AUTODESK REVIT BUILDING 8.

1
®

Metric Tutorial

August 2005

Copyright © 2005 Autodesk, Inc.
All Rights Reserved
This publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. AUTODESK, INC., MAKES NO WARRANTY, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS, AND MAKES SUCH MATERIALS AVAILABLE SOLELY ON AN "AS-IS" BASIS. IN NO EVENT SHALL AUTODESK, INC., BE LIABLE TO ANYONE FOR SPECIAL, COLLATERAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN CONNECTION WITH OR ARISING OUT OF PURCHASE OR USE OF THESE MATERIALS. THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE LIABILITY TO AUTODESK, INC., REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF ACTION, SHALL NOT EXCEED THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE MATERIALS DESCRIBED HEREIN. Autodesk, Inc., reserves the right to revise and improve its products as it sees fit. This publication describes the state cation, and may not reflect the product at all times in the future.

Autodesk Trademarks
The following are registered trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and/or other countries: 3D Props, 3D Studio, 3D Studio MAX, 3D Studio VIZ, 3DSurfer, ActiveShapes, ActiveShapes (logo), Actrix, ADI, AEC Authority (logo), AEC-X, Animator Pro, Animator Studio, ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Map, Autodesk, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk (logo), Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk University (logo), Autodesk View, Autodesk WalkThrough, Autodesk World, AutoLISP, AutoSketch, Biped, bringing information down to earth, CAD Overlay, Character Studio, Cinepak, Cinepak (logo), Codec Central, Combustion, Design Your World, Design Your World (logo), Discreet, EditDV, Education by Design, gmax, Heidi, HOOPS, Hyperwire, i-drop, Inside Track, Kinetix, MaterialSpec, Mechanical Desktop, NAAUG, ObjectARX, PeopleTracker, Physique, Planix, Powered with Autodesk Technology (logo), RadioRay, Revit, Softdesk, Texture Universe, The AEC Authority, The Auto Architect, VISION, Visual, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Hydro, Visual Landscape, Visual Roads, Visual Survey, Visual Toolbox, Visual TugBoat, Visual LISP, Volo, WHIP!, and WHIP! (logo). The following are trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and/or other countries: 3ds max, AutoCAD Architectural Desktop, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT Learning Assistance, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk Map, Autodesk Streamline, AutoSnap, AutoTrack, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, Buzzsaw.com, Cinestream, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Content Explorer, Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignProf, DesignServer, Design Web Format, DWF, DWG Linking, DXF, Extending the Design Team, GDX Driver, gmax (logo), gmax ready (logo),Heads-up Design, IntroDV, jobnet, ObjectDBX, onscreen onair online, Plans & Specs, Plasma, PolarSnap, ProjectPoint, Reactor, Real-time Roto, Render Queue, Visual Bridge, Visual Syllabus, and Where Design Connects.

Autodesk Canada Inc. Trademarks
The following are registered trademarks of Autodesk Canada Inc. in the USA and/or Canada, and/or other countries: discreet, fire, flame, flint, flint RT, frost, glass, inferno, MountStone, riot, river, smoke, sparks, stone, stream, vapour, wire. The following are trademarks of Autodesk Canada Inc., in the USA, Canada, and/or other countries: backburner, backdraft, Multi-Master Editing.

Third Party Trademarks
All other brand names, product names or trademarks belong to their respective holders.

Third Party Software Program Credits
ACIS Copyright © 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright © 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Copyright © 1997 Microsoft Corporation. All rights reserved. International CorrectSpell ™ Spelling Correction System © 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield ™ 3.0. Copyright © 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE ® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE ® and other Pantone, Inc. trademarks are the property of Pantone, Inc. © Pantone, Inc., 2002 Pantone, Inc. is the copyright owner of color data and/or software which are licensed to Autodesk, Inc., to distribute for use only in combination with certain Autodesk software products. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright © 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN © RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC © RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin." Typefaces from the Bitstream ® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust © 1996. All rights reserved.

GOVERNMENT USE
Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts ............................................................................................... 1
Understanding the Basics ................................................................................................................................. 2 Navigating the Revit Building User Interface ............................................................................................. 4

Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model .................................................................................. 11
Creating Your First Building Model ............................................................................................................... 12 Creating and Modifying the Exterior Walls of the West Wing ................................................................ 12 Adding the Interior Walls of the West Wing ............................................................................................ 24 Dimensioning the Building Model ........................................................................................................... 32 Adding Doors and Windows ..................................................................................................................... 41 Adding Floors and Floor Openings ........................................................................................................... 58 Adding a Roof and Ceiling ........................................................................................................................ 74 Adding Multi-Level Stairs .......................................................................................................................... 80 Creating the East Wing and Passageway .................................................................................................. 87 Scheduling the Building Model .............................................................................................................. 100 Rendering the Building Model ................................................................................................................ 104 Documenting the Building Model .......................................................................................................... 106

Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings .......................................................................... 113
Modifying System Settings ........................................................................................................................... 114 Modifying General System Options ........................................................................................................ 114 Specifying File Locations ......................................................................................................................... 115 Specifying Spelling Options .................................................................................................................... 117 Modifying Snap Settings ......................................................................................................................... 118 Modifying Project Settings ........................................................................................................................... 120 Creating and Applying Materials ............................................................................................................ 120 Creating and Applying Fill Patterns ........................................................................................................ 123 Controlling Object Styles ........................................................................................................................ 125 Modifying Line Patterns and Styles ........................................................................................................ 128 Modifying Annotations ........................................................................................................................... 131 Specifying Units of Measurement, Temporary Dimensions, and Detail Level Options ........................ 133 Modifying Project Browser Organization ............................................................................................... 134 Creating an Office Template ........................................................................................................................ 136 Choosing the Base Template ................................................................................................................... 137 Modifying Project Settings ...................................................................................................................... 137 Loading and Modifying Families and Groups ........................................................................................ 142 Modifying Views and View Templates ................................................................................................... 144 Modifying Render Scene Settings ........................................................................................................... 147 Modifying Import/Export Settings .......................................................................................................... 148 Setting up Shared and Project Parameters .............................................................................................. 149 Creating Named Print Settings ............................................................................................................... 151

Chapter 4 Ceilings ............................................................................................................................... 153
Creating Ceilings .......................................................................................................................................... 154 Creating Automatic Ceilings ................................................................................................................... 154 Creating Compound Ceilings ................................................................................................................. 156

Chapter 5 Openings ............................................................................................................................ 159
Cutting Roof Openings ................................................................................................................................ 160 Cutting a Dormer Opening in a Roof ..................................................................................................... 160 Creating a Perpendicular Roof Opening ................................................................................................. 164

Contents | i

Creating a Vertical Roof Opening ........................................................................................................... 167 Creating Openings in Floors and Ceilings ................................................................................................... 170 Cutting an Opening in a Floor ............................................................................................................... 170 Cutting an Opening in a Ceiling ............................................................................................................ 173 Cutting an Opening Using the Shaft Tool .............................................................................................. 174

Chapter 6 Railings ............................................................................................................................... 177
Creating Railings .......................................................................................................................................... 178 Creating the Railing Layout .................................................................................................................... 178 Adjusting Railing Parameters .................................................................................................................. 180

Chapter 7 Roofs ................................................................................................................................... 185
Creating Roofs .............................................................................................................................................. 186 Creating an Extruded Roof ...................................................................................................................... 186 Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint ................................................................................................. 190 Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint ............................................................... 192 Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint .................................................................................................... 194 Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint ................................................................................................... 197 Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof ...................................................................................................... 199 Aligning Roof Eaves ................................................................................................................................ 201 Creating a Mansard Roof ........................................................................................................................ 202 Creating Fascia, Gutters, and Soffits ............................................................................................................ 204 Creating Roof Fascia ................................................................................................................................ 204 Creating Gutters ...................................................................................................................................... 205 Creating Soffits ........................................................................................................................................ 206

Chapter 8 Stairs .................................................................................................................................. 209
Creating Stairs .............................................................................................................................................. 210 Creating the Main Lobby Stair Run ........................................................................................................ 210 Modifying the Main Lobby Stair Run ..................................................................................................... 215 Creating the Second Floor Lobby Side Stairs .......................................................................................... 221 Creating the Level 2 Landing Railings .................................................................................................... 224 Creating the Emergency Exit Stair Run .................................................................................................. 231 Creating a Semi-circular Exterior Stair Run ............................................................................................ 236 Working with the Stair Calculator .......................................................................................................... 241

Chapter 9 Walls .................................................................................................................................. 247
Creating Walls .............................................................................................................................................. 248 Sketching Walls ....................................................................................................................................... 248 Working with Compound Walls ............................................................................................................ 258 Working with Vertically Compound Walls ............................................................................................ 266 Joining Walls to Floors ............................................................................................................................ 276 Working with Foundation Walls ............................................................................................................ 278 Working with Wall Wraps ...................................................................................................................... 281 Assigning Wall Bottom and Top Attachments ....................................................................................... 283

Chapter 10 Curtain Systems ................................................................................................................ 287
Flat Curtain System ...................................................................................................................................... 288 Creating an Entrance .............................................................................................................................. 288 Adding Mullions to the Curtain System  ................................................................................................ 296 Curved Curtain System ................................................................................................................................ 299 Adding a Curved Curtain System  .......................................................................................................... 299 Adding a Custom Curtain Panel ............................................................................................................. 301 Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel  ...................................................................................... 304 Additional Curtain Systems ......................................................................................................................... 307 Sloped Glazings  ...................................................................................................................................... 307 Storefront System  ................................................................................................................................... 308 Curtain System by Lines  ........................................................................................................................ 311

Chapter 11 Creating Drawings ............................................................................................................ 315
Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project ........................................................................................................... 316 Creating a Drawing Sheet ....................................................................................................................... 316 Adding a Sheet to the Project .................................................................................................................. 323 Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet .......................................................................................... 324

ii | Contents

Creating New Views to Add to Sheets ..................................................................................................... 326 Using Legends .............................................................................................................................................. 333 Creating a Symbol Legend ...................................................................................................................... 333 Creating a Wall Type Legend .................................................................................................................. 335 Using a Legend View to Match Types ..................................................................................................... 337 Using Revision Tracking ............................................................................................................................... 339 Setting Up a Revision Table .................................................................................................................... 339 Sketching Revision Clouds ...................................................................................................................... 340 Tagging Revision Clouds ......................................................................................................................... 341 Working with Revisions .......................................................................................................................... 342

Chapter 12 Detailing ............................................................................................................................. 345
Creating a Detail from a Building Model ..................................................................................................... 346 Creating a Callout View .......................................................................................................................... 346 Detailing the View .................................................................................................................................. 350 Adding Detail Lines ................................................................................................................................. 356 Adding a Vapor Barrier and Insulation ................................................................................................... 359 Adding Break Lines ................................................................................................................................. 360 Adding Text Notes ................................................................................................................................... 363 Changing Component Order and Visibility Settings in Detail Views ......................................................... 364 Changing Detail Component Order in a Detail View ............................................................................ 364 Changing Visibility Settings in a Detail View ........................................................................................ 366 Creating a Drafted Detail ............................................................................................................................. 369 Creating a Drafting View ........................................................................................................................ 369 Creating a Detail in the Drafting View ................................................................................................... 369 Importing a Detail into a Drafting View ................................................................................................. 376 Creating a Reference Callout .................................................................................................................. 379

Chapter 13 Scheduling ......................................................................................................................... 381
Creating Type and Instance Schedules ........................................................................................................ 382 Creating a Window Schedule .................................................................................................................. 382 Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams ..................................................................................................... 385 Creating a Room Schedule ...................................................................................................................... 385 Creating a Room Color Diagram ............................................................................................................ 394 Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes ....................................................................................................... 396 Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions ..................................................................... 396 Scheduling Shared Parameters ..................................................................................................................... 401 Creating a Multi-Category Schedule ....................................................................................................... 401 Using Formulas and Filters in Schedules ...................................................................................................... 406 Creating a Level-Based Door Schedule with a Filter ............................................................................... 406 Creating a Wall Schedule with Filters and a Formula ............................................................................ 408 Scheduling Project Parameters ..................................................................................................................... 409 Creating a Room Schedule with Project Parameters ............................................................................... 410 Exporting Project Information with ODBC ................................................................................................. 411 Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access ............................................................................ 411

Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning ......................................................................................... 413
Setting the Base Elevation of a Project ......................................................................................................... 414 Setting the Base Elevation of a House ..................................................................................................... 414 Dimensioning ............................................................................................................................................... 416 Creating Dimensions .............................................................................................................................. 417 Controlling Witness Line Location ........................................................................................................ 422 Modifying Dimension Properties ............................................................................................................ 425 Working with Alignments and Constraints ........................................................................................... 426 Creating Automatic Linear Wall Dimensions ......................................................................................... 432 Annotating ................................................................................................................................................... 434 Creating Angular Dimensions ................................................................................................................. 434 Sequentially Tagging Rooms ................................................................................................................... 435 Tagging Doors and Windows .................................................................................................................. 437

Chapter 15 Viewing .............................................................................................................................. 441
Viewing a Building Model ............................................................................................................................ 442 Exploring the Building Model ................................................................................................................ 442 Creating a Perspective View with a Camera ........................................................................................... 445

Contents | iii

Creating a Section View .......................................................................................................................... 451 Creating Elevation Views ........................................................................................................................ 453 Controlling Fill Pattern Colors ..................................................................................................................... 455 Controlling the Fill Pattern Color of a Material ..................................................................................... 455 Setting the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Color for a Wall Type ................................................................... 457 Creating a View Plan Region ........................................................................................................................ 459 Creating a Plan Region in a Floor Plan ................................................................................................... 459

Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .............................................................. 463
Rendering an Exterior View ......................................................................................................................... 464 Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model ....................................................................... 464 Adding Trees to the Site .......................................................................................................................... 468 Creating a Perspective View .................................................................................................................... 470 Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View ............................................................................................. 473 Rendering an Interior View .......................................................................................................................... 476 Adding RPC People ................................................................................................................................. 476 Creating the Interior Perspective View ................................................................................................... 478 Creating a New Render Scene ................................................................................................................. 481 Defining Daylights and Rendering the View .......................................................................................... 482 Creating and Recording Walkthroughs ....................................................................................................... 484 Creating a Walkthrough ......................................................................................................................... 484 Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position ........................................................................ 487 Recording the Walkthrough ................................................................................................................... 489

Chapter 17 Presentation Views ........................................................................................................... 491
Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique ............................................................................................... 492 Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique .............................................................................................. 492 Using Advanced Model Graphics ............................................................................................................ 494 Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet ............................................................................................................ 496 Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique .............................................................................................. 499 Preparing the Elevation View for the Analytique ................................................................................... 500 Adding a Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet .......................................................... 502 Adding Section Views to the Analytique ..................................................................................................... 504 Preparing a Section View for the Analytique .......................................................................................... 505 Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View ............................................................................... 509 Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique ............................................................................... 510 Working with a Presentation View Template ......................................................................................... 514 Working in a Callout Analytique ............................................................................................................ 517 Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes .................................................................................................. 524 Creating Cutaway Isometric Views ......................................................................................................... 525 Creating Cutaway Perspective Views ...................................................................................................... 531 Annotating the Analytique ..................................................................................................................... 536

Chapter 18 About Families and the Family Editor ........................................................................... 539
Using Families and the Family Editor .......................................................................................................... 540 Introduction to Families ......................................................................................................................... 540 Introduction to the Family Editor .......................................................................................................... 542

Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor .................................................................. 545
Creating a Door Family ................................................................................................................................ 546 Drawing the Door Plan View Components ............................................................................................ 546 Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry ................................................................................................. 550 Assigning Materials to the Door Components ....................................................................................... 553 Defining New Door Types ....................................................................................................................... 556 Creating a Window Family .......................................................................................................................... 558 Specifying the New Window Parameters ................................................................................................ 559 Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry ........................................................................................ 560 Creating the Window Sash Solid Geometry ........................................................................................... 566 Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry .......................................................................................... 569 Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry ..................................................................................... 574 Assigning Materials to the Window Components ................................................................................. 584 Defining New Window Types ................................................................................................................. 587 Creating a Furniture Family ......................................................................................................................... 591 Specifying the New Rolltop Desk Parameters ......................................................................................... 592

iv | Contents

Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry .................................................................................................... 597 Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry ..................................................................................... 600 Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry ..................................................................................................... 609 Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry .................................................................................................... 614 Defining New Furniture Types ................................................................................................................ 617 Creating a Baluster Family ........................................................................................................................... 619 Drawing a Baluster .................................................................................................................................. 619 Assigning the New Baluster to a Stair Run .............................................................................................. 621 Creating Profile Families .............................................................................................................................. 623 Drawing a Sweep Profile .......................................................................................................................... 623 Drawing a Rail Profile ............................................................................................................................. 624 Drawing a Stair Nosing Profile ................................................................................................................ 624 Drawing a Reveal Profile ......................................................................................................................... 625 Drawing a Host Sweep Profile ................................................................................................................. 626 Applying a Sweep Profile to a 2D Path ................................................................................................... 627 Applying a Host Sweep Profile to Walls .................................................................................................. 629 Creating a Room Tag .................................................................................................................................... 631 Specifying Room Tag Parameters ............................................................................................................ 631 Creating an Annotation Symbol .................................................................................................................. 633 Creating a Custom North Arrow Annotation Symbol ............................................................................ 633 Adding the New North Arrow to a Project ............................................................................................. 636 Creating a Titleblock Family ........................................................................................................................ 636 Drawing Linework for a Titleblock Sheet ............................................................................................... 637 Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock .............................................................................................. 640 Adding the Titleblock to a New Project .................................................................................................. 649 Creating In-Place Families ............................................................................................................................ 650 Creating the Dome Roof In-Place Family ............................................................................................... 651 Creating the Concave Floor In-Place Family .......................................................................................... 658

Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques ................................................................. 661
Planning a Parametric Component Family .................................................................................................. 662 Determining Component Needs ............................................................................................................. 662 Selecting the Family Template ................................................................................................................ 663 Creating the Component Skeleton .............................................................................................................. 665 Adding Reference Planes ......................................................................................................................... 666 Adding Dimensions and Constraints ...................................................................................................... 671 Creating New Length Parameters ........................................................................................................... 674 Flexing the Component Model ............................................................................................................... 678 Adding Solid Geometry ................................................................................................................................ 680 Creating Solid Extrusions ........................................................................................................................ 680 Adding Constraints to the Solid Geometry ............................................................................................ 682 Creating Additional Solid Geometry ...................................................................................................... 685 Testing the Family in a Project ..................................................................................................................... 693 Loading a Family into a Project .............................................................................................................. 693 Testing a Family Instance in a Project .................................................................................................... 694 Working with Nested Subcomponents ........................................................................................................ 697 Adding a Nested Component ................................................................................................................. 698 Creating Formula-controlled Parameters ................................................................................................ 702 Arraying Nested Subcomponents ............................................................................................................ 706 Reloading a Family into a Project ........................................................................................................... 711 Applying Subcategories, Materials, and Parameters ..................................................................................... 712 Creating and Applying Subcategories ..................................................................................................... 713 Creating Material Parameters .................................................................................................................. 717 Controlling Component Visibility ............................................................................................................... 719 Assigning Detail Level and View Controls .............................................................................................. 719 Creating Component Types ......................................................................................................................... 722 Creating Multiple Component Types ..................................................................................................... 722 Creating Conditional Formulas .............................................................................................................. 723

Chapter 21 Area Analysis ..................................................................................................................... 725
Using Area Analysis Tools ............................................................................................................................ 726 Creating Area Schemes and Plans ........................................................................................................... 726 Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans ................................................................................. 732

Contents | v

Chapter 22 Massing ............................................................................................................................... 735
Using Massing Tools ..................................................................................................................................... 736 Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model ...................................................................................... 736 Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model .......................................................... 741 Using Mass Family Files in a Project  ........................................................................................................... 743 Creating New Mass Family Types  .......................................................................................................... 743 Loading and Placing New Mass Families ................................................................................................ 744 Joining Mass Elements ............................................................................................................................ 747 Using Mass Elements with Design Options ................................................................................................. 750 Mass Elements in Design Options .......................................................................................................... 750 Creating Building Components from Mass Elements ................................................................................. 752 Creating Walls by Picking Faces ............................................................................................................. 753 Creating Floors by Picking Faces ............................................................................................................. 755 Creating Roofs by Picking Faces .............................................................................................................. 759 Creating Curtain Systems  ...................................................................................................................... 761 Editing Elements Created from Massings ............................................................................................... 763 Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility ............................................................................................................ 768

Chapter 23 Site ..................................................................................................................................... 771
Using Site Tools ............................................................................................................................................ 772 Creating a Toposurface ........................................................................................................................... 772 Adding Property Lines ............................................................................................................................. 777 Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings ...................................................................................... 781 Creating Topographic Subregions ........................................................................................................... 783 Grading the Toposurface ......................................................................................................................... 788 Adding a Building Pad ............................................................................................................................ 793 Adding Site Components ........................................................................................................................ 795 Tagging Site and Parking Components .................................................................................................. 798 Creating Parking Space Schedules ........................................................................................................... 799

Chapter 24 Grouping ............................................................................................................................ 801
Creating Groups ........................................................................................................................................... 802 Creating a Group ..................................................................................................................................... 802 Placing a Group ....................................................................................................................................... 803 Modifying a Group .................................................................................................................................. 804 Creating Nested Groups ............................................................................................................................... 805 Creating a Nested Group ......................................................................................................................... 806 Modifying a Nested Group ...................................................................................................................... 807 Working with Groups .................................................................................................................................. 809 Duplicating a Group ............................................................................................................................... 809 Creating a Detail Group .......................................................................................................................... 812 Using Attached Detail Groups ................................................................................................................ 813 Saving and Loading Groups .................................................................................................................... 815 Automatically Creating a Group ............................................................................................................. 816

Chapter 25 Structural .......................................................................................................................... 819
Adding Structural Walls ............................................................................................................................... 820 Importing a DWG for Use as an Underlay .............................................................................................. 820 Sketching Structural Walls ...................................................................................................................... 821 Dimensioning and Modifying Walls ...................................................................................................... 830 Adding Structural Columns and Beams ....................................................................................................... 833 Adding Structural Columns .................................................................................................................... 834 Adding Structural Beams and Girders ..................................................................................................... 838 Adding Joists and Purlins ........................................................................................................................ 848 Copying Level 1 Structure to Upper Levels .................................................................................................. 854 Defining New Levels ............................................................................................................................... 855 Duplicating the Existing Design ............................................................................................................. 856 Adding Braces in a Framing Elevation ......................................................................................................... 858 Creating a Framing Elevation ................................................................................................................. 858 Adding Structural Braces ......................................................................................................................... 860

Chapter 26 Sharing Projects ................................................................................................................ 865
Overview ....................................................................................................................................................... 866

vi | Contents

Using Worksharing in a Project ................................................................................................................... 866 Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals .......................................................................................... 866 Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets ................................................................................... 869 Working Individually with Worksets ..................................................................................................... 873 Using Worksets with Multiple Users ....................................................................................................... 876 Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users ......................................................................... 881

Chapter 27 Creating Multiple Design Options .................................................................................. 885
Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project ............................................................................................ 886 Creating the Structural Design Options ................................................................................................. 886 Creating the Roof System Design Options ............................................................................................. 896 Managing Design Options ...................................................................................................................... 903

Chapter 28 Project Phasing ................................................................................................................. 909
Using Phasing ............................................................................................................................................... 910 Phasing Your Model ................................................................................................................................ 910 Using Phase-Specific Room Tags ............................................................................................................. 915

Chapter 29 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates ....................................................... 919
Linking Building Models .............................................................................................................................. 920 Linking Building Models from Different Project Files ............................................................................ 920 Repositioning Linked Building Models ................................................................................................... 928 Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility ........................................................................................ 931 Managing Linked Building Models ......................................................................................................... 933 Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models ........................................................................................... 935 Acquiring and Publishing Coordinates ................................................................................................... 935 Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates ........................................................................................ 937 Scheduling Components of Linked Files ................................................................................................ 941 Working with a Linked Building Model ................................................................................................. 943 Managing Shared Locations .................................................................................................................... 944

Contents | vii

viii | Contents

Understanding the Concepts

1

In this tutorial, you learn the fundamental concepts of Revit Building. You learn how Revit Building works, the terms used when working with the product, and how to navigate the user interface.

In the lesson that follows, you learn many of the important features in Revit Building that contribute to a user-friendly design environment, enhanced productivity, and faster construction documents. You begin with the fundamental concepts that Revit Building is built upon. You learn the terminology, the hierarchy of elements, and how to navigate the user interface.

1

Understanding the Basics
In this lesson, you learn what Revit Building is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work.

What is Autodesk Revit Building?
The Revit Building platform for building information modeling is a design and documentation system that supports the design, drawings, and schedules required for a building project. Building information modeling (BIM) delivers information about project design, scope, quantities, and phases when you need it. In the Revit Building model, every drawing sheet, 2D and 3D view, and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. As you work in drawing and schedule views, Revit Building collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. The Revit Building parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views, drawing sheets, schedules, sections, and plans.

What is meant by parametric?
The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the model that enable the coordination and change management that Revit Building provides. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. In mathematics and mechanical CAD, the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters; hence, the operation of the software is parametric. This concept is important because it is this capability that delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit Building: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project, and Revit Building coordinates that change through the entire project. The following are examples of these element relationships:

The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. If you move the partition, the door retains this relationship to the partition. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. If the length of the elevation is changed, the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. In this case, the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved, the floor or roof remains connected. In this case, the parameter is one of association or connection.

How does Autodesk Revit Building keep things updated?
A fundamental characteristic of a building information modeling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. When you change something, Revit Building immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. Revit Building uses two key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do, without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design.

Element behavior in a parametric modeler
Revit Building uses five software element classes: host, component, annotation, view, and datum. This implementation provides flexibility for designers. Revit Building elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly; programming is not required. If you can draw, you can define new parametric elements in Revit Building. Hosts include walls, floors, roofs, and ceilings. Components include windows, doors, and furniture. Annotations are 2D, view-specific elements that help you produce your documentation. Views are dynamic representations of the model and are always up-to-date. Datums are reference elements that help you put your building together. In Revit Building, the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the building. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. Often, you do nothing to establish these relationships; they are implied by what you do and how you draw. In other cases, you can explicitly control them, by locking a dimension or aligning two walls, for example.

Understanding Autodesk Revit Building terms
Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit Building are common, industry-standard terms familiar to most architects. However, there are some terms that are unique to Revit Building, and understanding them is crucial to understanding the software. This section defines the basic terms used in Revit Building. The first term you need to know is "project." In Revit Building, the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. The project file contains all the information for your building design,

2 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts

from geometry to construction data. This information includes components used to design the model, views of the project, and drawings of the design. By using a single project file, Revit Building makes it easy for you to alter your design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views, elevation views, section views, schedules, and so forth). Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. Another important term to understand is "level". Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements, such as roofs, floors, and ceilings. Most often, you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a building. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building; for example, first floor, top of wall, or bottom of foundation. To place levels, you must be in a section or elevation view.
Level 2 work plane cutting through the 3D view with the corresponding floor plan tiled next to it.

When creating your project, you add Revit Building parametric building elements to the design. All elements are considered categories. Revit Building classifies elements by model component elements and annotation elements. A model component element, such as a door, desk, or roof, represents the actual 3D geometry of the building. An annotation building element, such as a door tag, elevation symbol, or room tag, helps document the model. Families are classes of elements in a category that group elements with a common set of parameters (properties), identical use, and similar graphical representation. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties, but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. For example, six-panel colonial doors could be considered one family, although the doors that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. Most families are component family files, which means you can load them into your project and create them from family templates. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. Other families are called system families. These families, which include walls, dimensions, ceilings, roofs, floors, and levels, are not available for loading or creating as separate files. Revit Building predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. For example, the behavior of a wall is predefined in the system; however, you can create different types of walls with different compositions. System families can be transferred between projects. Each family can have different types. A type can be a specific size of a family, such as a A0 title block or a 910 x 2110 door. A type can also be a style, such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. A family can have several types. For example, a table could come in several different sizes. Each different size would be a new type within the same family. Instances are the actual items that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the building (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances).

Understanding the Basics | 3

Autodesk Revit Building terms

Navigating the Revit Building User Interface
One of the advantages of Revit Building is its ease of use, specifically its clear user interface. The Revit Building window is arranged to make navigation easy. Even the toolbar buttons are labeled, making it easy to understand what each button represents. Revit Building uses standard Microsoft® Windows® conventions. If you have used any other product that follows these conventions, learning Revit Building is much easier. In the following illustration, the user interface is labeled. In the steps that follow, you navigate and become familiar with the user interface.

Start a new project
1 On the Standard toolbar, click .

This creates a new project based on the default template.

4 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts

The Title Bar
2 Place your cursor at the top of the user interface and notice the Title Bar contains the name of the project and the view that is currently open.

By default, new projects are numbered consecutively until saved with a new name. In addition, the Level 1 floor plan view is the default open view. TIP The view opened and the view names are dependent on the template that the project is based on.

The Menu Bar
3 On the View menu, click Zoom.

The Menu Bar across the top of the window includes standard menu names such as File, Edit, and View. You can choose commands by placing the cursor over the menu name and clicking. You then click the command name to run the command. Many of the commands also have shortcut keys to speed up the design process. These shortcut keys are listed next to the command on the menu. TIP For example, the shortcut key for Zoom To Fit is ZX. While working in the drawing area, you simply type the required keystrokes to run the command. Another timesaving tool for selecting commands is to place the cursor in the drawing area and right-click. A context menu appears with a list of all available commands. The context menu changes depending on the function you are performing and what is currently selected.

The Toolbar
4 On the Window menu, click Toolbar.

There are six toolbars across the top of the window just beneath the Menu Bar. The buttons on the toolbar represent some of the more common commands. You can control the visibility of the six toolbars and turn the toolbar text labels on or off within the Window ➤ Toolbar menu. You can use the toolbar grips to resize and move each toolbar.

The Options Bar
5 On the Modelling menu, click Wall. Notice the bar beneath the toolbars contains wall design options.

Understanding the Basics | 5

The Options Bar is context-sensitive and varies depending on the tool or selected component. 6 On the Modelling menu, click Door. Notice the design options available on the Options Bar are now applicable to doors. On the left side of the Options Bar, notice a door type is specified.

The Type Selector
7 The drop-down list on the left side of the Options Bar is called the Type Selector. Select the drop-down list to view the list of doors.

The Type Selector is a context-sensitive drop-down list. If you select the Door tool, the Type Selector displays a list of doors available within the project. The list of components in the Type Selector is identical to the components listed in the Families branch of the Project Browser under the respective category.

8 On the Modelling menu, click Wall.

6 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts

9 In the Type Selector, notice the list of walls that are available. You use the Type Selector in two ways. First, you can select a component type before you add it to the building model. For example, if you intend to add a door, the door type active in the Type Selector is the door type that is added when you insert it into the building model. You can also use the Type Selector to change a component type after it has been added to the building model. Within the drawing area, you can select any component and then change the type from the Type Selector.

The Design Bar
10 On the Window menu, click Design Bars. The Show Design Bars dialog box is displayed.

The Design Bar is located on the left side of the interface, immediately below the Type Selector. There are 10 tabs in the Design Bar, containing buttons grouped by function. You can control which tabs display by selecting them in the Show Design Bars dialog box. 11 Click OK. Each tab contains frequently used commands that are also available from the menu.
■ ■ ■ ■

Basics tab—includes commands for creating most basic building model components. View tab—commands for creating different views in the project Modelling tab—all the commands to create model elements Drafting tab—commands for both adding annotation symbols and creating the sheet details for the project construction documents Rendering tab—commands for creating rendered 3D images Site tab—commands for adding site components and producing site plans Massing tab—commands for executing conceptual massing commands Area Analysis tab—commands for making area schemes and plans Structural tab—commands for adding structural components to your project Construction tab—includes commands for creating construction industry information

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

To access the commands within a tab, click the tab, and the respective commands are displayed on the Design Bar. TIP You can turn the visibility of each tab on and off by right-clicking on the Design Bar and selecting the tab from the context menu.

Understanding the Basics | 7

The Project Browser
12 To the right of the Design Bar is the Project Browser. In the Project Browser, select Views (all).

You can use the Project Browser to quickly manage the views, schedules, sheets, reports, families, and groups of your current project. You can right-click in the browser to add, delete, and rename views, families, and groups. The browser is conveniently organized by view type (floor plans, elevations, 3D), family category (doors, walls, windows), and group name. You can expand or compress the browser list by clicking the + or sign next to the name. To open a view, double-click the name. You can also drag and drop from the browser into the drawing area, making it easy to add a family or group to the project or add a view to a sheet. The browser is also dockable, so you can position it wherever you want by dragging the Project Browser title bar to a new location. 13 In the Type Selector, scroll through the sorting options available for the Project Browser.

8 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts

14 On the Settings menu, click Browser Organization. You can create and modify Project Browser organization schemes for both views and sheets. After you create a browser organization scheme, you can instantly change the sorting within the Project Browser by selecting the scheme in the Type Selector. 15 In the Browser Organization dialog box, click Cancel.

The Status Bar
16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Wall. The cursor is displayed as a pencil. 17 Place your cursor near the center of the drawing area. Do not click.

Understanding the Basics | 9

18 On the Design Bar. Click the Help button. click Autodesk Revit Help. notice that the name of the preselected component is Views: Elevation: West. press F1 to get help on that dialog box. Windows: From any window. TIP You can control the level of Tool Tip assistance from the Settings ➤ Options menu. When you place the cursor over a component. 19 Place the cursor over the elevation symbol arrow on the left side of the drawing area. it tells you to "Click to enter wall start point. 10 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts . Tool Tips: To see Tool Tips. and then click on a specific menu command or command button for Help. press F1 to get the topic associated with the window. HTML help window to search for information and quickly display it to read or print. Help is available online at all times during a Revit Building session. rest the cursor over the Toolbar button until the Tool Tip displays. Make sure you place the cursor over the arrow portion of the symbol. 20 Press TAB. In the Status Bar. In this case. If there is no Help button displayed. regarding selected components within a view. notice the Status Bar provides information regarding what you should do next. Be sure to have the Standard toolbar displayed. click Modify. There are several tools that help you find information. You can select a topic on the Contents tab. The elevation symbol consists of two parts. it highlights and the status bar displays the component name. and notice that the preselected component switches to the main elevation symbol. Elevations: Elevation: Elevation 5. You can access Help in the following ways: ■ Dialog Boxes: Dialog boxes include Help buttons. You can turn the Status Bar visibility on or off from the Window menu. and the topic specific to the dialog box opens." TIP The tooltip that displays is identical to the note in the status bar. or save commonly used pages on the Favorites tab. in conjunction with Tooltips. ■ ■ ■ 22 Close the Revit Building Help window. Autodesk Revit Building Help 21 On the Help menu. search for all instances of a word or phrase on the Search tab. It highlights when the cursor is over it. you can use the Status Bar and the Tab key to toggle between components and select the desired component. When attempting to select a specific component in a complex or crowded view.In the bottom left corner of the window. Context-sensitive help is also available to provide instant help on any menu command. You can also press SHIFT+F1. Toolbar: From the Toolbar. The Status Bar also provides information. use the Tab key to alternate between nearby components. You can use this tri-pane. the main symbol and the elevation directional arrows. find a keyword on the Index tab. TIP When attempting to select a specific component in a crowded or detailed view. click .

Understanding the Concepts. If you have not already done so. and then add the passageway between them. While creating your first building information model. floors. you create the shell of the west wing . For learning purposes. all views and schedules instantly update.mirror it to create the east wing. The building model you create consists of an east wing and a west wing joined by a curtain wall passageway. You should understand the user interface. As you make design changes throughout this tutorial. before proceeding further. stairs. and a roof . you can normally use various means to accomplish identical tasks. doors. 11 .including all windows. common terms. Because the design process in Revit Building is extremely flexible. Therefore. review the tutorial. and fundamental concepts before creating your first building model. For training purposes. you learn about the Revit Building parametric capabilities and ease of use. this tutorial uses a diversity of methods whenever possible.Creating Your First Building Model 2 This tutorial is designed to familiarize you with the basic concepts and methods of creating a building model using Autodesk Revit Building. the design process might differ in a real-world scenario. This tutorial is designed to teach concepts as well as methods.

expand Elevations. you define the levels first so that you can set the top constraint when you first create the walls. you render the model and document the project by adding schedules and views to sheets. ceilings. You then add sketched components such as floors. After adding dimensions.Creating Your First Building Model In this lesson. After sketching the walls. you use the west wing to create the east wing. You then sketch the exterior and interior walls of the west wing. and a roof. you can. NOTE The dataset for this tutorial was created using the default template. As you design the walls. you begin with a project file based on a simple template to which you add several new levels. click Level. and double-click North. and apply new wall types. In this exercise. and then add the passageway between them. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. you sketch the exterior walls of the west wing. When you create walls. 12 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . If you sketch the walls with the top constraint specifying a height. modify. stairs. Finally. expand Views (all). Using the mirror tool. Open m_First_Project. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. click the Training Files icon. at a later time. Creating and Modifying the Exterior Walls of the West Wing In this exercise. you can assign the wall height to a level or a specific value. click Open. Notice that Level 1 and Level 2 are already defined. You can add and modify levels at any time during the design process. you add and modify doors and windows. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.rvt located in the Metric folder. Minor modifications have been made for training purposes. Add new levels 1 In the Project Browser. you create. you create a new wall type with multiple wall sweeps and reveals. reassign the top constraint to a specific level. You then apply the new wall type to the existing walls.

it terminates the command in progress. Creating Your First Building Model | 13 . Verify that Make Plan View is selected 4 Move the cursor over Level 2 and notice the prospective new level displays above it. In this view. the datum is in model extent mode. You can also use the ESC key to accomplish this. 5 Click Level 2 to create level 3 at the designated offset above it. 9 Click directly on the Level 4 text. click Modify. 8 Select Level 4. In the Project Browser. This means that if you move the extents of one level line. ■ ■ 6 Click Level 3 to add Level 4. it toggles to 2D. When you select Level 4. this indicates that you can select and edit the values. This means that if you drag the control to resize the datum extent. notice that a floor plan and ceiling plan have been created for Level 3. it changes the extent of that datum in all other parallel views. 7 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. The left and right extents of the new level are aligned and locked to the levels below. the extents of the other level lines adopt the same change. This allows you to create a new level by picking an existing line and applying an offset. When you click Modify. This means that changes to the extents are applied only to the active view. the level name and height value displays with the color blue. notice the following: ■ There is a control titled 3D that displays at the ends of the datum. provided those datums also have the 3D model extent control. If you click the 3D control. ■ Select . With the 3D designation. ■ ■ Enter 4000 mm for Offset.3 On the Options Bar.

double-click Level 1. there are four elevation symbols.TIP You may need to zoom in to accomplish this. which define the East. TIP The Level 4 ceiling plan view has also been renamed to Roof. or scroll the 10 Enter Roof and press ENTER. you could begin the model by simply sketching the exterior walls and then continuing the design process from that point. you create the exterior walls of only the west wing. 12 In the Project Browser. and South elevation views. Theoretically. 14 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. mirroring it to create the east wing. You can use the zoom tools located on the View menu. and then designing the passageway to connect the two. In such a case. Sketch the exterior walls 13 This building model consists of an east wing. notice that the name of the Level 4 floor plan is changed to Roof. In the steps that follow. West. right-click in the drawing area and use the zoom tools on the context menu. In this view. 14 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . However. This process reduces the amount of repetitive work and ensures consistency between each wing. use the wheel on your mouse. a west wing. 11 Click Yes to rename corresponding views. and a curtain glass passageway connecting the two wings. tool on the toolbar. the floor plan would resemble the following illustration. because the east wing is a mirror image of the west wing. you can take advantage of the parametric capabilities of Revit Building by designing the majority of the west wing. North.

A solid line with two drag handles displays on the West elevation symbol. you use this command to modify the view.15 Move the cursor over the left elevation symbol and then over the elevation arrow. The drag handles control the left and right clip planes of the elevation view.Brick on CMU. Do not click the symbol. NOTE The far clip plane for the East. do not turn on the far clip planes at this time. For training purposes. You can activate the far clip plane in the element properties dialog box of each respective view. 17 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 16 In the drawing area. select Basic Wall: Exterior . 18 In the Type Selector. and South elevation views are inactive. Later in this tutorial. click Wall. Make sure you click the arrow and not the round part of the symbol. North. click the Elevation: West symbol. TIP You can turn off the visibility of the elevation symbols by using the Visibility/Graphics command found on the View menu. Creating Your First Building Model | 15 . This means that each view is infinite. The name of the elevation view is displayed in a tooltip or in the status bar at the bottom of the drawing window. West.

you can control the default witness line location for temporary dimensions and save the settings to the project. Click the arrows a second time to return the exterior face to the outside of the rectangle. Because the west wing is later mirrored to the right. click . By clicking the arrows. Also notice the dimension that displays. as shown. 24 On the View toolbar.19 In the Options Bar. Move the cursor down and to the right until the rectangle is 12. 22 Select the left. specify the following options: ■ ■ Specify Roof for Height. You can click the temporary dimension value and modify it. ■ 20 Sketch the rectangle by clicking the upper left corner to specify the rectangle starting point. Verify that Wall Centerline is selected for Loc Line.000 mm long. TIP If necessary. . you can flip the wall orientation. Temporary dimensions are primarily sketching aids. 23 Click the arrows once to set the exterior face of the wall on the inside of the rectangle. click Modify.000 mm wide and 24. and flip arrows display on the exterior face of the wall. make sure you sketch the rectangle just to the right of the west elevation symbol. vertical wall of the rectangle. and use the directional arrows on your keyboard to move them into position as shown above. 21 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. The selected wall is red. This is a temporary dimension. and click to complete the rectangle. Select the drawing tool. TIP From the Settings ➤ Temporary Dimensions menu. select the four walls by dragging a selection box around them. 16 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model .

you do not need to type the metric suffix. you can use these handles to modify the height or depth of the wall. 27 Click the temporary dimension value and reset the rectangle width to 12000 mm. You do not need to enter 12000 mm. For example. The blue dots at the base of the wall are drag handles that allow you to modify the length of the wall. 26 Drag the wall to the right as shown and release the mouse button when the width of the rectangle is approximately double the original size. you can enter 12000 and press ENTER. In addition. TIP When entering a value.25 Select the 24000 mm wall on the right. notice the shape handles (arrows) on top and bottom of the wall. Notice that temporary dimensions also display in 3D views. Creating Your First Building Model | 17 .

enter ZF. as shown.28 Right-click in the empty space of the drawing area and. including the brick surface pattern displays. click the Model Graphics Style control. and click Hidden Line. The brick surface pattern displays. click the Model Graphics Style control. 33 On the View Control Bar. 32 On the keyboard. This is the shortcut key for Zoom to Fit. Notice the wall remains selected. 30 On the Design Bar. When a surface pattern becomes too dense. 31 On the View Control Bar located at the bottom-left corner of the frame. Notice that the brick surface pattern becomes solid fill after you zoom to fit. click Modify. 29 Draw a region around the corner. 18 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . and click Shading with Edges. it is displayed as solid fill. click Zoom in Region. Notice the material settings.

you would click Edit/New to access the type parameters. You can then make changes to the type parameters without inadvertently modifying the components of the original type. 35 On the Options Bar. you add horizontal sweeps of soldier course brick to the wall structure. In the steps that follow. you can see the list of type parameters. You could then make changes to the wall structure as needed. To accomplish this. and then apply it to the remaining walls. For example. If your intent is to modify only the structure of the selected component. If you change an instance parameter. In the upper half of the dialog box. Although you can scroll through the list of type parameters.Create and apply new wall type 34 Select the 24000 mm wall on the right as shown. only the wall that you selected would change. Creating Your First Building Model | 19 . However. The lower half of the dialog box contains the instance parameters. which control all components of the same type. you cannot modify them within this dialog box. modify it. The Element Properties dialog box displays the parameters of the selected component. you create a new wall type. click . you should click Duplicate to create a new component type. it has no effect on components that are not selected. which control the selected component or components. if you changed the Top Offset of the wall. For example. any changes made to the type parameters would be applied to all components of the same type. if you wanted to modify the wall structure.

38 In the Name dialog box. 40 In the Edit Assembly dialog box. Therefore. For training purposes. and click OK.Brick on CMU with Soldier Course. The sample height does not determine the height of any walls in the project. click Duplicate. enter the new wall name. the original wall type must remain unchanged.36 In the Element Properties dialog box. but you should specify a value high enough to allow you to create the desired wall structure. 41 In the lower left corner of the Edit Assembly dialog box. 39 In the Type Properties dialog box. click Edit/New. click Edit. 20 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . under the Value column for Structure. 37 In the Type Properties dialog box. click Preview. You can specify the sample height to any value you want. The sample height is the height of the wall in the preview pane. enter 13500 for Sample Height. Exterior . you must create a new wall type before altering the wall structure.

Verify that Exterior is selected for Side. Enter -50.0 mm for Offset. Click inside the Material field. select Masonry . select Section: Modify type attributes. Notice the vertical structure tools are now active. 44 In the Wall Sweeps dialog box. ■ ■ ■ ■ 46 Click OK. Creating Your First Building Model | 21 . 47 Right-click in the preview area and click Zoom in Region from the context menu. 49 Under Layers. Enter 4000 mm for Distance. 48 Draw a region around the soldier course. 42 Under the preview pane. Verify that Base is selected for From. 43 Under Modify Vertical Structure. and click OK.Notice that the vertical structure tools are inactive. 45 In the Wall Sweeps dialog box. the corresponding layer is highlighted in the preview area. In the Materials dialog box. click Add.Brick Soldier Course. click Sweeps. Make sure the offset is a negative number. select layer 9. This is because the preview is displaying a plan view. for View. under Name. When you select a layer. This should be the interior finish layer. make the following modifications: ■ ■ Select M_Wall Sweep-Brick Soldier Course: 2 Bricks for Profile.

52 For the second wall sweep. and click OK. 51 In the Wall Sweeps dialog box. Select Masonry . Verify that Exterior is selected for Side. Enter 4000 mm for Distance. Verify that the Offset is zero. Verify that Base is selected for From. 53 Click OK. Select Flip. Make sure it is a negative number. modify the settings as follows: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select M_Wall Sweep-Brick Soldier Course: 2 Bricks for Profile. 57 Click Apply. click Add.Add a second sweep 50 In the Edit Assembly dialog box. Verify that Base is selected for From. 58 Click Add. click Add. Verify that Exterior is selected for Side. 22 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . Enter -50 mm for Offset. click Sweeps. Add reveals 54 In the Edit Assembly dialog box. 55 In the Reveals dialog box.Brick Soldier Course for Material. under Modify Vertical Structure. 56 Specify the following parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select M_Reveal-Brick Course: 2 Bricks for Profile. click Reveals. Enter 8000 mm for Distance.

You can also use the thin lines tool to temporarily apply thin lines globally to all views. 65 On the View menu. Verify that the Offset is zero. Select Flip. 60 Click OK. This can be affected by the view scale for this particular view. click OK. 66 On the View toolbar. 62 In the Type Properties dialog box. Verify that Base is selected for From. click OK. click Modify. Notice some of the line weights in this view are rather heavy. Enter 8000 mm for Distance. 63 In the Element Properties dialog box.59 Specify the parameters for the second reveal: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select M_Reveal-Brick Course: 2 Bricks for Profile. 61 In the Edit Assembly dialog box. click OK. 64 On the Design Bar. Verify that Exterior is selected for Side. click . Creating Your First Building Model | 23 . click Zoom  ➤ Zoom in Region and draw a zoom region around the corner that includes one of the sweeps and a reveal.

the interior walls resemble the following illustration. 72 On the Design Bar. 74 Navigate to your preferred directory. the corners of the sweeps and reveals wrap automatically. press and hold the CTRL key while you select each component. When finished. name the file m_First_Project-in_progress. and click Save.Brick on CMU. after the new wall type is applied. 68 Enter ZF. Notice that. click Modify. Exterior . 67 On the View Control Bar.rvt. choose Basic Wall: Exterior . Adding the Interior Walls of the West Wing In this exercise. click the Model Graphics Style control. click . 73 On the File menu. and click Shading with Edges. 75 Proceed to the next exercise. TIP To select multiple components. 24 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model .Brick on CMU with Soldier Course. 70 Select the three walls that are still the original wall type. This turns off thin lines globally. This indicates that thin lines will continue to be applied globally to the project. This is the shortcut key for Zoom to Fit. They do not have sweeps or reveals. 71 In the Type Selector. click Save As. you add the interior walls of the west wing. Also notice the button remains activated. 69 On the View toolbar.Notice thin lines are applied to all the linework in this view. Adding the Interior Walls of the West Wing.

2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. ■ 5 Using the following illustration as a guide. place the cursor over the north wall. click Wall. 6 Move the cursor down. select Basic Wall: Interior . under Views (all). and click. specify the following: ■ ■ Verify that Level 2 is selected for Height.135mm Partition (2-hr). 4 In the Options Bar. Verify that Wall Centerline is selected for Loc Line. 5000 mm from the centerline of the west exterior wall. double-click Level 1. m_First_Project-in_progress.rvt. Creating Your First Building Model | 25 . and click when it intersects the centerline of the south exterior wall. under Floor Plans. Select the Line sketching tool.Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved at the end of the previous exercise. 3 In the Type Selector. Sketch the main corridor 1 In the Project Browser. .

and click when it intersects the centerline of the south exterior wall. TIP The temporary dimension snap values are dependent on your zoom settings. Draw a crossing pick from the upper-right to the lower-left that crosses both interior walls. Click to specify the wall start point. 26 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . ■ Draw a pick box from the upper-left to lower-right that includes both interior walls in their entirety. If you zoom into the model.7 Move the cursor over the north exterior wall and 2500 mm to the right of the wall you added in the previous step. 10 Select both interior walls using one of the following three methods: ■ ■ Select one of the interior walls. 8 Move the cursor down. click Modify. the snap values decrease. 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and select the second interior wall. press and hold CTRL.

Add remaining interior walls 14 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. This allows you to analyze their location in relationship to each other and modify the location of both walls at the same time. TIP You can change the selection color by modifying the system settings. and under Colors. click Modify. click a temporary dimension value. select Options. and enter 4750 mm. click Activate Dimensions. specify the selection color. click the Graphics tab. The temporary dimensions are displayed for both walls. Each wall should be 4800 mm from the previous wall. as shown. 11 On the Options Bar. Creating Your First Building Model | 27 . they display as red. On the Settings menu. 15 In the Type Selector. 12 Using the following illustration as a guide. Notice that temporary dimensions do not display automatically when multiple components are selected. select Basic Wall: Interior . click Wall.79mm Partition (1-hr). 16 Add four horizontal interior walls stretching from the centerline of the left exterior wall to the centerline of the left wall of the corridor. This places both interior walls 4750 mm from the centerline of the closest exterior wall. 13 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.After the walls are selected.

as shown. Use the dimensions shown in the following illustration when adding the walls. modify temporary dimension values to obtain exact placement.17 Add five horizontal interior walls stretching from the centerline of the right wall of the corridor to the centerline of the right exterior wall. If necessary. 28 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . 18 Add the final four interior walls in each corner of the right side of the building model. The dimension lines have been provided for training purposes. Dimension lines have been added for training purposes.

In the above illustration and callout. TIP If the lines within the floor plan display too thick. This places the view in thin lines mode. a thin line appears at the tip of the cursor. NOTE If the Tools toolbar is not available. there is no immediate and obvious indication of the split location. 22 On the Tools toolbar. 21 Sketch a zoom region around the upper-right quadrant of the building model. 24 Click to split the wall. This line represents where the underlying object is to be split. The cursor displays as a cutting tool. When you are finished splitting the walls. notice the exact placement of the cursor and the location of the proposed wall split. you can activate it by opening the Windows menu and clicking Toolbar  ➤ Tools. and you can now split walls and lines. 25 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click . Creating Your First Building Model | 29 . 20 Enter ZR. This is the shortcut key for Zoom in Region. click Modify. As you move the cursor over the wall. click Modify. place the cursor over the intersection of the right wall of the corridor and the short horizontal wall that intersects it as shown. After splitting the wall.Use split tool to modify walls 19 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 23 In the drawing area. you can click on the View toolbar. click the tool a second time to turn thin lines mode off.

and delete the segment. 28 Using the same techniques learned in previous steps.26 Select the short wall segment that you split from the right wall of the corridor. 30 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . 30 Enter ZF. 27 On the Standard toolbar. 29 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. zoom in to the bottom right corner of the building model. split the right corridor wall. click . click Modify. This is the shortcut key for Zoom To Fit.

NOTE Arrows have been added at the location of the two splits. This tool allow you to spin the model in any direction. Notice the interior walls that you added and split. 33 Using the following illustration as a guide. After the second split. 37 Press and hold SHIFT and spin the building model by dragging one of the corners in any direction. Zoom in as necessary. split the right wall of the corridor at the intersection of the two center horizontal interior walls. click . 34 Press ESC to end the Split command. Creating Your First Building Model | 31 . the inner segment is deleted automatically. click 36 On the View toolbar. select Delete Inner Segment. 35 On the View toolbar.There are two remaining splits to make. 32 On the Options Bar. click . 31 On the Tools toolbar. .

5 On the Options Bar. Dimensioning the Building Model. Next. Level 1 . In the final section of this exercise. it opens automatically in the Project Browser. click Rename.5mm Arial. A permanent dimension is considered modifiable when one or more of the components that it references is selected for modification. enter Level 1 . right-click Level 1. 39 Proceed to the next exercise.38 On the File menu. You begin by adding a simple dimension between two walls. Create and rename copy of Level 1 1 In the Project Browser. click Dimension.Dimensioned and Annotated. options. under Floor Plans. Permanent dimensions can appear in two different states: modifiable and non-modifiable. For Pick. When geometry is selected for modification. the dimension value is displayed at its true size and is not selectable for modification. ready for modification. 32 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . and in the context menu. If the geometry referenced by a permanent dimension is not selected for modification. you add dimension lines to the building model. and click Duplicate. you constrain the building model using equality and locking constraints.Dimensioned and Annotated. You create a dimension by selecting the dimension type. The dimension styles available in the Type Selector are dependent on the type of dimension selected on the Options Bar. m_First_Project-in_progress. select Linear Dimension Style: Diagonal . click Save. 3 In the Rename View dialog box. specify the following dimension parameters: ■ Click . When you duplicate a view. 2 In the Project Browser. select Wall centerlines. 6 In the Type Selector. This is the aligned dimension option. and click OK.2. and components that require dimensioning. under Floor Plans. Add a dimension line between two walls 4 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. should be open. Dimensioning the Building Model In this exercise. you add a multi-segmented dimension string to modify the witness lines. the dimension value displays in blue and can be modified directly by clicking the value. under Views (all).rvt. both permanent dimensions and temporary dimensions display. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved at the end of the previous exercise. select Individual References. right-click Copy of Level 1. ■ ■ For Prefer. The floor plan. In that case.

click Modify. move the cursor over the left exterior wall as shown. 10 On the Design Bar.7 In the drawing area. Creating Your First Building Model | 33 . click to select it. 8 Move the cursor over the right exterior wall as shown. When a dashed line displays on the wall centerline. Click in the empty space of the drawing area to place the dimension line. 9 Move the cursor just above the north wall. click to select it. When a dashed line is displayed on the wall centerline.

on each witness line. Click the control a second time and the witness line moves to the exterior face. 12 Select the dimension line. and a blue padlock displays. This behavior is similar to the witness line control on temporary dimensions. 15 Select the vertical exterior wall on the left. Notice that the dimension line and value displays as red. change it to 15000. the value is not available for modification.11 Enter the keyboard shortcut ZR for Zoom In Region. Information is displayed in a tooltip. Click it a third time to return the witness line to the wall centerline. This is one of the ways in which a permanent dimension differs from a temporary dimension. 34 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . The control at the bottom of each witness line controls the gap between the end of the witness line and the component it references. the dimension value displays as modifiable. 16 Click the permanent dimension value. 17 Click the temporary dimension value. or in the status bar of the drawing window. Notice the selected wall moved to the left. These controls allow you to modify and constrain the dimension. When you select a component referenced by a dimension witness line. and press ENTER. and draw a zoom region around the north exterior wall and dimension line. Notice that a temporary dimension also displays. 13 Place the cursor over the blue control in the center of the left witness line. In its current state. indicating that the control moves the witness line. change it to 4750. This means you can modify the value by clicking it. Notice that the dimension value is not blue. Notice the dimension value turns blue. 14 Click the control once and the witness line moves to the interior face of the wall. and press ENTER. Controls display on the value.

Click the symbol to make the temporary dimension permanent. and click to place the dimension as shown. 22 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Prefer. vertical. Creating Your First Building Model | 35 . click Dimension. In the Auto Dimension Options dialog box. 19 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. select Wall centerlines. select Intersecting Walls. Add a multi-segmented dimension 20 Using one of the zoom methods learned previously. and click OK. exterior wall.18 Place the cursor over the dimension symbol located beneath the temporary dimension value. select Entire Walls. Click Options. 21 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. zoom out until you can see the entire building model. For Pick. move the cursor to the left. 23 Select the left.

36 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . NOTE Make sure you right-click the blue control and not the dimension line. 26 Using the following illustration as a guide.24 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. right-click the blue control on the witness line second from the top. click Modify. Modify witness lines 25 Select the multi-segmented dimension you added in the previous steps. and click Delete Witness Line.

Creating Your First Building Model | 37 .27 Right-click the dimension line. WARNING Do not right-click a witness line. click Edit Witness Lines. and in the context menu. 28 Select the centerline of the interior wall where you previously deleted the witness line. it provides a different set of options on the context menu.

Create constraints 30 Select the second interior wall from the top to the left of the corridor. click in the empty space of the drawing area to complete the editing process.29 After selecting the wall. 38 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . NOTE There are two alternative ways of ending the dimension edit process: You can click Modify on the Design Bar. or press ESC on the keyboard.

31 Drag the wall downward until the distance between it and the wall below it is approximately 2400 mm.Notice that the dimension values become modifiable on each side of the witness line that refers to the selected wall. Creating Your First Building Model | 39 .

34 Select the same wall you moved previously and drag it upward approximately 1200 mm as shown. Notice a lock displays for each segment.32 Select the multi-segmented dimension line. You can turn the lock on and off by clicking the lock symbol. 35 Select the multi-segmented dimension. the other moves with it and maintains the locked dimension value. Notice that the dimension value for the locked segment remains unchanged as you move the wall. 36 Click the lock symbol on the 2400 mm segment to remove the constraint between the two walls. The relationship between these components is constrained. 33 Click the lock on the 2400 mm segment of the dimension. This dimension does not need to be precise. Lock symbols offer the opportunity to constrain the building model by locking a dimension value or an alignment. if you move one component. 40 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model .

38 On the Options Bar. Notice that each segment is now equally spaced and the dimension values display EQ. Next. You then add windows and use the mirror and array tools to save time and ensure consistency. Adding Doors and Windows In this exercise. you load multiple new door types and add them to the building model. 40 In the Project Browser. select Value for Equality Display. This is an equality constraint that makes all dimension segments equal. and click OK.Notice an EQ symbol displays with a slash through it. Adding Doors and Windows. double-click Level 1. You begin by adding single flush doors. under Other. you use the Paste Aligned tool to copy the Level 1 windows to Levels 2 and 3. 39 In the Element Properties dialog box. Notice that each segment displays an equal value. In the final section of the exercise. click . under Floor Plans. Creating Your First Building Model | 41 . 37 Click the equality constraint to activate it. under Views (all). select Save. you add doors and windows to the building model. 42 Proceed to the next exercise. 41 On the File menu.

3 In the north side of the building model. Add single flush doors to the building model 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. This is the mechanical room. the door resides on a level line. A door symbol displays when the cursor is over the wall.Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved at the end of the previous exercise. When you add a door. m_First_Project-in_progress. doors snap automatically to the closest available level. You can offset the door from the level. Regardless of the initial placement. This is most evident when you add a door in an elevation or 3D view. Doors are wall-hosted families and can only be added to a wall. In addition.rvt. however. 4 Approach the same corridor wall from inside the room. 42 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . 2 In the Type Selector. click Door. place the cursor over the right corridor for the room shown in the following illustration. you can flip the door opening immediately after placing it. the initial opening is based on the wall face from which the cursor approaches. select M_Single-Flush: 0915 x 2134mm. Do not click at this time.

When you are finished. 8 Click the temporary dimension value between the door centerline and the lower horizontal wall. Notice the blue controls that display. use the flip controls to adjust the opening. and press ENTER. Creating Your First Building Model | 43 .5 Press the Spacebar once to flip the door hand. return the door to the position shown in the following illustration. Press the Spacebar a second time. These control the door opening direction and the hand of the door (left or right). Do not be concerned with exact placement. 7 Click each control to familiarize yourself with how the door controls work. 6 Click to add the door with the opening inside the room. 9 Add an additional door of the same type to the small room above door number 1 as shown. and modify temporary dimensions as shown. The precise dimensions are not important. You can use this to flip from left to right hand opening. specify a value of 600 mm. After you add door number 2.

and select M_Double-Glass 2. click Training Files. as shown. ZF. click Load. to zoom to fit. 11 On the Design Bar. 17 Press and hold CTRL.10 Zoom in to the bottom right corner of the building model and add a door of the same type to the room as shown. click Modify. 14 On the Options Bar. Load and apply new door types 13 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and select M_Double-Flush. and set the temporary dimensions. 16 Navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Families\Doors folder.rfa extension. 15 In the left pane of the Open dialog box. click Door.rfa. 12 Enter the keyboard shortcut. All Revit Building families have an .rfa. 44 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . Flip the door. Notice that a preview image of the selected door displays in the upper right corner of the dialog box.

add a door to each of the five rooms to the left of the corridor.You can load multiple families at the same time. 20 In the Type Selector. Creating Your First Building Model | 45 . TIP Zoom in and out as necessary. 18 Press and hold CTRL. 19 Click Open to load all three door families into the project. 22 In the Type Selector. and select M_Single-Flush Vision. Each door should open into the room. 21 Starting in the room in the upper left corner. These door families are now available in the Type Selector drop-down list. as shown. select M_Single-Flush Vision: 0864 x 2032mm. a preview image does not display. select M_Single-Flush Vision: 0915 x 2134mm. The distance between the door centerline and nearest wall centerline should be 600mm. When more than one family is selected.rfa.

46 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . select M_Double-Flush: 1730 x 2134mm. This is door number 14 in the following illustration. The arrow has been added for training purposes.23 Zoom in around the upper-right corner of the building model and add doors 9 and 10 as shown. 25 Add the final M_Single-Flush Vision: 0915 x 2134mm door in the center of the building model and to the right of the corridor as shown. 27 Add a door to the right exterior wall opposite of door number 1. 24 Zoom in around the lower-right corner of the building model and add doors 11 and 12 as shown. 26 In the Type Selector. This is door number 13 in the following illustration.

Notice that the brick surface pattern displays as you zoom into this view. under Views (all). NOTE The display of a surface pattern is zoom dependent. select Visibility/Graphics. under Elevations.Add a door in elevation view 28 In the Project Browser. double-click North. Although there is no technical reason you cannot add a door in this view. If your view displays solid fill. 32 Expand the Walls category. 29 Zoom around the building model and level heads. Creating Your First Building Model | 47 . 30 On the View menu. it would be easier if the visibility of the wall surface pattern was turned off. and scroll down to Walls. and clear Surface Pattern. 31 Click the Model Categories tab. zoom in until the brick pattern displays.

then Level 2. the wall surface pattern will remain visible in all other views. click Door. it has two basic requirements: it must be hosted by a wall and it must be associated with a level. Changes to Visibility/Graphics are applied only to the open view. 36 Move the cursor over the wall at Level 3. 48 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . Tag a door in plan view 38 In the Project Browser. Notice the door snaps to each level. Notice that the double doors on the north wall display without a tag. When adding a door. You can apply an offset if required. under Floor Plans. select M_Double-Glass 2: 1830 x 2134mm. NOTE The temporary dimensions refer to interior walls. In this case. 35 In the Type Selector. as shown.33 Click OK. and down to Level 1. 37 Add a double-glass door centered on Level 1. double-click Level 1. 34 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

click Door. as shown. 39 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Creating Your First Building Model | 49 . 40 On the Options Bar. 42 Zoom in to the lower exterior wall. 45 Add the final door centered on the lower exterior wall. 44 In the Type Selector. click the double doors to add a tag. TIP For each component type. This should be door number 15. click Tag.Components are tagged in the view in which they are placed. clear Leader. NOTE Because the default door tag was not designed to display in an elevation view. a tag did not display when you added the door in the North elevation view. 43 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. verify that M_Double-Glass 2: 1830 x 2134mm is selected. the Type Selector and Options Bar remember the last settings used for that component. 41 On the upper exterior wall.

53 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. As you move the cursor over a wall. 54 In the Type Selector.46 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. 52 Zoom in on the upper exterior wall. select M_Andersen 400 C35: C35. Windows are wall-hosted components. 47 On the View toolbar. click Modify. 49 Spin the model. click Save. the window displays at the cursor. double-click Level 1. click 48 On the View toolbar. 50 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . you can flip the window after placement. just like doors. click . click Window. The window exterior is placed on the wall face closest to the cursor. . Add windows to the building model 51 In the Project Browser. 50 On the File menu. Like doors. and notice the doors you added.

elevation. 66 Add two C35 windows to the right of the exterior double door. 61 On the Options Bar. 59 Zoom around the window. go to Help. If you want to modify a window in a specific way but an instance or type parameter is not available to accomplish the task. The list of parameters can vary depending on the window family design. and 3D views. In the family editor. you can edit the family in place or open the window in the family editor. click the temporary dimension value and specify the correct distance. click to place it as shown. click Modify. 62 In the Element Properties dialog box. There should be a 1950 mm distance between the centerlines of the two windows. You can load and assign tags that display the specific information you need in the format you prefer. click Cancel. 57 On the Design Bar. IMPORTANT  If necessary. the designer creates the instance and type parameters that control geometry. When you add a window in a plan view. 58 On the View toolbar. click . 65 Zoom out so you can see the right side of the upper exterior wall. and select it. 56 When the window displays at the tip of the cursor. modify it. materials. 63 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click . and reload it into the project. In this project. Creating Your First Building Model | 51 . Notice the list of instance parameters available for modification. 64 Add a window to the right of the existing window as shown. the default head or sill height is used to set the initial height of the window. The designer can also create a window with few modifiable parameters. click Window. 55 Move the cursor over the exterior face of the left side of the upper exterior wall. and visibility.You can add windows in plan. the window is using a type tag that displays the window type number rather than the window mark. 60 Make sure the distance between the window centerline and the left wall centerline is 1400 mm. For more information on creating and loading annotation tags. as shown.

click . click Mirror. and select the three remaining windows. 72 Place the cursor over the middle of the exterior face of the right exterior wall. 69 Select one of the windows on the upper exterior wall. and click to set the mirror axis. 52 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . 74 Move the cursor to the left.67 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. the selected windows are to be mirrored across a horizontal axis residing on the midpoint of the east exterior wall. The copy option is selected by default. In this case. 73 When the triangular midpoint symbol displays on the exterior face of the wall. Mirror the windows 68 Zoom out until the building model fits within the view. click Modify. press and hold CTRL. 70 On the Edit menu. indicating that the midpoint of that component is ready to be selected. You also have the option to mirror a copy rather than the selected component(s). A tooltip is displayed. you can pick or draw the mirror axis. When you mirror a component or components. 71 On the Options Bar. click to select it. and make sure Copy is selected.

click Window. Add and array windows 75 Zoom in to the room in the upper left corner of the building model. at the dimensions shown. 77 Add two windows to the left exterior wall. Creating Your First Building Model | 53 .The windows are mirrored immediately after you specify the mirror axis. You tag the windows later in the exercise. 76 On the Design Bar. Notice that the mirrored windows are not tagged.

83 Move the cursor over the intersection of the left exterior wall and the intersecting interior wall shown below. You then move the array to the second or last location. Enter 5 for Number. specify the following options: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that is selected for a linear array.78 On the Design Bar. 82 On the Options Bar. Creating an array is a three-step process. you can use the array tool to finish the job. 81 On the Edit menu. 80 Select the two windows that you just added on the left exterior wall. 79 Zoom out in the upper left corner so you can see the two rooms with doors 4 and 5. and click to set the array end point. Clear Group And Associate. For Move To. and click to set the array start point. it is an ideal situation to use an array. 54 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . Because all of the rooms on this side of the building model are equally spaced. You first click a point to specify the array start point. Rather than manually add the rest of the windows on the left exterior wall. select 2nd. click Array. Select Constrain. click Modify.

click Window. If you make a mistake placing the array. 86 On the bottom-right side of the building model. Creating Your First Building Model | 55 .84 Move the cursor down until the arrayed window group is centered in the room below the starting point. any misplacement has a multiplier effect as the array continues down the wall. NOTE It is extremely important to make sure the new array is centered between the walls of the next room. Notice the arrayed windows are not tagged. as shown. Add remaining level 1 window 85 On the Design Bar. and click the similar intersection shown below to set the array end point. undo the step and try again. add the final window to the right exterior wall and centered in the second room from the bottom. Because the rooms on the left side of the building model are of equal size.

click Modify.87 If you are still using Thin Lines mode. click . 90 Spin the model. 92 In the 3D Drawing area. you can use the paste-align tool to accomplish the same goal significantly faster. click 89 On the View toolbar. drag a selection box around the entire building model. and notice the windows you added. 56 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . on the View toolbar. . Rather than use the same methods to add similar windows to levels 2 and 3. turn it off by clicking 88 On the View toolbar. Paste align windows to Levels 2 and 3 91 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

select Level 2. 100 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. This leaves only the windows selected within the 3D view. click Paste Aligned  ➤ Select Levels by Name. click Window. and click OK. 97 In the Select Levels dialog box. such as equality constraints. 98 On the Design Bar. Notice that when you add a window in elevation view. double-click North. After the windows are added to Level 2 and Level 3. Don’t be concerned with precise placement or spacing between the windows and doors.This selects every component in the building model. click . clear walls and doors from the selection. notice that windows need to be added above the double doors on the north and south walls. notice the wall surface pattern displays. clear Tag on Placement. 93 On the Options Bar. This is because the changes you made to the Visibility/Graphics of the North elevation view were applied only to that view. click Window. select Level 3. Creating Your First Building Model | 57 . 99 In the Project Browser. 96 On the Edit menu. and click OK. 104 On the Design Bar. 94 In the Filter dialog box. press and hold CTRL. the window snaps to the default sill height which displays as a green dashed line. 102 Add a C35 window in the center of Level 2 and Level 3 as shown below. 105 Add C35 windows to the center of Levels 2 and 3 as you did in the previous steps. click Modify. The spacing will be modified in a later dataset. 103 In the Project Browser. click Copy to Clipboard. under Elevations. 95 On the Edit menu. In this view. 101 On the Options Bar. The spacing can be manipulated using some of the dimensioning tools you learned earlier. double-click South. under Elevations.

You can also select or draw lines. You add a more complex floor type to levels 2 and 3. Like walls. you add floors and floor openings to the building model. 110 On the File menu. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved at the end of the previous exercise. . 58 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . 109 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog box. under Floor Plans. You also add elevators and plumbing components to the building model. roof. select Window Tags. When sketching these components. double-click Level 1. m_First_Project-in_progress. 107 Zoom out until you can see the entire building model. the respective layers interact according to the functional assignment within the Edit Assembly dialog box. When walls intersect a floor. 111 Proceed to the next exercise. 3 Spin the model and observe that floors are needed throughout the building model. In this exercise. Floors. and click OK. each of these components can have a compound structure. 108 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click 2 On the View toolbar. and all require their borders to be sketched. roofs. you begin by adding a floor slab Level 1.rvt. click . or ceiling. click Tag All Not Tagged. click Save. you can select walls to define the border of the component. Adding Floors and Floor Openings. and ceilings are examples of sketched components. Notice that all the windows in the view are tagged. where three openings are required for the stairs and elevators. Add a floor slab to Level 1 1 On the View toolbar.106 In the Project Browser. Adding Floors and Floor Openings In this exercise.

the building model becomes unavailable for modification until you finish the floor sketch. 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 6 On the Design Bar. In addition. verify that Pick Walls is selected. You are in sketch mode. 5 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.4 In the Project Browser. click Floor Properties. click Floor. 12 Select Concrete . A magenta line displays with flip arrows. clear Extend into wall (to core). 14 On the View toolbar. 8 Click the upper exterior wall. When in sketch mode.300mm for Type. 11 On the Design Bar. You can click the flip arrows to move the floor boundary to either the interior or exterior face of a wall. click the flip arrows to flip the line. click . under Floor Plans. Sketch. Creating Your First Building Model | 59 . and click OK. double-click Level 1. The Design Bar now has only one tab. 10 Select the three remaining exterior walls. 7 On the Options Bar. Notice the floor on Level 1 that extends to the exterior face of the walls. you must either finish or quit in order to access other design modes. 9 If the magenta line is not on the exterior face of the north exterior wall. click Finish Sketch.

the interior walls on Level 1 display as an underlay. Notice the location of the magenta line. double-click Level 2. when it highlights under the cursor. The windows are not tagged because you did not add them within this view.Add a floor to Level 2 15 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. In this view. 60 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . When the chain of walls highlights. You can use TAB to select a chain of walls or lines at any time. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Floor. 18 Place the cursor over the upper exterior wall and. 19 Zoom in to the upper exterior wall. click to select it. 17 On the Options Bar. press TAB. verify that Extend into wall (to core) is selected.

you paste-align the level 1 interior walls and components to level 2 before adding the level 3 floor. 24 Click Finish Sketch. 27 On the View toolbar. move the elevator into position. Next. click Floor Properties. . as shown. A message displays asking if you want to join geometry and cut the overlapping volume out of the walls. 33 Add two elevators in the center room on the right side of the building model. Creating Your First Building Model | 61 . 21 Use the flip arrows to place the magenta line on the exterior face of the core. double-click Level 1. These elevators are wall-hosted components. 22 On the Design Bar. Attaching the walls ensures that if you change the floor elevation. 32 In the Type Selector. This occurs because the structural layers of the floor must cut through the interior finish layer of the wall in order to extend to the wall core. and click OK. 31 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click 28 On the View toolbar. click Component. Add elevators and bathroom components 30 In the Project Browser. and click to place it. you add elevators and plumbing components on Level 1. select M_Elevator Center: 2032mm x 1295mm. 23 Select Beam and Block 200mm for Type. After you add these components. under Floor Plans. click . the walls remain attached. To do this. position the cursor on the wall. The interior walls of the building model are displayed in red. A message displays asking if you want the walls that go up to this floor to attach to it. 26 Click Yes to join geometry and cut out the overlapping volume. 29 Spin the model and observe the new floor on Level 2. The line chain flips to each face of the core rather than the interior and exterior wall face.20 Click the flip arrows. 25 Click Yes to attach the wall tops to the floor. indicating that they are not attached to the floor.

and specify the dimension 1150 mm as shown above. as shown. toggle the temporary dimension witness line to the interior face of the adjacent wall. click Modify.TIP After adding the elevators. 37 In the Type Selector. 35 Zoom in to the upper right corner of the building model. select M_Pedestal Sink-3D: Pedestal Sink. 62 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . click Component. 38 Add the sink to the center of the room. 34 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select each one. 36 On the Design Bar.

For example. the second click specifies the rotation end point. you can use the listening dimension to accurately rotate the component. Rotating an object requires two clicks. when rotating the component. Listening dimensions react to cursor movements and keyboard entries. click Modify. an angular value displays that responds to keyboard entries. When rotating. establish the direction of the rotation.39 On the Design Bar. 40 Select the sink. In this case. 43 Move the cursor 90 degrees to the left and click to set the rotation end point. Creating Your First Building Model | 63 . The first click specifies the rotation start point. click Rotate. enter 90 on the keyboard and press Enter. 42 Place the cursor directly above the sink and click to set the rotation start point as shown. The component will rotate to the value. TIP Although you can manually rotate the component. you can type the wall length and press Enter rather than setting the wall end point. when you sketch a wall. 41 On the Edit menu.

as shown. 46 In the Type Selector. 64 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . 47 Add the toilet on the right wall. click Component. select M_Toilet-Commercial-Wall-3D: 480mm Seat Height. 48 Use the same procedure to add a toilet and sink in the similar room at the lower right corner of the building model.44 Drag the sink until it snaps to the center of the left wall face. 45 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

a message might be displayed stating that the new walls conflict with an existing insert. and click OK. 53 In the Filter dialog box. clear Door Tags. Paste align interior walls 49 In an empty space within the drawing area. Creating Your First Building Model | 65 . Depending on the exact placement of the windows you added in the north and south elevation views. 50 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 51 Draw a crossing pick box beginning inside the upper-right corner of the building model and extending to the inside of the lower-left corner. and plumbing fixtures can be paste aligned to Levels 2 and 3. click Modify. (Do not include the exterior walls in the selection. click .) This captures all the internal walls. click Paste Aligned  ➤ Select Levels by Name. In addition. 54 On the Edit menu. and click Zoom To Fit. right-click. the interior walls. 52 On the Options Bar. click Copy to Clipboard. 55 On the Edit menu.Before adding the final floor. doors. elevators. and click OK. doors. 56 Select Level 2. and components. you must add the openings for the stairwells and the elevators.

61 On the View toolbar. The message disappears once you click in the drawing area. you can continue working and the warning dialog box closes automatically. Ignore the warning and proceed with the next step. under Floor Plans. you add floor openings to accommodate the elevators and stairs. If you received this error. 59 Correct the problem by moving the window away from the corridor wall. click . For more information regarding the warning. it is most likely because the center window intersects the corridor wall on Levels 2 and 3. Therefore. 60 Check the lower exterior wall for the same problem and correct it. In the steps that follow. double-click Level 2. zoom in to the upper exterior wall and notice that the center window conflicts with the left wall of the corridor. When you add a model opening. you are prompted to select the floor.These conflict warnings alert you to problems in your layout. 58 If you received the conflict message. 57 In the Project Browser. click 62 On the View toolbar. If you know the source of the problem. 63 Spin the model so you can see the interior walls and components on level 2. 66 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . roof. it is often a good idea to create a view that makes the selection process more precise. if necessary. you can click the controls on the side of the dialog box. or ceiling in which you want the opening. You can drag the window or use the arrow keys on your keyboard to nudge the window to a location that does not conflict with the interior wall. .

Adding a section is a two-click process. double-click Level 1. under Floor Plans. click to set the start point. 68 Click the section line. 65 Right-click in the empty space of the drawing area. you can flip the view direction and modify the extents of the view. click Section. and the second click specifies the section tail. 67 Place the cursor over the upper right corner of the building model. and click Zoom To Fit. The first click specifies the section head. 69 Click the flip arrows to change the direction of the view towards the interior. move the cursor down and click just below the south exterior wall. drag the clip planes of the view so that you capture only the building model and set the depth just past the bathroom wall. as shown. 66 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Creating Your First Building Model | 67 . After you add the section.Create a section view 64 In the Project Browser. 70 Using the shape handles.

the section heads are linked directly to the view so when you double-click the section head.71 On the Design Bar. click Modify. or ceiling and cut vertically. 72 Double-click the section head. 68 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . 74 In the Opening Placement Options dialog box. Similarly. floor. just as the level heads do in an elevation view. and click OK. select Pick a roof. when it highlights. the referenced view opens. This view offers easy accessibility to all floors as well as the stairwells on the left and right. select it. click Opening. The section head is displayed in blue. 75 Place the cursor over the level 2 floor and. Create a floor opening 73 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.

78 On the Design Bar. select the rectangle drawing tool. In the following illustration.Because you must be in a view parallel to the screen in order to edit a sketch. When locked. the sketch lines have been enhanced for training purposes. 77 Zoom around the stairwell in the lower right corner. 81 Click each of the four padlocks to lock them. and click Open View. click Lines. 80 Draw a rectangle that snaps to the interior wall faces of the stairwell as shown below. Notice the locking constraints that display. 76 In the Go to View dialog box. these constraints ensure that the opening adapts to any changes in the associated walls. 79 On the Options Bar. select Floor Plan: Level 2. the Go to View dialog box displays and offers you a selection of views to choose from. Creating Your First Building Model | 69 .

88 Zoom to the stairwell in the upper right corner. 89 On the Design Bar. select it. 82 On the Design Bar. 86 Place the cursor over the level 2 floor and when it highlights. click Lines. and click Open View. 70 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . click Opening. 92 Click Finish Sketch. click Finish Sketch. 83 In the Project Browser. or ceiling and cut vertically. under Sections (Building Section). double-click Section 1. select Pick a roof. it is often easier to add the stairs first and then modify the opening precisely to the location of the stairs. Add a second opening 84 On the Design Bar. select the rectangle drawing tool. and click OK. The modification of the opening is done for you in a dataset used later in this tutorial. 91 Draw a rectangle that snaps to the interior wall faces of the stairwell and lock the lines as shown. floor. 87 In the Go to View dialog box. 85 In the Opening Placement Options dialog box.NOTE Although the opening could account for the stair landings at this point. 90 On the Options Bar. select Floor Plan: Level 2.

select Floor Plan: Level 2. when it highlights. or ceiling and cut vertically. 103 On the View toolbar. After adding a floor to Level 3. 96 Place the cursor over the level 2 floor and. 99 On the Design Bar. 94 On the Design Bar. 97 In the Go to View dialog box. 95 In the Opening Placement Options dialog box. you paste align these openings rather than sketch them again. . 105 Spin the model so that you can see the vertical penetrations on level 2. 101 Draw a rectangle that snaps to the interior wall faces of the elevator shaft and lock the lines as shown. 102 Click Finish Sketch. click Lines. and click OK. 100 On the Options Bar. double-click Section 1. click Opening. and click Open View. select Pick a roof.Add an opening for the elevators 93 In the Project Browser. select it. click 104 On the View toolbar. You have completed the three openings required for this level. Creating Your First Building Model | 71 . select the rectangle drawing tool. 98 Zoom in to the elevators. under Sections (Building Section). click . floor.

116 On the Options Bar. 117 In the Filter dialog box. press TAB. Copy floor openings to Level 3 114 In the Project Browser. 115 Draw a pick box around Level 2 so that you capture the three openings you created previously. The floor type you assigned to Level 2 is used for Level 3. 113 Click Yes to join geometry and cut volume. click to select it.Add a floor to Level 3 106 In the Project Browser. 111 On the Design Bar. under Views (all). clear everything except Floors (Floor opening cut). 72 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . 118 On the Edit menu. and click OK. 110 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls and. 107 Right-click. click Copy to Clipboard. under Floor Plans. 120 Select Level 3 and click OK. click Finish Sketch. click . double-click Level 3. under Sections (Building Sections). 108 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Paste Aligned  ➤ Select Levels by Name. and click Zoom To Fit. Make sure you do not select Floors. 119 On the Edit menu. when the chain of walls highlights. 112 Click Yes to attach the walls to the bottom of the floor. double-click Section 1. and. click Floor. verify that Extend into wall (to core) is selected. when the wall highlights under the cursor. 109 On the Options Bar.

and click Zoom To Fit. 123 Right-click. Paste-align components to Level 3 122 In the Project Browser. click . The vertical penetrations extend through Levels 2 and 3.121 On the View toolbar. under Floor Plans. Do not include the exterior walls. click Modify. 125 Draw a crossing pick box beginning just inside the upper right corner and extending to the lower left corner. and components to Level 3. 124 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. The only remaining task in this exercise is to paste-align the Level 2 interior walls. double-click Level 2. Creating Your First Building Model | 73 . doors. under Views (all).

hold the CTRL key down and select it. click Save. Adding a Roof and Ceiling. click . NOTE If you receive a warning that a conflict exists with an insert. hold the SHIFT key down and select the component. 74 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . and click OK. Adding a Roof and Ceiling In this exercise. click OK and go to the Level 3 floor plan. click Copy to Clipboard. 131 On the View toolbar. this removes it from the selection set. 132 On the File menu.TIP If you miss a component. 128 On the Edit menu. 129 On the Edit menu. 130 Select Level 3 and click OK. you add a gable roof and ceiling to the west wing of the building model. 127 In the Filter dialog box. 133 Proceed to the next exercise. Reposition one or both of the windows that may be intersecting the corridor wall. If you accidently select a component that does not belong in the selection set. click Paste Aligned  ➤ Select Levels by Name. 126 On the Options Bar. clear Floors and Floors (Floor opening cut). click .

and verify that Overhang is 600 mm. Add a gable roof to the building model 1 In the Project Browser. under Views (all). click Pick Walls. 6 Select the right exterior wall so that the sketch line is right of the wall. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 8 Select the upper exterior wall and the lower exterior wall. click Roof  ➤ Roof by Footprint. 3 On the Design Bar. select Defines slope. 5 Select the left exterior wall so that the sketch line is left of the wall. m_First_Project-in_progress. click the flip arrows to move the lines outside of the exterior walls. 4 On the Options Bar. Verify that Extend to wall core is clear. Both are sketched components and require you to define the border of the component.rvt. double-click Roof. Creating Your First Building Model | 75 .Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved at the end of the previous exercise. If the sketch lines are on the interior side of the exterior walls. 7 On the Options Bar. Creating a footprint roof is very similar to creating a floor. clear Defines slope. under Floor Plans.

click 13 On the View toolbar. select Warm Roof . 11 On the Design Bar.9 On the Design Bar. click Finish Roof. Notice the exterior walls are not connected to the roof. 14 Spin and zoom the building model until it resembles the following illustration. .Timber for Type. click . 76 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . 15 Move the cursor over the gable end wall until it is preselected. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box. 16 Press TAB to preselect the chain of exterior walls. 12 On the View toolbar. click Roof Properties. and click OK.

Modify the roof 22 Select the roof. Notice the drag handle on the roof ridge. for Attach Wall. for Top/Base. click Modify. 19 On the Options Bar. 21 On the Design Bar. The exterior wall chain displays as solid red. select Attach. Creating Your First Building Model | 77 . 20 Select the roof. 23 Drag the roof ridge control upward to a point where the pitch is approximately doubled. 18 On the Options Bar.17 Click to select the entire chain of exterior walls. select Top. The exterior walls attach to the roof.

click Modify. TIP Although you can add a ceiling in a floor plan view. Notice the exterior walls adjust to the new roof pitch. 28 On the Modeling tab of the Design Bar.24 Release the drag handle at the new position. select Compound Ceiling: 600 x 600mm grid. you select a ceiling type from the Type Selector. and then click inside highlighted rooms to add a ceiling. Using the sketch method. double-click Level 3. 26 On the Edit menu. you can sketch the perimeter of a ceiling using the same pick and draw techniques learned when you added the floors and roof. 78 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . This returns the roof to its original position. under Views (all). you will use the auto ceiling method. Add a ceiling to Level 3 27 In the Project Browser. click Ceiling. ■ In this case. 29 In the Type Selector. There are two methods to create a ceiling: ■ Using Auto Ceiling. 25 On the Design Bar. the ceiling is normally outside the view range and is not visible after you add it. click inside the room to add a ceiling as shown. 30 In the upper-left corner of the building model. under Ceiling Plans. click Undo Move.

32 In the Type Selector. 33 Click within the main corridor and each stairwell to add a ceiling in each. Creating Your First Building Model | 79 . select Compound Ceiling: 600 x 1200mm grid.31 Add a ceiling of the same type in the remaining rooms on the left side of the corridor and in both bathrooms. as shown.

40 In the Element Properties dialog box. 38 On the View Control Bar. click the Model Graphics Style control. 39 Right-click the ceiling over the elevator shaft on Level 3. under Constraints. 42 Proceed to the next exercise. click Properties. and select Shading with Edges. 37 In the drawing area. 80 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . double-click the section head. select Compound Ceiling: Plain. enter 3900 mm for Height Offset From Level. you modify the original stairwell to be a multistory stair and mirror a copy to the other stairwell. 36 On the Design Bar. Adding Multi-Level Stairs. 35 Add a ceiling to the three remaining rooms on the right side of the corridor.34 In the Type Selector. you begin by creating a set of stairs from Level 1 to Level 2. 41 On the File menu. click Save. and click OK. Rather than repetitively creating the same stairs on each level and in each stairwell. and from the context menu. Adding Multi-Level Stairs In this exercise. click Modify.

In the steps that follow. 5 Add the three lines as shown.rvt. 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. you create a set of U-shaped stairs similar to those in the following illustration. the permanent dimension lines have been added as a training aid and the section line has been hidden temporarily. double-click Level 1. In the image below. and use the temporary dimensions to specify the values shown in the following image. under Views (all). 2 Zoom in to the stairwell in the lower right corner of the building model. Creating Your First Building Model | 81 . select Wide Lines. 4 In the Type Selector. under Floor Plans. you first add temporary model lines that provide an underlay to trace over.Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved at the end of the previous exercise. m_First_Project-in_progress. click Lines. In order to sketch the stairs accurately. Add stairs between Level 1 and 2 1 In the Project Browser.

and then clicking the top endpoint of the same line. In the steps that follow. not to the centerline. The dimensions have been predetermined.NOTE It is important to dimension the lines to the interior face of the walls. 6 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Stairs. 7 Sketch the first half of the run by clicking on the bottom endpoint of the right vertical line. 82 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . By default. you sketch the stair run and trace the run over the two vertical lines. and then specify the value. and then clicking the bottom endpoint of the same line. the Run tool is active. for example: 550 mm. You are in sketch mode. Click on the temporary dimension witness line control until it moves to the interior face of the wall. 8 Sketch the second half of the run by clicking on the top endpoint of the left vertical line.

10 In the Railings Type dialog box. click Railings Type. click Finish Sketch. Specify railing type 9 On the Design Bar. Creating Your First Building Model | 83 .The stair run is complete. and click OK. 11 On the Design Bar. select 900mm Pipe.

This makes the model lines more apparent. and select Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate. 84 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . 15 Delete the three model lines. 16 On the View Control Bar. 14 Select the three model lines. click the Hide/Isolate control. click the Hide/Isolate control. and select Hide Object. 12 Select the stairs.Notice that the model lines still display. 13 On the View Control Bar.

double-click Section 1.17 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 20 In the Element Properties dialog box. 19 On the Options Bar. as needed. Modify stairs 18 Select the stairs. 21 On the Design Bar. select Level 3 for Multistory Top Level. Creating Your First Building Model | 85 . click . under Constraints. IMPORTANT Be careful not to select the railings. under Sections (Building Section). under Views (all). Use TAB or zoom in. click Modify.

Do not select the railings. and select Copy. 24 On the Options Bar. 23 On the Edit menu. The cursor now snaps only to midpoints. 25 Enter the keyboard shortcut. click Mirror. SM. 86 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . click . as shown. When the midpoint symbol and tooltip displays. This is done in the next exercise using a new dataset. 27 Move the cursor upward and perpendicular to the floor. click to specify the start point of the mirror axis. you could modify the floor openings to accommodate the stair landings.NOTE At this time. 26 Place the cursor over the center of bottom edge of the Level 1 floor. and click to set the mirror axis endpoint. Copy west stairs to east stairwell 22 Select the stairs created in the previous steps.

a new dataset is supplied with the building model saved at this point. you create the east wing of the building model by mirroring the west wing. 31 On the File menu. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. .28 On the Design Bar. click Save. Creating the East Wing and Passageway In this exercise. You add a curtain wall passageway between the wings with a suspended walkway between each of the upper floors. 29 On the View toolbar. It has been modified slightly for training purposes. NOTE Beginning with the next exercise. click Modify. click 30 On the File menu. Creating Your First Building Model | 87 . Creating the East Wing and Passageway. click Close.

zoom out before making the selection. click Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. The following modifications have been made: ■ ■ ■ ■ Wall inserts on the north and south walls were evenly spaced. NOTE It is important to capture every component within this building model. Floor openings were modified to create stair landings. click Ref Plane. You use this plane later as the mirror axis. If necessary. 88 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . Mirror the west wing 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. under Views (all). 3 In the Project Browser. 2 Draw a vertical reference plane 12000 mm from the exterior face of the right exterior wall as shown.rvt file located in the Metric folder. click the Training Files icon.Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. This dataset is essentially the same dataset you saved at the end of the last exercise. expand 3D Views. Open the m_First_Project-West_Wing. Stair railings on Level 3 were added. Additional 3D views were added. and double-click 3D Southwest Isometric. 4 Draw a pick box around the entire building model.

9 Select the vertical reference plane you added previously. IMPORTANT Components selected in one view remain selected when you switch views. under Floor Plans.The entire model displays as selected. double-click Level 1. 8 On the Options Bar. and select the section line to add it to the selection set. Creating Your First Building Model | 89 . click and verify that Copy is selected. 5 In the Project Browser. click Mirror. 6 Press and hold CTRL. 7 On the Edit menu.

under Floor Plans. click the flip arrows to ensure the exterior face of the curtain wall is facing the outside. 11 If necessary. double-click Level 1. 10 After the mirrored copy displays. Add the passageway walls between wings 17 In the Project Browser. click 15 On the View toolbar. 14 On the View toolbar. 19 In the Type Selector. zoom out to see both wings of the building model. 21 Sketch the two curtain walls between the wings. select Roof for Height. Notice that the new wing is a mirror image of the original. select Curtain Wall: Exterior Glazing. In addition. If necessary. 16 Spin and zoom the building model until it resembles the following illustration. . click Modify on the Design Bar.After you specify the mirror axis. 12 Select the reference plane. 90 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . as shown. click Wall. notice that a new section view exists in the Project Browser. The new components are numbered sequentially. 18 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. a progress bar displays on the status bar as the mirrored copy is generated. 13 On the Edit menu. 20 On the Options Bar. click . click Delete.

split the same exterior wall at the intersection of the exterior face of the wall hosting door 13 as shown. as shown below. 25 Split the face of the exterior brick wall at the intersection with the curtain wall. select Delete Inner Segment. 23 On the Tools menu. Creating Your First Building Model | 91 . zoom into the intersection and make sure you split the wall where it intersects the exterior face of the elevator shaft wall. When splitting the wall. 24 On the Options Bar. click . 26 Using the same technique. click Split Walls and Lines.Split and delete exterior wall faces of each wing 22 On the View toolbar.

Notice the segment between the splits has been deleted. click Split Walls and Lines. 28 Zoom in to the intersection of the passageway and the exterior wall of the right wing. verify that Delete Inner Segment is selected. 29 On the Tools menu. 92 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . you can use the Align tool to clean up the intersection.27 Enter ZF to Zoom to Fit. 30 On the Options Bar. TIP If the split does not line up perfectly with the intersecting wall.

to turn off thin lines mode. 35 In the Project Browser. split the face of the exterior brick wall at the similar intersections shown below. under Floor Plans. click . 38 On the Options Bar. 33 On the View toolbar. Creating Your First Building Model | 93 . double-click Level 1. click 34 On the View toolbar. click Modify. 37 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 32 On the Design Bar. and clear Extend into wall (to core).31 Using the technique learned previously. Arrows refer to each split location. Add a floor to the Level 1 passageway 36 Adjust your zoom settings until you can see the perimeter of the entire passageway. click Floor. enter 150 for Offset. 39 Select both curtain walls so that the floor offset is on the exterior side of each wall.

44 Select the center of the left vertical line. 94 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . 45 Continue cleaning up the intersections using this method. the sketch line weight has been increased for training purposes. 47 Select Concrete 300mm for Type. When sketching. 46 On the Design Bar. 41 On the Options Bar. and then select the center of the top horizontal line. click Trim/Extend. notice the overlapping intersections that must be cleaned up before the sketch can be finished. 51 On the Design Bar. double-click Level 2. Add walkway to Level 2 49 In the Project Browser. When finished. 48 Click Finish Sketch. under Floor Plans. In the following illustration. click and Lock. 53 Sketch a rectangle with the vertical lines attached to the level 2 floor of each wing and each horizontal line 1500 mm from the inner face of the curtain wall. The general rule is that you should click the section of the line that you wish to keep.40 On the Design Bar. click Floor. click Floor Properties. 42 Select the edge of the floor on both the west and east wings. . 50 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Lines. dimensions have been added for training purposes. the sketch should be a single closed loop as shown. 43 On the Tools menu. NOTE In the following image. 52 On the Options Bar. there are two general rules that must be applied: You must have a closed loop and there cannot be intersecting lines. In this case. click Lines. click the rectangle drawing tool. and click OK.

TIP When sketching. 60 Select the line at the top edge of the walkway so that the sketch line is offset inside the walkway. 55 Select Beam and Block 200mm for Type. you can use the SPACEBAR to toggle the offset. and specify an offset of 50 mm. and click OK. 59 On the Options Bar.54 On the Design Bar. If they do. If necessary. click . 58 On the Design Bar. as shown. click and . select 1100mm for Type. click Lines. 66 Select the railing. click Finish Sketch. TIP Make sure the line intersections do not overlap. 63 On the Design Bar. 65 On the Design Bar. Creating Your First Building Model | 95 . zoom in when selecting the walkway edge to make sure the offset is correct. 64 In the Element Properties dialog box. 56 Click Finish Sketch. 61 On the Options Bar. click Railing Properties. 62 Draw two short lines to close the gap between the walkway and where it intersects each wing. and click OK. use the trim tool to make the sketch a single line. click Railing. click Floor Properties. Add railings to Level 2 walkway 57 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.

75 In the section view. it is faster to mirror it. only midpoints will be snapped to. and modify the direction and shape handles. move the cursor to the right.67 On the Edit menu. continuous line. 68 On the Options Bar. as shown. 96 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . 72 Add a section view to the center of the passageway. click Mirror. It should be noted that the reason both railings weren’t sketched at the same time is because a railing sketch has to be a single. 74 Double-click the section head you created in the previous step. 70 Click at the midpoint of the walkway for the mirror axis start point. and click to set the mirror axis. TIP Press and hold CTRL while making multiple selections. however. For the next mouse click. click and Copy. You could create another railing on the other side of the walkway. click Modify. 73 On the Design Bar. 69 Enter SM. select both railings and the walkway on Level 2. Add a new section view 71 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Section.

under Floor Plans.76 On the Edit menu. The only remaining task is to add a roof to the passageway. click Roof  ➤ Roof by Footprint. 83 On the Options Bar. check Defines slope. 82 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. 78 In the Select Levels dialog box. 81 Using the zoom commands. click . click Copy to Clipboard. double-click Roof. Creating Your First Building Model | 97 . and verify that Overhang is 600 mm. adjust the view so you can see the entire passageway. 77 On the Edit menu. Add roof to passageway 80 In the Project Browser. zoom in until you can see the railings and walkways. 79 On the View toolbar. 84 Select each curtain wall so that the offset is outside the curtain wall as shown. click Paste Aligned  ➤ Select Levels by Name. If necessary. select Level 3.

as shown. click Lines.85 On the Design Bar. click Finish Roof. click the center of each roof line to clean up each corner. 89 Using the techniques you learned earlier. click . clear Defines slope. 91 On the View toolbar. click Trim/Extend. as shown. 87 Sketch two vertical lines that intersect the horizontal lines. 90 On the Design Bar. Exact dimensions are not important. 88 On the Tools menu. 98 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . 86 On the Options Bar.

it is easier to demonstrate the roof joins in hidden line mode. First. click Join/Unjoin Roof. you select the edge of the passageway roof. Creating Your First Building Model | 99 . Second. click the Model Graphics Style control. Join the roofs 92 On the View Control Bar. The two roofs are joined. and then the outer edge of the corresponding wing roof. For training purposes. 94 Click the left edge of the passageway roof. you click the edge of the roof that you want to join. 95 Click the outer edge of the main roof. you select the edge of the roof or wall that you want it joined to. 93 On the Tools menu. and click Hidden Line.Notice that the passageway roof needs to be joined to each wing. In this case. Joining a roof is a two-click procedure.

103 Proceed to the next exercise. click Save As. 100 On the View Control Bar. 101 On the File menu.96 On the View toolbar. click Join/Unjoin Roof.rvt. 97 Spin the model so that you have access to the unjoined end of the passageway roof and the east wing roof. you duplicate the schedule twice. click . Scheduling the Building Model. you modify it to filter by level. 98 On the Tools menu. Scheduling the Building Model In this exercise. you create and modify a door schedule. and change the filtering so each level has a unique door schedule. and select Shading with Edges. name the file First Project-Dual Wings-in progress. click the Model Graphics Style control. First Project-Dual Wings-in progress. 102 Navigate to your preferred directory. rename each schedule. After creating the schedule. 99 Join the passageway roof and the roof of the other wing using the same technique learned in the previous steps.rvt 100 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . and click Save. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved at the end of the previous exercise. Finally. The initial schedule contains all doors in the building model.

Creating Your First Building Model | 101 . on the Fields tab. specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Type. 10 Move Cost below Hardware. Under Parameter Data. 4 From the Available Fields list. and click Add. select Mark and click Move up until it displays at the top of the list. Select Instance. 8 Under Scheduled fields (in order). select Family and Type under Available Fields.Create a door schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 9 Move Hardware so that it is directly below Family and Type. enter Hardware for Name. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. 5 Click Add Parameter. Select Other for Group parameter under. Select Text for Type. Select Common for Discipline. TIP If the View tab is not visible. select Doors for category. add the following as scheduled fields: ■ ■ ■ Level Mark Cost Notice that there is not an available field for Hardware. right-click on the Design Bar and click View. 2 In the New Schedule dialog box. 6 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. click Schedule/Quantities. select Project parameter. TIP You can also double-click an available field to add it to the scheduled fields. You can add custom fields and make them either type or instance parameters. and click OK. 7 Click OK.

22 Under Field formatting. select Level. select the column grip between Door Type and Hardware and move the grip to the right until the door types display in their entirety. 20 Select Right for Alignment. Door Type will display as the column heading rather than Family and Type. select Hidden field. 12 Select Level for Sort by. 26 In the door schedule. 25 Click OK. and under Field Formatting. The door schedule displays. 14 At the bottom of the tab. select Header and select Footer. On the schedule. the column is redundant. 15 Select Mark for Then by. 21 Under Fields. 23 Click the Appearance tab. 18 Enter Door Type for Heading. 19 Under Fields. Therefore. select Family and Type. select Calculate totals. select Grand totals and select Itemize every instance. 24 Select Bold for Header text. You can hide this field because you are sorting and grouping by level. 17 Under Fields. 13 Under Sort by. select Cost. Modifications to the schedule appearance display only when the schedule is added to a sheet.11 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. 102 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . 16 Click the Formatting tab.

32 In the Project Browser. enter Brass. under Other. each schedule still lists all the doors for each level. However. and click Rename. Modify the schedule 27 Click in the Cost field for door mark number 1. 37 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. and press ENTER. and press ENTER. under Schedules/Quantities. Cost is a type parameter. right-click Door Schedule. A message displays indicating that this change must be applied to all elements of the same type. expand Schedules/Quantities. and click Properties. right-click Door Schedule.TIP In this view. any changes made to column size are not retained when the schedule is added to a sheet. Because you created the hardware parameter as an instance parameter. under Schedules/Quantities. and click OK. enter Door Schedule-Level 1. 33 In the Rename View dialog box. and click OK. enter 500. Duplicate and filter door schedules 30 In the Project Browser. and click Duplicate. 36 In the Element Properties dialog box. 31 Repeat the previous step to create a second copy of the door schedule. specify Level equals Level 1 for Filter by. Creating Your First Building Model | 103 . right-click Door Schedule-Level 1. This is because for this door type. 35 In the Project Browser. 34 Repeat the process to rename the remaining copies to Door Schedule-Level 2 and Door Schedule-Level 3. 28 Click OK. 29 Click in the Hardware field for door mark number 1. You now have a separate schedule for each level. click Edit for the Filter value. each door is allowed a different value.

under Schedules/Quantities. Enter Exterior Scene for Name. 41 On the File menu. 3 In the Scene Selection dialog box. Create the exterior scene 1 On the View toolbar. Rendering the Building Model. 2 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. you capture the image and save it within the project. click OK. Rendering the Building Model In this exercise. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved at the end of the previous exercise. 104 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . 42 Proceed to the next exercise. modify the settings. click Settings. Notice that the information is now filtered for each level. After rendering. specify the following parameters: ■ ■ ■ Select New. Filter each schedule by their respective level. select Exterior. Under Type. 4 Click OK.rvt. double-click each door schedule. click Save. 39 Repeat the previous four steps for Door Schedule Level 2 and Door Schedule Level 3. 40 In the Project Browser. and then render a 3D view using that scene. First Project-Dual Wings-in progress.38 In the Element Properties dialog box. you create an exterior scene. click .

Creating Your First Building Model | 105 . G. This is the background color for the scene. 18 Drag a box around the building model as shown. 15 On the View toolbar. When the rendering process is complete. select Good for Quality. 9 Specify a value of 250 for the R. A color bar displays. click the Bars tab. click OK. clear Use Sun and Shadow Settings from view. 10 Click OK. click Environment. under Scene Settings. 8 In the Color Picker dialog box. click Region Raytrace. and B settings. 14 Click OK. under Background Color. 6 In the Environment dialog box. under Scene Settings. 12 In the Render Scene Settings dialog box. click . the building model should resemble the following illustration. 17 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. 16 Spin the building model until it resembles the following illustration. 7 Click the color bar. 13 Under Raytrace Settings. select Solid Color. The raytrace process begins and a progress bar displays on the status bar. and select Blurry Reflections and Blurry Transparency. This is a white background color. 11 In the Environment dialog box.Specify scene settings 5 In the Render Scene Settings dialog box.

First Project-Dual Wings-in progress. Documenting the Building Model. You add a floor plan and schedule to the first sheet. Documenting the Building Model In this exercise. click Capture Rendering. click Display Model. you add this to a sheet. you add two sheets with titleblocks to the project. An expandable branch called Renderings is added to the Project Browser.rvt 106 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved at the end of the previous exercise.19 On the Design Bar. 23 Proceed to the final exercise. click Save. On the second sheet. 22 On the File menu. This is the captured rendering from the previous steps. expand Renderings. In the next exercise. 21 In the Project Browser. 20 On the Design Bar. you add a rendered view and an elevation view. and double-click {3D}.

You can create a titleblock family and load it into the project or navigate to it from this dialog box. 8 Select the titleblock and zoom in to the lower right corner. The titleblocks that are listed are loaded into the project. and press ENTER. 6 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. click Metric Library. Titleblocks are a family just like any other component. click OK to use the loaded titleblock. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog box. Creating Your First Building Model | 107 .Add a sheet and titleblock to the project 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Sheet. Notice that several titleblocks are installed with the software. The blue text is text that you can modify. The text is not selectable by design. 9 Click Owner. click Load. 5 Click Cancel. 7 Try to select the logo in the upper right corner. The creator of this titleblock family did not want this text to be modifiable in the project environment. 4 Double-click the Titleblocks folder. You are prompted to select a titleblock. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. enter your name.

click Add View. In this case. click Project Information. the label displays As Indicated.10 On the Settings menu. Notice that your name is displayed for Client Name. 11 Enter First Building Model for Project Name. Titleblock numbering is sequential and automatic. and click OK. The Scale is blank and is filled in when a view is added to the titleblock. If you add views of different scales. 13 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Add a view to the titleblock 12 Zoom out until you can see the entire sheet. 108 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . select Floor Plan: Level 1. referring the reader to the view titles. the next sheet and titleblock will be A102. 15 Move the cursor to the center of the titleblock and click. and click Add View to Sheet. 14 In the Views dialog box.

click Deactivate View. The titleblock becomes an underlay and the view becomes active. 17 Right-click the view. Notice drag handles display on the ends of the view title. click Visibility/Graphics. 18 On the View menu. 25 Drag the view to the lower left corner of the titleblock as shown. Notice the elevation symbols display. and on the context menu. 24 Adjust the view title length by dragging the shape handles under the extents of the view. However. 19 Click the Annotation Categories tab. You can work on the building model within this view. click Activate View. click Modify. clear Elevations. 23 Select the view. 21 Right-click the view. Creating Your First Building Model | 109 . and on the context menu. you activated the view specifically to turn off the elevation symbol visibility. 20 Under Visibility. Relocate the view title 22 Drag the view title under the view.16 On the Design Bar. and click OK.

26 Zoom in to the lower right corner. Notice that the scale value has updated. 110 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . under Schedules/Quantities. 28 In the Project Browser. 27 Zoom out until the titleblock fits within the drawing area. drag Door Schedule-Level 1 onto the upper right corner of the titleblock.

29 Zoom in to the top of the schedule. Creating Your First Building Model | 111 . 31 Zoom out and move the schedule into the upper right corner of the titleblock. 30 Using the column drag handles. adjust each column width so no text wrapping occurs.

If you click this. click Close. 36 On the File menu. under Renderings. drag {3D} to the upper right corner of the new titleblock. 35 In the Project Browser. the Scale label displays As Indicated. notice the z symbol in the center edge. You have completed your first building model. drag North to the lower left corner of sheet A102. click Save. 112 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . You can adjust the lengths of each section after the break. modify the location and width of the view titles. 34 In the Project Browser.TIP When the schedule is selected. click OK to use the default titleblock. Because these two views have different view scales. Add various views to a second sheet 32 On the View tab of the Design Bar. under Elevations (Building Elevations). 33 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. 37 On the File menu. If necessary. the schedule breaks in half. click Sheet.

113 . you modify the system environment. In the first lesson.Modifying Project and System Settings 3 In this tutorial. and set it as your default template. you create an office template. which is independent of the project settings. you modify project settings to control the appearance of the components and subcomponents within that project. Finally. you learn how to modify your Autodesk Revit Building working environment. In the second lesson.

16 Click OK. they are not saved to project or template files. click the Graphics tab. select Invert background color.Modifying System Settings In this lesson. click Wall. click New ➤ Project to open a new Revit Building project. 19 On the Design Bar. selection default options. NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. 13 In the Color dialog box. you modify the settings that control your local Revit Building working environment. click the value for Selection Color. 2 On the Settings menu. click Browse. 8 Select m_Tutorial_Default. 18 Sketch a simple straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area. Set graphics settings 1 On the File menu. click Options. click the Graphics tab. and your username when using worksets. select yellow. Modifying General System Options In this exercise. notification preferences. the elements causing the error display using this color. 14 Click the General tab. click Modify. 9 In the New Project dialog box. 15 Under Notifications. 12 Under Colors. 10 On the Settings menu. journal cleanup options. 6 In the New Project dialog box. and select the wall. 114 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . and click OK. When an error occurs. click OK. Notice that the drawing area is black. 7 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog box. 17 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. you learn how to control the system settings within Revit Building. click Close to close all open projects. System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects. and click Open. and click OK. click Training Files. 3 In the Options dialog box. 4 Under Colors. click Options.rte in the Metric folder. Select None for Tooltip Assistance. under Template file. 11 In the Options dialog box. 5 On the File menu. These settings control the graphics. specify the following options: ■ ■ Select One hour for Save Reminder interval.

the family template files. 32 On the File menu. These files are used primarily in the software support process. Notice that the drawing area background colors are no longer inverted and that tooltips display when you place the cursor over any building component. Under Username. click Close. Journals can be run in order to detect a problem or recreate lost steps or files. 25 On the File menu. select values for When number of journals exceeds and Delete journals older than (days). the family libraries. click the Graphics tab and make the following changes: ■ ■ Under Graphics. Journal files are deleted automatically after their number exceeds the value you specify. 21 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it. 26 In the left pane of the Open dialog box. select your preferred Save Reminder interval. These settings control location of important Revit Building files such as your default project template. enter the name you want to use during worksharing. clear Invert background color. Notice that the system settings apply to this project. Specifying File Locations In this exercise. click No. They are saved at the termination of each Revit Building session. 20 On the Design Bar. you specify your default file locations. 29 In the Options dialog box. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. click the Training Files icon. click Close. as well as the material and rendering libraries. Select Red for Selection Color. click Modify.rvt file located in the Metric folder. Notice that a tooltip is not displayed. If prompted. 31 Click OK. 30 Click the General tab and make the following changes: ■ ■ ■ Under Notifications. Under Journal File Cleanup. 27 Open the m_Settings. Modifying System Settings | 115 . 24 When prompted to save. click Options. This setting controls only the tooltips that display within the drawing area. 23 On the File menu. Your login name displays by default.Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red. do not save the changes. Journal files are text documents that record each step during your Revit Building sessions. 28 On the Settings menu. click Open. Notice that a tooltip is displayed even though you set Tooltip Assistance to None. and select Normal for Tooltip Assistance. 22 Place the cursor over any of the icons on the toolbars. Specifying File Locations.

click the File Locations tab. you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog box. Save. click Browse. click Browse. click Browse. or loading a Revit Building file. This path is set automatically during the installation process. Load. Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog box. 6 In the Browse for Folder dialog box. 3 Under Default template file. architectural firm where customized templates reside on a network drive. 8 Click Cancel. and click Browse to select a template. 12 Click in the Library Path field for My Library. An icon for each library displays in the left pane of all Revit Building Open. you can start a new project with that template. On the File menu. notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane of the dialog box. TIP To view a template. 7 In the Options dialog box. and click the arrow that displays on the right side of the field. under Default path for family template files. The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. centralized. there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path. saving. 10 Under Libraries. These are the family templates that you use to create new families. under Libraries. notice the list of library names. 2 In the Options dialog box. and click OK. However. Notice that there are industry-specific templates that you can set as your default template. 11 Click in the Library Name field of the new library. select the folder to save your files to by default. and Import dialog boxes. click Options. 4 Click Cancel. and you can create new libraries. You can modify the existing library names and path. 5 Under Default path for user files. choose New  ➤ Project. click . 116 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . When you are opening.Set file locations 1 On the Settings menu. such as in a large. and change the name to My Library. Each library path points Revit Building to a folder of families or training files. In the following illustration. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path.

16 On the File menu. Specifying Spelling Options. view the current path. 24 Under AccuRender resource location. Save. 20 Click the File Locations tab. The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit Building Open. Notice that Revit Building navigates directly to the library path. If you work in a large office. click Open. Load. 19 On the Settings menu. Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise. click Options. 21 Under Libraries. and click OK. 18 Click Cancel. you may want to set up an office library on a network path in order to increase productivity and maintain office standards. specify the new location here. This path specifies the location of the AccuRender® texture library. Modifying System Settings | 117 . This path is determined during installation. you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit Building. TIP You may want to create a new folder first. Specify rendering settings 23 Click the Rendering tab. click the My Library icon. select My Library. The library icons display in the order that they are listed in the Options dialog box. 14 Under Library Name. 15 Click until My Library is at the top of the list. templates. click My Library.13 Navigate to C:\My Documents or any other folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit Building projects. 25 Click OK. 17 In the left pane of the Open dialog box. 22 Click to delete the library. or families. and click OK. and Import dialog boxes. and select it as the library path. 26 Proceed to the next exercise. If you want to relocate this path.

select Ignore words in UPPERCASE. 11 In the Options dialog box. and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis. click Options. click Edit. click Edit. You can turn snap settings on and off. and click Open. click Browse. 19 In the Options dialog box. 4 Select m_Tutorial_Default. Modifying Snap Settings. you modify snap settings. Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary. click to open a new Revit Building project using the default template. Notice that there is also a building industry dictionary. click New ➤ Project to open a new Revit Building project. 15 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 14 Click in the drawing area. click Save.rte in the Metric folder. and then click File  ➤ Exit. 13 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 8 Under Building industry dictionary. or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method. 5 In the New Project dialog box. 2 In the Options dialog box. enter sheetmtl-Cu. and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU. 18 On the Settings menu. 12 On the Standard toolbar. click Modify. This resets the spelling settings to their original configuration. click OK. click Edit. 17 Click OK. 10 On the File menu. click Training Files. click OK. click the Spelling tab. 25 On the File menu. It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase. delete sheetmtl-CU. If prompted. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog box. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. 118 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise. click the Spelling tab. click Restore Defaults. 7 On the File menu. 26 Proceed to the next exercise. click Exit. click Options.Modify spelling settings 1 On the Settings menu. 5 In the text editor. you modify snap increments. 3 Under Settings. Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file. click Exit. 22 In the text editor. Modify snap increments 1 On the File menu. 24 In the Options dialog box. 6 On the File menu. 20 Under Settings. 2 In the New Project dialog box. scroll down the list of building industry terms. In this exercise. click Spelling. work with snapping turned off. click Close. do not save the changes. 21 Under Personal dictionary. 16 On the Tools menu. 4 Under Personal dictionary. 9 In the text editor. click Text. under Template file. click OK. 23 On the File menu of the text editor. click Save.

For example. These are shortcut keys that you can use at any time when working on the design. If you do not have a wheel button. zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 500 mm. 10 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. After you click to place the object at the midpoint. enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off. 9 In the Snaps dialog box. click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 1000. Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments. Modifying System Settings | 119 . if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint. This is the increment that you added previously.6 On the Settings menu. While sketching. click OK. and move the cursor to the right. snapping reverts to the system default settings. 11 Click in the center of the drawing area.. and enter 500 . zoom out until it does so. This dimension reacts to the movement of your cursor and numerical keyboard entries. As you zoom in and out within a view. use the wheel button on your mouse. 12 While sketching a generic straight wall. click Wall. you can also use the zoom shortcut keys such as ZO to zoom out. 8 Under Object Snaps. notice the two-letter acronyms next to each object snap option. A listening dimension refers specifically to the dimension that appears while in the act of sketching. click Snaps. you can right-click and select a zoom option from the context menu. Sketch without snapping 13 While sketching the wall. Notice that the listening dimension snaps at 1000 mm increments. enter SM and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you commit an action. You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it. 7 Under Dimension Snaps. If it does not. Revit Building uses the largest increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. TIP To zoom while in the act of sketching.

15 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall. Using these options. click Snaps. it defines the appearance of that component in shaded and rendered views. Modifying Project Settings In this lesson. 25 On the File menu. and the wall edges. Make sure you also delete the semicolon. 19 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall. 14 Click to set the wall endpoint. the command is only active for one click of the mouse. it will snap to the endpoints. The exercises in this lesson should be done sequentially using the same project file. the midpoint. If you cannot complete the exercises in their entirety. lines. and do not save the file. and specify the wall endpoint. Modifying Project Settings. Use snapping shortcut keys 16 On the Design Bar. 21 Move the cursor downward. you learn how to control the project environment by using the options available on the Settings menu. click Modify. 17 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously. and use it to complete the exercises. and object styles.Notice that when snapping is turned off completely. the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right. annotations. When you use shortcut keys to control snapping. Do not set the wall end point. If you move the cursor along the wall. When you apply a material to a component. and click Wall. 22 On the Settings menu. 18 Enter SM. click in the Length dimension snap increments box. you modify the way the Project Browser organizes the project. 26 Proceed to the next lesson. Well designed materials provide the foundation for photorealistic renderings. Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall. 20 Click to start the wall at the midpoint. fill patterns. Creating and Applying Materials In this exercise. This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints. and delete the value 500 . Notice that snapping is once again active. you modify the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. and move the cursor to the right. You create and modify materials.. 23 Under Dimension Snaps. click Close. 120 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . 24 Click OK. Finally. save the project file with a unique name. you create a new material and apply it to a model component.

After you create a new fieldstone material and apply it to the exterior wall face. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. In the left pane of the Open dialog box.Stone for Name. This list includes all materials required by loaded model components. Open m_Settings. and select Masonry . all materials that are part of that component family are also loaded into the project. 2 Scroll down. However. click Open. nor is there an AccuRender texture applied. click Materials. you begin with a simple building model consisting of brick on CMU exterior walls. Create a new material 1 On the Settings menu. you modify the material so that it displays correctly in a shaded or rendered view. This building model has a generic roof and generic floor. click the Training Files icon. and click OK. When a model component is loaded into a project.Fieldstone. Notice that there is no Surface Pattern applied to this material. Notice that the material settings have not changed from the material that you duplicated. Modifying Project Settings | 121 . you render a region to observe the changes.rvt located in the Metric folder. Notice the materials listed on the left side of the dialog box. 3 Click Duplicate. This creates a new material using the selected material settings as the starting point. this material provides a good foundation for the new material. You have created a new material that can be applied to any model component in this project. In the steps that follow. Masonry-Fieldstone. enter Masonry . 4 In the New Material dialog box.In the steps that follow.

click New  ➤ Use Current Material as Template. 28 In the Type Selector. expand Views (all). and select the remaining two unchanged walls. click to select a texture. The upper wall now uses the Fieldstone on CMU AccuRender texture when you render it. 13 In the Save Material As dialog box. 14 In the Material Library dialog box. notice that the Surface Pattern is still blank. Layer #1 is the exterior finish of the wall. 12 In the Material Editor dialog box. and click OK. and click OK. you help prevent the appearance of repetitive patterns within the rendering. 15 Click OK. you create a fieldstone pattern and apply it to the Masonry . on the Material menu. and double-click Level 1. click OK. 18 In the Element Properties dialog box.Modify material settings 5 Under AccuRender. and click . expand Floor Plans. Fieldstone on CMU. In the next exercise. 17 Select the upper exterior wall. click This is the material you created previously.Fieldstone material. 25 Click OK three times.Fieldstone for the name. select Basic Wall: Fieldstone on CMU. Before closing the Materials dialog box.Fieldstone is now part of your AccuRender User library. click the Maps tab. 9 Select the entry under Image Mapping. select user from the list of libraries. 27 Press CTRL. 7 In the Material Library dialog box. and click Edit. 26 Select the right exterior wall. click Edit/New.Brick. 23 On the right side of the Material field. 8 In the Material Editor dialog box. Apply the new material 16 In the Project Browser. click OK. .Fieldstone for Name. 24 In the Materials dialog box. enter 0. click Edit. click the Orientation tab. enter Masonry . 20 Enter the new wall name. select Masonry . 11 Under Offset. 10 In the Image Mapping dialog box. The AccuRender texture Masonry . It is currently assigned the material Masonry .75 for X and Y. All of the exterior walls of this project are now Fieldstone on CMU. By offsetting the X and Y values of the image map. 21 In the Value field for Structure. and click OK. 6 Navigate to BMCD2AR3\Bitmap Textures\Stone\. 122 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . and select Stone82. 19 Click Duplicate. and click OK. 22 Click in the Material field for layer #1.

33 On the File menu. click Region Raytrace. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns In this exercise. 32 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. Notice that the exterior walls are no longer brick. This is because a surface pattern was not selected when the fieldstone material was defined. and drag a rectangle around the area you want to render. click Display Model. After you draw the rectangle around the 3D model. This is because a material has not been applied to the roof. the rendering process begins. and click Rendering. In the exercise.rvt. 35 Proceed to the next exercise. the fieldstone material that you created is displayed. TIP If you want to see the material in greater detail. you create a fieldstone pattern and apply it to this material. Controlling Object Styles. and there is no stone pattern applied in this view. Notice the roof did not render. Modifying Project Settings | 123 . When finished. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns. and save the file as m_Settings-in progress. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns.29 On the View Toolbar. click Save As. right-click the Design Bar. In the following exercise. select Region Raytrace. TIP If the Rendering tab is not available on the Design Bar. you apply a material to default roofs and resolve this. you create a new pattern called Fieldstone and apply it to the material you created in the previous exercise. Zoom into the model. 30 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. drag a rectangle around the 3D image. 31 In the drawing area. click Display Model on the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. click . 34 Navigate to a folder of your preference.

The location of these files can vary depending on the path you set during installation. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. Model patterns are fixed and scale with the model. 9 Select Fieldstone_Model. 5 Click New. click Custom. 2 On the Settings menu. Both pattern types are created and applied in a similar way. click Fill Patterns. select fldstn. 10 Under Custom. Create a new fill pattern 1 In the Project Browser. 3 Under Pattern Type. choose Model. and double-click East. Model patterns represent actual element appearance on a building. 12 Click OK. Drafting patterns represent material in symbolic form.pat from the Common folder. 6 In the Add Surface Pattern dialog box. such as steel. The new model pattern is available in the Name list in the Fill Patterns dialog box. expand Elevations. 4 Scroll down the list of patterns.56 for Import scale. click Import. 7 Under Custom. your training files can be found on C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\Revit Building\Training. 124 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . which consists of a double-diagonal hatching pattern. Drafting pattern density is fixed. 8 Navigate to the training folders installed with your Revit Building software. Notice that a fieldstone pattern is not available. m_Settings-in progress. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise.rvt. such as brick coursing or ceramic tile on a wall. Notice that no model surface pattern displays on the fieldstone wall. Apply the fieldstone pattern 13 Select the east exterior wall. and click Open. and enter . TIP Typically.There are two types of fill patterns: model and drafting. 11 Enter Fieldstone for Name. and click OK.

click Save. Rather than continually modify the type properties of each window type. TIP If the pattern does not display. The client may not be certain of the exact window frame color to use and may want to see renderings of various options. Controlling Object Styles You can use Object Styles to control the appearance of components and subcomponents. Controlling Object Styles. 27 On the File menu.14 On the Options Bar. Object Styles are applied in every view and can be overridden in a particular view by modifying the Visibility/Graphics settings. there are often multiple window types within a project. click in the Material field for layer #1.” You can then change the material in the Object Styles dialog box and apply it to all window types. notice that there is no surface pattern applied to the Masonry . click Modify. click OK. adjust your zoom settings as needed. The east wall of the building displays as solid fill.Fieldstone material. 16 In the Value field for Structure. click to select a fill pattern. 23 Click OK three times. For example. 24 On the Design Bar. click Edit. Object Styles allow you to control the appearance of multiple component types. click . Layer #1 is the exterior finish of the wall. select Model. click . 18 On the right side of the Materials field. It is currently assigned the material Masonry . 21 Select the Fieldstone model pattern. 19 Under Surface Pattern. 28 Proceed to the next exercise.Fieldstone. click . 20 In the Fill Patterns dialog box. Modifying Project Settings | 125 . 25 Zoom into the model until the fill pattern appears. you can set the window frame material to “By Category. 26 On the View Toolbar. In the Materials dialog box. click Edit/New. 15 In the Element Properties dialog box. and click OK. 17 In the Edit Assembly dialog box. under Pattern Type. 22 In the Materials dialog box.

use the shortcut keys ZR (Zoom in Region) and drag a rectangle around the three left windows facing you. Apply object styles 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click 3D Model View.rvt. 2 On the keyboard. m_Settings-in progress.NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. 126 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . expand 3D Views. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise.

under Other. click Model Graphics Style. and select the circular window on the second level. 16 In the Type Properties dialog box. click OK. click Edit/New. This means that the material is assigned by the Object Styles setting. 12 On the Options Bar. and select 8 In the Materials dialog box. Notice the exterior frames of all the windows are now gray. click . click Modify. click . 5 On the Options Bar. click OK. and click Shading with Edges.3 On the View Control Bar. 13 In the Element Properties dialog box. 7 In the Type Properties dialog box. click the Trim Exterior value. click By Category. 14 In the Type Properties dialog box. 4 Select one of the windows. under Other. and select 15 In the Materials dialog box. 17 In the Element Properties dialog box. click OK. click OK. click the Trim Exterior Material value. 6 In the Element Properties dialog box. click By Category. 18 On the Design Bar. 11 Zoom out. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Edit/New. 9 In the Type Properties dialog box. . . Modifying Project Settings | 127 .

White for Trim material. 24 In the Materials dialog box. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. you create a new line pattern and apply it to the fascia of the roof. click OK. click Object Styles. Notice that the external window frames are now white. Modifying Line Patterns and Styles. 21 Under Category. select Trim. 23 On the right side of the Material field. You then create a new line style to mark the zoning setback from the property line. expand Windows. and click in the Material field. and click OK twice. Modifying Line Patterns and Styles In this exercise. click Object Styles. . 26 On the Settings menu. 128 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings .Granite for name. 27 Under Category. and click OK. 22 Under the Windows category. click . expand Windows.19 On the Settings menu. click 29 On the File menu. 30 Proceed to the next exercise. 28 On the View Toolbar. Notice that the material is applied to all windows regardless of their type. select Trim . 25 In the Object Styles dialog box. m_Settings-in progress. click Include categories from all disciplines in the list above. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise.rvt. click Save. specify Trim . 20 In the Object Styles dialog box.

click Model Graphics Style. 9 In the Object Styles dialog box. now you must apply it. or you can use Object Styles to apply the change to all views. 8 On the Settings menu. The line style is applied to the roof in all views. click Object Styles. click New. and select Roof Line for Line Pattern. 5 Enter the Types and Values shown in the following illustration: 6 Click OK twice. There are two ways to apply the line style to the roof. 2 On the Settings menu. You have created a new line pattern. m_Settings-in progress. 7 On the View Control Bar. 4 In the Line Pattern Properties dialog box. enter Roof Line for Name. under Category. 10 Select Red for Line Color. Modifying Project Settings | 129 . select Roofs. and click Hidden Line. 11 Click OK. You can use the Visibility/Graphics settings to modify the roof appearance in a specific view. 3 In the Line Patterns dialog box. click Line Patterns. is open with the 3D view active.Create a new line pattern 1 Verify that the project from the previous exercise.rvt.

21 In the Select Line Style dialog box. 16 Select Solid for Line Pattern. select Override and specify the following options: ■ ■ ■ Select 5 for Line Weight. click Model Graphics Style. Notice that the line style displays in this view also. 25 In the Line Styles dialog box. click Object Styles. and click Hidden Line. 17 Click OK. double-click 3D Model View. under Modify Subcategories.12 In the Project Browser. and click OK. click New. click Visibility/Graphics. 24 On the Settings menu. under Floor Plans. double-click Site. Select Roof Line for Line Pattern. Notice the site topography and the property lines. under 3D Views. click Line Styles. This overrides the appearance of the roof only in the current view. 14 On the Settings menu. select Roofs. and select Black for Line Color. 22 Click OK twice. 15 In the Object Styles dialog box. 18 On the View menu. 130 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . under Category. 26 Enter Zoning Setback for Name. 13 On the View Control Bar. 19 Click the Model Categories tab. Select Blue for Line Color. Create a new line style 23 In the Project Browser. 20 Click Override for Line Style Projection. and select Roofs for Visibility.

click Visibility/Graphics. 34 On the View menu. select Zoning Setback. 28 Click OK. Notice that the line style has not been applied to the roof in this view because you applied the override to the 3D Model View only. 29 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. (Make sure you specify a negative value. 37 In the Project Browser. click Save. 41 On the View Toolbar. click Visibility/Graphics. double-click Level 1 Annotated. 38 On the View menu. The -3000mm offset displays inside the property lines. This turns off the visibility of the Zoning Setback lines only in this view. expand Lines. under Floor Plans. and clear Zoning Setback. Notice the Zoning Setback lines appear in this view. move the cursor to the bottom-right corner of the property lines. Modifying Project Settings | 131 . 30 In the Type Selector.27 For the Zoning Setback category. expand Lines.) Click . 42 On the File menu. 36 Click OK. specify the following: ■ ■ Click . Select Red for Line Color. ■ 32 Click the upper-left corner of the property line to begin the rectangle. 35 On the Model Categories tab. You also load a new window annotation symbol and apply it to show the window instance number rather than the window type number. and click to set the rectangle endpoint. 40 Click OK. Enter -3000 mm for Offset. you create a new dimension style using units of measurement that differ from the project settings. 31 In the Options Bar. Modifying Annotations In this exercise. 39 On the Model Categories tab. Select Double Dash 5/8" for Line Pattern. Modifying Annotations. click . click . and clear Zoning Setback. click Lines. specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ Select 2 for Line Weight Projection. 33 On the View Toolbar. 43 Proceed to the next exercise.

You have created a new dimension style.rvt. 6 In the Format dialog box: ■ ■ Clear Use project settings. notice that there is a Linear . 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and that the tag displays the window type number rather than the window instance number. 2 On the Settings menu. 17 Click Load. 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. m_Settings-in progress. Load a new window tag 10 In the Project Browser. click Duplicate. you load a new window tag that displays the window instance mark. The window tag used in this project is designed to display the type number. navigate to the Annotations/Architectural folder of the Metric Library. and select M_Window Tag . Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. 15 On the Settings menu. In the steps that follow. under Category. click the default value for Units Format.Imperial and click OK. 5 Under Text. scroll down to Windows. 11 Select any window in the east or west wall. 18 In the Open dialog box. click . 7 Click OK twice. 13 In the Element Properties dialog box. Notice that there is a window tag loaded and applied to windows. Notice that the windows on the east and west walls are tagged. under Floor Plans. 3 In the Type Properties dialog box. click Modify. notice the Mark value differs from the window tag value. double-click Level 1 Annotated. 14 Click Cancel. click Dimension.Imperial dimension available. Create a new dimension style 1 Verify that the project from the previous exercise. click Annotations  ➤ Dimensions  ➤ Linear. 132 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . 12 On the Options Bar.NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. In the Type Selector. 16 In the Tags dialog box. click Annotations  ➤ Loaded Tags. 4 Enter the name Linear . is open with the 3D View active. m_Settings-in progress.rvt.Number. Select Feet and fractional inches for Units.

click Tag. Under Category. click Tag All Not Tagged. 24 On the Options Bar. you modify the detail level assignments. TIP Using the techniques learned in the previous steps. and Detail Level Options. 19 Click Open. Unless overridden. 25 On the left side of the north wall. 30 In the Type Selector. and select the drop-down arrow that displays. M_Window Tag .rvt. Specifying Units of Measurement. . m_Settings-in progress. dimension values display using this setting. Temporary Dimensions. scroll to Windows and notice that M_Window Tag . Temporary Dimensions. This indicates this tag is designed to display the window instance value rather than the type value. 31 On the Design Bar. 28 Under Leader. Notice that both window tag types can coexist within the same view. 26 On the Design Bar.Number. click Modify.Number. you modify the temporary dimension settings. click the three left-most windows. 21 Under Loaded Tags.Number. This tag is used when tagging windows By Category. select one of the window tags that displays the type value. The remaining untagged windows are tagged by instance value. notice Window Tags appears twice. select M_Window Tag . In the second section. and Detail Level Options In this exercise. you specify the project units of measurements. 20 In the Tags dialog box. Notice that you can choose between the two window tag types loaded into this project. verify that Create is clear. and click OK. click M_Window Tag .Number is now the assigned tag. Modifying Project Settings | 133 . A window instance tag displays on each selected window. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. 34 Proceed to the next exercise. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. clear Leader. In the first section. notice that the label displays 1i. 23 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.In the preview image. click Save. Each Window Tag category has a different loaded tag: one displays the type value.Number as the assigned tag. you modify three settings that have a broad impact on the project. the other displays the instance value. 29 On the east wall. 27 Select the Window Tag category with the loaded tag. Leave M_Window Tag . Specifying Units of Measurement. 22 Click OK. click 33 On the File menu. In the final section. you can have multiple views: one displaying window type tags and the other displaying window instance values. 32 On the View Toolbar.

13 On the File menu. click Save. These drawings and sheets can become so numerous that navigating a lengthy Project Browser list can be cumbersome. click the default value for Format. 9 Under Doors and Windows. expand Floor Plans. In this exercise. you can use the Project Browser settings to instantly modify how the Project Browser groups and sorts. select Openings. temporary dimensions now snap to the wall faces and to the door and window openings. expand Views (all).rvt from the Common folder. Notice the 1 : 50 view scale moved to the Medium column. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. TIP You can override the detail level at any time by specifying the Detail Level parameter in the View Properties dialog box. click . Open c_Project_Browser. Unless overridden. 5 In the Format dialog box. 6 Click OK. 4 In the Project Units dialog box. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. under Length. click the Training Files icon. you often produce multiple packages of related drawings. 8 Under Walls.Set units of measurement 1 On the Settings menu. select Faces. When you create a new view and specify its view scale. under Area. you use the arrows between the columns to move view scales from one detail level to another. Organize the Project Browser by views 1 In the Project Browser. dimensions use these project settings. click Project Units. select 0 decimal places for Rounding. 3 In the Format dialog box. click Open. Any new view created using this scale is automatically assigned the detail level Medium. and expand 3D Views. Modifying Project Browser Organization In a typical project. select To the nearest 100 for Rounding. Specify temporary dimension properties 7 On the Settings menu. 2 In the Project Units dialog box. click the default value for Format. You do not select a view scale to move it. 11 Between the columns Coarse and Medium. 134 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . In this project. In order to organize the views and sheets into sets of deliverables. In this table. and click OK. the detail level is specified automatically according to the arrangement in the table. you modify the Project Browser organization and create new methods of grouping and sorting the views and sheets. 14 On the File menu. Modifying Project Browser Organization. click Detail Level. and click OK. click Temporary Dimensions. Specify detail levels 10 On the Settings menu. Modifications to area rounding are displayed in schedules and area tags. click Close. 12 Click OK. The view scale moves either from the bottom or the top of the column based on the direction. select meters squared for Unit suffix. and click OK.

5 On the Views tab. 14 In the Project Browser. and click OK. Notice that the sheets are listed alphanumerically based on the sheet number. 9 In the Browser Organization dialog box. click Browser Organization. 10 In the Project Browser. under Sheets. and click Apply. In the Project Browser. 4 On the Settings menu. and notice the progression of each view: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Main Bldg . expand both the Architectural and Structural views. 2 In the Project Browser. 3 Open each of the 3D views in the following order. and click OK.Phase 3-Structure Completed Project-Structure Completed Structure w/ Roof&Floors Completed Project Each of the 3D views varies by phase and discipline. click Browser Organization.Notice that the views are listed alphabetically. 13 Select Sheet Prefix. 12 Click the Sheets tab. expand each sheet set. select Type/Discipline. On the Project Browser. expand Sheets (all). expand each view type.Phase 1-Structure East Wing . click Browser Organization. 7 On the Settings menu. notice that Views are divided into Architectural and Structural disciplines. 8 Select Phase. select Discipline. and notice that each is grouped by discipline. 6 In the Project Browser. Modifying Project Settings | 135 . notice that Views are grouped based on Phase. and click OK. Organize Project Browser by sheets 11 On the Settings menu.Phase 2-Structure West Wing .

expand Complete. 21 In the Project Browser. 18 In the Browser Organization Properties dialog box. A well designed template will ensure office standards are maintained and will reduce repetitive work. 16 Click the Views tab. 22 On the File menu. Creating an Office Template In this lesson. and click New. Proceed to the next lesson. When you create new projects. You can save Project Browser organization schemes. you may decide to modify one or more of these templates to the specific needs of your company. and click OK. 17 Enter Phase/Type/Discipline. enter a unique file name. The lesson begins with choosing the right base template and progresses through many of the most common modifications that you would consider in order to make a template unique to your situation. click Close. named print settings. In this lesson. select Phase/Type/Discipline as the current browser organization. Notice that the Project Browser has reorganized all the views within this project according to Phase. and view names. and render scenes in a template. under Views. navigate to your preferred directory. and Discipline. expand 3D Views. View Type (Family and Type). and click OK. click the Folders tab. All the settings that you changed in this lesson are saved with the project. Creating an Office Template. you maintain consistent standards and reduce the amount of repetitive work. It is mostly conceptual and designed as a road map with options for your consideration.Create a new browser organization name 15 On the Settings menu. You can also save these settings in a template file. and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Group by: Phase Then by: Family and Type Then by: Discipline 19 Click OK. you modified various project settings that affect project appearance and organization. click Browser Organization. levels. 20 In the Browser Organization dialog box. By saving these settings as a template and using it throughout the office. and expand both Architectural and Structural. In the lesson that follows. This lesson is intended to provide you with a blueprint of how to create your office template. you create a Revit Building template file and set it as your default template. and click OK. 136 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . dimensions styles. the project template is used to provide the initial project settings such as materials. If you want to save this file. Although Revit Building provides many templates to choose from. you create an office template.

and click Open. navigate throughout the various views and schedules. Modifying Project Settings. select Project for Create new. The first step in creating your office template is deciding which template to use as your starting point. In order to maintain office standards and reduce rework. You may need to have a variety of office templates if your work requires it. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to other templates. Other than the default template. In that case. for instance. 12 Under Template File. Other templates. 14 Click Open. you select the starting point for your office template. You should choose the option that will help you develop the best template with the least amount of work. 11 Under Create New. 6 In the Project Browser. structural or construction. click Close. 10 On the File menu. 3 Under Template File. Even if you choose not to base that project on a template. Whenever you create a new project or template. you can select an existing template or begin the project with no template. close them. click Zoom  ➤ Zoom in Region and. Creating an Office Template | 137 . 8 In the Project Browser. 2 In the New Project dialog box. When you create the material. you can create the materials commonly used in most projects.rte template. For example. 13 Select the default template. click Browse. If you have additional projects open. Notice there are a number of different templates to choose from. you can establish the settings that are common to most projects. you modify the project settings for your new template. in the drawing area. are simple in respect to the predefined views and schedules. If you want to use a template other than the default. certain baseline settings are still assigned to the new project. For example. drag a zoom region around the level heads. expand Views. a group of settings are used to specify the project environment. such as the structural template.Choosing the Base Template In this exercise. 4 Select the Construction-DefaultMetric. click New ➤ Project. 9 On the File menu. 7 On the View menu. The template selection may vary depending on your installation. and double-click North. select Project Template. click Browse. but the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of the structural tools. These settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. Notice that there are more predefined levels than you normally see in the default template. you can select it now. Notice that the construction template is more complex than the default template. 5 Click OK. Modifying Project Settings In this exercise. each is modified in a way to make it useful to the applicable industry. When you create a new template based on an existing template. Review existing templates 1 On the File menu. you can dictate its appearance in all views and when rendered. TIP This template is the starting point for your new template. expand Elevations. and click OK. when you create a new project. click New  ➤ Project. the same rules apply. You can use an existing template as the baseline or use no template at all.

You can align. Choose the appropriate option. Specify object styles 9 On the Settings menu. RELATED See Modifying System Settings for more information on creating new AccuRender materials. or modify existing patterns. there are additional commands under the Settings menu that allow modifications that can be saved in a template. see the previous lesson. Create and modify fill patterns 5 On the Settings menu. You can do this by setting the AccuRender Texture. 138 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . Observe the materials that are already defined. you modify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Materials Fill patterns Object styles Line styles. If there are materials that are commonly used within your office or industry. click Object Styles. weights. and patterns Annotations Project units Temporary dimensions Detail levels Project Browser organization In addition to the list above. 8 Click OK when finished. In the Object Styles dialog box. Modifying System Settings or refer to the Help documentation. you may want to specify their appearance when rendered. For more details on modifying these settings. RELATED See Modifying Project Settings for more information on creating new fill patterns. rotate. You may want to save the material to a library located on a network path. and materials for different categories and subcategories of components or imported objects. specific modifications are not dictated. line patterns. The specifics regarding each of these are addressed at the end of this exercise. and move model patterns. 7 Create new fill patterns as needed. You may want to rename or modify some of the existing materials. You can also dimension to model pattern lines. If there are custom AccuRender materials that you want to add to the template. be aware that access to the original material library may be necessary at some point. Model patterns represent actual element appearance on a building. If you create or modify new materials. TIP Drafting patterns represent materials in symbolic form. 3 Under AccuRender. you can do so by going to the Material menu and selecting New. 2 Scroll down the Name list. 6 Scroll through the list of model and drafting patterns. During this exercise. you can set line weights.In this exercise. click to access the AccuRender Material Library. click Materials. line colors. click Fill Patterns. and create the AccuRender material. You are merely pointed to each area where you can adapt the template to your needs. create and modify them as needed. Create and modify materials 1 On the Settings menu. 4 Click OK twice to close the Material Library and Materials dialog boxes. When you save a new AccuRender material designed to be used in an office template.

31 To modify a line pattern. Creating an Office Template | 139 . and create new subcategories as needed. select it. 12 If necessary. there are three tabs: one for model component line styles. 17 For existing line categories. and scroll through the list of categories. You can add and delete view scales. 26 Click the Annotation Line Weights tab. The widths are dependent on the scale of the design. 30 Scroll through the list of line patterns. 19 Click OK. 22 Modify existing line weights as needed. 21 Click the Model Line Weights tab. 11 Modify the properties of any existing categories as needed. click Line Patterns. 10 Click the Model Objects tab. 14 Modify categories. The Annotation Line Weights tab controls the line width of annotation symbols. 18 If necessary. line color. Modify line patterns 29 On the Settings menu. 15 Click OK to close the Object Styles dialog box. 24 Click the Perspective Line Weights tab. The Model Line Weights tab controls the line width of modeling components. and one for annotation symbol line styles. such as walls and windows in orthographic views. or line pattern as needed. one for perspective model line styles. and click Edit. Modify line weights 20 On the Settings menu. such as section lines and dimension lines. 33 Click OK. click Line Styles. You can define the widths of 16 different pens for six different drawing scales. The Perspective Line Weights tab controls the line width of objects such as walls and windows in perspective views. 23 Add and delete view scales as needed. 32 Add and delete line patterns as needed.TIP When the material of a component is set to by category. create new subcategories. In the dialog box. 25 Modify existing line weights as needed. 28 Click OK. it adopts the material assigned to its object styles category. 27 Modify existing line weights as needed. Annotation line widths are independent of the view scale. click Line Weights. modify the line weight. Modify line styles 16 On the Settings menu. create new line subcategories. The Line Weights command controls the display of line widths for each scale of a view. 13 Click the Annotation Objects tab.

when you add a door with the tag option selected. and specify the properties. click Annotations  ➤ Dimensions  ➤ Linear. click Annotations  ➤ Loaded Tags. click Load. 41 Select the Type drop-down list. 49 To load new annotation tags. Modify loaded tags 47 On the Settings menu. On the Settings menu. click Project Units. click Annotations  ➤ Dimensions  ➤ Radial. select it from this list. 44 If you need to create a new linear dimension style. You can override tag assignment using the Type Selector. The tag assignments in this dialog box dictate the default tag for each category. and specify the properties. 38 If you need to create a new arrowhead style. the last loaded tag becomes the default tag. 42 Modify the properties of existing linear dimension styles if necessary. 56 Specify the Slope option. click Format. angular. Specify project units 51 On the Settings menu. click Annotations ➤ Arrowheads. 45 Click OK. name the style. tags. 55 Repeat the previous two steps for the Area. 43 Click Rename if you want to rename an existing style. and Angle settings. select it from this list. 35 Select the Type drop-down list. the door is tagged using the tag assigned to the Doors category in this dialog box.Modify arrowheads 34 On the Settings menu. Modify Dimension Styles 40 On the Settings menu. To see the details of a particular style. and click OK. ■ ■ On the Settings menu. 50 After you have loaded the necessary tags. and choose a decimal symbol. and radial dimensions are modified separately. click Duplicate. 36 Modify the properties of existing arrowhead styles if necessary. 54 Click OK. name the style. and notice the list of existing linear dimension styles. You can have multiple tags loaded for any category. 52 Under Length. Notice many categories do not have loaded tags. click Annotations  ➤ Dimensions  ➤ Angular. make sure each category is assigned the desired tag. For example. 46 Repeat the previous five steps for angular and radial dimensions. 48 Scroll through the list of loaded tags. click Duplicate. To see the details of a particular style. and notice the list of existing arrowhead styles. 39 Click OK. Linear. When more than one tag has been loaded for a category. 37 Click Rename if you want to rename an existing arrowhead. 140 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . 53 Modify the unit settings if necessary. The arrowheads configured within this dialog box can be applied to text notes. 57 Click OK. you can override the assignment by selecting a different tag from the drop-down list. In the Tags dialog box. and dimensions. Volume.

click Detail Level. 69 Click the Sheets tab. RELATED For more information on modifying browser organization. Medium.Specify temporary dimensions 58 On the Settings menu. you must decide if the time investment is offset later by the reduction in repetitive work. In a typical project. In such a case. there are several additional commands that control the project environment. you can modify the location of temporary dimension witness lines. you should consider each carefully before applying changes to a template. 59 Under Walls. 66 In the Browser Organization dialog box. In order to organize the views and sheets into sets of deliverables. and move view scales as needed. see Modifying Project Browser Organization. If you routinely create the same documentation sets. To move the view scales. or Edit existing organization types. you can use the Project Browser settings to instantly modify the grouping and sorting within the Project Browser. NOTE You cannot select specific scales in this dialog box. specify where you want the temporary dimensions to measure from by default. click the arrows between columns. 64 Click OK. The view scales move from the lower-left to the upper-right and vice-versa. For example. 61 Click OK. 71 If necessary. Creating an Office Template | 141 . or Fine. 63 Review the table. 68 If necessary. or Edit existing organization types. specify the default location for temporary dimensions. Rename. you often produce multiple packages of related drawings. The detail level is based on view scale. However. you may only want to add generically named settings that would be applicable to most projects. Specify detail levels 62 On the Settings menu. 60 Under Doors and Windows. 67 Delete. 70 Delete. View scales are organized under the detail level headings Coarse. Additional project settings 73 On the Settings menu. click Temporary Dimensions. click Browser Organization. the detail level of that view is automatically assigned using this table. create new browser organization types. you may want to modify the browser organization settings within the template. You can override the detail level at any time by specifying the Detail Level parameter in the View Properties command. Modify project browser organization 65 On the Settings menu. create new browser organization types. TIP In the drawing area. click the Views tab. you can save rendered scene settings to a template. you can move view scales from one detail level to another. Rename. These views and sheets can become so numerous that navigating a lengthy Project Browser list can be cumbersome. When you create a new view. Using the arrows between the columns. Although these settings can be saved within a template. 72 Click OK.

or load a new door type. Create and modify the view templates to control the appearance of default views. Select it. Although this is possible. However. you could load detail components. For example. 74 Proceed to the next exercise. Goal: Load new door type Steps: In the Element Properties dialog box. In the Element Properties dialog box. If necessary. select from the Options Bar. you may want to delete. you load and modify families or groups into the template started in the previous exercise. and graphic overrides applicable to most projects. titleblocks. This would be cumbersome and counterproductive. furniture. Settings Menu Command Project Parameters Associated Tutorial Considerations This command is covered in an exercise later in this lesson. each component loaded will add to the length of the relative Type Selector list. In addition. Use the instructions in the table below to load. and click Open. Although the options are endless. You should think very carefully about what families or groups to load and modify within a template. create. and electrical fixtures. Make modifications. you can set the default contour line interval. modify. you do both. Each command is available on the Settings menu. If necessary. you can set up the phases. or electrical fixtures. In the steps that follow. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups. and make modifications in each area as necessary. click Door. If you have not completed the previous exercise. See Modifying Views and View Templates. Site Settings If necessary. Use the table below as a checklist. It is important to understand that you should not load every conceivable family into a template file. select Load. or modify a door. Obviously. 2 In the Type Selector. it is not recommended because it would increase the file size significantly before the first component was added to the project. This command is covered in an exercise later in this lesson. you should only load components that tend to be used in every project and are not likely to change. Depending on the intended use of this template. if you loaded every window type you could find. do so before starting this exercise. Links to associated tutorials are provided. and the poche depth. you can add project (and shared) parameters to a template. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups In this exercise. create. See Modifying Render Scene Settings Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings Render Scene If necessary. and click OK. This could be useful for things such as hardware. You can do this in several ways: select a component type and click Properties. You may want to modify wall types to add a more diverse selection within the template. you can create scene settings and save them to the template. For example. there are some important thoughts to consider. you may want to load families into the template to save time later or ensure consistency throughout the office. Navigate to the directory containing the door type. Modify door type 142 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . See Setting up Shared and Project Parameters. If necessary. you can move onto the next component type. You can find additional information in Help. 3 To modify. You can load any family or group into a template. you would have to scroll through a lengthy list of windows every time you changed a window within a project. If this selection is satisfactory. Load and modify families 1 Use the project started in the previous exercise. select Edit/New. you can create and modify area schemes if there are default settings applicable to most projects.Each of these areas are covered later in this lesson or in other tutorials. phase filters. notice the list of doors already loaded. the section cut material. and in the Basics tab of the Design Bar. or use the Project Browser. Phases Project Phasing Area Settings Area Analysis View Templates This command is covered in an exercise later in this lesson. or add to this selection.

(The titleblock name may vary depending on the template you started with. Enter Name. and click OK. 6 On the File menu. You can use the Project Browser to modify family types. 8 Expand Annotation Symbols. 4 Click OK. Click Duplicate.Goal: Create new door type Steps: In the Element Properties dialog box. expand Families. Use Project Browser to modify families 7 In the Project Browser. Notice that you have the option to Load Family or Load Group. Loading from the library is the quickest when you know exactly what families you want to load. and select the titleblock type.) 9 Expand the titleblock. select Edit/New. Modify type properties. Notice that each family category is listed. Notice that there is a titleblock symbol loaded. Press ESC twice to return to the template. You can also load families and groups from the File menu. You may want to open other Design Bar tabs and make modifications to components not available on this tab. 5 Repeat the process for any component type that you want to modify. Creating an Office Template | 143 . click Load from Library. and click OK.

View templates help standardize the look of all views by providing the initial settings for a view. click 11 Click <<Preview. 14 Proceed to the next exercise. 2 Select Architectural Plan for Name. In this exercise. you created new projects using different templates. and then create new views that will automatically use those templates. create. 13 Using any of the techniques learned in previous steps. click View Templates. To do so. you create the views required for your template. In addition. The view inherits view properties such as View Scale.10 On the Options Bar. load. At any time. you will first modify view templates. In addition. This titleblock is currently part of the template. Modifying Views and View Templates. you can apply a template to an existing view at any time using the Apply View Template command. Discipline. In this exercise. These values represent the starting point for each plan view. You may want to load a titleblock applicable to your office and then delete this titleblock. 144 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . Detail Level. you can apply a view template to any view. . These settings are applied when you create a new plan view by adding a new level. Create and modify view templates 1 On the Settings menu. and the visibility settings of categories and subcategories. click Load. To load a titleblock. and click Delete. 12 Click OK. You can use the Project Browser to delete a component from the project/template. View Range. Modifying Views and View Templates At the beginning of this lesson. RELATED For more information. and you noticed that each template had a unique set of predefined views. Notice it has Revit Building in the upper-right corner. you create and apply the underlying view templates that control their initial appearance. see Creating a Titleblock Family. or modify any component families or groups as necessary. right-click the component.

You can also duplicate or delete the view. duplicate. 22 In the Project Browser. 5 Repeat the steps above for each of the view templates in the Name drop-down list. Upon the application of the view template. 21 In the Project Browser. right-click Level 1. There is no limit to the number of times you can apply a view template to a view. there is no limit to the number of view templates that you can apply. review the existing floor plans. click Apply. duplicate. 20 In the Project Browser. 16 On the View menu. or delete them as needed. 8 On the View menu. 27 Recreate additional levels as needed. the view properties of the target view are instantly reset to match those of the template. 14 Select the Architectural Plan template. expand Floor Plans. click Apply View Template. In addition. Make sure you are still in the South Elevation view. After applying the template. open the view from the Project Browser. Create and modify views 19 In the Project Browser. Subsequent modifications to the view template do not affect any current views unless you reapply the view template. 26 Rename and reposition the level as needed. The associated floor plan will use the Architectural Plan view template to set its initial view properties. the view is not linked to the template in any way. and click OK. expand Views. click Apply. double-click South. NOTE Do not select Apply automatically to new views of same type. notice that you have the option to rename. 3 Specify each value according to your needs. 18 If you modified any other view templates. select Make Plan View. click Apply View Template. Blue level heads have associated plan views. and then click OK. ceiling plans. you reduce rework and increase consistency across projects. Notice the level names. click Level from the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Black level heads have no associated views. in the context menu.By modifying the view templates according to your specific needs. This options means that every time a new plan view is created. Creating an Office Template | 145 . and click OK. and apply the appropriate template. If necessary. you can rename this view according to your preference. 17 If you made modifications to the Site Plan template. 6 Click OK. double-click Site. under Elevations. 11 Click Apply. click Apply View Template. review the floor plans. This would result in the Site Plan view template becoming the default template for all new plan views. Rename. 10 Select Apply automatically to new views of same type. 13 On the View menu. and double-click Level 1. it will use this view template to set the initial view properties. 24 In the Options Bar. Applying a view template to a view is a one-time action. under Floor Plans. select Site Plan. under Floor Plans. 12 In the Project Browser. and elevations. 25 Add the new level within the elevation view. Keep in mind that these settings are the default settings for this view type. under Floor Plans. double-click Level 2. under Floor Plans. 4 If necessary. and. 15 In the Project Browser. Apply view templates 7 In the Project Browser. or delete this view. 9 Select the Architectural Plan template. rename or duplicate the view template and make modifications. 23 To add additional levels to the template.

35 You can use Orient to a Direction or Orient to a View to set the camera location and target. 146 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . On the Formatting tab. 40 Click OK. click . on the View toolbar. You are prompted to select a titleblock. and click OK. This can save significant time and ensure office standards are maintained. assign filters. select and order required fields. To do so. you may want to modify the view properties of any new views. make the following modifications as needed: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. Add sheets to the template 42 On the View tab of the Design Bar. modify settings as needed. On the Filter tab. 32 To create additional 3D views. to orient and save the view. and click View Properties. click Sheet. supply a view name. 30 In the Project Browser. click 33 On the View toolbar. You may want to consider adding the schedules that you use most often. click 29 In the Project Browser. select the category type. If you have already loaded your office titleblocks into the template. and click OK. and click OK. Create and modify schedules 37 On the View tab of the Design Bar. If necessary. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. 41 Repeat the steps above for each schedule type you add to the template.Create 3D views 28 To add 3D views to the template. modify settings as needed. The view is listed in the Project Browser under Views  ➤ 3D Views. on the View toolbar. expand 3D Views. 36 To save the view. and modify their properties accordingly. On the Appearance tab. right-click {3D}. click Schedule/Quantities. You can add schedules to a template. click . 31 Rename the 3D View. select one. under 3D Views. You can use this tool. 38 If you want to add schedules to your template. Dynamically Modify View. 34 Click the arrow on the right side of the Dynamic View dialog box. 39 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. go to the View menu. and select Rename. modify settings as needed.

if not. it is completely bare. 45 Create new sheets as needed. if one exists. exterior-default. you could render basic scenes much faster and with greater consistency without the need to spend time modifying these settings. Haze: Simulates effects from slight “depth cues” to dense fog. the relevant tab appears. click Environment. choose the appropriate season for plant rendering. and click New  ➤ Place Titleblock. which is included on the Revit Building CD.TIP You can add sheets to the template and delete the titleblock. and provide a name for the scene. and click OK. ■ ■ ■ 6 Specify the Advanced features: TIP As you select options. tiff. 43 Add views to the sheet by selecting Add View from the View tab of the Design Bar. By adding a default interior and exterior rendered scene setting to the template. Clouds: Adds procedurally generated clouds to the background. Choose from bitmap. TIP You can drag and drop views directly from the Project Browser onto the sheet. You can still add views to the sheet. you can install AccuRender by running the install program on the Revit Building CD. Alpha Channel: Lets you use the image's alpha channel (embedded pixel-by-pixel masking information). and a Clouds tab appears. go to the View menu. for example. ■ Background Image: Lets you map images to your background. To do so. 5 Specify the background color. 44 To rename or renumber the sheet. Modifying Render Scene Settings You can create interior and exterior scene settings and save them within the template. while in winter. To later add a titleblock to a sheet. Ground Plane: Adds an infinite plane to your rendering. click Sun. 2 Color Gradient: Lets you vary the color between two selected colors. 10 Under Plant Season. click Render Scene. Modifying Render Scene Settings. and colors. or targa. Be sure that you have installed this software. for example. and click Rename. 4 In the Render Scene Settings dialog box. and changes the color automatically depending on the sun and sky conditions. Subsequent sheets are numbered consecutively based on the previous sheet. ■ Automatic Sky: Treats the background as a sky. Background images are available from the AccuRender software. select the Clouds option. jpeg. place. a deciduous tree in summer appears in full bloom with leaves. 8 Under Scene Settings. and then click OK. Creating an Office Template | 147 . 7 Click OK. under Scene Settings. ■ ■ ■ ■ You can also save and load environmental settings. 3 Click OK. 2 Under Type. settings. Solid Color: Specifies a single color that appears behind your rendering. select the default titleblock. for example. Different seasons directly affect any AccuRender plants in the view. select the titleblock and delete it. After the sheet is created. 3 Color Gradient: Lets you vary the color between three selected colors. Create and modify an exterior scene 1 On the Settings menu. 46 Proceed to the next exercise. right-click the sheet in the Project Browser. 9 Specify the date and time. select Exterior.

Setting the quality to Better or Best reduces meshing artifacts. This works on opaque faces only. 17 Click OK when finished. When you import a DWG or DXF file.Default. Best. however. ■ 13 Specify Raytrace Settings: ■ Select Quality: Click the Quality drop-down list to choose an antialiasing option: Draft. ■ 12 Specify the Radiosity Settings: ■ Select Quality: Click the Quality drop-down list to choose an option: Draft. You then set the import line weights for DWG/DXF. Select Blurry Reflections to affect the look of reflections in glass. you modify the export layer settings for DWG/DXF and DGN. Increasing the antialiasing level adds considerable rendering time. Medium. Better. Best is the slowest. Better. Specify the Color Bleeding value: This controls the color saturation of reflected light. This setting is effective for region raytraces. Draft provides the lowest quality and fastest speed. Select View Culling to eliminate rendering model faces that lie outside the area being raytraced. but provides the highest quality. 15 Provide a name for the new interior scene. 18 Proceed to the next exercise. This value is used both for the initial number of steps when you first use the Radiate command and for any subsequent calculation by clicking Continue from the Options Bar. when used in conjunction with high antialiasing and soft shadows it can produce very high quality renderings with fewer radiosity artifacts. This is a very time consuming operation but. Good. ■ Select Soft Shadows to produce more realistic shadow edges. Radiosity quality affects the relative coarseness of the mesh and the amount of time to process the solution. and click OK. Modify export layers for DWG and DXF 1 On the File menu. The number of bounces determines how many levels of reflections or transparencies are permitted. 16 Repeat the steps you performed when creating an exterior scene. Good. Best. ■ Set values for Reflection and Transparency bounces. These scenes are now part of the template and will provide users with two basic rendering scenes. Medium. for example Interior . each layer in the file is assigned a line weight based on the pen number/line weight settings you created. Back face culling decreases rendering time and space. AccuRender always processes transparent faces. Modifying Import/Export Settings In this exercise. Higher values cause the color of reflected light to more closely approximate the color of the reflecting surface. ■ ■ ■ Create and modify an interior scene 14 In the Render Scene Settings dialog box. Meaningful values are between 0 and 1. ■ Specify the Solution Goal: This limits the radiosity calculation to a certain number of steps. Shadows based on the size of the light source are calculated.11 Specify Culling options: ■ Select Back Face Culling to eliminate rendering on model faces that do not face the camera eye. Modifying Import/Export Settings. 148 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . such as jaggy shadows or light leaks. but also increases the solution time. Select Blurry Transparency to affect the look of material seen behind glass. Antialiasing is a process in which more than one ray is shot for each pixel in an attempt to better resolve the value of the pixel. Higher values cause longer rendering times. the quality also is lower. Select Recalc Radiosity Lights to recalculate the shadows cast during the radiosity preprocess. click New. click Import/Export Settings ➤ Export Layers DWG/DXF.

5 For each category. When you import a DWG or DXF file. windows. for example. it lists components regardless of category by using an external parameter as a filter. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters In this exercise. doors. specify the following: ■ ■ Projection Level Number and Color ID Cut Level Number and Color ID 6 If you modified the settings in this dialog. and then are exported along with your project into the appropriate CAD program. and the creation of multi-category tags and schedules. You can save these mappings to a text file. each layer in the file is assigned a line weight based on the pen number/line weight settings you created. name the file. 2 For each category. and they cannot be used to tag objects (as with Shared Parameters). They cannot be shared with other projects. you continue the refinement of the template by setting up shared parameters. For example. Modify import line weights 7 On the File menu. you do not need to worry about where the text file is saved. The layer names are stored in a text file (either exportlayers. You can add these shared parameters to any family regardless of category. Modify export layers for DGN 4 On the File menu. you could use Shared Parameters to add specific parameters to an existing family component for scheduling and tagging when those parameters are not initially present by default. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters. and click Save. click Import/Export Settings ➤ Import Line Weights DWG/DXF. you normally schedule a single category: rooms. you can skip this exercise and move onto the last exercise of this lesson. therefore. These settings are retained within the project template. Pen Number 1 to Line Weight Number 1. 9 Select Save As. 8 In the dialog box. Set as many pen-line weight mappings as desired. Pen Number 2 to Line Weight Number 2.txt for MicroStation). Their values may also be aggregated and reported using multi-category schedules. and related multi-category tags and schedules. and click Save.txt for AutoCAD or exportlayersdgn. Layer name corresponds to level name for MicroStation. and click Save. In this exercise. Using Shared Parameters. and so on. When scheduling. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. TIP Color ID in the Export Layers dialog box corresponds to an AutoCAD or MicroStation color ID. select Save As. select Save As. Creating Named Print Settings. If you are unfamiliar with shared parameters. and they become the set mappings for the project. name the file.The Export Layers command maps Revit Building categories and subcategories to specific layer names that are available after exporting to other CAD programs. When you create a multi-category schedule. see Scheduling Shared Parameters or Scheduling Project Parameters. project parameters. The layer mapping files reside in the Data folder of the Revit Building program installation directory. and so on. Revit Building presets the layer names to American Institute of Architects (AIA) industry standards. detailed instructions are not supplied since each office has a unique set of needs. Creating an Office Template | 149 . Multi-Category Tags employ Shared Parameters to permit tagging of any family component regardless of category. Project Parameters are those parameters (either instance or type) that are used within a single project for the purposes of scheduling information specific to that project. You can import pen numbers from a DWG or DXF file and map them to a Revit Building line weight. project parameters. If you do not need to make changes to shared or project parameters. Their definitions are stored in an external file ensuring consistency across families and projects. click Import/Export Settings ➤ Export Layers DGN. match the pen (DWG/DXF Color Number) to the appropriate line weight. specify the following: ■ ■ Projection Layer Name and Color ID Cut Layer Name and Color ID 3 If you modified the settings in this dialog. name the file. you can define additional parameters that are not included in either the pre-defined instance and type parameters within family components or within the project template.

Set up project parameters 13 On the Settings menu. For each parameter group. 14 Click Add. If this template will be used by multiple people within an office. For information on creating multi-category tags. click New. 19 Choose whether the parameter is stored by instance or type. The tag is now part of the template. 26 Choose whether you want the shared parameter to be an instance or a type parameter. 9 Name the Parameter. you can load them into the template. you can browse to that file and modify it as needed. you can begin creating parameter groups. click Load from Library  ➤ Load Family. click New. select the tag. After you have created the multi-category tags within the Family Editor. 25 Click OK. This allows you to name the external parameter file. see the tutorial referenced in the introduction of this exercise. or use the Help documentation for assistance. 24 Click Select. After the file is named. you can create a list of parameters. 8 Under Parameters.Set up shared parameters 1 On the File menu. 2 Click Create. and click OK. and click OK when finished. 27 Click OK. select a parameter value type. If a file already exists. add required parameters. 30 On the File menu. 28 Add shared project parameters as needed. 23 To add a shared project parameter. and select Shared Parameter. Create and load multi-category tags 29 Create required multi-category tags in the Family Editor. 5 Enter the group name. click Project Parameters. 20 Select the element categories this parameter applies to. 150 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . select a group that you want to add parameters to. 21 Click OK. click Add. 7 Under Parameter group. 22 Add project parameters as needed. enter a parameter name. 17 Under Discipline. under Groups. and assign which categories this parameter applies to. 11 For each parameter group. 12 Click OK when you have finished creating shared parameters. 15 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. select Project parameter. 4 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog box. and choose a shared parameter. 3 Name and save the file. 6 Create as many groups as needed. and click Open. NOTE This procedure is for creating a new shared parameter file. and specify the Type. 10 Click OK. 16 Under Name. click Shared Parameters. 31 Navigate to the directory. select a parameter discipline type. you may want to save the file to a network location. 18 Under Type.

and create additional settings as needed. 10 Repeat these steps as needed. 14 Under Save as type. 11 Click OK when finished. you should save it to a network path.Create multi-category schedules 32 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Setup. 6 Modify the printer settings. Create named print settings 1 On the File menu. select a different printer. For each printer. 5 In the New dialog box. click New. 13 Navigate to the directory where you want to save the template. If you need to share this file with others. 15 Name the template. and click Save. 3 Under Settings. you create named print settings. and make it your default template file. click Print. you can set options such as sheet sizes. Creating Named Print Settings. Notice that the shared parameters created in previous steps are available within the list of available fields. Depending on your office environment. and click OK. 8 Click OK when you have finished creating named settings for this printer. 9 In the Print dialog box. Creating an Office Template | 151 . you need only select a setting. and print. you may find it beneficial to add named print settings to the template. By creating named settings within the template. 4 Click Save As. enter a name for the print setting and click OK. click OK. click Save. enter a name for the schedule. Save the template 12 On the File menu. paper placement. you can select the printer for each set of named settings within the Print Setup dialog box. save the file as a template. and the percent of actual size. 33 Select <Multi-Category> for Category. and create new settings for this printer. click Schedule/Quantities. 37 Create additional multi-category schedules as needed. make minor modifications if necessary. You can also create named settings for printing to DWF and to a PDF writer. 38 Proceed to the final exercise. By going first to the Print command. select the first printer for which you want to create named settings. The only remaining task is to save it. Creating Named Print Settings In this exercise. 7 If you want to have multiple settings for this printer. 35 Create the schedule as you did in the previous exercise. TIP You can also create named settings for your DWF and PDF writer. 34 Under Name. 36 When you have completed the schedule. select Template Files (*. Your template is complete. 2 Under Name. click Setup. This is especially true if you have numerous printers in a large networked office.rte).

Set the template as your default template file 20 On the Settings menu. and navigate to the location where you saved the template. 18 Select the template. loaded components.Use the template 16 To use the template. In addition. 24 Click OK. click Browse. In addition. 17 Select Browse. click Options. you can use the Transfer Project Standards tool to move standards from one project to another. This can provide a good starting point for a template. 21 Click the File Locations tab. you modified settings. and click New  ➤ Project. 22 Next to Default template file. If you have a project. 152 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . 19 Click OK. TIP There are other ways you can create a template. you ensure that office standards are maintained. go to the File menu. you significantly reduce the amount of repetitive work that would be done by each employee for each project. and saved them to a template. and click Open. In this lesson. You can also set this template as your default template. select it. By investing the time to individualize your template. you could delete the model geometry and save the empty project as a template file. and click Open. 23 Navigate to the template location. The changes you made to the template are now the starting point for this project.

You learn how to add ceilings by selecting room boundaries to automatically place the type of ceiling that you select. You also learn how to change the surface pattern of a ceiling grid. see the online Help. 153 . and how to create a compound ceiling. For more information.Ceilings 4 In this tutorial. You can also create ceilings by sketching them. you learn how to create automatic ceilings in Revit Building.

and double-click Level 1. Open c_Ceiling. click the Training Files icon. 154 | Chapter 4 Ceilings . The ceiling is displayed. select Basic Ceiling : 600 x 1200mm grid. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. expand Views (all). Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. when the room boundary highlights. click Open. Create automatic ceilings 1 In the Project Browser. select it. expand Ceiling Plans. You can create automatic ceilings in an RCP (reflected ceiling plan) view of the building model. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. you learn how to create ceilings with the AutoCeiling command. Creating Automatic Ceilings In this exercise.rvt located in the Common folder.Creating Ceilings In this lesson. and then change the surface pattern of one of the ceiling grids. you learn how to add ceilings to an RCP view of a simple building model. 4 Move your cursor into the upper center room and. You add four different types of ceilings. you can change the surface pattern of the ceiling grids. You also learn how to create and add a compound ceiling to the building model. After you add ceilings to the model. 3 In the Type Selector. click Ceiling.

enter Wood Diagonal Strips 150mm. click Edit/New. 16 In the Type Properties dialog box. click OK. When selected. Creating Ceilings | 155 . click . select Basic Ceiling : 600 x 600mm grid. and click OK. 13 In the Name dialog box. 11 In the Element Properties dialog box. 12 In the Type Properties dialog box. 6 In the Type Selector. 14 In the Type Properties dialog box. 7 Select the room on the left and the room on the right. under Name. The new ceiling material is applied to the ceiling. select it. 10 On the Options Bar. select Finishes . 9 Select the 600 x 600mm ceiling grid located in the room on the left. click Modify.Interior . under Materials and Finishes. it displays in the Type Selector. click OK. 17 In the Element Properties dialog box.5 Select the lower center room and. click Duplicate. and then click . NOTE You select one of the grids or the entire ceiling using the TAB key. Change the ceiling grid surface pattern of room on the left 8 On the Design Bar.Wood Diagonal Strips 150mm. when the room boundary highlights. click in the Material type parameter Value field. 15 In the Materials dialog box. and click OK.

you change the project to Metric.rvt located in the Common folder. Close the exercise file without saving your changes. click the Training Files icon. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. and then add the ceiling to the building model. you learn how to create a compound ceiling. click Save As. add layers of material to the ceiling type. Creating Compound Ceilings In this exercise. Create a new ceiling type 1 In the Project Browser. on the File menu. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. You create a new ceiling type.18 If you want to save your changes. click Open. In the steps that follow. NOTE This common dataset is used in several imperial and metric datasets. The original project units are imperial. expand Ceiling Plans. and save the exercise file with a unique name. Open c_Condominium. 156 | Chapter 4 Ceilings . expand Views (all). and double-click First Floor.

5 In the Project Units dialog box. click OK. 10 In the Type Properties dialog box.Interior . click Insert twice to add two new layers. click .Specify metric project units 2 On the Settings menu. click Duplicate. and click OK. under Thickness. enter Gypsum board on metal furring. Add the compound ceiling 19 Move your cursor into the common area of the model and click to insert the Gypsum board on metal furring channels ceiling. enter 45 mm Layer 3: Structure [1]. select Compound Ceiling: Ceiling 1. 7 In the Type Selector. 9 In the Element Properties dialog box. select Metal . under Material. 17 In the Type Properties dialog box.Cold Rolled Channel.Furring. under Layers. 14 In the Edit Assembly dialog box. 4 In the Format dialog box. and click OK. 13 In the Edit Assembly dialog box. 15 Define the five layers as follows and in the following order: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Layer 1: Core Boundary Layer 2: Structure [1]. under Material. click Edit for the Structure type parameter value. 12 In the Type Properties dialog box. specify Millimeters for units. 18 In the Element Properties dialog box. click the format button for length.Gypsum Wall Board. click OK. 3 In the Project Units dialog box. select Metal . click Project Units. enter 12 mm 16 Click OK. select Finishes . 6 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 11 In the Name dialog box. under Construction. Creating Ceilings | 157 . under Material. click Ceiling. click Preview to display the current layers. click Edit/New. click OK. enter 20 mm Layer 4: Core Boundary Layer 5: Structure [1]. under Thickness. 8 On the Options Bar. under Thickness.

click the Detail Level control. You can also apply thin lines from the View menu. 158 | Chapter 4 Ceilings . 21 On the View Control Bar. click Save As. TIP You can use the zoom commands to zoom into the ceiling.View the compound ceiling in a section view 20 In the Project Browser under Views (all). expand Sections (Type 1). and double-click Section 1. Close the exercise file without saving your changes. 23 If you want to save your changes. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 22 The compound ceiling is visible in the section view of the first floor. on the File menu. and click Fine.

In the exercises that follow. floor. In addition. or ceiling. you cut floor and ceiling openings that expose the stairs beneath them. you create an opening for an existing dormer and cut two openings in the roof in order to visualize the difference between a perpendicular and a vertical cut. floors. You can cut vertically through a selected floor. 159 . When creating a hosted opening. you have the option to cut perpendicularly through the face of a roof. or ceiling. and you can create an opening in a roof specifically for a dormer.Openings 5 You can cut openings through roofs. roof. or ceilings using the Opening command.

View current dormer construction 1 In the current 3D View. 160 | Chapter 5 Openings .rvt located in the Metric folder. click Open. notice the existing dormer. Cutting a Dormer Opening in a Roof In this exercise. the view range of a wireframe view was modified to display the entire dormer roof. the project must have an existing dormer.Cutting Roof Openings In this lesson. you cut an opening in a roof with an existing dormer. In this case. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. This allows you to precisely define the borders of the opening. To use the Opening tool to cut a dormer opening. click the Training Files icon. you create an opening for an existing dormer and cut two openings in the roof in order to visualize the difference between a perpendicular and vertical cut. Open the file m_Cutting_Openings. and you should create a view where you can see the dormer geometry.

5 In the Opening Placement Options dialog box. and.2 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Project Browser. WARNING Do not select the dormer roof.Dormer. The display is wireframe so each dormer component can be seen and selected when defining the borders of the opening. The camera is located in the attic and is pointing to the dormer interior. expand 3D Views. and double-click Roof . and click OK. NOTE If the Modelling tab of the Design Bar is not active. Select the main roof to be cut. click Opening. You need to cut an opening in the roof to accommodate the dormer. Notice no opening exists in the roof for the dormer. right-click the Design Bar. Create the dormer opening 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. The dormer windows are above the roof so they do not display. Cutting Roof Openings | 161 . select Pick a roof to be cut by a dormer opening. and click Modelling. click to select it. under Views (all). This view has been set up specifically for the dormer. and double-click Attic View. expand Views (all). 6 Move the cursor over the main roof. expand Floor Plans. The view range was modified so the cut plane captured the entire dormer. when the edges of the roof highlight. This is an interior 3D view.

Sketch lines display along the border between the dormer roof and the selected roof. and select the exterior face of the three walls that define the dormer. Valid boundaries are a joined roof or its bottom face. select it. or a model line on the face of the roof to be cut. you define the boundary of the dormer opening. 8 Zoom in around the dormer. 162 | Chapter 5 Openings . and. a bottom face of a floor. an edge of the roof to be cut. when it highlights. a side face of a wall. 7 Place the cursor over the dormer.Next.

14 In the Project Browser. Cutting Roof Openings | 163 . 12 On the Design Bar. The dormer opening in the roof is apparent. 9 On the Design Bar. click Finish Boundary. 11 Drag each control to the corner until it intersects with the vertical sketch line on that side. Although the overlapping lines are not a problem. 10 Select the lower sketch line. click Modify. double-click Attic View. 13 Zoom out to see the entire plan view. and notice the drag controls on each end. under 3D Views. the gaps in the bottom sketch line need to be closed. and the horizontal line on the bottom dormer wall does not extend to the corners.Notice the sketch lines overlap in places.

15 On the File menu. select Save As from the File menu. click Open.rvt located in the Metric folder. click . 164 | Chapter 5 Openings . click the Training Files icon. Open the file m_Cutting_Openings. you create a roof opening that is perpendicular to the roof face. Create a perpendicular opening 1 On the View toolbar. 2 Using the spin function. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. Creating a Perpendicular Roof Opening In this exercise. NOTE If you want to save this file. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. click Close. spin the model around so that you can see the side of the roof without the dormer.

3 On the Design Bar. and. Cutting Roof Openings | 165 . click Modify. floor. click Opening. or ceiling and cut perpendicular to face. select it. and click OK. 6 Move the cursor over the exterior face of the main roof. The opening on the right is cut vertically. the opening on the left is cut perpendicular to the face. and click Modelling. 5 In the Opening Placement Options dialog box. TIP If the Modelling tab of the Design Bar is not active. 8 Sketch a rectangle in the center of the roof. click . In the following illustration. which is the side of the roof without a dormer. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. when it highlights. select Pick a face of a roof. 7 On the Options Bar. right-click the Design Bar.

10 Place the cursor over the edge of the opening. when it highlights. 166 | Chapter 5 Openings .9 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. and. select it.

select Save As from the File menu. NOTE If you want to save this file. You can move it. you create a roof opening that is cut vertically through the roof. 2 Using the spin function. click . Cutting Roof Openings | 167 . click Open.rvt located in the Metric folder. If you want to modify the shape of the sketch. 11 On the Options Bar. click Close. notice the tool displays. change the shape. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. dimension it. click 12 On the File menu. and click Finish Sketch. .The opening is an element independent of the roof. spin the model around so that you can see the side of the roof without the dormer. Creating a Vertical Roof Opening In this exercise. Open the file m_Cutting_Openings. Create a vertically cut opening 1 On the View toolbar. and constrain it like any other element. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. click the Training Files icon.

right-click the Design Bar. the opening on the right is cut vertically through the face. and. In the following illustration. click Opening. floor. select Pick a roof. The opening on the left is cut perpendicular. select it. or ceiling and cut vertically. 5 In the Opening Placement Options dialog box.3 On the Design Bar. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. when it highlights. TIP If the Modelling tab of the Design Bar is not active. and click Modelling. click Modify. 168 | Chapter 5 Openings . 7 Move the cursor over the main roof. 6 Click OK.

it is easier to sketch the boundary on a plan view. 14 Place the cursor over the edge of the opening. and double-click Roof . 8 In the Project Browser. when it highlights. click Lines. 10 On the Options Bar. and. expand Views (all). select it. click .Because the cut is vertical. 13 On the View Toolbar.Dormer. 12 On the Design Bar. 11 Sketch a rectangle in the center of the roof on the side without the dormer. click . expand Floor Plans. 9 On the Design Bar. Cutting Roof Openings | 169 . click Finish Sketch.

and click Finish Sketch. click the Training Files icon. 15 On the Options Bar. If you want to modify the shape of the sketch. click Open. you cut openings in a floor to accommodate a set of stairs that are already in place. notice the tool. you cut an opening on the second level of a building model to accommodate a set of existing stairs. you created a roof opening that was cut vertically through the roof. The exercises in this lesson must be done sequentially. 170 | Chapter 5 Openings . and constrain it like any other element. Cut a floor opening 1 In the Project Browser.The opening is an element independent of the roof. In this exercise. and double-click Section 1. You can move it. dimension it. Creating Openings in Floors and Ceilings In this lesson.rvt located in the Metric folder. expand Sections (Filled Arrow). In the left pane of the Open dialog box. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. change the shape. NOTE If you want to save this file. click Close. click 16 On the File menu. Cutting an Opening in a Floor In this exercise. Open the file m_Cutting_Openings. expand Views (all). select Save As from the File menu. .

Before cutting the floor opening. 5 In the Opening Placement Options dialog box. select Pick a roof. right-click the Design Bar. and the level 1 and 2 lines. TIP If the Modelling tab of the Design Bar is not active. click Ref Plane. The first click specifies the start point. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. the opening on the right is cut vertically through the face. This is useful when sketching the opening in a plan view. make sure that the plane intersects the fifth stair tread from the bottom. When cutting a floor or ceiling for a stairway.Notice that there is not an opening for the stairway in the ceiling or the floor. The opening on the left is cut perpendicular to the face. click Opening. you add a reference plane to mark the stair head height. The length of the plane does not have to be precise. a section view provides an excellent vantage point to select faces or planes to cut. and click Modelling. However. floor. 3 Add a vertical reference plane similar to the following illustration. Adding a reference plane is a two-click process. Creating Openings in Floors and Ceilings | 171 . and the second click specifies the end of the plane. In the following illustration. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. or ceiling and cut vertically.

172 | Chapter 5 Openings . under Sections (Filled Arrow). click Lines. you may close the project with or without saving it. 9 On the Design Bar. Notice the new floor opening. 10 On the Options Bar. click Model Graphics Style. do so now. 14 In the Project Browser. Otherwise. 12 Sketch a rectangle that borders the interior face of the wall. 13 On the Design Bar. 7 In the Go To View dialog box. the stairs. under Views (all). 11 Zoom in around the upper right corner where the stairs are located. and click Open View. and the reference plane you added previously. 8 On the View Control bar. click . double-click Section 1. NOTE The next exercise requires this project in its current state. You are prompted to select a view. click Finish Sketch. and click Wireframe. If you intend to complete the next exercise. select Floor Plan: Level 2.6 Select the floor on Level 2.

click . 6 Sketch a rectangle that borders the reference plane. right-click the Design Bar. select Reflected Ceiling Plan: Level 1. 2 In the Opening Placement Options dialog box. 9 In the Project Browser. Dataset Continue using the dataset you were using in the previous exercise. the interior face of the wall. 7 On the Design Bar. Cut a ceiling opening. under Sections (Filled Arrow). Use the following illustration as a guide. TIP If the Modelling tab of the Design Bar is not active. and the right and lower border of the stairs and floor you added in the previous exercise. and click Open View. and click Modelling. select Pick a roof. 1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 4 In the Go To View dialog box. 3 Select the ceiling below level 2. Notice the new ceiling opening. click Finish Sketch. you cut a ceiling opening for the stairwell. under Views (all). under 3D Views. 5 On the Options Bar. 8 In the Project Browser. click Opening.Cutting an Opening in a Ceiling In this exercise. double-click Section 1. floor. and click OK. double-click Level 1 Interior View. or ceiling and cut vertically. under Views (all). Creating Openings in Floors and Ceilings | 173 .

Open the file m_Cutting_Openings. 174 | Chapter 5 Openings . expand Views (all). click Close. Cutting an Opening Using the Shaft Tool In this exercise. you cut an opening through several levels of a building model to accommodate a set of existing stairs and to account for the possibility of extending the stairs up another level. The first click specifies the start point. click Ref Plane. 3 Add a vertical reference plane similar to the following illustration. expand Sections (Filled Arrow). Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. However. Adding a reference plane is a two-click process. and the level 1 and 2 lines. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click the Training Files icon. you must sketch in a plan view.rvt located in the Metric folder. and double-click Section 1. Notice that there is not an opening for the stairway in the ceiling or the floor. When using the shaft tool to cut an opening. make sure that the plane intersects the fifth stair tread from the bottom. NOTE If you want to save this file. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. The length of the plane does not have to be precise. Before cutting the opening.10 On the File menu. you add a reference plane to mark the stair head height. Add a reference plane 1 In the Project Browser. however. and the second click specifies the end of the plane. click Open. select Save As from the File menu.

the stairs. click Model Graphics Style. 7 On the View Control bar. This accounts for the possibility of extending the existing stairs up another level. 5 In the Opening Placement Options dialog box. select Create shaft opening. under Constraints. and click Open View.4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 14 Click OK. and the reference plane you added previously. Entering a value for base offset ensures that the shaft opening does not cut through the floor at level 1. 11 Sketch a rectangle that borders the interior face of the wall. Enter 3400 for Base Offset. 10 Zoom in around the upper right corner where the stairs are located. click Properties. ■ ■ Select Up to level: Roof for Top Constraint. but does cut the ceiling of level 1. 8 On the Design Bar. and click OK. select Floor Plan: Level 2. 16 In the Project Browser. under Views (all). click Lines. click Opening. under Sections (Filled Arrow). TIP If the Modelling tab of the Design Bar is not active. click . If you selected level 2 for the base constraint. 12 On the Design Bar. 15 On the Design Bar. 6 In the Go To View dialog box. 9 On the Options Bar. and click Wireframe. and click Modelling. Creating Openings in Floors and Ceilings | 175 . right-click the Design Bar. specify the following parameters: ■ Select Level 1 for Base Constraint. double-click Section 1. 13 In the Element Properties dialog box. the ceiling of level 1 would remain intact. click Finish Sketch.

Notice the shaft opening that cuts through several levels. 176 | Chapter 5 Openings . and roof that interferes with the defined volume of the opening. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. ceiling. Using the shaft tool. you can cut a single opening through every floor.

and panels. you learn how to create a railing and customize it using design information for rails.Railings 6 In this tutorial. posts. 177 . balusters.

Make certain that you draw the line from bottom to top because these starting and ending points are used to justify the railing later. press the CTRL key. Project is selected under Create new.Custom4.Custom3. such as panels. Sketch a plan view of two railing lines 5 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. M_Post . 8 Draw a 4300 mm vertical line from bottom to top as shown. you learn how to create and place a railing using design information such as the shape and finish material of the rails. Creating the Railing Layout In this exercise. M_Baluster Panel 1.rte is selected as the Template file from the Metric Templates folder. navigate to Metric Library/Balusters. 7 On the Options Bar. select M_Baluster .rfa. you create a railing and add components to it. select Chain. 178 | Chapter 6 Railings . and click OK. click Lines. 2 In the New Project dialog box. you need to load railing components from the library provided in the drawing template.Newel. and click Open. and M_Post . click New ➤ Project. The railing layout in this exercise is based on these custom components. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family.Creating Railings In this lesson.rfa.rfa. verify that DefaultMetric.rfa. M_Baluster . 4 In the Open dialog box. You also learn how to use a pattern editor to place balusters and posts and how to customize the railing with additional components.Square w Ball. 3 On the File menu. between the balusters. 6 On the Design Bar. Before you lay out the railing.rfa . Open five component families 1 On the File menu. click Railing.

and then click 17 In the Materials dialog box. click Duplicate. click in the Material field.Dark Gray. click in the Material field. 19 In the Materials dialog box. 16 In row 1. 12 In the Type Properties dialog box. In row 2. and then do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In row 1. click Edit/New. click Insert. 14 In the Type Properties dialog box. Specify the railing parameters 10 On the Design Bar. 18 In the Edit Rails dialog box. select Metal . TIP You may need to zoom in until the angular dimension increments by a single degree. In row 2.9 Draw a second 4300 mm line at an angle of 37 degrees as shown. enter -25 mm for Offset. enter Top for Name.Paint Finish .Paint Finish . enter 300 mm for Height. In row 2. and click OK. Creating Railings | 179 . 11 In the Element Properties dialog box. and click OK. and then click . select Metal . select M_Rectangular Handrail : 50 x 50 mm for Profile. 15 In the Edit Rails dialog box. in row 2. . enter Railing with Glass Panel for Name.Dark Gray. click Railing Properties. Matte for Name. Matte for Name. enter Bottom for Name. click Edit for Rail Structure. In row 2. 13 In the Name dialog box. and click OK.

Select Bottom for Base. 29 In row 3. 180 | Chapter 6 Railings . click Edit for Baluster Placement. click . select M_Post.Newel : 150mm for Baluster Family and enter 0 mm for Space. IMPORTANT Completing this tutorial is required to successfully complete some exercises in the tutorial on Stairs. 31 On the Design Bar. Enter 380 mm for Dist. 26 Select Beginning for Justify. under Posts. 30 Click OK three times. click on row 2. 33 On the View menu. 32 On the Toolbar.Newel : 150mm for Baluster Family and enter 0 mm for Space. 28 In row 2. from previous. under Main pattern. 35 Proceed to the next exercise. click Save As and save the exercise file as Training_Railing.Glass for Baluster Family. enter 230 mm for Dist.rvt. select M_Post. A new row is displayed. Select M_Baluster Panel 1: 600mm . do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select M_Baluster . 23 In row 2. Lay out the main baluster pattern 22 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box. 25 In row 4. select M_Post . Select Bottom for Base. Adjusting Railing Parameters. and then click Duplicate. you change the pattern of balusters and posts with the pattern editor to show different design options for the railing. Adjusting Railing Parameters In this exercise. 24 In row 3. click OK.20 In the Edit Rails dialog box. under Construction. in row 1. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter Glass Panel for Name. click Shading with Edges.Custom 3 : 25mm for Baluster Family. Enter 380 mm for Dist. 34 On the File menu. click Finish Sketch. from previous. Lay out the post pattern 27 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box. 21 In the Type Properties dialog box.Square w Ball : 60mm for Baluster Family and enter 50 mm for Top offset. from previous.

click Edit for Baluster Placement. View the spread pattern to fit option 14 On the Options Bar. The railing layout reflects the assigned end justification option. 13 Click OK three times. Training_Railing. 4 On the Options Bar. The railing layout reflects the beginning justification option that you assigned in the previous exercise. Creating Railings | 181 . under Main pattern. under Construction. under Main pattern. click Edit for Baluster Placement. expand Elevations. select End for Justify. 17 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box. 16 In the Type Properties dialog box. 6 In the Type Properties dialog box. 11 In the Type Properties dialog box. click Edit/New. View the end justification option 3 On the Design Bar. 15 In the Element Properties dialog box. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box. 18 Click OK three times. click Modify and select the railing. expand Views (all). View the center justification option 9 On the Options Bar.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. View the beginning justification option 1 In the Project Browser. click Edit/New.rvt. click . 5 In the Element Properties dialog box. 2 Zoom in on the left side of the railing. click . under Construction. 12 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box. click . click Edit/New. 8 Click OK three times. and double-click East. click Edit for Baluster Placement. under Construction. under Main pattern. select Center for Justify. 7 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box. select Spread Pattern To Fit for Justify. The railing layout reflects the assigned center justification option.

and select Truncate Pattern for Excess Length Fill. click Edit for Baluster Placement. custom baluster excess length fill. and spacing options. select M_Baluster . 20 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Edit/New. 25 In the Element Properties dialog box. View the custom baluster with specified spacing excess length fill option 24 On the Options Bar. 27 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box. 26 In the Type Properties dialog box. You cannot assign base top and bottom offset parameters to excess length fill balusters.The railing layout reflects the assigned spread pattern to fit justification option. enter 54 degrees for Angle. click . under Main pattern. under Construction. 32 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box. click Edit for Baluster Placement. select Beginning for Justify. 33 Under Posts. click . select Truncate Pattern for Excess Length Fill. and enter 150 mm for Spacing. View the truncate pattern excess length fill option 19 On the Options Bar. under Construction. click . click Edit/New. 34 Click OK three times. The railing layout reflects the assigned beginning justification. 23 Click OK three times. 21 In the Type Properties dialog box. 35 On the Toolbar. 28 Click OK three times. select Angles Greater Than for Corner Posts At. 182 | Chapter 6 Railings .Custom3 : 25mm for Excess Length Fill. under Main pattern. The railing layout reflects the assigned beginning justification and truncated excess length fill options. click . click Edit for Baluster Placement. 30 In the Element Properties dialog box. under Construction. under Main pattern. click Edit/New. 22 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box. Observe that the balusters that occur in the excess length fill area extend below the bottom rail. 31 In the Type Properties dialog box. View post options 29 On the Options Bar.

39 In the Type Properties dialog box. a corner post does not occur. double-click East.rvt. under Elevations. In row 4. under Construction. Creating Railings | 183 . 37 On the Options Bar. Since the angle is less than 54 degrees. The railing layout reflects the assigned distance and justification options. 42 Click OK three times.The railing layout reflects the assigned minimum angle limit for the corner post option. 40 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box. enter 380 mm for Dist. from previous. click Modify and select the railing. 38 In the Element Properties dialog box. enter 0 mm for Dist. click Save As and save the exercise file as Training_Railing. 43 In the Project Browser. do the following: ■ ■ ■ In row 2. Select Spread Pattern To Fit for Justify. Specify the final railing layout 36 On the Design Bar. under Main pattern. click Edit/New. click Edit for Baluster Placement. select Each Segment End for Corner Posts At. from previous. click . 44 On the File menu. 41 Under Posts.

184 | Chapter 6 Railings .

gutters. 185 .Roofs 7 In this tutorial. you learn how to add fascia. you learn how to create different types of roofs in Autodesk Revit Building. In addition. and soffits to the roofs that you create.

you need to select a work plane to use as a sketching guide. you learn to create several different types of roofs. 3 In the Work Plane dialog box. select Name. You do not need to create the work plane. and mansard roofs. verify that Section: Section1 is selected. click the Training Files icon. click Open. Creating an Extruded Roof In this exercise. including hip. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. verify Level 3 is selected for Level. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. expand Views (all). You create roofs from footprints and by extrusion: the two roof creation methods in Revit Building. The section view is automatically cropped around the area where you want to sketch the roof. 5 In the Go To View dialog box. 1 In the Project Browser. You create the roof by sketching the top roof profile and extruding it over the length of the breezeway. and double-click Level 1.Creating Roofs In this lesson. shed. 6 In the Roof Reference Level and Offset dialog box. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. 186 | Chapter 7 Roofs . click Roof ➤ Roof by Extrusion. expand Floor Plans. 4 Click OK. and then select Reference Plane : Breezeway. and click OK.rvt located in the Metric folder. Open m_Roofs. a work plane named Breezeway exists for the purpose of this exercise. gable. and then click Open View to select a section view parallel to the work plane in which to sketch the roof. Before you can sketch the roof profile. you create an extruded roof over a breezeway between a house and a garage.

Creating Roofs | 187 . This helps ensure that the plane is measured from the face of the wall rather than from the wall centerline. 8 Sketch the first reference plane 450 mm to the left of the left exterior breezeway wall face. 10 Sketch a vertical reference plane centered between the two vertical walls. you can place it in the general location and then zoom in and use temporary dimensions. TIP Instead of trying to place the reference plane in its exact location initially. 7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Ref Plane. 9 Sketch a similar reference plane 450 mm to the right of the right exterior breezeway wall face. you need to define four reference planes to help determine key points on the profile sketch.Before you can sketch the profile of the roof.

188 | Chapter 7 Roofs . Begin the sketch at the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the horizontal plane. sketch the roof profile. click Lines. The roof is automatically extruded from the Breezeway work plane in one direction. select Chain. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Next. 14 Sketch two sloped lines to create the roof profile. click Finish Sketch to complete the roof. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 13 On the Options Bar.11 Sketch a horizontal reference plane 450 mm below Level 2. Use automatic snaps to link the chain to the reference plane intersections.

press TAB. expand Sections (Type 1). press CTRL. use the Join Roofs command to adjust the length of the roof and join the roof edges to the exterior walls. click to display the model. and then select the exterior face of the wall. Next. 17 On the Tools toolbar. and select the second wall. The breezeway walls still penetrate the roof. click Modify. 23 Select one of the breezeway walls. 20 Select the breezeway roof edge. Notice that the breezeway roof penetrates the house walls inappropriately. so you next attach the breezeway walls to the breezeway roof. 19 On the Tools toolbar. Creating Roofs | 189 .16 On the View toolbar. The roof should resemble the following illustration. and double-click Section 1. and then select the exterior wall face of the garage to join the roof to the garage wall. 18 Select the edge of the roof. expand Views (all). click . 22 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Use the Join Roof command again to join the opposite end of the breezeway roof to the exterior wall of the house that joins the breezeway. click . 21 In the Project Browser.

Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. click Attach for Top/Base. 25 Select the roof to join the wall tops to the roof. you set the roof slope as a property of the footprint slope lines. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint. You use roof slope lines to define the roof gable ends. 26 On the View toolbar. 190 | Chapter 7 Roofs . you create a gable roof over a garage from a footprint. To complete the gable roof with the correct pitch. and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected. click to view the completed breezeway roof in the model.24 On the Options Bar. You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint.

1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. under Dimensions. 5 Select the left vertical wall of the garage to define the first roof slope line. the roof slope has a 750 mm rise over a 1000 mm run. select both slope definition lines. verify that Floor Plan: Garage Roof is selected. and click Open View. click Pick Walls. sketch the roof footprint. and on the Options Bar. 9 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. verify that Defines slope is selected. edit the properties of the two vertical slope definition lines to change the roof pitch. click Yes to attach the highlighted exterior garage walls to the roof. and click OK.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Verify that a dashed green line displays to the left of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall. 7 On the Options Bar. 10 Press CTRL. 4 On the Options Bar. 2 In the Go To View dialog box. 6 Select the parallel wall on the right to define the second roof slope line. click . 3 Next. enter 500 mm for Rise/1000 to change the roof slope. By default. clear Defines slope. Verify that a dashed green line displays to the right of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall. 8 Select the two horizontal walls to create a closed loop and complete the roof footprint. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 12 On the Design Bar. Creating Roofs | 191 . click Finish Roof. and enter 600 for Overhang. Next. On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. m_Roofs. 11 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Modify. 13 When you see the informational dialog box. The Element Properties dialog box is displayed.rvt.

and enter 600 for Overhang. NOTE You add the slope defining lines in a later step. you sketch a closed rectangular opening around the chimney. click Pick Walls. The roof requires an opening to accommodate a chimney.rvt. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. click to view the gable roof and attached walls in the model. Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint In this exercise. clear Defines slope. expand Floor Plans. 192 | Chapter 7 Roofs . and then verify that a dashed green line displays to the exterior side of the walls. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. the opening that you sketched becomes a void in the roof. m_Roofs. 1 In the Project Browser. Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint. You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. you add a main gable roof to a house from a footprint. 3 On the Options Bar. When you complete the roof. expand Views (all). 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls. and double-click Level 3.14 On the View toolbar. After you define the roof slope lines and complete the footprint. press TAB.

sketch a rectangle from the upper left corner of the exterior chimney face to the lower right corner of the exterior chimney face. 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 10 On the View menu. select Defines Slope. click Finish Roof. 8 On the Options Bar. sketch the chimney opening. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit to view the entire floor plan. Next. Next. 9 Using automatic snaps. select Defines Slope. 13 On the Options Bar. 15 On the Options bar. click . Creating Roofs | 193 . click Lines. click Modify. 7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. add new slope lines to the roof. click Yes to attach the walls to the roof. 14 Select one of the shorter line segments shown in the following illustration. 11 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 12 Select the uppermost horizontal line. 17 When you see the informational dialog box.6 Click to select all the walls.

4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.rvt. expand Views (all). 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. 3 On the Options Bar. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint. Verify that a dashed green line displays on the exterior side of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the walls. and double-click Level 2.18 On the View toolbar. click Pick Walls. you create a hip roof over the rear of a house from a footprint. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. expand Floor Plans. 5 Select the exterior edges of the three walls that create the rear addition to the house. click to view the new roof in the model. 194 | Chapter 7 Roofs . click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. select Defines slope. 1 In the Project Browser. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and enter 600 for Overhang. m_Roofs.

Roof sketches must create a closed loop before you can create the roof. The sketched lines cannot overlap or intersect each other. Next. trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep. 6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click . using the following illustration for guidance. Creating Roofs | 195 . select the left vertical slope definition line. clear Defines Slope. You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch. verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected. 10 On the Options Bar. 11 To trim the first line segment. and then specify a point near the midpoint of the line that you sketched along the wall of the main building. click Lines. close the roof sketch. 12 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections.Next. 7 On the Options Bar. and click . 9 On the Tools toolbar. 8 Select the exterior edge of the uppermost horizontal wall of the main building.

raise the roof 600 mm above the current level. Notice that the walls do not join to the roof.Next. and click OK. to use the Dynamic View tool to view the back of the house. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 196 | Chapter 7 Roofs . Press and hold CTRL to select and join the two remaining walls at the same time. click Attach for Top/Base on the Options Bar. click Finish Roof. join the two remaining walls to the roof. 22 Using the same method that you used previously. Next. 16 On the View toolbar. 14 Under Constraints. 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Roof Properties. 19 Select one of the walls under the hip roof. click 17 Click to display the model. 20 Select the roof to join the wall top to the roof. Use the Attach Top/Base command to join the walls to the roof. enter 600 for Base Offset From Level. The Element Properties dialog box is displayed. and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected. 18 On the Design Bar. click Modify. Notice that the new hip roof does not properly join to the back of the house. use the Join Roof command to fix the roof. 21 Click to use the Dynamic View tool to view the remaining walls that support the hip roof.

3 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. you create a shed roof over the entrance to a house from a footprint. clear Defines Slope. expand Views (all). Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 1 In the Project Browser. m_Roofs. 25 Proceed to the next exercise.23 On the Tools toolbar.rvt. The properly joined roof should resemble the following illustration. and then select the edge of the main roof to join the roofs. 24 Select the edge of the hip roof. click Pick Walls. 4 On the Options Bar. and enter 300 for Overhang. click . expand Floor Plans. Creating Roofs | 197 . click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint. and double-click Level 2.

19 Click on the View toolbar to display the model. click Finish Roof to complete the roof. press TAB. and select the lower horizontal line at the front of the roof. and press ENTER. and then click to select all three of the entry way walls. 8 On the Tools toolbar. click . Next. select the left vertical roof line. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Next. and click OK. enter 0 for Overhang. 198 | Chapter 7 Roofs . you add a slope-defining line. Notice the rise value is displayed next to the slope marker. trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 14 Enter 500 mm for the rise value to change the roof slope. enter -600 for Base Offset From Level. 7 Select the exterior face of the main wall to close the sketch. Verify that a green dashed line displays around the exterior side of the walls. and then select a point near the midpoint of the upper horizontal line you sketched earlier. 6 On the Options Bar. You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch. 10 To trim the first line segment. click Modify.5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls that defines the entry way. 18 Click Yes to attach the walls to the roof. select Defines slope. Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep. 9 On the Options Bar. 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected. 16 Under Constraints. 13 On the Options Bar. click Roof Properties. 11 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections.

7 On the Options Bar. Verify that the reference planes are located inside the shed roof sketch. expand Views (all). and double-click Level 2. click to activate the roof footprint sketch.20 Click to use the Dynamic View tool to rotate the model. click Split Walls and Lines. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof. and double-click 3D. 2 Select the shed roof over the entrance of the house. 1 In the Project Browser. expand Views (all). Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof In this exercise. 5 On the View menu. you add slope arrows to the shed roof. click . Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 4 In the Project Browser. Before you can add slope arrows. 6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 10 Split the slope defining line where the reference planes intersect as shown in the following illustration.rvt. and zoom in around the shed roof footprint. you need to split the slope defining line into three segments. click Ref Plane. 3 On the Options Bar. m_Roofs. 8 Select the two vertical sketch lines. 9 On the Tools menu. expand 3D Views. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. Creating Roofs | 199 . and enter 600 for Offset. you need to add two reference planes. expand Floor Plans. To help locate the position of each split.

15 to add the second slope arrow. and click 19 Under Constraints. click Modify.Next. add two new slope arrows. 11 On the Design Bar. and then click OK. 21 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Move the cursor along the roof line until the midpoint displays. Aligning Roof Eaves. clear Defines Slope. verify is selected. 200 | Chapter 7 Roofs . 14 On the Options Bar. use the Attach Top/Base command to join the wall to the roof. click Finish Roof to complete the roof. select both slope arrows. and then select it to specify the location of the slope arrow head. click Slope Arrow. change the longest slope line segment (the middle segment) so that it no longer defines slope. 15 Sketch a slope arrow from the reference plane to the midpoint of the lower horizontal roof line: ■ Select the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the roof line to specify the location of the slope arrow tail. select Slope for Specify. 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. enter 500 for Rise/1000. Next. and move the cursor to rotate the arrow. 20 Under Dimensions. NOTE If the front wall is separated from the roof. ■ 16 Repeat steps 13 . 22 Click on the View toolbar to display the model. and select the middle segment of the slope defining line. click Modify. 12 On the Options Bar. . Begin the tail at the right reference plane. 23 Proceed to the next exercise. 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 18 Press CTRL. The head should snap to the midpoint of the line as in the previous steps.

Aligning Roof Eaves In this exercise. m_Roofs. click Finish Roof. When you sketch a hip roof. click Align Eaves. click . under Dimensions. Creating Roofs | 201 . The eave lines display with a dimension. expand Floor Plans. Notice how the overhang adjusts to match the eave height of the first eave. When eave heights differ. 9 Select the left vertical eave to use to align the eaves. select a method to align the eaves. select Adjust Overhang to align the eaves by adjusting the overhang to match the eave height of the first eave. 1 In the Project Browser. 6 With the two gable end lines selected. 7 In the Element Properties dialog box. you can use the Align Eaves tool to align them. the adjacent eave heights must align. 10 On the Options Bar. 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 4 Select the two gable end lines (the lines without slope definition). expand Views (all). Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Next. 13 On the View toolbar. select Defines Slope. 5 On the Options Bar. 2 Select the gable roof over the garage. click . enter 800 mm for Rise/1000. click to display the model. and click OK.rvt. and double-click Garage Roof. When aligning eaves. you convert the gable roof over the garage to a hip roof and use the Align Eaves tool to adjust the eave heights. 3 On the Options Bar. 11 Select both the horizontal eave lines. on the Options Bar. This dimension is the height of the eave measured from the sketch plane. 12 On the Design Bar. you must select one eave to use to align both eaves.

202 | Chapter 7 Roofs . expand Views (all). Open m_Mansard_Roof. you constrain the current roof so it does not rise above Level 3. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 15 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. on the Options Bar. and double-click North. click Open. click the Training Files icon. 3 Select the roof and. 4 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Modify. Notice the model has four defined levels: In the next steps. In the left pane of the Open dialog box.14 If you want to save your changes.rvt located in the Metric folder. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. select Level 3 for Cutoff Level. 5 Click OK to cut the top of the roof off at level 3. expand Elevations. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. click Save As. you create a mansard roof by cutting off a hip roof at a specific level and adding another roof on top of it. Creating a Mansard Roof In this exercise. on the File menu. 1 In the Project Browser. click . Creating a Mansard Roof. under Constraints.

click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. and double-click Level 3. click Finish Roof. click . 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Lines. and click OK.6 On the View toolbar. click Modify. press TAB. 10 On the Options Bar. and select the remaining three lines. and then select Defines slope. click to display the model. click . 9 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 11 Select the four edges of the roof cutoff. expand Floor Plans. expand Views (all). enter 750 mm for Rise/1000. Next. Creating Roofs | 203 . 13 Select one of the roof cutoff lines. under Dimensions. create a new roof that starts at level 3 and completes the mansard roof. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 14 On the Options Bar. click to display the model with the complete mansard roof. 7 In the Project Browser. 15 In the Element Properties dialog box. 17 On the View toolbar.

Gutters.rvt located in the Common folder. 7 In the Type Properties dialog box. After you create a roof. open the Profiles folder. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click . you can easily create its fascia. click Save As. click Duplicate. 19 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. gutters. select M_Fascia-Built-Up. 1 On the File menu. 10 Move the cursor to the top edge of the roof. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. Open c_Condominium. and open the Roofs folder. and click OK. and soffits in Revit Building. 9 In the Type Properties dialog box. 204 | Chapter 7 Roofs .rfa. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Fascia. and soffits. click Edit/New to access the type properties of the fascia. click Load From Library ➤ Load Family. and click Open. 8 In the Name dialog box. and Soffits In this lesson. gutters. click the Training Files icon. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. on the File menu. you learn how to create roof fascia. 6 In the Element Properties dialog box. Creating Roof Fascia In this exercise.18 If you want to save your changes. and save the exercise file with a unique name. under Construction. enter Built-up Fascia. 5 On the Options Bar. click Open. Creating Fascia. you learn to use the Host Sweep command to create fascia on the roof of a condominium.rfa and M_Gutter-Cove. 3 Press CTRL. open the Metric Library folder. and click OK twice. select M_Fascia-Built-Up: 38 x 184mm x 38 x 286 for Profile. 2 In the Open dialog box.

Gutters. 13 Proceed to the next exercise.11 Select the top edge of the roof to place the fascia. 12 Select all of the roof top edges to place the fascia around the building. Creating Gutters In this exercise. Creating Gutters. and Soffits | 205 . Creating Fascia. you use the Host Sweep command to place a gutter at the bottom edge of the roof on a condominium building model.

2 On the Options Bar. 11 Continue to add gutters to the other roof edges of the building model. c_Condominium. Creating Soffits In this exercise. 3 In the Properties dialog box.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and then click . 5 Enter Cove Shape Gutter for Name. 7 Under Materials and Finishes. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. 8 In the Materials dialog box. 10 Click to place the gutter.rvt. 1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 206 | Chapter 7 Roofs . select Metal-Aluminum for Name. under Construction. you learn how to place a roof soffit. click Duplicate. select M_Gutter-Cove: 125 x 125mm for Profile. You add the soffit underneath the roof of the condominium building model that you used in the previous exercise. click in the Value field for Material. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Gutter. and click OK. Creating Soffits. click . 4 In the Type Properties dialog box. 6 In the Type Properties dialog box. and click OK three times. 9 Move the cursor to the bottom edge of the roof. click Edit/New.

1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 5 On the Design Bar. Notice that the geometry of the roof and the soffit overlap. expand Views. 6 In the Project Browser. and Soffits | 207 . and double-click Roof. click Finish Sketch. 3 On the Design Bar.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and double-click 3D. c_Condominium. 4 Select the roof. click Pick Roofs. click Roof ➤ Roof Soffit. expand Views (all). expand 3D Views.rvt. Creating Fascia. expand Floor Plans. Gutters.

9 If you want to save your changes. and then select the soffit to join them. 208 | Chapter 7 Roofs . 8 Select the roof. on the File menu.7 On the Tools menu. click Join Geometry. 10 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. click Save As. and save the exercise file with a unique name.

Stairs 8 In this tutorial. and work with a stair calculator. 209 . You learn to create special feature stairs. and semi-circular runs of stairs. add railings to your landings. you learn how to create and modify straight. u-shaped.

click Open. The level where the stairs originate displays as your current working level. Open the m_Stair_Exercise. such as treads. you can display both of the levels that you are working with. add. you learn how to create runs of typical and special feature stairs with the stairs aligned correctly between the levels in your project. 7 Using the following illustration as a guide. expand Views (all). click Stairs. click the Training Files icon. 6 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. The level where the stairs end displays as a screened background after you select it as an underlay. use the Stair Calculator to add a straight run of stairs to your drawing. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. and then modify. railings from another project. 4 Click OK.rvt file located in the Metric folder. 3 In the Element Properties dialog box. 2 On the View menu. Draw a straight stair run 5 Zoom in on the entry way. expand Floor Plans. you create and align a straight run of stairs to provide access from the first level to the second level of the building model. The outline of the level 2 floors and wall display as an underlay. click View Properties. Creating the Main Lobby Stair Run In this exercise. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. under Graphics. select Level 2 for Underlay. View the first level lobby and second level underlay 1 In the Project Browser. specify the start point for the stair run. 210 | Chapter 8 Stairs . risers and stringers.Creating Stairs In this lesson. If you add stairs to a drawing in plan view. You learn to work with different stair components. and double-click Level 1.

Creating Stairs | 211 . click Finish Sketch.8 Specify the stair run endpoint as shown. 9 On the Design Bar.

click . 11 On the Toolbar. 12 Select the front edge of the second level as the alignment line as shown. The top edge of the stair run is now aligned with the front edge of the second level. 212 | Chapter 8 Stairs . 13 Select the top edge of the stair run as the entity to align as shown.Align the top edge of the stair run with the front edge of the second level 10 Zoom in on the top of the stair run.

Align the stair run centerline with the wall centerline
14 Select the wall centerline as the alignment line as shown. TIP On the Options Bar, click Wall centerlines on the Prefer menu.

15 Select the stair run centerline as the entity to align as shown.

The stair run centerline is now aligned with the wall centerline.

16 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand 3D Views, and double-click lobby stair view.

Creating Stairs | 213

Specify new main lobby stair parameters
17 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Sections, and double-click Stair Section. 18 On the View menu, click Thin Lines.

TIP Hold the cursor over the stairs to see the risers and treads. 19 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the stair run. 20 On the Options Bar, click .

21 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 22 In the Type Properties dialog box, click Duplicate. 23 In the Name dialog box, enter Lobby Main Stairs for Name, and click OK.

214 | Chapter 8 Stairs

24 In the Type Properties dialog box, do the following:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Under Treads, enter 255 mm for Minimum Tread Depth. Under Treads, select Stair Nosing - Radius : 20 mm for Nosing Profile. Under Treads, enter 50 mm for Tread Thickness. Under Risers, clear End with Riser. Under Risers, select Straight for Riser Type. Under Risers, enter 20 mm for Riser Thickness. Under Risers, select Extend Tread Under Riser for Riser to Tread Connection. Under Stringers, select Match Level for Trim Stringers at Top. Under Stringers, enter 305 mm for Stringer Height. Under Stringers, enter 65 mm for Stringer Carriage Height. Under Stringers, enter 180 mm for Landing Carriage Height. .

25 Under Materials and Finishes, click in the Value box for Tread Material, and click

26 In the Materials dialog box, select Finishes - Interior - Carpet 1 for Name, and click OK. 27 Click in the Value box for Riser Material, and click .

28 In the Materials dialog box, select Finishes - Interior - Carpet 1 for Name, and click OK. 29 Click in the Value box for Stringer Material, and click .

30 In the Materials dialog box, select Wood - Cherry for Name, and click OK. 31 In the Type Properties dialog box, click OK. Because you specified ending the stair run with a tread instead of a riser, a warning dialog box displays, telling you that the actual number of risers is different from the desired number of risers. 32 Click OK to ignore this warning message. 33 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Dimensions, enter 1220 mm for Width. 34 Click OK.

The stair section reflects the new assigned parameters. 35 On the File menu, click Save As, and save this exercise file as Training_Stairs.rvt. 36 Proceed to the next exercise, Modifying the Main Lobby Stair Run.

Modifying the Main Lobby Stair Run
In this exercise, you use design information about a railing from another project and create special feature stairs with concave stringers from the straight run of stairs you completed in the previous exercise.

Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise, Training_Stairs.rvt.

Changing the railing type
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand 3D Views, and double-click lobby stair view. 2 On the Design Bar, click Modify, press CTRL, and select both railings. 3 In the Type Selector, select Railing : Railing with Glass Panel.

Creating Stairs | 215

NOTE If the panels do not display in the railings, go to the Type Properties of the railing. Click Edit next to the Baluster Placement parameter. If selected, clear the check box for the User Baluster Per Tread on Stairs option. Notice that the railing start post is offset above the level of the floor.

Adjust the railing start post offset
4 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select one of the railings. 5 On the Options Bar, click .

6 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 7 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, click Edit for Baluster Placement. 8 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box, under Posts, in row 1, enter -200 mm for Base offset. 9 Click OK three times. 10 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

The railing start post is now at floor level.

Change the stair shape in plan view
11 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1. 12 Zoom in on the stair run. 13 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the stair run. 14 On the Options Bar, click Edit. 15 Press and hold CTRL, select the left and right stair run boundary lines, and delete them.

216 | Chapter 8 Stairs

Draw the left boundary arc
16 On the Design Bar, click Boundary. 17 On the Options Bar, click .

18 Specify the intersection of the bottom riser and inside wall face as the arc start point as shown.

19 Specify the left end of the top riser as the arc endpoint.

Creating Stairs | 217

20 Specify a point to the left of the stair run for the arc midpoint approximately as shown.

Mirror the left boundary arc
21 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the left boundary arc. 22 On the Toolbar, click .

23 Select the stair run centerline as the mirror axis.

Draw the new first riser
24 On the Design Bar, click Modify, select the first riser and delete it.

218 | Chapter 8 Stairs

25 On the Design Bar, click Riser. 26 On the Options Bar, click .

27 Specify the lower end of the left boundary arc as the arc start point as shown.

28 Specify the lower end of the right boundary arc as the arc endpoint as shown.

29 Specify the intersection of the front wall edge and the stair run centerline as the arc midpoint as shown.

Creating Stairs | 219

30 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

31 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click lobby stair view.

The stair run from the first floor main lobby is now complete. 32 On the File menu, click Save As and save the exercise file as Training_Stairs.rvt. 33 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating the Second Floor Lobby Side Stairs.

220 | Chapter 8 Stairs

Creating the Second Floor Lobby Side Stairs
In this exercise, you create and align runs of side stairs with railings.

Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise, Training_Stairs.rvt.

Specify the lobby side stair run parameters
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2.

2 On the View menu, click View Properties. 3 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Graphics, select Level 3 for Underlay, and click OK.

4 Zoom in on the upper left of the lobby area. 5 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Stairs, and then click Stairs Properties. 6 In the Element Properties dialog box, select Lobby Main Stairs for Type, and click Edit/New. 7 In the Type Properties dialog box, click Duplicate. 8 In the Name dialog box, enter Lobby Side Stairs for Name, and click OK. 9 In the Type Properties dialog box, do the following:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Under Risers, select End with Riser. Under Risers, select None for Riser Type. Under Construction, enter -300 mm for Extend Below Base. Under Stringers, select Do not trim for Trim Stringers at Top. Under Stringers, select None for Right Stringer. Under Stringers, select None for Left Stringer. Under Stringers, select 1 for Middle Stringers. Under Stringers, enter 100 mm for Stringer Carriage Height. Under Treads, select Front, Left and Right for Apply Nosing Profile.

10 Click OK. 11 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Dimensions, enter 1220 mm for Width, and click OK.

Creating Stairs | 221

Place the lobby side stair run
12 Specify a point near the left edge of the landing for the stair run start point, and then specify a point to the left for the stair endpoint. NOTE The exact location of the stair run is not critical. You specify its final location in subsequent steps. 13 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

Move the stair run into the corner of the level 2 opening
14 Zoom in on the upper left side of the stair run. 15 On the Design Bar, click Modify, hold down CTRL, and select the stair run and both railings. 16 On the Toolbar, click .

17 Specify the upper left endpoint of the railing as the move start point as shown.

18 Specify the upper left corner of the level 2 opening as the move endpoint as shown.

The top of the stair run is now positioned in the corner of the level 2 opening.

222 | Chapter 8 Stairs

19 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand 3D Views, and double-click {3D}.

Specify a new side stair run railing type
20 On the Design Bar, click Modify, press and hold CTRL, and select both railings. 21 In the Type Selector, select Railing : 900mm Pipe. Notice that both railings are on the outside of the treads. This is because the original stairs that you duplicated, the main lobby stairs, have left and right stringers that hosted the railings. Because the lobby side stairs have only a center stringer, you need to flip the railings so they rest on the stair treads. 22 Select each railing, right-click, and click Flip Orientation.

Mirror the lobby side stair run
23 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2. 24 On the Design Bar, click Modify, press and hold CTRL, and select the side stair run and both railings. 25 On the Toolbar, click .

26 Specify the main lobby stair run centerline as the mirror axis as shown.

Creating Stairs | 223

The lobby side stair run is mirrored to the right side of the lobby.

27 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click {3D}.

The lobby side stairs and railings are now complete. 28 On the File menu, click Save. 29 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating the Level 2 Landing Railings.

Creating the Level 2 Landing Railings
In this exercise, you create and modify railings for a landing and then extend the railings from the side stairs in the previous exercise to the railing on the landing.

224 | Chapter 8 Stairs

Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, Training_Stairs.rvt.

Sketch the left side level 2 landing railing path
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2. 2 Zoom in on the level 2 landing. 3 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the left main stair railing. 4 On the Options Bar, click Edit. 5 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 6 On the Options Bar, select Chain. 7 Click to specify the sketch line start point approximately as shown.

8 Move the cursor down and specify the next sketch point as shown.

9 Move the cursor to the right and specify the sketch endpoint as shown.

Creating Stairs | 225

10 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the left railing sketch line of the main stairs. 11 Select the endpoint of the sketch line for the railing as shown.

12 Drag the arc sketch line endpoint up to the right end of the new horizontal sketch line as shown.

13 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

14 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand 3D Views, and double-click Level 2 Landing.

226 | Chapter 8 Stairs

15 Zoom in and on the View toolbar, click

to reorient the view to look as shown.

Create the right side level 2 landing railing
16 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2. 17 Select the right lobby main stair railing and delete it. 18 Select the left lobby main stair railing. 19 On the Toolbar, click .

20 Specify the lobby main stair centerline as the mirror axis as shown.

The new lobby main stair and level 2 landing railing layout is mirrored to the right side of the stair run.

21 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click Level 2 Landing.

Creating Stairs | 227

Extend the lobby side stair railing onto the landing
22 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2. 23 Zoom in on the left side of the level 2 landing. 24 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the upper lobby side stair railing.

25 On Options Bar, click Edit. 26 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 27 Click to specify the right endpoint of the railing sketch line for the line start point as shown.

28 Move the cursor 440 mm to the right and specify the sketch line endpoint as shown.

228 | Chapter 8 Stairs

29 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 30 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click {3D} and zoom in on the railing extension.

The railing now extends onto the landing.

Modify the railing extension parameters
31 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the extended railing. 32 On the Options Bar, click .

33 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 34 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, select No Connector for Tangent Joins. 35 Click OK twice.

Creating Stairs | 229

36 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the extended railing. 37 On the Options Bar, click .

38 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 39 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, select Add Vertical/Horizontal Segments for Tangent Joins, and click Edit for Baluster Placement. 40 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box, under Posts, in row 2, select None for Baluster Family. 41 Click OK three times.

42 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the extended railing. 43 On the Options Bar, click Edit. 44 Select the 440 mm railing extension sketch line segment. 45 On the Options Bar, select Custom for Height Correction and enter 170 mm. 46 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

230 | Chapter 8 Stairs

47 On the File menu, click Save. 48 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating the Emergency Exit Stair Run.

Creating the Emergency Exit Stair Run
In this exercise, you create a u-shaped run of stairs in plan view, and then add a railing and extend the stairs to another level in a three-dimensional (3D) view. When you are adding stairs that turn corners in plan view, it is easier to align the stairs if you mark the edge of the landing with a reference plane first.

Dataset
Continue to use the dataset from the previous exercise, Training_Stairs.rvt.

Draw a reference plane
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1. 2 Zoom in on the stairwell on the left side of the building.

3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Ref Plane. 4 On the Options Bar, click and enter 528 mm for Offset.

5 Move your cursor over the left edge of the exterior wall and place a vertical reference plane to the left of the exterior wall face as shown.

Creating Stairs | 231

18 Click OK three times. Specify the exit stairs parameters 6 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 16 Under Materials and Finishes. 17 In the Materials dialog box.5 mm as indicated by the temporary dimension. select Finishes . select Metal . select Metal . and click OK. select for Stringer Material Value. and click OK. select for Tread Material Value.Paint Finish. 14 Under Materials and Finishes. Draw the exit stairs 19 Click to specify the midpoint of the landing edge as the stair run start point as shown. and then click Edit/New. 7 In the Element Properties dialog box.Paint Finish. 9 In the Type Properties dialog box. 12 Under Materials and Finishes. is at 864. 13 In the Materials dialog box. enter Exit Stairs for Name. 11 In the Type Properties dialog box. Dark Gray Matte for Name. click Stairs. 232 | Chapter 8 Stairs . 8 Under Dimensions. Dark Gray Matte for Name. click Duplicate. under Treads. enter 915 mm for Width. and click OK. select 180mm max riser 275mm tread for Type. enter 255 mm for Minimum Tread Depth. 10 In the Name dialog box. and then click Stairs Properties. measured from the exterior wall centerline. 15 In the Materials dialog box. select for Riser Material Value.Exterior: Precast Concrete Panels for Name.The new reference plane. 20 Move the cursor up 2040 mm and specify the stair run next point as shown.

21 Move the cursor to the right and specify the intersection of the next-to-last riser line and the reference plane as the stair run next point as shown. The exit stair run layout is complete. Creating Stairs | 233 . 22 Drag the cursor down and specify the intersection of the landing edge and the reference plane as the stair run endpoint as shown.

View the exit stairs 24 In the Project Browser. 234 | Chapter 8 Stairs . 26 Hold CTRL and select two of the exterior walls of the exit stairwell. and double-click Exit Stairs. expand Views (all). and the exit door. click Finish Sketch.23 On the Design Bar. 25 Zoom in on the exit stairwell. expand 3D Views.

31 On the Options Bar. 35 Click OK three times. hold down CTRL. in row 2. click Edit for Baluster Placement. select Railing : 900mm Pipe. click .Round1 : 25mm for Baluster Family. and select both railings. click Edit/New. click Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Object. The selected objects are hidden. click Modify. under Posts. Creating Stairs | 235 . 30 In the Type Selector. Specify a new railing type 28 Zoom in on the stair run. under Construction. 34 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box.27 On the View Control Bar. and the exit stairs are visible. 33 In the Type Properties dialog box. 29 On the Design Bar. 32 In the Element Properties dialog box. select M_Baluster .

Turn on the display of the exit stairwell exterior walls and exit door 39 On the View Control Bar. Creating a Semi-circular Exterior Stair Run. 38 In the Element Properties dialog box. 37 On the Options Bar. and click OK. click . select Level 3 for Multistory Top Level. click Modify. 41 Proceed to the next exercise. click Save. you create a semi-circular run of stairs and then modify the winders and the railing.Add another exit stairs flight 36 On the Design Bar. Creating a Semi-circular Exterior Stair Run In this exercise. click Hide/Isolate ➤ Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate. under Constraints. 40 On the File menu. and select the exit stairs. 236 | Chapter 8 Stairs .

Under Risers. Under Stringers.Cast-in-Place Concrete for Name. Under Risers. Under Risers. select 9 In the Materials dialog box. Training_Stairs. 15 On the Options Bar. 7 In the Type Properties dialog box. 6 In the name dialog box. and then click Stairs Properties. click Run. and double-click Level 1. click OK. enter 5 mm for Riser Thickness. click Stairs. 11 In the Materials dialog box. select Extend Tread Under Riser for Riser to Tread Connection. select Concrete . and click OK. 4 In the Element Properties dialog box. Under Construction. Under Stringers.Cast-in-Place Concrete for Name. click Duplicate.rvt. Under Treads. TIP You can use the shortcut key SM to snap only to midpoints. enter 200 mm for Landing Carriage Height. enter Semicircular Stairs for Name. enter 200 mm for Maximum Riser Height. Specify the semi-circular stair run parameters 1 In the Project Browser. 8 Under Materials and Finishes. 2 Zoom in on the exterior concrete pad above the north exterior wall of the building. enter 1 mm for Tread Thickness. enter 0 mm for Landing Overlap. expand Floor Plans. select for Monolithic Material Value. select 16 for Desired Number of Risers. 12 In the Type Properties dialog box. select 180mm max riser 275mm tread for Type. enter 0 mm for Nosing Length. and click Edit/New. and click OK. Under Treads. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Draw the semi-circular stair run 14 On the Design Bar.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Creating Stairs | 237 . select Monolithic Stairs. enter 300 mm for Stringer Carriage Height. 13 In the Element Properties dialog box under Dimensions. click . expand Views (all). 5 In the Type Properties dialog box. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Construction. 10 In the Type Properties dialog box. and click OK. 16 Click to specify the midpoint of the concrete slab edge as the stair run center point as shown. enter 1300 mm for Width. select Concrete . and click OK. for Tread Material Value.

18 On the keyboard. and click to specify the arc end point. and press ENTER. enter 1310 for Radius as shown.17 Drag the cursor to the right along the slab edge. as shown. 238 | Chapter 8 Stairs . The semi-circular stair run is complete. 19 Move the cursor counterclockwise until the display indicates that there are 0 risers remaining.

20 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. expand Views (all). and double-click Exterior Stairs. Modify the semi-circular stair run parameters 21 In the Project Browser. Creating Stairs | 239 . expand 3D Views. TIP You may need to select the outer railing and flip its orientation to align it to the pad.

The underside of winder parameter is smooth. 22 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the stair run. 23 On the Options Bar, click .

24 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 25 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, select Stepped for Underside of Winder. 26 Click OK twice.

The underside of winder parameter is stepped with no overlap. 27 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the stair run. 28 On the Options Bar, click .

29 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 30 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, enter 300 mm for Landing Overlap. 31 Click OK twice.

240 | Chapter 8 Stairs

The underside of winder parameter is stepped with a 300 mm overlap.

Specify new semi-circular stair run railing parameters
32 On the Design Bar, click Modify, press and hold CTRL, and select both railings. 33 In the Type Selector, select Railing : 900mm Pipe.

34 If you want to save your changes, on the File menu, click Save. 35 On the File menu, click Close.

Working with the Stair Calculator
In this exercise, you create two sets of stairs side by side within a new project. The first set of stairs uses the default settings to calculate the slope. The second set of stairs uses the stair calculator to calculate the slope of the stairs. After creating both stairs, you add dimensions to them to see how the tread depth and stair slope adjust based on the changes made in the stair calculator.

Dataset
■ ■ ■

On the File menu, click New ➤  Project. In the New Project dialog box, under Template File, click Browse. Open the DefaultMetric.rte file located in the Metric Templates folder.

Creating Stairs | 241

Create a set of stairs using the default settings
1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Stairs. 2 On the Design Bar, click Stairs Properties. 3 In the Element Properties dialog box, select Industrial and Assembly for Type, and click OK. 4 In the center of the Level 1 Floor Plan, click to specify the stair run start point, move the cursor vertically upward until the stair risers are complete, and click to specify the end of the stair run.

5 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 6 On the View Toolbar, click .

When you created these stairs, the slope was calculated automatically. In the steps that follow, you create a set of stairs using the stair calculator to define the stair slope.

242 | Chapter 8 Stairs

Create a set of stairs using the stair calculator
7 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1. 8 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Stairs. 9 On the Design Bar, click Stairs Properties. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box, select Industrial and Assembly for Type, and click Edit/New. 11 In the Type Properties dialog box, click Duplicate. 12 In the Name dialog box, enter Industrial and Assembly - Calculated Slope, and click OK. 13 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, click Edit for Calculation Rules. 14 In the Stair Calculator dialog box, select Use Stair Calculator for slope calculation. The Stair Calculator computes actual tread depth using the following Calculation Rule equation: X * Rise + Y * Depth = Z X is the value to multiply the actual riser height indicated by the stair properties; Y is the value to multiply the actual tread depth, and Z is the result that lies within threshold minimum and maximum values range based on either design standards or building codes. 15 Enter 680.0 mm for Z, enter 695.0 mm for Maximum Result for Stair Calculator, and enter 670.0 mm for Minimum Result for Stair Calculator. 16 Click OK. 17 In the Type Properties dialog box, click OK. 18 In the Element Properties dialog box, click OK. 19 To the right of the stairs you created previously, click to specify the stair run start point, and move the cursor vertically upward until the stair risers are complete. NOTE When specifying the stair run starting point, try to align it with the bottom of the stairs you created previously. This allows you to make a better comparison of the slope when you view the stairs together in a 3D view at the end of the exercise.

20 After all the risers have been created, click to specify the stair run end point. 21 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. Notice the stairs created using the stair calculator have a longer run than the first set of stairs you created. 22 On the View menu, click Zoom  ➤  Zoom in Region, and draw a zoom region around both sets of stairs. 23 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension. 24 On both sets of stairs, add dimensions to the bottom tread and the stair run as shown.

Creating Stairs | 243

25 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 26 Select the right stair run, Industrial and Assembly - Calculated Slope. 27 On the Options Bar, click .

28 In the Element Properties dialog box, notice the Actual Tread Depth is 332.2 mm. Within this project, the project units are set to display length dimension values on screen rounded to the nearest 1 mm. Even more exact dimension values are displayed to the nearest .1 mm where appropriate in the Element Properties dialog box. In this case, the actual tread depth dimension is 332.2 mm; it becomes 332 mm when rounded to the nearest 1 mm in the drawing area. The actual tread depth is determined by using the following Calculation Rule equation derivation: Tread = (Z - X * Riser) / Y Substituting with the current values (X = 2, Y = 1, Z = 680 mm and Riser = 173.9 mm) yields: Tread = (680 - (2 * 173.9))/1 Tread = (680 - 347.8) Tread = 332.2 mm 29 In the Element Properties dialog box, click OK. 30 On the View Toolbar, click 31 On the View Toolbar, click . and spin the model as shown.

244 | Chapter 8 Stairs

Notice the difference between the slope of the two stairs. 32 On the File menu, click Close. You can close the project file without saving your changes. This completes the Working with the Stair Calculator exercise. This also completes the Stairs lesson.

Creating Stairs | 245

246 | Chapter 8 Stairs

Walls

9

247

Creating Walls
In this lesson, you learn about walls. Sketch wall segments, work with compound walls, and create new wall types. Create curtain and foundation walls, join walls to floors, and assign wall top and bottom attachments.

Sketching Walls
In this exercise, you use sketching tools to draw and modify straight and arc wall segments, and then add a floor with an opening.

Draw the first exterior wall segment
1 On the File menu, click New ➤ Project.
■ ■ ■ ■

In the New Project dialog box, under Template file, click Browse. In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog box, click the training files icon. Select the m_Tutorial_Default.rte file located in the Metric folder, and click Open. In the New Project dialog box, click OK.

2 Zoom in on the center of the viewing window. 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Wall. 4 Specify the wall segment start point, and drag the cursor to the right 2900 mm.

5 Click to specify the wall segment endpoint and select the dimension. 6 Enter 3000 mm for the new horizontal dimension.

7 Press ENTER.

The wall segment length is updated with the new dimension.

Draw the second exterior wall segment
8 Specify the right endpoint of the first wall segment as the second wall segment start point.

9 Drag the cursor down 2100 mm, and click to specify the wall segment endpoint.

Both vertical and horizontal dimensions display.

248 | Chapter 9 Walls

Draw the third and fourth exterior wall segments
10 Specify the lower end of the second wall segment as the third wall segment start point. 11 Press and hold SHIFT, drag the cursor to the right 2400 mm, and click to specify the third wall segment endpoint.

NOTE Hold down SHIFT as you drag the cursor to constrain your drawing direction orthogonally. 12 Specify the right end of the third wall segment as the fourth wall segment start point. 13 Hold down SHIFT, drag the cursor up 2100 mm, and click to specify the fourth wall segment endpoint.

Stretch the fourth exterior wall segment
14 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 15 Select the fourth wall segment and select the upper drag control.

Observe that the first wall segment has an assigned lock icon that references the alignment of the first wall segment centerline and the fourth wall segment endpoint. 16 Drag the cursor up to 3600 mm.

Only the fourth wall segment is stretched. 17 Select the drag control again, and drag the cursor down to 2100 mm. 18 Click the first wall segment lock icon to lock the alignment of the first wall segment centerline and the fourth wall segment endpoint.

Creating Walls | 249

19 Select the drag control again, and drag the cursor up to 2900 mm.

Observe that the first wall segment centerline and the fourth wall segment endpoint maintain their alignment. The second wall segment stretched as well to accommodate the new position of the first wall segment. Locking the alignment ensures that this relationship between wall segments is maintained.

Draw the fifth and sixth exterior wall segments
20 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Wall. 21 On the Options Bar, select Chain. 22 Specify the upper end of the fourth wall segment as the fifth wall segment start point. 23 Drag the cursor to the right 5500 mm, and click to specify the fifth wall segment endpoint.

24 Drag the cursor down 5500 mm, and click to specify the sixth wall segment endpoint.

250 | Chapter 9 Walls

Draw the seventh, eighth, and ninth exterior wall segments
25 Drag the cursor to the left 7000 mm, and click to specify the seventh wall segment endpoint.

26 Drag the cursor down 2100 mm, and click to specify the eighth wall segment endpoint.

27 Drag the cursor to the left 3900 mm, and click to specify the ninth wall segment endpoint.

Move the eighth wall segment
28 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the eighth wall segment. 29 Drag the cursor to the right until the centerline of the eighth wall segment aligns with the fourth wall segment centerline.

Creating Walls | 251

30 Click the eighth wall segment lock icon to lock the alignment of the eighth wall segment centerline and the fourth wall segment centerline. 31 Select the eighth wall segment, and drag the cursor to the right 2100 mm to specify the new wall segment location

Observe that the eighth wall segment centerline and the fourth wall segment centerline maintain their alignment. The third, fifth, seventh, and ninth wall segments are stretched as well to accommodate the new position of the eighth wall segment. Locking the alignment ensures that this relationship between wall segments is maintained.

Draw an arc wall segment
32 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Wall. 33 On the Options Bar, click .

34 Specify the left end of the ninth wall segment as the arc start point.

252 | Chapter 9 Walls

35 Specify the left end of the first wall segment as the arc endpoint. NOTE Do not snap the cursor to 180 degrees.

36 Move the cursor along the preview arc wall, and click to place the arc wall. 37 Select the radius value, and enter 4900 mm.

38 Press ENTER.

Creating Walls | 253

Move wall segments by modifying dimensions
39 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the fourth wall segment. 40 Select the 3200 mm dimension value, and enter 4000.

41 Press ENTER.

254 | Chapter 9 Walls

Both the fourth and eighth wall segments are shifted 800 mm to the right.

Draw a diagonal exterior wall segment
42 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Wall. 43 Specify the midpoint of the fifth wall segment as the diagonal wall segment start point.

44 Specify the midpoint of the sixth wall segment as the diagonal wall segment endpoint.

45 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 46 On the Toolbar, click .

47 Select the left side of the fifth wall segment as the first wall segment to trim.

48 Select the diagonal wall segment as the wall segment to trim to. 49 Select the lower side of the sixth wall segment as the next wall segment to trim.

Creating Walls | 255

50 Select the diagonal wall segment as the wall segment to trim to.

Draw a floor by picking walls
51 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Floor, and then click Pick Walls. 52 Place the cursor over one of the walls, press TAB, and click to select the entire chain of walls.

All of the wall segments are highlighted. 53 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

Sketch a rectangular floor cutout
54 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Opening. 55 In the Opening Placement Options dialog box, select the first option, and click OK. 56 Place the cursor over the edge of the floor until it highlights, and click.

256 | Chapter 9 Walls

57 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 58 On the Options Bar, click .

59 Using the following illustration as a guide, specify an approximate location for the first corner of the rectangular floor opening.

60 Specify the second corner of the rectangular floor opening, creating a 1800 mm X 3000 mm floor opening.

TIP The cursor snaps to dimension values based on the zoom of the view. To get the rectangle to the exact dimensions, you may need to zoom in. 61 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 62 On the Toolbar, click .

63 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 64 On the Toolbar, click .

65 In the Dynamic View dialog box, select Spin, and then, while holding the left mouse button down, move the cursor in the viewing window to orient the view as shown.

Creating Walls | 257

This completes the Sketching Walls exercise.

Working with Compound Walls
In this exercise, you work with compound walls. Convert generic wall styles to new custom wall styles, add dimensions, edit fill patterns that display in section views, and apply surface patterns.

Dataset
■ ■ ■

On the File menu, click Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog box, click the Training Files icon. Open the m_Gallery.rvt file located in the Metric folder.

Access wall properties
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1.

2 Zoom in on the upper part of the floor plan. 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Modify. 4 Select the 200 mm exterior wall.

258 | Chapter 9 Walls

GRG (Glass Reinforced Gypsum).Interior . 7 In the Type Properties dialog box. click .Exterior Insulation and Finish System. Click in the Material field. do the following: ■ ■ Click in the Function field. Enter 50 mm for Thickness. and click OK. click Insert twice. select Wood . under Name. click . and select Finish 1 [4]. and in the Materials dialog box. Enter 15 mm for Thickness.EIFS . Click in the Material field. click Edit/New.5 On the Options Bar. under Layers. and click Up. enter 200 mm Stud Wall for Name. 13 In row 1. 8 In the Name dialog box. Click in the Material field. and select Structure [1]. select Finishes . Click OK. 10 In the Edit Assembly dialog box. ■ Creating Walls | 259 . under Name. and in the Materials dialog box. ■ 15 In row 5. 12 Select row 3. Add two layers to the new wall type 9 In the Type Properties dialog box. Click OK. click Click OK. and click Down twice. and in the Materials dialog box. 11 Select row 2. ■ 14 In row 3.Stud Layer. click . . click Duplicate. select Finishes . do the following: ■ ■ Click in the Function field. 6 In the Element Properties dialog box. under Name. click Edit for Structure. Enter 135 mm for Thickness. and select Finish 2 [5].Exterior . do the following: ■ ■ Click in the Function field.

17 Click OK three times. select Basic Wall : 200 mm Stud Wall. click Dimension. expand Families. 19 Zoom in on the left end of the new 200 mm Stud wall segment. click Detail Level ➤ Medium. expand Walls. select Wall centerlines for Prefer. The style of the selected walls is updated in the building model. 21 Select Generic . 26 Select the upper horizontal wall segment centerline as the first dimension point. 24 On the Design Bar. 260 | Chapter 9 Walls . and expand Basic Wall. 25 On the Options Bar. Specify the view detail level 18 On the View Control Bar. and click Select All Instances. 22 In the Type Selector. Assign the new wall style to the remaining exterior walls 20 In the Project Browser.200mm.16 Click Preview. right-click. Add a wall centerline dimension 23 Zoom in on the lower part of the floor plan.

select Wall faces for Prefer. The vertical wall centerline to centerline dimension displays. Creating Walls | 261 .27 Select the lower horizontal wall segment centerline as the second dimension point. 28 Specify a point to the left as the dimension location point. Add a wall face dimension 29 On the Options Bar. 30 Select the upper horizontal wall segment exterior face as the first dimension point.

34 Select the left vertical wall segment exterior core face as the first dimension point. 262 | Chapter 9 Walls . The vertical wall exterior face to exterior face dimension displays. select Faces of core for Prefer. Add a wall core face dimension 33 On the Options Bar.31 Select the lower horizontal wall segment exterior face as the second dimension point. 32 Specify a point to the right as the dimension location point.

35 Select the right vertical wall segment exterior core face as the second dimension point. 36 Specify a point below as the dimension location point. Creating Walls | 263 . The horizontal wall core face to core face dimension displays.

Assign the new gypsum fill pattern to a wall layer in section view 44 On the Settings menu. select Gypsum. Assign a masonry surface pattern in a 3D view 49 In the Project Browser. 42 In the New Pattern dialog box. 38 On the Settings menu. and click Import. 47 In the Materials dialog box. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Sand . click Fill Patterns.pat. and click OK.Glass Reinforced Gypsum. 40 In the New Pattern dialog box. and click Open. 39 In the Fill Patterns dialog box. 43 Click OK twice. 264 | Chapter 9 Walls . 41 In the Import dialog box. click OK. 50 On the View Control Bar.GRG . Enter 0.Dense for Import. click New. 48 Zoom in on the gypsum board representation in the wall section. and double-click Callout of Section 3. select Finishes . select Custom. navigate to \Program Files\Autodesk Revit Building\Data. expand Sections (Callout 1). click Materials. 46 In the Fill Patterns dialog box.25 for Import scale.Create a custom gypsum fill pattern 37 In the Project Browser. The new Gypsum pattern is assigned to the gypsum wall board representation in section view. select revit. click for Pattern.Interior . Enter Gypsum for Name. and under Cut Pattern. expand 3D Views and double-click {3D}. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 45 In the Materials dialog box.

51 On the Settings menu, click Materials. 52 In the Materials dialog box, select Masonry - Concrete Blocks, and under Surface Pattern, click 53 In the Fill Patterns dialog box, select Model for Pattern Type, select Block 8x16, and click OK. 54 In the Materials dialog box, click OK. 55 Select the low circular wall segment. 56 On the Options Bar, click . for Pattern.

57 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 58 In the Type Properties dialog box, click Edit for Structure. 59 In the Edit Assembly dialog box, under Layers, in row 2, click 60 In the Materials dialog box, select Masonry - Concrete Blocks. 61 Click OK four times. 62 Zoom in on the low wall segment. for Material.

Align a masonry surface pattern in an elevation view
63 In the Project Browser, expand Elevations, and double-click East.

64 Zoom in on the right retaining wall.

Creating Walls | 265

65 Zoom in on the upper left corner of the wall. 66 On the Toolbar, click .

67 Select the building wall edge as the alignment reference.

68 Select the CMU edge as the line to align.

The upper left corner of the CMU pattern is now aligned with the upper left corner of the retaining wall. This completes the Working with Compound Walls exercise.

Working with Vertically Compound Walls
In this exercise, you modify vertically compound walls and create and modify wall layers in sections view.

266 | Chapter 9 Walls

Dataset
■ ■ ■

On the File menu, click Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog box, click the Training Files icon. Open the c_Townhouse.rvt file located in the Common folder.

Access the exterior wall properties
1 On the Settings menu, click Project Units. 2 In the Project Units dialog box, click the button under Format next to Length. 3 In the Format dialog box, select Millimeters for Units, and click OK. 4 Click OK in the Project Units dialog box. 5 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the right front exterior wall.

6 On the Options Bar, click

.

7 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 8 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, click Edit for Structure. 9 If the Preview pane is not displayed on the left side of the Edit Assembly dialog box, click Preview. 10 On the Preview pane, ensure that Section: Modify type attributes is selected for View.

The wall section displays at its default sample height of 6096 mm.

Creating Walls | 267

Assign split regions to the wall section
11 Right-click in the preview window and click Zoom In Region. 12 Zoom in on the bottom of the wall section. 13 Under Modify Vertical Structure (Section Preview only), click Split Region. 14 Specify a point up 300 mm from the bottom of the wall on Layer 1: Masonry - Brick as the first split point.

15 Specify a point up 300 mm from the first split point on Layer 1: Masonry - Brick as the second split point.

Merge split regions in the wall section
16 Under Modify Vertical Structure (Section Preview only), click Merge Regions. 17 Select the upper split line as the region to merge.

268 | Chapter 9 Walls

The previously split regions are now merged.

Adjust the split line location
18 Under Modify Vertical Structure (Section Preview only), click Modify. 19 Select the split line, and click the 300 mm dimension value. 20 Enter 3680 mm.

Creating Walls | 269

21 Press ENTER. 22 Zoom out on the wall section.

The split line now occurs 3680 mm above the bottom of the wall.

Adjust the sample wall height
23 Scroll up to view the top of the wall. 24 Move your cursor over the top of the wall and press TAB until the outer boundary of the wall is highlighted (watch the Status Bar in the lower-left corner of the interface to be sure you are highlighting the outer boundary), and then click to display the lock icon and the 6096 mm dimension value. 25 Click the 6096 mm dimension value, and enter 5500 mm.

270 | Chapter 9 Walls

26 Press ENTER. The sample wall height is now 5500 mm.

Add another split line
27 Zoom in on the existing split line. 28 Under Modify Vertical Structure (Section Preview only), click Split Region. 29 Specify a point up 240 mm from the existing split line on Layer 1: Masonry - Brick as the new split point.

The new split line now occurs 240 mm above the previous split line.

Creating Walls | 271

Add a new layer to the wall style
30 Under Layers, select row 1, and click Insert. 31 In row 1, select Finish 1 [4] for Function. 32 Select for Material.

33 In the Materials dialog box, under Name, select Masonry Brick - Soldier Course, and click OK. 34 In the Edit Assembly dialog box, under Layers, select row 1. 35 Under Modify Vertical Structure (Section Preview only), click Assign Layers. 36 On the Preview pane, select the 240 mm high region between the split lines as shown. Place the cursor at the bottom of the region to select it.

37 Click OK three times. 38 Zoom in on the front brick wall.

The soldier course displays in the exterior wall.

272 | Chapter 9 Walls

Specify allowance for layer extension
39 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the front brick wall. 40 On the Options Bar, click .

41 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 42 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, click Edit for Structure. 43 In the Edit Assembly dialog box, on the Preview pane, zoom in on the bottom of the wall. 44 Under Modify Vertical Structure (Section Preview only), click Modify. 45 Select the outer boundary of the wall at the masonry brick layer.

46 Click the lock icon to unlock the masonry brick layer for layer extension. 47 Click OK three times.

Modify extended layers
48 In the Project Browser, expand Sections (Callout 1), and double-click Wall Detail. 49 Select the brick wall.

50 Using the drag control at the bottom of the brick wall, drag it down into the concrete wall approximately as shown.

Creating Walls | 273

51 On the Tools menu, click Join Geometry. 52 Select the brick layer of the wall as the first layer to join.

53 Select the concrete foundation wall as the second layer to join.

The concrete foundation wall is cut away to accommodate the brick course.

54 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the brick wall. 55 On the Options Bar, click .

56 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Constraints, enter -150 mm for Base Extension Distance, and click OK.

274 | Chapter 9 Walls

Add a wall sweep
57 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the brick wall. 58 On the Options Bar, click .

59 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 60 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, click Edit for Structure. 61 In the Edit Assembly dialog box, under Modify Vertical Structure (Section Preview only), click Sweeps. 62 In the Wall Sweeps dialog box, click Add and do the following:
■ ■

Select Sill : Sill for Profile. In the Material field, click Concrete. Click OK. , and in the Materials dialog box, under Name, select Concrete - Cast-in-Place

■ ■ ■ ■

Enter 3860 mm for Distance. Select Base for From. Select Exterior for Side. Enter -90 mm for Offset.

63 Click OK. 64 On the Preview pane, zoom in on the applied wall sweep in the wall section.

65 Click OK three times. 66 In the Project Browser, under Views (all), under 3D Views, double-click 3D perspective. 67 Zoom in on the front wall, and view the sill.

Creating Walls | 275

This completes the Working with Vertically Compound Walls exercise.

Joining Walls to Floors
In this exercise, you work with joining walls and floors in section view.

Dataset
■ ■ ■

On the File menu, click Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog box, click the Training Files icon. Open the c_Floor_wall_joins.rvt file located in the Common folder.

Draw the level 2 50 mmx255 mm wood joist floor
1 On the Settings menu, click Project Units. 2 In the Project Units dialog box, click the button under Format next to Length. 3 In the Format dialog box, select Millimeters for Units, and click OK. 4 Click OK in the Project Units dialog box. 5 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2.

6 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Floor. 7 On the Options Bar, select Extend into wall (to core). 8 For all four walls, select the outer edge of the wall core. Use the flip arrows to toggle the selection. TIP You can select each wall or use the TAB key to select the chain of walls.

276 | Chapter 9 Walls

9 On the Design Bar, click Floor Properties. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box, select Wood Joist 255 mm for Type, and click OK. 11 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 12 When prompted to cut the geometry from the walls, click Yes. 13 In the Project Browser, expand Sections, and double-click Section 1. 14 Zoom in on the wall at Level 2.

The level 2 floor extends into the wall structural layer.

Draw the level 1 50 mmx255 mm wood joist floor
15 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Floor. 17 On the Options Bar, select Extend into wall (to core). 18 Select all four walls on the centerline (click each wall while pressing Ctrl).

19 On the Design Bar, click Floor Properties. 20 In the Element Properties dialog box, verify that the Type is Wood Joist 255mm, and click OK. 21 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 22 When prompted to attach the walls to the bottom of the floor, click Yes. 23 In the Project Browser, expand Sections, and double-click Section 1. 24 Zoom in on the wall at Level 1.

Creating Walls | 277

The foundation wall is trimmed by the level 1 floor. This completes the Joining Walls to Floors exercise.

Working with Foundation Walls
In this exercise, you create and modify concrete foundation walls and footings.

Dataset
■ ■ ■

On the File menu, click Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog box, click the Training Files icon. Open the c_Wall_Functions.rvt file located in the Common folder.

1 On the Settings menu, click Project Units. 2 In the Project Units dialog box, click the button under Format next to Length. 3 In the Format dialog box, select Millimeters for Units, and click OK. 4 Click OK in the Project Units dialog box. 5 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1.

6 On the View menu, click View Properties. 7 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Graphics, select T.O. Footing for Underlay, and click OK. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Wall. 9 In the Type Selector, select Basic Wall : Foundation - 305 mm Concrete. 10 On the Options Bar, do the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Select T.O. Footing for Depth. Select Finish Face: Exterior for Loc Line. Select Chain. Enter 305mm for Offset.

11 Specify the outside upper left corner of the building as the first foundation wall segment start point, and then specify the outside lower left corner of the building as the first foundation wall segment endpoint.

278 | Chapter 9 Walls

12 Proceed in a counterclockwise direction and draw the remaining five foundation wall segments. Snap to the outside corners at each foundation wall segment endpoint. 13 In the Project Browser, expand 3D Views, and double-click {3D}.

Create a new 610 mm concrete footing wall type
14 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click T.O. Footing.

Creating Walls | 279

15 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Wall. 16 In the Type Selector, select Basic Wall : Foundation - 305 mm Concrete. 17 On the Options Bar, click .

18 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 19 In the Type Properties dialog box, click Duplicate. 20 In the Name dialog box, enter Foundation - 610mm Concrete for Name, and click OK. 21 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, click Edit for Structure. 22 In the Edit Assembly dialog box, under Layers, in row 2, enter 610 mm for Thickness.

23 Click OK three times.

Draw the 610 mm concrete footing
24 On the Options Bar, do the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Select Unconnected for Depth and enter 305 mm. Select Finish Face: Exterior for Loc Line. Select Chain. Enter 460 mm for Offset.

25 Specify the outside upper left corner of the foundation as the first footing wall segment start point and then specify the outside lower left corner of the foundation as the first footing wall segment endpoint. If a warning about the objects not being visible in the current view is displayed, close the warning dialog.

280 | Chapter 9 Walls

26 Proceed in a counterclockwise direction and draw the remaining five footing wall segments. Snap to the outside corners at each footing wall segment endpoint.

27 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click {3D}.

The concrete foundation walls and footings are now complete. This completes the Working with Foundation Walls exercise.

Working with Wall Wraps
In this exercise, you assign different wall wrap conditions to a window opening.

Dataset
■ ■ ■

On the File menu, click Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog box, click the Training Files icon. Open the c_Wall Functions.rvt file located in the Common folder.

Creating Walls | 281

Assign window wall closure parameters
1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1. 2 Zoom in on one of the level 1 windows.

Neither the interior nor the exterior wall components wrap around the window opening. 3 Select the window. 4 On the Options Bar, click .

5 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 6 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, select By host for Wall Closure. 7 Click OK twice.

Assign an interior wall wrap parameter
8 Select the wall. 9 On the Options Bar, click .

10 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 11 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, click Edit for Structure. 12 In the Edit Assembly dialog box, under Default Wrapping, select Interior for At Inserts. 13 Click OK three times.

The interior metal stud wall with gypsum board now wraps around the window opening.

Assign an exterior wall wrap parameter
14 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the wall. 15 On the Options Bar, click .

16 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 17 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, click Edit for Structure. 18 In the Edit Assembly dialog box, under Default Wrapping, select Exterior for At Inserts. Both would wrap gypsum and brick. Exterior wraps only the brick. 19 Click OK three times.

282 | Chapter 9 Walls

The exterior brick wall now wraps around the window opening. This completes the Working with Wall Wraps exercise.

Assigning Wall Bottom and Top Attachments
In this exercise, you assign wall bottom attachments to a curved floor in 3D view and wall top attachments to reference planes in elevation view.

Dataset
■ ■ ■

On the File menu, click Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog box, click the Training Files icon. Open the c_Attach_Top_Bottom.rvt file located in the Common folder.

Attach wall bottoms to floor surface
1 Select all four wall segments.

2 On the Options Bar, click Attach for Top/Base, and select Base for Attach Wall. 3 Select the floor as the object to attach to.

The walls are projected down to attach to the floor.

Creating Walls | 283

6 On the Options Bar. The south wall is projected up to attach to the first reference plane. 5 Select the south wall. click Attach for Top/Base. expand Views (all). and double-click South. and select Top for Attach Wall. 284 | Chapter 9 Walls .Attach wall tops to reference planes 4 In the Project Browser. expand Elevations. 7 Select the first reference plane as the object to attach to.

and select Top for Attach Wall. 10 On the Options Bar. 9 Select the north wall. Creating Walls | 285 . double-click North.8 In the Project Browser. click Attach for Top/Base. under Elevations. The north wall is projected up to attach to the second reference plane. 11 Select the second reference plane as the object to attach to.

286 | Chapter 9 Walls .12 In the Project Browser. expand 3D Views and double-click {3D}. This also completes the Walls lesson. This completes the Assigning Wall Bottom and Top Attachments exercise.

and they are not windows. 287 . or you can use a specific curtain system command. to resize the system. A typical curtain system comprises a wall. They are typically not load-bearing and are not cut for doors or windows. they can usually include mullions and have glazed panels. and mullions. You can add curtain systems with the wall command. Like windows. To switch panel types. grid lines. Like walls. This affects the entire curtain system.Curtain Systems 10 Curtain systems are not walls. and you can change these elements individually. For example. curtain systems are usually assembled on site as a single unit. you need to change the length of the wall. you select the grid. panel. they can define space and separate the exterior from the interior. To change grids. Unlike windows. you need to select a panel.

Creating a curtain system using the wall command 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click the Training Files icon. expand Views (all).rvt file located in the Metric folder. 1 In the Project Browser. you further develop the building information model by creating a flat curtain system at the entrance of the model. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. expand Floor Plans. you create a curtain system using the wall command. 288 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems . Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. click Curtain Wall : Curtain Wall 1. Creating an Entrance In this exercise. This type of curtain system is also referred to as a curtain wall.Flat Curtain System In this lesson. Open the m_Curtain_Walls. 5 Start the curtain system where shown. click Open. and double-click Ground Floor. 2 Zoom in on Grid F where it meets the arc in the floor. This floor edge will be the entrance to the building. 4 On the Type Selector. click Wall.

7 Zoom in on the join between the curtain system and the exterior wall. Flat Curtain System | 289 .6 Move the cursor down along the edge of the floor and finish at the outside face of the exterior wall as shown.

Note that a curtain system created from the wall command has similar properties to other walls: base constraint. 13 Specify 1200 for Top Offset. 290 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems . 12 Under Constraints. top and base attachments. 11 Select the curtain system and click . expand 3D Views. top constraint.8 In the Project Browser. and double-click Southeast Isometric. The curtain system is now at the same height as the other existing curtain systems. click Orient ➤ Northeast. and room bounding. You want the curtain system to attach to the roof. and click OK. 10 Zoom in on the curtain system you just added. expand Views (all). 9 On the View menu. specify Up to level: TOP OF ROOF for Top Constraint.

using curtain grids. click Curtain Grid. the curtain system is a single glazed panel. under Floor Plans. 18 In the Project Browser. and resize the crop boundary as shown. 17 Click the elevation arrow to display the crop boundary. double-click the elevation symbol arrow to open the new elevation view.Right now. 15 On the View tab of the Design Bar. right-click on the elevation name Elevation 1 . and click OK. 19 Enter Entrance Elevation. double-click GROUND FLOOR. 22 Place a horizontal curtain grid 1200 mm above the ground floor level line. 16 Place the elevation symbol in front of the curtain wall and click Modify on the Design Bar. 20 In the drawing area. and click Rename. Adding curtain grids 14 In the Project Browser. click Elevation. You are going to subdivide the panel into several smaller panels. Flat Curtain System | 291 .a. 21 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.

FIFTH FLOOR. The selected grid lines are now at each of these levels. hold CTRL and select SECOND FLOOR. click Modify. 25 On the Design Bar. click Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. click Curtain Grid. 27 On the Edit menu. and click OK. and SEVENTH FLOOR.23 Place another grid 1500 mm above the first grid. 24 Place another grid so that it snaps to the SECOND FLOOR level line. watch the tooltips and the Status Bar. 28 On the Edit menu. click Modify. TIP To be sure that the curtain grid is at the midpoint of the panel. 29 In the Select Levels dialog box. 32 Move the cursor along the GROUND FLOOR level (left of the vertical grid line) until it snaps to the midpoint of the larger vertical panel. or press CTRL + C on the keyboard. 33 On the Design Bar. THIRD FLOOR. FOURTH FLOOR. one larger than the other. Click to create a vertical grid. 31 Place the cursor on grid 2 so that it highlights. Click to place another grid line. SIXTH FLOOR. 292 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems . 26 Hold CTRL and select the 3 grid lines you just placed. 30 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. This divides the curtain wall vertically into 2 panels. click Copy to Clipboard.

36 Select the lowest segment of the left grid line. You enter an editor that lets you select segments of the grid line to remove them. and then select the segment above it. 35 Select the left vertical grid line. and on the Options Bar. Adding the doorway 34 Zoom in to the ground floor level in the Entrance Elevation view. The segment line style changes to dashed. You do not use the Door command. Instead. remove the horizontal segment that intersects the vertical segment removed in the previous step. Flat Curtain System | 293 . 38 Using the same method. The two segments are removed. you set up a doorway on a curtain panel. you add a doorway to the curtain system. click Add or Remove Segments.Next. and then you replace that panel with a curtain system door panel. 37 Click in any white space to exit the editor.

45 Select the horizontal grid line that is 1200 mm above the ground floor.39 On the Design Bar. 43 Delete the dimensions. The line style changes from dashed to solid to indicate a grid segment has been added. 44 When the warning about locked dimensions being deleted displays. Do not click between the 1800 mm panels. and lock them. 46 Click Add or Remove Segments on the Options Bar. 47 Click the horizontal grid line between the smaller panels. Use the following picture as a guide. 42 Place dimensions as shown. You now have two 1800 mm wide panels between smaller rectangular panels. TIP You may need to adjust your zoom settings to view the dimensions. click Curtain Grid. You are going to add more segments to an existing curtain grid. select One Segment. click OK to leave the curtain grids constrained. 41 Place 4 vertical grid lines as shown. 294 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems . 40 On the Options Bar.

and click Wireframe. under Elevations. 50 In the Doors folder. Watch the Status Bar to be sure you are highlighting the panel. 56 In the Project Browser. you change panels in front of ceilings from glazed to solid. double-click Entrance Elevation. You will have to press TAB to highlight it. 51 Select the left 1800 mm panel. They are part of the curtain panel category. The panel changes to a double door. Changing panels 58 Zoom in to the FIFTH FLOOR level. click Modify. Flat Curtain System | 295 . and click Open.TIP The middle grid lines are centered between the long vertical grid above them. 52 On the Type Selector. 55 In the Project Browser. 53 Use the same method to replace the other panel with a double door. you replace the 2 larger 1800 mm panels with curtain system doors. Next. select M_Curtain Wall-Store Front-Dbl. click M_Curtain Wall-Store Front-Dbl: Store Front Double Door. click once to the right of the long grid and then click once to the left of it. not as curtain panels. you replace some of the transparent panels with solid ones. 54 On the Design Bar. double-click GROUND FLOOR to see the plan view door swings of the curtain wall doors. These panels schedule as doors. click . 49 On the File menu. on the new curtain system you added. 57 On the View Control Bar. Now. under Floor Plans. To get the horizontal grid to display between the vertical grids. click in any white space to exit the editor. Next. This changes the graphics style of the view.rfa. 48 When the grids are placed (line style have changed to solid). click Load From Library ➤ Load Family.

click . and Material specifies the shading and patterning. click Shading with Edges for Graphics Style. click Wireframe for Graphics Style. 64 Replace the two adjacent glazed panels with solid panels. The Offset property specifies the distance from the centerline of the curtain wall. 62 Click Edit/New to open the Type Properties of the panel. 67 Change the remaining glazed panels in front of ceilings to solid panels. This completes the exercise for creating an entrance. click System Panel : Solid. Adding Mullions to the Curtain System In this exercise. 61 With the panel still selected. The glazed panel is changed to a solid panel. click Save As. The glazed panels display in blue. Thickness specifies the depth of the panel.59 Select one of the panels below the FIFTH FLOOR level line. Name the file m_rvt8_Curtain_Walls-in_progress. 68 On the File menu. 296 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems .rvt. 65 On the View Control Bar. 63 Click OK twice to close the Type Properties and Element Properties dialog boxes. 60 On the Type Selector. you place mullions on curtain panel grids. 66 On the View Control Bar. and the solid panels display in white.

6 On the Options Bar. 1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. select All Empty Segments.Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. so you remove them next. 3 Place a mullion on the grid segment at the ground floor immediately to the right of the right set of doors. Flat Curtain System | 297 . select Grid Line Segment. however. select Entire Grid Line. Mullions can change their joins to other mullions. You are going to change some mullion joins. 4 On the Options Bar. because they reduce the doors’ size by their widths. The two mullions below the doors are not necessary. 5 Place a mullion on the horizontal grid that is 1200 mm above the ground floor. click Mullion. there are a few that you do not want. 9 Delete the mullions below them. Now all empty grid segments have mullions on them. 7 Place the cursor on any empty grid segment on the curtain system and click. Removing mullions 8 Zoom in on the set of doors. 2 On the Options Bar.

The bottom of the mullion meets the top of the horizontal mullion. Two mullion join controls display. 298 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems . 11 Select the vertical mullion above and between the set of double doors. click Hidden Line for Graphics Style. 13 Click the top mullion control.Changing mullion joins 10 On the View Control Bar. 12 Click the lower mullion join control. The top of the vertical mullion now meets the bottom of the horizontal mullion above.

This completes the exercise for adding mullions. 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 16 Save the file. double-click Ground Floor. you add both predefined and custom mullions to the system. Curved Curtain System | 299 . and click OK. click . under Floor Plans. The curtain wall is sketched as an arc. Finally. 10 Place the second point at the lower right side. 14 On the Design Bar. Finally. 8 On the Options Bar.TIP After selecting the vertical mullion. You also learned how to modify grids and change panels. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. 4 On the Type Selector. click Curtain Wall : Curtain Wall 1. specify Up to level: FIFTH FLOOR for Top Constraint. Adding a Curved Curtain System In this exercise. 6 Under Constraints. You learned how to create a basic curtain wall system and how to subdivide it with grids. you add a curtain system using the wall command. you learned how to add mullions and change their joins. click Wall. click Modify. double-click Southeast Isometric. 7 Enter 1200 for Top Offset. Curved Curtain System In this lesson. 9 Start the wall by clicking at the left edge of the circle at the centerline of the intersecting wall. 5 Click . you create a curved curtain system near the entrance of the model that was just completed. 2 Zoom in on the circular space above the entrance that was just completed. you can also right-click and select Break at Join from the Join Conditions menu to break the mullion at both joins. This also completes the lesson on creating a flat curtain system. 15 In the Project Browser. You also create a custom curtain panel for the system. 1 In the Project Browser.

eighths. 15 In the Project Browser. and then sixteenths. 12 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. You are going to use one of these snaps points. 16 Zoom in on the cylinder. Watch the Status Bar to ensure you are at the midpoint. Do not add a grid on the GROUND FLOOR level. The curtain wall displays as one flat panel between the first and second points placed. The curtain grid command snaps only to the curved arc. and snap the cursor to each level line and click to add horizontal curtain grids. Next. 14 Continue to place more grids by using the snap points on the arc. under Elevations. 300 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems . click Curtain Grid. double-click East.11 Finish the arc by clicking at the top of the arc. you place grids on the system. 13 Snap the cursor to the midpoint of the curved arc and click. Divide the halves into quarters.

click Modify. you create a custom curtain panel and place it into the curved curtain system. click Basic Wall: Generic . Next you create a custom panel and add it to the system. Next. Adding a Custom Curtain Panel In this exercise. select the bottom layer of panels. Curved Curtain System | 301 . Using walls as panels 18 Using a selection box. you change some panels in the system.300mm. 19 On the Type Selector.17 On the Design Bar. This completes the first exercise for creating a curved system. to filter out all other elements 20 Save the file. Remember to click from the selection except Curtain Walls.

specify Glass for Subcategory. enter 100 for Depth. 4 On the Design Bar. click Lines. double-click Exterior. 3 In the Project Browser. under Elevations. 9 Select the extrusion. 1 On the File menu. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. click New ➤ Family. click 12 Sketch 2 lines that crisscross the extrusion. 6 On the Options Bar. and on the Options Bar. and on the Options Bar. double-click Metric Curtain Wall Panel. 7 Start the sketch at the upper lefthand reference line intersection and finish at the lower righthand reference line intersection. 10 Under Identity Data. click Model Lines. click .rft. . 11 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. 2 In the Metric templates folder. and click OK.Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 5 On the Design Bar. 8 On the Design Bar. 302 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems . and click .

24 In the Project Browser. 18 In the Project Browser. click System Panel . 14 On the File menu. 16 On the File menu. double-click FOURTH FLOOR. Hold Shift and spin the model so that you can see the The curved curtain system’s structure now matches that of the main part of the building. click Save As. All fifth floor panels are selected.13 On the Design Bar. double-click FIFTH FLOOR. 26 On the Type Selector. 15 Close the family file by clicking Close on the File menu. 22 Right-click. . right-click and select Select Panels along Horizontal Grid from the Select Panels menu.Pattern. click curved curtain system.rfa. All the panels change to the solid panel. under Floor Plans. right-click and select Select Panels along Horizontal Grid from the Select Panels menu. 25 Highlight a panel in the arc. 21 Select the curved arc curtain wall. under Floor Plans. 19 Highlight a panel in the arc.Pattern. and return to your project file.Solid.Pattern. Curved Curtain System | 303 . 20 On the Type Selector. click Modify. All fourth floor panels are selected. and then click . select Curtain Panel .rfa family. and save the family as Curtain Panel . 17 Load the Curtain Panel . 23 On the View toolbar. All the panels change to the custom panel you created. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. and click Flip Orientation.

Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and click OK. 5 In the Metric Templates folder. 8 On the Design Bar. This completes the exercise for adding a custom curtain panel. click New ➤ Family. 27 Save the file. under Elevations. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. enter 8 for Sides. except at the GROUND FLOOR level. you use the Family Editor to create a custom mullion. double-click Metric Profile. double-click East. For vertical mullions. 7 Specify Mullion for Profile Usage.rft. click . click Family Category and Parameters. 6 On the Settings menu. and select Radius and specify 50 mm for the radius. 304 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems . 9 On the Options Bar. Creating a custom mullion in the Family Editor 4 On the File menu. 1 In the Project Browser.The finished arc wall should look like the following picture. click Mullion. click Lines. you add both custom and predefined mullions to the curved curtain panel. 3 Select each horizontal grid line on the curved curtain panel. Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel In this exercise.

Click again to specify the ending point. click Detail Component. Curved Curtain System | 305 . click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 15 On the File menu. Notice that both the starting and ending points are in the same location. 14 In the Family element visibility settings dialog box. click the Training Files icon. 18 On the Design Bar. clear Fine.10 Place the cursor at the intersection of the reference planes and click to enter the octagon starting point.rfa file from the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Families\Detail Components folder. click Visibility. This controls the detail level at which the mullion profile displays. and click OK. 16 In the left pane of the Open dialog box. 12 Select the lines in the octagon. 19 Place the detail component so that it snaps to the mullion profile as shown.detail. 11 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 13 On the Options Bar. 17 Open the m_Cylinder Mullion .

30 On the Modelling tab. 25 Close the family file by clicking Close on the File menu. it can be added as a mullion type. 35 Enter Cylinder Mullion for Name. 33 Click Edit/New. 40 On the Design Bar.rfa family. and spin the model so that you can see the curved curtain system. 21 Select the detail component. 41 In the Project Browser. After the new profile is loaded. so next you remove the unwanted ones. 27 Load the Cylinder Mullion. 32 In the Element Properties dialog box. and click Visibility. double-click Southeast Isometric. select Circular Mullion for Family. 26 On the File menu. under 3D Views. double-click GROUND FLOOR. under Floor Plans. 306 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems . 42 Highlight a mullion in the arc. 31 Click . 38 On the Options Bar. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 36 Under Construction. click Save As. right-click and use Select Mullions on gridline from the Select Mullions menu. 28 In the Project Browser. clear Coarse and Medium. and click OK.rfa. and click DELETE. and click OK. 22 In the Family element visibility settings dialog box. The detail component becomes the true representation in plan view. specify Cylinder Mullion : Cylinder Mullion for Profile. 23 On the File menu.20 On the Design Bar. 37 Click OK twice. select All Empty Segments. 34 In the Type Properties dialog box. click Modify to exit placing mullions. click Duplicate. You have placed more mullions than you want. click Mullion. and return to the project file. click Modify. 24 Save the family as Cylinder Mullion. 29 Click . 39 Click on any grid line in the entry cylinder.

click Pick Walls. 1 In the Project Browser. TIP To chain select all the walls. Additional Curtain Systems In this lesson. and you can click to select them all. This completes the exercise for adding mullions. 4 On the Design Bar. as well as the lesson on creating a curved curtain system. Additional Curtain Systems | 307 . select Defines slope. and then apply those custom elements to the system.43 Save the file. under Floor Plans. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 5 On the Options Bar. 6 Select the inside faces of the base walls. Sloped Glazings Sloped glazings are useful when you are creating skylights and other glazed roofing systems. a storefront system. and a ruled curtain system. place the cursor on the inside face of one of the walls. double-click TOP OF ROOF. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. In this lesson. make custom curtain panels and mullions. 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. you create additional types of curtain systems: a sloped glazing system. 2 Zoom in on the skylight at the center of the building between Grids 2 and 3 and D and E. you learned to create a curved curtain system. All the inside faces highlight. and press TAB.

15 On the Options Bar. click Finish Roof. click Roof Properties. double-click Southeast Isometric. This completes the exercise for creating a sloped glazing system. 19 Save the file. Storefront System In this exercise.7 On the Design Bar. 13 Zoom in on the skylight. 18 On the View Control Bar. click Hidden Line for Graphics Style. 16 Select the grid lines that define the edges of each panel in the sloped glazing. 308 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems . click Modify. 10 On the Design Bar. 8 In the Element Properties dialog box. click System Family: Sloped Glazing for Family. you embed curtain walls into other walls to create a storefront system. click Mullion. 12 On the View Control Bar. select Entire Grid Line. enter 600 for Base Offset From Level. under 3D Views. 11 In the Project Browser. click Shaded with Edges for Graphics Style. 9 Under Constraints. 17 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 14 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.

under Floor Plans. click Wall. This curtain wall cuts the original wall. You are going to place a storefront system in this wall. Additional Curtain Systems | 309 . 2 Zoom in on the wall at the eastern-most area of the model. 7 Sketch a curtain wall along the wall centerline to the approximate length shown. 5 On the Options Bar.Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and enter 2400. select Unconnected for Height. double-click GROUND FLOOR. 6 Start the wall 1200 mm from one end of the wall on the wall centerline. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 4 On the Type Selector. select Curtain Wall : Storefront. You can place the curtain wall right inside this wall. 1 In the Project Browser.

9 On the Design Bar. even if the wall height changes. For this wall. click OK to close the Type Properties dialog box and return to the Element Properties dialog box that displays the instance parameters. 14 After you have looked at the Pattern parameters. The Instance Parameters list includes additional parameters that define the curtain grid layout. click Modify. and click . 11 Zoom in on the new storefront wall. The Layout (Grid 2) is set to Fixed Distance. and press ENTER. The Number (Grid 1) is the number of vertical curtain grids you want on the curtain instance. This indicates that the curtain grids are placed at even intervals along the length of the curtain wall at a distance up to 1524 mm. or end. you can look at the properties of the storefront wall. Justification (Grid 1). For more information about these curtain wall parameters. see the Revit Building help. Angle (Grid 1). and Offset (Grid 1). and the Spacing (Grid 2) is set to 2400 mm. The storefront wall already has a curtain grid layout. and the Spacing (Grid 1) is set to 1524 mm. 15 To see how these parameters can affect the wall. By setting the Angle (Grid 1) value. The Offset (Grid 1) is the distance the spacing starts from the justification point. To see how the grid layout is defined. Click OK. center. under 3D Views. This specifies an exact length for the wall. 10 In the Project Browser.8 Click the temporary dimension. which is specified in the type. double-click Southeast Isometric. 310 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems . 12 Select the storefront wall. 13 Click Edit/New to open the Type Properties dialog box. The Justification (Grid 1) specifies the vertical spacing at the beginning. you are rotating the grid lines to an angle on the face of the panel. the Layout (Grid 1) is set to Maximum Spacing. enter 45 for Angle (Grid 1) and 15 for Angle (Grid 2). This means that the panel heights will be exactly at a 2400 mm height. The Grid 2 counterparts are the same but for the perpendicular direction. Under the Pattern heading. enter 10200 mm. The type parameters under the Pattern heading create the predefined layout. You see these same parameters for Grid 2. you find Number (Grid 1).

In this exercise. click Hidden Line for Graphics Style. 17 Select a curtain grid. This completes the exercise on creating a storefront.16 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. you create a curtain wall based on 2 lines that have been sketched at different elevations on the model. This type of curtain system is known as a ruled curtain system. 2 Orient the view to the storefront wall you added in the last exercise. you learned how to embed a curtain wall and set up a grid layout. click Curtain System ➤ Curtain System by Lines. 3 On the View Control Bar. 18 Save the file. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. under 3D Views. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. double-click Southeast Isometric. 1 In the Project Browser. Additional Curtain Systems | 311 . click Mullion. and select All Empty Segments on the Options Bar. Curtain System by Lines In this exercise.

312 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems .5 Place the cursor at the bottom edge of the SECOND FLOOR. 6 Click the highlighted line. making sure Thin Lines : Model Lines : Line is highlighted. 7 Place the cursor at the top edge of the TOP OF ROOF level. 8 Select the highlighted line. Watch the Status Bar and Tooltips to be sure you are highlighting the thin line. and highlight the thin line. A panel between the 2 lines is created. Press TAB to select the line if it does not immediately highlight.

9 Select the panel. click System Panel : Solid. but now that you have created a ruled curtain system. 17 Save the file. 16 Change the THIRD FLOOR level panels to solid. Next. Notice there are very few properties for the ruled curtain system. 12 Using the midpoint curtain grid snaps. you subdivide the ruled curtain system using curtain grids. and define a ruled curtain system. right-click and use Select Panels along Grid 2 from the Select Panels menu. Additional Curtain Systems | 313 . Finally.A ruled curtain system does not have all the properties of a curtain wall. In this lesson you learned to create a sloped glazing system. place horizontal grids that divide the panel into halves. and then eighths. This completes the exercise for creating a ruled curtain system. 13 Place vertical grids that snap to the midpoints on the panel and divide the panel into halves. 10 Click OK to close the Element Properties dialog box. 14 Highlight a top level glazed panel. you replace some of the glazed panels in front of the ceilings with solid panels. This is similar to placing the grids on the curved curtain system. 15 On the Type Selector. click Curtain Grid. and the lesson on creating additional curtain systems. and click . quarters. and then eighths. you can vary the steps to style the system the way you want. 11 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. quarters. embed a curtain system inside another wall. NOTE The next few steps are intended as a guide to finish the system.

314 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems .

Sheets are defined by borders. you learn how to create drawings from a building information model in an Autodesk Revit Building project.Creating Drawings 11 In this tutorial. begin by first creating sheets. Depending on the type of drawing that you want to create. which are a type of view in a project. section. three-dimensional views. 315 . elevation. you can add different views of the building model directly to the sheet. and schedules. To create a printed or plotted set of drawings from the views in your building model. and are accessible from the Project Browser. The model views that you can add to sheets include plan. usually contain a title block.

Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. You also reorient the swing of one of the doors in the floor plan view on the sheet. you create a drawing sheet that includes a floor plan of the first level of the building model. 316 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings . you learn how to create sheets within an Revit Building project. Next. how to create new views from a building model. You begin by duplicating an existing floor plan view that includes furniture. and dimension the exterior walls of the building to complete the floor plan drawing sheet. Creating a Drawing Sheet In this exercise. you enter the project information and create a drawing sheet with a title block that displays the project information. adjust the view scale. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. and how to make changes to the building model from a view on a sheet. You turn off the visibility of the furniture in the duplicated view to create a floor plan view and rename the original view as the furniture plan. Open m_Drawing_Exercise located in the Metric folder. The project used in the following exercises is a small office building model.Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project In this lesson. and observe that the changes are made in the floor and furniture plan views of the building model. how to add views to the sheets. You then add the floor plan view to the sheet. click Open. click the Training Files icon.

3 Right-click Copy of Level 1. 9 Under Visibility. 12 In the Element Properties dialog box. Casework. 5 In the Project Browser. and specialty equipment are no longer displayed in the Level 1 floor plan view. 2 Under Floor Plans. The changes in visibility are applied to this view only. enter Level 1 Furniture. 7 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog box. and specialty equipment continue to display in the Level 1 Furniture plan. and expand Floor Plans. 4 In the Rename View dialog box. expand Views (all). lighting fixtures. and click Duplicate. clear: ■ ■ ■ ■ Casework Furniture Lighting Fixtures Specialty Equipment 10 Click OK. Casework. furniture. click Visibility/Graphics. Turn off visibility for casework. 8 Select Include categories from all disciplines in the list above. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project | 317 . and click Rename. click Edit for Project Address. right-click Level 1. furniture. click the Model Categories tab. click Project Information.Copy the Level 1 floor plan view to create a Level 1 Furniture plan view 1 In the Project Browser. and specialty equipment in the Level 1 Floor Plan view 6 On the View menu. and click OK. double-click Level 1 to redisplay the floor plan. furniture. Enter the project information to display in the title block of the drawing sheet 11 On the Settings menu. A copy of the Level 1 Floor plan view is displayed in the Project Browser.

The text fields of the title block on the sheet automatically display the corresponding project information that you entered in step 14. MA 12345 14 Click OK. Enter J. and click View. 2005 for Project Issue Date. Enter Residence for Project Name. right-click. The text fields in the titleblock family (shown below) contain labels that associate the project information parameters with the appropriate text fields.13 In the Edit Text dialog box. enter the following address: ■ ■ 123 Main Street Anytown. 16 Click OK. 318 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings . Enter 2005-01 for Project Number. select A0 metric. 15 Continue to change the remaining type parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter 31 March. Smith for Client Name. 18 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. Enter Client Approved for Project Status. A title block and drawing borders are displayed on the drawing sheet. The title block that you selected is a family that has already been loaded into the project. click Sheet. TIP If the View tab is not displayed in the Design Bar. and click OK. 17 On View tab of the Design Bar.

and click OK. but the scale of the view is too small for the drawing sheet. and you can modify it within the sheet by activating the Level 1 floor plan view and changing its scale. 23 Ground Floor Plan is displayed in the title block as the sheet name and is appended to the sheet name in the Project Browser.Unnamed. click . 22 In the Element Properties dialog box. 20 On the Design Bar. 25 In the Views dialog box. 26 Move the cursor to the center of the drawing sheet. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project | 319 . select Floor Plan: Level 1.NOTE The Project Path parameter in the lower-right corner of the sheet view automatically updates every time the project file is saved. click Modify. and click Add View to Sheet. expand Sheets (all). 24 On the View tab of the Design Bar. The Level 1 floor plan view is displayed on the drawing sheet. The new sheet is displayed in the Project Browser with the name A101 . enter Ground Floor Plan for Sheet Name. View scale is a property of the view. 21 When the title block highlights. on the Options Bar. and click to place the view in the center of the drawing sheet. under Identity Data. click Add View. and select the title block. 19 In the Project Browser.

If you were to open the Level 1 floor plan view. click Deactivate View. click Viewport : Title w Line. 32 Select the viewport. select 1:20 for View Scale. and click View Properties. indicating that the Level 1 floor plan View is active and you can modify it. right-click. and click OK. 320 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings . on the View menu. you would see that the scale of the Level 1 floor plan view is now 1:20. 33 Drag the viewport to the center of the drawing sheet. and drag the grips that display on the scale to lengthen it. and click View Properties. 31 Select the viewport and from the Type Selector. under Graphics. The scale of the view on the sheet changes. Any changes that you make to it on the sheet while it is active display when you open the Level 1 floor plan view. The border and title block are grayed out. The border and the title block are no longer grayed out. Center the view on the sheet and reposition the drawing scale 30 On the View menu. 28 Right-click the view. indicating the view is deactivated. click Activate View. 29 In the Element Properties dialog box.27 With the view selected.

click Modify. Reorient the door in the upper exterior wall 39 On the Design Bar. Move the cursor above the north exterior wall. as shown in the following illustration.Dimension the exterior walls of the building 34 Right-click on the viewport on the drawing sheet. This creates aligned dimensions that originate at the wall faces. and click to place the dimension. click Dimension. and then select the outer face of the east exterior vertical wall. 37 Dimension the north wall of the building: ■ Select the outer face of the west exterior vertical wall. 40 Click the control arrows until the door swings open to the interior. as shown in the following illustration. and select the door on the north exterior wall (in the upper right corner). and select Wall faces for Prefer. 35 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. ■ 38 Dimension the west exterior wall of the building by selecting the outer faces of the north and south exterior walls and placing the dimension to the left of the west wall. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project | 321 . and click Activate View. click . 36 On the Options Bar.

double-click Level 1. and the door is updated. 42 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. The dimensions that you added to the Level 1 floor plan view are not displayed.41 Select the view. 322 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings . Adding a Sheet to the Project. the changes are made within the building model and not restricted to the current view. This means that when you reoriented the door swing in the Level 1 floor plan. but the door reflects the change you made to its orientation in the Level 1 floor plan. are specific to the view in which they are created. right-click. the change is also made in the Level 1 Furniture plan. When you change the geometry of the building model while the view is activated. however. 43 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. 44 Proceed to the next exercise. Dimensions. double-click Level 1 Furniture. and click Deactivate View. The two dimensions that you added to the view in the previous steps have been added to this view.

add the furniture plan view.rvt. under Sheets (all). 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. you add a new sheet to the project. 3 Select the title block.Furniture Plan Level 1. enter Furniture Plan Level 1 for Sheet Name. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project | 323 . click Sheet.Adding a Sheet to the Project In this exercise. and on the Options Bar. 4 In the Element Properties dialog box. the new sheet. Add a new sheet to the project 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. m_Drawing_Exercise. select A0 metric. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. A102 . under Identity Data. The sheet is incrementally named A102. In the Project Browser. Furniture Plan Level 1 is displayed in the title block as the sheet name. click . and click OK. and adjust the scale of the view to create a furniture plan drawing. and click OK. is displayed.

Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. click the scale value. double-click Level 1 Furniture.Furniture Plan Level 1. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. under Sheets (all). verify that M_Floor Lamp 2 : 150 watt Incandescent is displayed. and then observe that the changes are also made in the Level 1 Furniture plan. 7 In the Project Browser. 4 In the Type Selector. 3 On the Design Bar. double-click A102 . Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet.Change the scale of the view before you add it to the sheet 5 In the Project Browser. click Modify. m_Drawing_Exercise. under Floor Plans. 6 On the View Control Bar. 9 Center the cursor in the drawing area of the sheet. Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet In this exercise. 8 In the Project Browser. You change a lamp type and the length of an interior wall in the furniture plan view on Sheet A102. and click Activate View. 324 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings . you learn how to modify a building model directly from the drawing sheets that you created from its views. and select 1:20. right-click on the view on sheet A102. 2 Zoom in on the lower left corner of the building. and select the lamp next to the lounge chair. under Floor Plans. click and drag Level 1 Furniture onto the sheet. and click to place the view. 5 Select M_Floor Lamp 1 : 100watt Halogen in the Type Selector to change the lamp type.rvt. Change the lamp type in the furniture plan 1 In the drawing area.

click Modify. select Floor Plan: Level 1 Furniture.6 Select one of the furniture components. The changes made to the lamp. 7 On the Design Bar. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. 8 Select the wall as shown in the following illustration. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project | 325 . enter 5200 mm. and the wall position in Sheet A102 are reflected in the Level 1 Furniture plan view. 11 Select the same wall you selected in step 8 to view the change in dimension. 10 On the Window menu. chair. furniture. The desk. and notice that Moves with Nearby Elements is selected in the Options Bar. 9 Click the temporary dimension value of the distance between the wall and the centerline of the exterior horizontal wall. and file cabinet adjacent to the wall move when the wall is resized. and press ENTER. Creating New Views to Add to Sheets.

and select the dashed callout view border. Create a callout view 1 In the Project Browser. click Callout. under Floor Plans. double-click Level 1 Furniture. callout. m_Drawing_Exercise. and move it to the position shown in the following illustration. and section views of the building model and add them to a single drawing sheet. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.Creating New Views to Add to Sheets In this exercise. A callout tag is placed inside the walls of the building model. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 3 Draw a rectangle around the room in the lower left corner of the drawing to define the boundaries of the room. 326 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings . you learn how to create new elevation. 4 On the Design Bar. click Modify.rvt. 5 Select the blue border grip adjacent to the view tag.

Change the callout view scale. The new sheet. click Add View. and click to place the view. click Modify. TIP You can also drag the Floor Plan: Callout of Level 1 Furniture view from the Project Browser to place it on the sheet. 12 Move the cursor to the upper left corner of the sheet. and double-click the callout tag to display the callout view. A103 . is displayed under Sheets (all) in the Project Browser. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project | 327 . click Sheet. position the view. 8 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and select 1:20. and add the callout view to a new sheet 7 On the View Control Bar. 9 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. click the scale value. select A0 Metric. 10 On the View tab of the Design Bar.Unnamed. 11 In the Views dialog box. and click OK.6 On the Design Bar. and click Add View to Sheet. select Floor Plan: Callout of Level 1 Furniture.

select the elevation symbol arrow. 14 Zoom in around the view tag of the callout. As you move the cursor. 18 On the Design Bar. 328 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings .13 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. 16 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 17 Move the cursor to the lower left room. and place it on the sheet 15 Adjust your zoom to display the lower left corner of the view. and click to place the elevation symbol. and zoom out to view the elevation extents. double-click Level 1 Furniture. click Modify. Create a new elevation view. the elevation symbol points to the closest wall. An elevation symbol displays at the end of the cursor in the drawing area. The elevation extents do not display when you select the body of the elevation symbol. click Elevation. center it in the room so that it points north. The tag now displays the drawing sheet and detail number.

select Elevation: Elevation 1 . and click Add View to Sheet. 25 Click to place the elevation next to the callout view on the drawing sheet. Add the new elevation views to sheet A103 22 In the Project Browser under Sheets (all). double-click A103 . expand Elevations.19 Select the body of the elevation symbol. 21 In the Project Browser under Views (all). 24 In the Views dialog box. 20 Select the box under the elevation symbol to create a new elevation view 180 degrees from the first elevation view you created when you placed the elevation symbol.Unnamed. The symbol is displayed as in the following illustration.a and Elevation 1 .a. and notice that two new elevation views display: Elevation 1 . 23 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project | 329 . click Add View.c.

double-click A102 . 330 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings . 28 Zoom in on the elevation tag in the lower left room. Create a section view. 30 Zoom in on the right side of the building.26 Add Elevation 1 .Furniture Plan Level 1.c to the sheet either with the Add View command or by dragging it from the Project Browser onto the sheet. and add it to the sheet 29 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. The sheet (drawing) number and detail IDs of the views are displayed in the symbol. double-click Level 1 Furniture. under Sheets (all). 27 In the Project Browser.

33 Add a section line that cuts through the right side of the building: ■ Click outside the north exterior wall of the building to place the start point of the section line and the section head (section tag). select 1:50 for Scale. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project | 331 .31 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Move the cursor down and click outside of the south exterior wall of the building to place the section tail and complete the section line. ■ 34 Click the arrows at the head of the section line to flip the section so it points to the west. click Section. 32 In the Options Bar.

and click Deactivate View. and click OK. and click Activate View. click Save As. elevations. 37 In the Views dialog box. and click Add View to Sheet. and sections. under Graphics. 41 Enter 25 for Scale Value. add views to your sheets. The drawing sheet is now complete. 38 Right-click on the viewport. double-click A103 . 45 Close the exercise file. select Section: Section 1. click Custom for View Scale. 40 In the Element Properties dialog box. you learned how to create new drawing sheets. 39 Right-click on the view. and to create new views of your building model. By completing the exercises in this lesson. 42 Right-click on the view.Unnamed. on the File menu. such as callouts. and click View Properties.35 In the Project Browser under Sheets (all). 36 On the View tab of the Design Bar. modify the building model from your sheets. 332 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings . 44 If you want to save your changes. click Add View. 43 Place the section view on the drawing sheet as shown in the following illustration. and save the exercise file with a unique name.

Upgrade : 6 mm M_Wall Tag : 12mm Door Tag metric Window Tag metric Using Legends | 333 . Building component legends list and identify components such as walls. and so on).rvt located in the Metric folder. click Symbol. Creating a Symbol Legend In this exercise. 3 Right-click Legend 1. click Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. you create a legend view and add symbols and text to it using a text type you create by duplicating an existing text type and modifying the type properties. 6 Add the following symbols to the legend view. you add the completed symbol legend to a cover sheet for the construction documents. NOTE A component that is placed in a legend does not count as an additional instance of the component in the Revit Building building model. expand Legends. selecting each from the Type Selector and placing it in the legend as shown. 2 In the Project Browser. On construction documents. and click OK. On construction documents. doors. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. windows. enter Symbol Legend for Name. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ M_Section Head . The two most common types of legends produced for construction documents are annotation legends and building component legends. Create a legend view 1 On the View menu. and click Rename. building component legends are often called schedules (wall type schedule. annotation legends are often referred to as symbol legends. click New ➤ Legend. Finally. 4 In the Rename View dialog box. Add symbols to the legend 5 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Open m_Legends.Filled Level Head .Using Legends Legends provide a way to display a list of the various building components and annotations used in a project. click the Training Files icon. and thus is not added to the number of instances of that component listed on a schedule or noteblock. Annotation legends are made up of components such as section markers and door tags that are paired with text that identifies them. door frame schedule. and door frames.

and double-click A100 . click . click Text. drag it to the lower-right corner of the cover sheet. click Symbol Legend. verify that Text : 3mm is selected. click Edit/New. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box. You do this by duplicating an existing text type and modifying the type properties. 334 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings . 12 Under Text. click Duplicate. you create a text type with the necessary size. 14 Enter Detail Callout (detail #/sheet #) for the text note.Create a text type 7 Because the text size for the symbol legend is not available in the Type Selector. and click to place it. and click OK twice. click Modify to end the command. 9 On the Options bar. 17 In the Project Browser. select Text : 6mm. expand Sheets (all). enter 3mm for Name. 8 In the Type Selector. 13 In the Type Selector. 11 In the Type Properties dialog box. 15 Working from the top down. On the Design Bar. and click OK. and click to the right of the first symbol to specify the text start point. enter the following text for the remaining symbols in the legend: ■ ■ ■ ■ Level Marker (Level name/Elevation in mm) Wall Tag (Wall Type #) Door Tag (Door #) Window Tag (Window Type #) Place the symbol legend on a sheet 16 In the Project Browser. enter 3mm for Text Size.Cover Sheet to open it in the drawing area. 18 On the Design Bar.

4 In the Rename View dialog box. You use the text type that you created in a previous exercise to create annotations that identify the material used in each wall component.The symbol legend is added to the project cover sheet. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. select Walls: Basic Wall: Exterior . m_Legends_in progress. 9 Repeat the procedure to place a wall of type Interior . and click OK. 8 Click near the top left of the drawing area to specify the insertion point for the wall. Using Legends | 335 . 7 Select Section for View. Add components to the legend 5 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Create a legend view 1 On the View menu. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. 19 On the File menu.rvt. 6 On the Options Bar. enter Wall Type Legend for Name. Creating a Wall Type Legend In this exercise.rvt. You then add the completed legend to a project cover sheet. you create a building component legend for the wall types in the building model. Creating a Wall Type Legend. 2 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. 3 Right-click Legend 1. click Legend Component. 20 Navigate to your preferred directory. click Save As.138mm Partition (1-hr) directly below the first wall. and click Save. click New ➤ Legend. expand Legends.Brick on CMU for Family. name the file m_Legends_in progress.

The text note with leader is added to the legend. verify that Text : 3mm is selected. 14 Click to the right of the wall to end the leader and specify the text start point. 15 Enter (1) Layer 16mm GWB. 11 In the Type Selector. 16 Use the following illustration as a guide for entering the remaining text annotations on the upper wall component.Add text to the legend 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 336 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings . and click Modify on the Design Bar. click Text. 17 Use the following illustration as a guide for entering the text annotations on the lower wall component. 13 Click in the far left portion of the Brick on CMU wall to specify the leader start point. 12 On the Options bar. click to add a single-segment leader.

double-click A100 . 19 On the Options Bar. drag it onto the sheet. 22 On the Design Bar. 23 In the Type Selector. 29 On the File menu. Place the legend on a sheet 25 Using extension reference lines. and enter Wall Type 1. 28 On the Design Bar. 20 Click below the upper wall component to specify the start point for the text. select Text : 6mm. You capture the wall type properties in the tool. click Modify to end the command. draw a detail line that extends as far as the longest component callout. click to add text without a leader.Cover Sheet to open it in the drawing area. select Medium Lines. you use the Match Type tool to convert a wall in the floor plan to the component type used in the Wall Type Legend. Using Legends | 337 . 24 Below the title text of the upper component. 26 In the Project Browser. The wall type legend is added to the project cover sheet. Using a Legend View to Match Types. and then select the wall to which you want to apply the same properties.Add titles to the legend components 18 In the Type Selector. and click to place it above the symbol legend. click Wall Type Legend. 21 Click below the lower wall and enter Wall Type 2. click Detail Lines. 27 In the Project Browser. add an identical detail line below the lower component. 30 Proceed to the next exercise. click Save. Using a Legend View to Match Types In this exercise.

click .rvt. select the wall type 1 component. Match a component type 3 On the Tools toolbar. Changing the detail level displays the hatching for each material of the wall component.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 5 In the floor plan view. Tile views in the drawing window 1 Close all project view drawings except Floor Plan: Level 1 and Wall Type Legend. select Medium for Detail Level. 6 Draw a rectangle around the upper-left corner of the floor plan. 7 Click on the wall at the top of the view. indicating that it captured the wall type properties. click Tile. so that you are zoomed in to the walls. 2 On the Window menu. m_Legends_in_progress. Notice that the eyedropper changes to filled. 4 In the Wall Type Legend view. enter ZR to zoom to a specific region. 338 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings . The open drawings are both visible. allowing you to select a component type in one drawing and then apply the type in the second drawing. 8 On the View Control Bar.

click Open.rvt located in the Metric folder. When Issued is selected. click Revisions. contractor inquiries. These changes can be due to owner requests. you use the Revisions command to open a revision table in which you can add rows that represent a sequence of revisions. Open m_Revisions. or changes in building material availability. the revision is locked and issued to the field. and enter Moved window and added second window to Living Room. Using Revision Tracking Revit Building provides tools that enable you to track revisions to your project. Using the table. you can specify the numbering method for revisions in a project. verify that By Project is selected for Numbering Method. In this exercise. 2 In the Revisions dialog box. and you can add data such as release date and description to each revision.The wall type in the floor plan matches wall type 1 from the Wall Type Legend. 4 Click on the value for Description. For example. In general. 6 Verify that Visible is selected. Setting Up a Revision Table There are likely to be changes to your construction documents after you have issued the original set of documents for bid or after you have received a signed contract. You can use revision tags to notate the revision clouds. and can then display the revisions in schedules that appear in the titleblock of each project sheet. 9 On the File menu. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence in which they are added to a sheet. all tags and schedules display the numeral 1. and you can draw revision clouds around elements in your project that have changed. If you select By Sheet. Add a revision to the project 3 Click on the value for Release Date. click the Training Files icon. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence of revisions in the Revisions dialog box. click Close. revision descriptions should be comprehensive. 10 Proceed to the next lesson. When you use this option. This is the date the revisions are sent out for review. Click Yes when prompted to save the drawing. yet as concise as possible. and enter a date. if the active revision is number 1. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. Using Revision Tracking | 339 . You can create a sequence of revisions. Specify a revision numbering method 1 On the Settings menu. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. 5 Verify that Issued is cleared. Using Revision Tracking. unanticipated changes in construction conditions.

2 Double-click Level 1 to open it in the drawing area. Revision clouds have read-only properties. which are inherited from the revision table you created for the project. 9 Navigate to your preferred directory. The selected window is moved to the left 900 mm. but each cloud is visible only in the view in which it is sketched. 4 Select the dimension value to the left of the window. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. expand Views. In most instances. any revision cloud you draw to indicate this particular revision is not visible in the view in which you create it.If Visible is not selected. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. including revision number and revision date. Sketching Revision Clouds In this exercise. and click Save. enter 1200 mm.rvt.rvt. name the file m_Revisions-in progress. you would turn off visibility only after a revision was issued. click Save As. Sketching Revision Clouds. Modify a window 1 In the Project Browser. 8 On the File menu. select the window. You can sketch revision clouds in all views except 3D views. You can draw multiple revision clouds for each revision. you make changes to the project floor plan. 7 Click OK. m_Revisions-in progress. 340 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings . and expand Floor Plans. 3 In the small empty room. and then indicate the changes graphically with a revision cloud. and press ENTER.

and click 6 Select the midpoint of the casement window as the start point. click Save. click Finish Sketch. click Revision Cloud. 12 Click to end that segment and begin a new segment.Add a window 5 Verify that the modified window is still selected in the drawing area. you load a revision tag into the project. 11 In the drawing area. and move the cursor clockwise to create a segment of the revision cloud. m_Revisions-in progress. 9 On the Design Bar. and then apply the tag to the revision cloud in the current drawing. 8 Click to place the second window. Using Revision Tracking | 341 . Tagging Revision Clouds. The tag number that is displayed in the drawing is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table in a previous exercise. Tagging Revision Clouds In this exercise. click near the windows you have changed. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Add a revision cloud 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.rvt. Revit Building is now in sketch mode. 14 On the Design Bar. click Modify to end the command. The revision cloud is displayed around the modified windows. You can change the appearance of the cloud from the Settings menu. 7 Move the cursor to the right until the distance from the midpoint is 1800 mm. 13 Continue adding segments until the cloud encompasses the area that you changed. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. on the Edit toolbar. 15 On the File menu.

the cloud is tagged as number 1.rfa. 342 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings . Because you chose to number by project. 5 In the Open dialog box. The number is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table. 10 On the File menu. you need to add one. and because the revision is the first in the project. Working with Revisions. If the cursor is just inside the cloud. Working with Revisions In this exercise. Add a revised view to a sheet 3 In the Project Browser. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. under Floor Plans. and click OK. the tag is displayed inside the cloud. click to place the floor plan. Tag a revision cloud 7 On the Options Bar. position the cursor just outside the revision cloud. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. 3 In the Tags dialog box. you create additional revisions in the revision table. 4 Click Load. 2 On the Options Bar. The tag displays the revision number of the cloud. verify that A0 Metric is selected. Because a real-world project can undergo several revisions before it is completed. 6 In the Tags. 6 Draw a rectangle around the revision schedule in the sheet titleblock. m_Revisions-in progress. 4 In the drawing area. click OK. 5 Enter ZR to zoom to a specific region.rvt. select Level 1. Because there are no tags loaded for revision clouds. A new sheet view is created in the project. notice that M_Revision Tag is the loaded tag for Revision Clouds. click Tag. In the Tags dialog box. You then issue a revision. which creates a record of the revision and locks it from further changes. dialog box. clear Leader. scroll down to Revision Clouds.Load a revision tag 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and click Open. click Save. click Tags. browse to Annotations\M_Revision Tag. 9 Click to place the tag. Create a sheet view 1 On the View menu. you create a sheet view in your project. and drag it onto the sheet view. 8 In the drawing area. click New ➤ Sheet. on which you place a revised view. 11 Proceed to the next exercise.

You can continue to add revisions. Click Yes when prompted to save the drawing. Using Revision Tracking | 343 . under Add. NOTE After you issue a revision. 11 In the Revisions dialog box. Create additional revisions 10 Your project may have several revisions before it is completed. 15 On the File menu. 14 Click OK. nor can you edit the sketch of the existing clouds. 12 Enter the appropriate information for this revision. and click OK. Issue a revision 7 After you make the necessary changes to the project and add the revised views to a sheet. You cannot add revision clouds to the revision in the drawing area.The information you added to the revision table in a previous exercise is displayed in the revision schedule. you prevent further changes to the revision. 13 If you want to hide issued revisions in the drawing. click New. 8 In the Revisions dialog box. 9 Select Issued. you can no longer modify it. click Close. click Revisions. On the Settings menu. A new row is added below the existing rows in the revision table. click Revisions. clear Visible for each issued revision. enter a name for Issued to. On the Settings menu. You do this by issuing the revision.

344 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings .

using detail components to represent materials like lumber. like a standard detail that you want to add to a library. and metal studs. In this tutorial. you also learn how to change the detail component display order and visibility settings in a detail to create depth and show varying levels of detail. you use a separate drafting view in which to create the detail. You can detail directly in a view of the building information model. plywood.Detailing 12 In this tutorial. 345 . For a detail that you do not want to associate with the model. These components scale with the building model. The "drafted" detail that you create is not parametrically linked to the building model. you learn how to create details in Autodesk Revit Building.

Open m_Cape_House. expand Floor Plans.Creating a Detail from a Building Model In this lesson. you must define the view in which you want to create a detail. Creating a Callout View In this exercise. expand Views (all). You define that view by creating a callout view within a section view. In order to detail from the building model. you create a callout view that references the foundation sill of the house. click Open.rvt located in the Metric folder. Modify the section view 1 In the Project Browser. You create the callout view by adding a callout to the section view. add detail components. 346 | Chapter 12 Detailing . and then complete the detail by adding break lines and text notes. The callout view is a larger view of the area that you define in the section view with the callout. you detail the foundation sill of a small house. In the callout view. The callout defines the extents of the callout view. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. The section line that you see in the floor plan indicates that a section view has been added to the project. and double-click First Floor. you trace over the building model geometry. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. click the Training Files icon.

2 On the Design Bar. Creating a Detail from a Building Model | 347 . 3 Click the break symbol to create a gap in the section line. Blue grips and a break symbol display on the section line. 4 Select and move the blue grips of the interior end points of the section line so the section line is displayed as in the following illustration. click Modify and select the section line.

and click the tab in the context menu. ■ Reposition the callout head 10 On the Design Bar. right-click in the Design Bar.Add a callout to the section view to specify the callout view 5 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 348 | Chapter 12 Detailing . click Callout. TIP If the tab that you need does not display in the Design Bar. 6 Double-click the head of the section line to display the section view. 8 On the Options Bar. 7 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Click in the section view where the lower right corner displays. and select the callout border. 11 Select the grip near the callout head and move it to the bottom left side of the view as shown in the following illustration. select 1:5 for Scale. 9 Add the callout by drawing a rectangle around the left side of the foundation: ■ Click in the section view where the upper left corner of the callout rectangle displays in the following illustration. The callout border and tag highlight and display blue grips. click Modify.

Display and modify the callout view 12 On the Design Bar. click Modify and double-click the callout head. select the First Floor level line. click View Properties. 14 In the Element Properties dialog box. Select Hidden Line for Model Graphics Style. 16 In the view. change the following instance parameters: ■ ■ Enter Section Detail @ Foundation Sill for View Name. 13 On the View menu. The callout view is displayed. Notice that the alignment of the level is locked to the site level. 15 Click OK. Creating a Detail from a Building Model | 349 .

turn off the display of some of the Design Bar tabs. Detailing the View In this exercise. You start by adding a filled region that represents the sloped grade outside of the foundation wall. which means that any detail components. you detail the view of the foundation sill. TIP If you do not see the Filled Region command. Notice that the Design Bar is now in Sketch mode and the model geometry is grayed out.17 Proceed to the next exercise. region objects. sub-flooring. as well as detail lines. and then add detail components to the detail that represent lumber. Exact dimensions are not important. Detailing the View. The detail components that you add to the view are two-dimensional family objects. 2 On the Design Bar. m_Cape_House. select Wide Lines. 3 In the Type Selector. siding. and an anchor bolt. TIP Enter SO on your keyboard to turn off snapping as you sketch. and insulation objects. that you add to the view are visible only in this view. Create a filled region that represents the sloped grade outside the foundation wall 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. They are also view specific. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 4 On the Options Bar. click Filled Region. 5 Trace the region representing the sloped grade using the following illustration for reference. 350 | Chapter 12 Detailing .rvt. select Chain and click . click Lines.

12 Click OK three times. 15 On the Design Bar. 8 In the Type Properties dialog box. click Finish Sketch to complete the filled region. 11 In the Fill Patterns dialog box. enter Earth for Name. click Modify and select the two lines shown in the following illustration. NOTE You may have to zoom out to view the earth fill pattern in the filled region. Creating a Detail from a Building Model | 351 . The earth fill pattern is displayed in the filled region. 9 In the Name dialog box. click Edit/New. click in the Fill Pattern type parameter Value field. under Name and Pattern. and click OK. 14 In the Type Selector. click Duplicate. If you are zoomed in too far. 7 In the Element Properties dialog box.6 On the Design Bar. select EARTH. 13 On the Design Bar. 10 In the Type Properties dialog box. the pattern does not display. click Region Properties. select <Invisible lines>.

TIP You may need to use the Move command to adjust the position of the lumber. 17 On the Options Bar. click Detail Component. select M_Dimension Lumber-Section. 22 Press the Spacebar to rotate the Lumber Section counter-clockwise. 19 At the bottom of the dialog box. navigate to Detail Components\Structural\Wood in the Metric Library. select M_Dimension Lumber-Section 38X235. 23 Place the 38X235 Lumber component in the detail view as shown in the following illustration. 352 | Chapter 12 Detailing .rfa. 18 In the Open dialog box. click .Add lumber detail components 16 On the Design Bar. 21 In the Type Selector. select the following lumber components: ■ ■ ■ 38X140 38X235 38X286 20 Click Open.

Creating a Detail from a Building Model | 353 . select M_Dimension Lumber.Section: 38x140. and place it in the detail view.24 Place a 38X235 lumber component as shown in the following illustration. 25 In the Type Selector.

354 | Chapter 12 Detailing . Add a plywood detail component to the exterior wall face 29 Place another plywood component on the exterior face of the wall as shown in the following illustration. TIP You may need to use the Align tool to place the plywood component. click Detail Component. 27 In the Type Selector. 28 Place the plywood component above the last 38X235 that you added as shown in the following illustration.Add a plywood detail component to represent the sub-flooring 26 On the Design Bar. select M_Plywood : 25mm.

click Edit/New. and click to place the lap siding. click Duplicate. 37 In the Type Properties dialog box. . select m_anchorbolt and place it in the detail view as shown in the following illustration. When you place the repeating detail component. click . 41 Add the lap siding to the plywood on the exterior face: ■ ■ Select the lower left corner of the plywood detail component. 39 In the Type Properties dialog box. enter 19 mm for Thickness. Verify Fill Available Space is selected for Layout. and click OK. Add an anchor bolt detail component 32 On the Design Bar. Add a lap siding to the exterior wall as a repeating detail component 34 On the Design Bar. 38 In the Name dialog box. Select Inside.30 On the Design Bar. and click OK. ■ ■ 40 Click OK twice. enter Lap Siding for Name. click Repeating Detail. select the plywood on the exterior face of the wall. change the following type parameters: ■ ■ Select m_lap siding for Detail. click Modify. Creating a Detail from a Building Model | 355 . and click 31 In the Element Properties dialog box. 33 In the Type Selector. click Detail Component. 35 On the Options Bar. until enough lap siding displays to cover it. Move the cursor up along the plywood component. 36 In the Element Properties dialog box. Verify Detail Rotation is set to None. this parameter determines the appropriate spacing between the repeated components so that they fill the space that you select evenly.

click Detail Lines. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Like detail components. Add detail lines 1 On the Design Bar. they are view specific.NOTE You may need to move your cursor above the crop region of the detail view to place the lap siding along the entire length of the plywood.rvt. Adding Detail Lines In this exercise. meaning they display only in this view. you add lines to your detail. click Wide Lines. The lap siding is displayed along the plywood. m_Cape_House. 42 Proceed to the next exercise. Select and move the blue grips on the repeating detail line to shorten or lengthen the lap siding. If you need to make modifications to the lap siding after you place it. 2 In the Type Selector. 3 Sketch detail lines to enclose the bottom end of the lap siding as shown in the following illustration. Adding Detail Lines. click Modify and select the repeating lap siding detail component. 356 | Chapter 12 Detailing . on the Design Bar.

6 On the Design Bar. 7 In the Type Selector. click View Properties. sketch a 20 x 100 mm baseboard. select Medium Lines. and click . select Medium lines. select Chain. The model geometry that displays underneath the detail components and lines is grayed out. and click OK. 8 Using the underlay inside wall face and floor as references. 9 Add two more detail lines as shown in the following illustration. select . click Filled Region. 12 On the Options Bar. 5 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Detail Lines. Creating a Detail from a Building Model | 357 .4 On the View menu. select As underlay for the Display Model instance parameter. Create a filled region that represents the15 mm gypsum board 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 11 In the Type Selector. 13 Trace over the interior wall face as shown in the following illustration.

16 In the Type Properties dialog box. 20 Click OK three times. click Edit/New. click in the Fill pattern type parameter value field.14 On the Design Bar. click Region Properties. under Name and Pattern. and click OK. 21 On the Design Bar. 358 | Chapter 12 Detailing . 15 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Finish Sketch to view the gypsum board. 17 In the Name dialog box. click Duplicate. select Gypsum-Plaster. enter Plasterboard for Name. 19 In the Fill Patterns dialog box. 18 In the Type Properties dialog box.

2 In the Line Styles dialog box. you add a vapor barrier and insulation to the detail. click Filled Region. you turn off the display of the model geometry. under Name and Pattern. click Edit/New. 34 Proceed to the next exercise. Adding a Vapor Barrier and Insulation In this exercise. m_Cape_House. and click OK. select Medium Lines.rvt. 28 In the Type Properties dialog box. 26 On the Design Bar. 27 In the Element Properties dialog box.Create a filled region that represents the foundation wall 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 3 In the New Subcategory dialog box. click Duplicate. 29 In the Name dialog box. 33 On the Design Bar. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. the region would be blank. enter Concrete for Name. 32 Click OK three times. click Line Styles. 23 In the Type Selector. 24 On the Options Bar. click Finish Sketch to view the concrete filled region. under Modify Subcategories. Near the end of this lesson. select . and click OK. select Concrete. click Region Properties. enter Vapor Barrier for Name. Add a vapor barrier 1 On the Settings menu. 30 In the Type Properties dialog box. 25 Trace a rectangle over the foundation wall. Creating a Detail from a Building Model | 359 . click New. If there were no filled region to represent the foundation walls. click in the Fill pattern type parameter value field. Adding a Vapor Barrier and Insulation. 31 In the Fill Patterns dialog box.

5 Click OK to complete the new line style. make the following changes to Vapor Barrier: ■ ■ ■ Select 3 for Line Weight/Projection. 9 Click the right face of the interior wall to create a line as shown in the following illustration. enter 120 mm for Width and 65 mm for Offset to center. Add insulation 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 8 On the Options Bar. click Detail Lines. 12 Sketch the insulation: ■ ■ Click at the top and to the right of the exterior wall face underlay of the wall to specify the start point. select Vapor Barrier. 360 | Chapter 12 Detailing . Adding Break Lines In this exercise. Select Black for Line Color.4 Under Lines Styles. Select Dash for Line Pattern. 13 Proceed to the next exercise. 11 On the Options Bar. you add break lines to the detail. 7 In the Type Selector. click Insulation. click and enter 28mm for Offset. Move your cursor down to the top of the 38x140 and click to specify the endpoint. 6 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Adding Break Lines.

8 Place the break line approximately in the center of the floor as shown in the following illustration. Add a break line to the floor 6 On the Design Bar. verify that M_Break Line is selected.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. click Detail Component. select M_Break Line. and select the crop boundary of the detail view. 7 In the Type Selector. 5 Select and move the crop boundary grips until the view displays as in the following illustration. 2 In the Type Selector. Creating a Detail from a Building Model | 361 . Add a break line to the top of the wall section 1 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 3 Place the break line at the top of the wall section as shown in the following image. 4 On the Design Bar.rvt. click Detail Component. m_Cape_House.

362 | Chapter 12 Detailing . What remains are the detail components and lines that you added previously. click Modify.9 On the Design Bar. the model elements such as walls and floors no longer display in this view. as shown in the following illustration. click and rotate the break line until it displays as shown in the following illustration. 10 On the Tools toolbar. 12 In the Element Properties dialog box. select Do not display for Display model. and click OK. and select the break line. NOTE You may need to drag the shape handles of the break line to resize it to the illustration. Turn off the visibility of model components to view detail components only 11 On the View menu. click View Properties. When you turn the display model off.

Click again to set the elbow position of the leader. click Text. m_Cape_House. Adding Text Notes In this exercise. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 5 If you want to save your changes. 4 Add the leaders and notes shown in the following illustration: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click in the detail to set the location of the arrow. Click again to set the location of the text box. Add text notes to the detail 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Enter the text. 2 On the Type Selector. Creating a Detail from a Building Model | 363 . Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.13 Proceed to the next exercise. Adding Text Notes. you add text notes to complete the detail.rvt. click to create a leader with two segments. 6 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. click Save As. select 4 mm text for Text size. on the File menu. 3 On the Options Bar.

Within a detail view. The section line that you see in the top right corner of the floor plan indicates that a section view that cuts through the kitchen sink and cabinet has been added to the project.Changing Component Order and Visibility Settings in Detail Views In this lesson. and double-click Basement. you change the order in which detail components in a detail view of a kitchen sink and cabinet display. click the Training Files icon. A detail component can display in front or in back of all other components. expand Floor Plans. 2 Double-click the section line head to display the section view. For example. You also learn how to override line styles and detail level settings for each model element. click Open. you can set only doors in a detail view to display in fine detail. or can display in front of or in back of specific components. expand Views (all). such as walls and windows. you can arrange the order in which detail components display. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. while other model elements.rvt located in the Common folder. you learn to modify the display of detail components in your detail views. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. The filled regions in the detail section view do not overlap properly. Open c_Office_Building. Changing Detail Component Order in a Detail View In this exercise. display in coarse detail. Open the detail view 1 In the Project Browser. 364 | Chapter 12 Detailing .

The sink now displays as if it was in front of the cabinet detail component. on the Options Bar. behind the cabinet. The sink is now sent to the back of the drawing. on the Options Bar. select it. click .Display the sink in front of the cabinet 3 Move your cursor over the kitchen sink detail component. Changing Component Order and Visibility Settings in Detail Views | 365 . and when it highlights. click . Display the sink behind the cabinet 5 Select the sink and. 4 With the sink selected.

Changing Visibility Settings in a Detail View. 2 On the Window menu. 3 On the View menu. and overriding detail level settings. a cabinet. c_Office_Building. 5 Click in the window containing the Floor Plan: Basement view and draw a zoom box around the furniture as shown in the following illustration. Select the base cabinet and try the various depth options on the Options Bar. and a simple fill pattern. 366 | Chapter 12 Detailing . select Zoom ➤ Zoom In Region. Open four different views 1 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. select Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit.rvt. select Tile. using halftone.There are three stacked detail components in this detail: a sink. 6 Proceed to the next exercise. Changing Visibility Settings in a Detail View In this exercise. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Display the furniture in the basement view in halftone 4 On the View menu. double-click Level 1. you change the visibility settings of several views by overriding line styles.

8 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog box. and click Apply. 9 Under Visibility. 10 Click OK. The furniture within this view is displayed in halftone. and double-click Level 1. and select Halftone. select Visibility/Graphics. Changing Component Order and Visibility Settings in Detail Views | 367 . 15 Clear the Visibility for Door tags. Turn off door tags in the Level 1 Floor Plan 11 In the Project Browser. The door tags are not displayed. 7 On the View menu. select Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. 13 On the View menu. expand Views (all).6 Maximize the window containing the Floor Plan: Basement view. 14 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog box. click the Model Categories tab. click the Annotation Categories tab. select Visibility/Graphics. 12 On the View menu. scroll down to Furniture. expand Floor Plans. 16 Move the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog box so you can view the floor plan.

20 In the Select Line Style dialog box. All the walls in this view are displayed as coarse regardless of the settings in the View Properties dialog box. The walls in this view display in a coarse level of detail while the rest of the floor plan is displayed in a fine level of detail. Select Black for Line Color. and click Apply. 18 For Walls. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Override. 21 Click OK twice. Select Solid for Line Pattern. 368 | Chapter 12 Detailing . The cut line style of the walls is now significantly heavier. click Override under Line Style Cut for Walls.Display walls in coarse detail in the Level 1 Floor Plan 17 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog box. click the Model Categories tab. select Coarse for Detail Level. Select 8 for Line Weight. Change the cut line style for walls in the view 19 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog box.

Creating a Drafting View In this exercise. you create a door detail in the new drafting view. Create the new drafting view 1 On View menu. Drafted details are created in drafting views and are not directly based on building model geometry. you can reference it within the model and place it on a sheet. and expand Drafting Views. as there is no parametric linkage to any building model components. you create a door detail in this new drafting view. Creating a Detail in the Drafting View. on the File menu.rvt located in the Metric folder. You can create drafted details using the drafting tools in Revit Building or by importing details from an existing detail library. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. expand Views (all). named Door Detail. The new drafting view. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. 3 Click OK to create the new drafting view. enter the following: ■ ■ Enter Door Detail for Name. 23 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. you create a drafting view that is not associated with a building model. 5 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating a Detail in the Drafting View In this exercise.22 If you want to save your changes. and save the exercise file with a unique name. Select 1:5 for Scale. Open m_Drafting_views. These details do not update with changes to the building model. Creating a Drafted Detail | 369 . You can create details in drafting views when you do not need to create callout views from the building model. 4 In the Project Browser. click the Training Files icon. The building model is no longer displayed in the drawing window because you have created a drafting view that is not associated with the building model. is displayed in the Project Browser. you learn how to create a drafted detail. In the next exercise. After you create a drafting view. click Save As. Creating a Drafted Detail In this lesson. click New ➤ Drafting View. click Open. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog box.

You can also use the Rectangles sketching tool to create the basic shapes. After you create a dimension. TIP If the tab that you need does not display in the Design Bar. m_Drafting_views. 5 Permanently dimension the door jamb sketch so that the dimension values match those in the following illustration. Create a drafted door detail 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 4 On the Design Bar. 2 In the Type Selector. 3 Sketch the door jamb shown in the following illustration. and click the tab in the context menu. you can change its value by clicking Modify on the Design Bar and selecting one of the lines the dimension references. 370 | Chapter 12 Detailing . TIP You may want to use the Chain option when you sketch the door jamb. select Wide Lines. you can change it. click Dimension.rvt. and then use the Split and Trim tools to complete the sketch. When the dimension value displays in blue. right-click in the Design Bar.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. click Detail Lines.

Creating a Drafted Detail | 371 . 17 Under Pattern Type. On the Design Bar. click Region Properties. and click OK. 11 On the Design Bar. under Name. 9 Turn off automatic snapping to facilitate sketching in close detail: ■ ■ On the Settings menu. click Detail Lines. select Wide Lines. 14 In the Name dialog box. verify Drafting is selected. 19 On the Design Bar. select Sand. 12 In the Element Properties dialog box. clear Length dimension snap increments. 15 In the Type Properties dialog box. click Filled Region. click Snaps. Under Dimension Snaps. 13 In the Type Properties dialog box. 8 On the Options Bar. 18 On the Design Bar.Create filled regions 6 You sketch filled regions to represent gypsum wall board. 21 Sketch the 50 mm x 15 mm door trim as shown. click for the Fill pattern type parameter. and click OK 3 times. The detail with filled regions (the gypsum wall board with the sand drafting pattern) is displayed. click . and click OK. click Lines. 7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 20 In the Type Selector. 10 Sketch two 15 mm thick rectangles as shown. 16 In the Fill Patterns dialog box. enter Sand. click Duplicate. click Edit/New. click Finish Sketch.

Adjust witness lines 23 Select each door jamb dimension. and add 2 dimensions to the door trim. 372 | Chapter 12 Detailing .22 On the Design Bar. 24 Drag the door jamb dimension controls to pull the dimensions away from the detail. click Dimension. 25 Add an overall dimension of the door jamb.

35 In the Type Properties dialog box.Sketch a door 26 On the Design Bar. TIP You may need to use the Move command to adjust the position of the lumber. and click OK twice. 37 Place the lumber component in the detail. Add the dimensional lumber for the header 29 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 31 On the Options Bar. click Detail Lines. click Duplicate. and on the View Control Bar. 32 In the Element Properties dialog box. 36 Press the Spacebar to rotate the Lumber counter-clockwise. click Detail Component. 30 In the Type Selector. Creating a Drafted Detail | 373 . click the Hide/Isolate command. and click Hide Object from the context menu. Select the desired dimensions. click Edit/New. TIP You may find it helpful to temporarily hide the dimensions in the view when sketching the door. 27 In the Type Selector. click . select M_Dimension Lumber 38X140. enter 38 x 125. select Medium Lines. 34 In the Name dialog box. and click OK. 28 Draw lines that represent the door as shown. enter 125 for the Width type parameter. 33 In the Type Properties dialog box.

click Detail Component. Add two break lines 39 On the Design Bar. 374 | Chapter 12 Detailing . select Break Line. 41 Add two break lines as shown. TIP Rotate and move the bottom break line to adjust its masking element. 40 In the Type Selector.38 Stack another 38 x 125 directly above the one that you placed in the previous step to complete the header.

and click OK. 50 On the Design Bar. click to create a leader with two segments. 47 In the Project Browser. verify that A0 metric is selected. click Modify to end the command. expand Views. 48 Select Door Detail. 46 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. and drag it onto the sheet. click Text. Place the drafting view on a new sheet 45 On the View menu. 43 In the Options Bar. Creating a Drafted Detail | 375 .Add text notes to complete the detail 42 On the Design Bar. and expand Drafting Views. click New ➤ Sheet. 49 Click to specify an insertion point. 44 Add leaders and text notes to the detail as shown.

After you explode it. you place an existing detail in a new drafting view to create a drafted detail. 7 On the View menu. select m_Rail_detail. Create a new drafting view 1 On the View menu. Select Custom for Scale. m_Drafting_views. Import a complete detail in DWG format 4 On the File menu. under Layer/Level Colors. 5 In the Import/Link dialog box. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Importing a Detail into a Drafting View. The detail is imported as an import symbol. 3 Click OK. In order to modify it. enter the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter Rail Detail for Name. select New ➤ Drafting View. DXF. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit to view the detail. The detail that you import is in DWG format. DGN. 376 | Chapter 12 Detailing .51 Proceed to the next exercise. 6 At the bottom of the Import/Link dialog box. Importing a Detail into a Drafting View In this exercise. Enter 5 for the Scale value. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog box.dwg from the Metric folder in the Training Files. click Import/Link ➤ DWG. and then click Open. the DWG entities are converted into Revit Building elements. you must explode it.rvt. select Preserve colors.

Change the text color to black and add text leaders 11 On the Design Bar. select black. click the button in the Color type parameter Value field.Explode the imported detail 8 On the Design Bar. 10 If an error dialog box displays. and click OK 3 times. The lines of the detail are converted to detail lines. 12 On the Options Bar. press and hold CTRL. click . 9 Right-click. Creating a Drafted Detail | 377 . and select all of the text blocks in the detail. click Modify. click Modify. The text retains the DWG layer color. 14 In the Type Properties dialog box. 15 In the Color dialog box. and the text within the detail is converted to Revit Building text. and then select the detail. click Edit/New. 13 In the Element Properties dialog box. The text is displayed as black after you click in the drawing area. and click Full Explode. click Delete Element(s).

17 On the Options Bar. click . Creating a Reference Callout. MET STUD FRAMING. and select the bottom text note. click Modify. 378 | Chapter 12 Detailing . 19 Add leaders to the remaining text notes to complete the detail as shown. A leader is added to the text note. 18 Select and move the leader grips to position the leader as shown. 20 Proceed to the next exercise.Add leaders to the text notes 16 On the Design Bar.

and select Drafting View: Door Detail (1/A101). and double-click Section 1.rvt. Create the callout view 1 In the Project Browser. expand Views (all). 3 On the Options Bar.Creating a Reference Callout In this exercise. click Callout. click Modify. 6 Select the callout. m_Drafting_views. 4 Zoom in on the Level 1 doors. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Creating a Drafted Detail | 379 . and double-click the callout. select Reference other view. it appears in the Reference other view list with the detail number and sheet number displayed after the view name. you create a callout in the section view of the building model to reference the door detail that you previously created. 5 Add the callout bubble by dragging a rectangular bubble over the upper left door corner. The section view is displayed. NOTE When a view has been placed on a sheet view. The callout head displays the detail and sheet information (1/A101) because the referenced drafting view is already placed on this sheet. Display the reference view 7 On the Design Bar. and use the callout grips to move the callout head. expand Sections. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. The door detail that you drafted previously is displayed.

8 If you want to save your changes. on the File menu. click Save As. close the exercise file without saving your changes. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 380 | Chapter 12 Detailing . Otherwise.

you learn how to create different types of schedules in your Autodesk Revit Building projects. 381 .Scheduling 13 In this tutorial.

creating an instance schedule. you create a window schedule for the building model shown below. you learn how to create type and instance schedules. You then select a window in the instance schedule and use the Show command to locate it in a view of the building model. or you can group components of the same type into a single line item. or a schedule that lists every window in the building. 382 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . You begin by creating an instance schedule. When you schedule building components in Revit Building. creating a type schedule. you can list each component as a separate line item.Creating Type and Instance Schedules In this lesson. Creating a Window Schedule In this exercise.

Next. click Open. you change the window instance schedule to a window type schedule. 5 Using the same process.rvt located in the Metric folder. click the Training Files icon. A schedule is created that contains every window in the building model. select Comments and click Add. Creating Type and Instance Schedules | 383 . The Comments field is moved under Scheduled fields. add the following fields to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Count Height Level Type Mark Width 6 Under Scheduled fields. and click OK. select Windows. 2 In the New Schedule dialog box. order the fields as shown in the following illustration by selecting them and clicking Move Up or Move Down. right-click in the Design Bar. and click View. Define the fields to display as columns in the window schedule 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. under Category. click Schedule/Quantities. 4 Under Available fields. you group and sort the windows in the instance schedule. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. Create a new window schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Finally. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. click the Fields tab. 7 Click OK. Open m_Schedules. or a schedule that lists the windows by window type.

click the Sorting/Grouping tab. you can display other views of the building model that include the selected window. and double-click Window Schedule to redisplay the window instance schedule. under Other. click Close. 16 Click OK twice. 13 In the Element Properties dialog box. on the Options Bar.Select a window in the schedule and locate it in the building model 8 Select any cell in the first row of the window schedule and. expand Schedules/Quantities. click Show. The window that corresponds to the information in the schedule row is displayed in a relevant view of the building model. this can be a time-consuming process. 15 Select Type Mark for Sort by. and click View Properties. click OK to search through relevant views of the building model. The window schedule is displayed. 9 In the warning dialog box that is displayed. 10 In the Show Element(s) in View dialog box. However. in large building models with many views. NOTE By clicking Show. sorted by type mark. click Edit for Sorting/Grouping. 14 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. Group and sort the window schedule by type mark 12 Right-click on the schedule. 384 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . 11 In the Project Browser.

you create a room schedule from the floor plan of a large building model. on the File menu. 20 Click OK twice. 19 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. click Edit for the Sorting/Grouping instance parameter. and save the exercise file with a unique name. and click View Properties. 22 Close the exercise file. click Save As. Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams In this lesson.Change the schedule from an instance schedule to a type schedule 17 Right-click on the schedule. Creating a Room Schedule In this exercise. 21 If you want to save your changes. you learn to add schedules and schedule keys to a project by creating a room schedule and room color diagram. clear Itemize every instance. The window type schedule is displayed. Schedule keys allow you to define common items that can be used by multiple objects within a schedule. 18 In the Element Properties dialog box. Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams | 385 .

select Number and click Add. Select the fields to display as columns in the room schedule 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. click Open. click the Fields tab.rvt located in the Metric folder. The Number field is moved under Scheduled fields. 386 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . 5 Under Available fields. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Schedule/Quantities. select Rooms. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. and click View. right-click in the Design Bar. Open m_Schedules. Several rooms and room tags exist in the floor plan. Create a room schedule 1 In the Project Browser. and click OK. and double-click flr 3 to make it the active view. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. expand Floor Plans. click the Training Files icon. expand Views (all).Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. 3 In the New Schedule dialog box. under Category.

select Bold to display the schedule headers in bold font. Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams | 387 . 8 Click the Appearance tab. The room Number is 1. and the Level and Area values are displayed as Not Tagged. because the room is not tagged with a room tag.6 Using the same process. next to Rows:. you define the font for the schedule headers. 10 Click OK. Add new rooms to the schedule 11 On the Options Bar. NOTE The Appearance settings only take effect when the schedule is placed on a drawing sheet. A new row is displayed at the bottom of the schedule. click New. Next. add the following fields to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ Name Level Area 7 Under Scheduled fields. The bold header is not noticeable until you place the schedule on a drawing sheet. order the fields as shown in the following illustration by selecting them and clicking Move Up or Move Down. 9 To the right of Header text.

and enter Conference to change the room name.12 Using the same process. Add two room tags to the floor plan 16 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. 14 Select Room in the Name column for Room 1. add a second room. and enter 30. None of the rooms have tags placed on them. 17 Zoom in on the right side of the building. 13 Select Room in the Name column for Room 29. The second room is displayed at the bottom of the list and is numbered sequentially. double-click flr 3. and select Conference from the list. 15 Select 1 in the Number column for Room 1. 388 | Chapter 13 Scheduling .

right-click in the Design Bar. 23 In the Project Browser. TIP If the Drafting tab of the Design Bar is not active. and double-click Room Schedule to view the updated room rows. 21 On the Options Bar. 19 On the Options Bar. 20 Move your cursor into the large room in the upper right corner of the floor plan. The boundaries of the room highlight before you place the room tag. Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams | 389 . 22 Place the room tag in the small room across from the large conference room. select 30 Conference for Room. expand Schedules/Quantities. and click to place the room tag.18 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Room Tag. and verify that Horizontal is selected. and click Drafting. select 29 Conference for Room.

double-click flr 3. double-click Room Schedule to view the 11 rooms that you added to the schedule. select Auto for Room. under Schedules/Quantities. click Room Tag. 26 On the Options Bar. 27 Place the room tags as shown in the following illustration. 390 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . 25 On the Design Bar. 28 In the Project Browser.Add eleven additional room tags 24 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans.

and zoom in on the room. and select the tags in the three remaining rooms named Room. under Identity Data. and select Circulation for Name. 32 With the room tags selected. 33 In the Element Properties dialog box.11 square meters. press and hold CTRL. locate the room with an area of 92. click . under Floor Plans. The name in the room tag is now Circulation. select Services for Name. 34 On the Design Bar. and select the seven room tags shown in the following illustration. and click OK. and click OK.Modify room tags 29 In the schedule. click . click Modify. press and hold CTRL. Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams | 391 . select Office for Name. 36 In the Element Properties dialog box. 31 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 30 In the Project Browser. double-click flr 3. 35 With the room tags selected.

Define three new room styles 42 On the Options Bar. under Category. and click OK. and Wall Finish. press and hold CTRL. and enter Std Office. 45 On the Options Bar. Enter Carpet 1 for Floor Finish. 41 Click OK to create the new room style schedule. enter the following information in the row: ■ ■ ■ Enter Vinyl for Base Finish. click New twice to add two rows to the schedule. click the Key Name field. Floor Finish. 43 In the new row. select Rooms. 392 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . Enter Paint for Wall Finish. 39 Select Schedule keys. 46 Add information to the rows so that the schedule displays as shown in the following illustration. 40 In the Schedule Properties dialog box.Add a schedule key 37 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 38 In the New Schedule dialog box. and click Add. under Available fields. click Schedule/Quantities. select Base Finish. click New to add a row to the schedule. 44 Using the same process.

and click OK. click View Properties. 53 In the Element Properties dialog box. 48 On the Design Bar. select Room Style. 55 On the View menu. and click OK. 51 On the Design Bar. click . press and hold CTRL. 39) in the lower right corner of the floor plan. click Modify. 56 Under Other. double-click flr 3. under Other. 52 On the Options Bar. click . under Available fields. select Exec Offices for Room Style. and select the room tags in the three offices (37. Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams | 393 . 57 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. and select the room tag in the large conference room (29) in the upper right corner of the floor plan. double-click Room Schedule. and click Add. 58 Change the order of the schedule as shown in the dialog box below. click Modify. 38. under Schedules/Quantities. click Edit for Fields. under Other. View the room schedule 54 In the Project Browser. 59 Click OK twice to update the schedule. 49 On the Options Bar.Apply the new room styles to the room schedule 47 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. select Exec Offices for Room Style. 50 In the Element Properties dialog box.

61 Proceed to the next exercise. 394 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . you create a room color diagram based on the names of the rooms in the floor plan.60 For the rooms in the schedule that are named Services. Creating a Room Color Diagram. select Services from the list in the Room Style column. Creating a Room Color Diagram In this exercise.

under Views (all). click Edit Color Scheme. click Color Fill. The rooms in the floor plan automatically change color. 5 In the alert dialog box. A legend displays at the tip of your cursor. 8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog box. and click the color green. Change the fill colors that are applied to the conference rooms 6 On the Design Bar. m_schedules. 4 Click in the lower right of the drawing area to place the legend. scroll all the way to the left. 7 On the Options Bar. Create a room color diagram 1 In the Project Browser.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click the color button for Conference. 9 In the Color dialog box. The fill color in the rooms named Conference are displayed as green. click OK. and double-click flr 3. click Modify. 11 Click OK three times. and select the color legend. 2 Zoom out so you can view the entire building model. Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams | 395 . click PANTONE.rvt. 10 In the PANTONE® Color Picker. expand Floor Plans.

13 In the Room Schedule. right-click in the Design Bar. Create a new wall schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Schedule/Quantities. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes In this lesson. select Walls. 16 Close the exercise file. double-click flr 3. and level. 15 If you want to save your changes. click the Fields tab. click Open.rvt located in the Common folder. You also learn how to create a furniture schedule that includes room name. 14 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. and save the exercise file with a unique name. To display graphics with metric values. 2 In the New Schedules dialog box. select the following fields and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ Area Volume Width Length 5 Click OK to complete the schedule. Room no longer displays in the key/legend. click Save As. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions In this exercise. NOTE Because the next two lessons use common files. double-click Room Schedule. and click OK. you create a wall schedule that includes columns for the Uniformat Assembly Codes and assembly descriptions of the scheduled walls. number. select Project Units from the Settings menu and change the appropriate formats to metric. The color diagram and legend reflect the changes that you made. you learn how to schedule Uniformat Assembly Codes as they are applied to Revit Building components. click the Training Files icon. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. on the File menu. Open c_Schedules_2.Change the name of the single room named Room 12 In the Project Browser. under Categories. under Schedules/Quantities. select Services for Room (10) in the Name column. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. 396 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . and click View. 4 Under Available fields. graphics are displayed with imperial values.

10 Click OK twice. and click Properties to view the element properties of the wall schedule that you created. add Assembly Code and Assembly Description to the schedule. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes | 397 . The Assembly Code and Assembly Description fields display in the schedule. 9 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. 7 Right-click Wall Schedule. 8 In the Element Properties dialog box. under Other. expand Schedules/Quantities.Schedule Uniformat Assembly Codes 6 In the Project Browser. click Edit for Fields.

Brick Veneer w/ Stud. expand C10 . and double-click Level 1. click in the Assembly code column in the first row of the schedule. and select C1010115 . expand Floor Plans. expand C1010100 . expand C1010 .Assign an assembly code to a wall type in the project within the schedule 11 In the wall schedule. and then click in the schedule. 13 Click OK.Interiors. under Views (all).Partitions. All of the walls of this wall type are updated. expand C . 14 Click OK in the dialog box that explains that the change will be applied to all elements of the chosen type.Interior Construction.Fixed Partitions. 12 In the Choose Assembly Code dialog box. Assign an assembly code to a wall type in the project from the building model 15 In the Project Browser. and click . 398 | Chapter 13 Scheduling .Partitions .

Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes | 399 . 22 In the Project Browser. double-click Furniture Schedule.Drywall w/ Metal Stud. Schedule building model components by level and room 23 In the Project Browser. expand C1010100. 19 In the Type Properties dialog box. under Schedules/Quantities. 20 In the Choose Assembly Code dialog box. expand C. double-click Wall Schedule. 18 In the Element Properties dialog box.5 1/2" Partition (1hr) walls. 21 Click OK three times. click . expand C1010. click Edit/New. under Identity Data. 17 On the Options Bar. expand C10.16 Select one of the Interior . and then click . and select C1010145 . under Schedules/Quantities. click in the Assembly Code field.Partitions .

Place the Furniture Schedule on a new drawing sheet 30 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click to place it. and click OK. 26 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. 25 In the Element Properties dialog box. 29 Click OK twice. right-click Furniture Schedule. under Other. Change the appearance of the schedule 33 Zoom in on the schedule on the sheet. 400 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . click Sheet. 34 Adjust the row length in the schedule by selecting and moving the blue grips that are displayed on the top of the schedule. and then add Level and Manufacturer to the schedule. select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal : 30 x 42 Horizontal. and click Properties. select Room for Select available fields from. click Edit for Fields.24 In the Project Browser. 32 Drag the furniture schedule from the Project Browser onto the sheet. 27 Add Room: Name and Room: Number to the schedule. 31 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. 28 Select Furniture for Select available fields from.

on the File menu. Scheduling Shared Parameters | 401 . and are defined and stored in an external file. An example of the use of shared parameters is the need to add specific parameters to a family component for scheduling and tagging when those parameters are not present by default.35 Split the schedule into multiple segments by clicking the blue break line that is displayed on the right border of the schedule. 37 If you want to save your changes. you learn how to use shared parameters to define additional parameters that are not included in pre-defined instance and type parameters either within family components or within the project template. regardless of category. adding the shared parameters to a family. 36 Select the blue crosses that are displayed in the center of each schedule segment to reposition the schedule segments as shown. and creating a multi-category schedule. Scheduling Shared Parameters In this lesson. The following exercise demonstrates the solution for this situation and covers the process of setting up shared parameters. The new schedule segments are automatically placed to the right of the original schedule and are top aligned. ensuring consistency across families and projects. These shared parameters can be added to any family. Their values may also be aggregated and reported within Revit Building multi-category schedules. Creating a Multi-Category Schedule In this exercise. 38 Close the exercise file. click Save As. you create a multi-category schedule. and save the exercise file with a unique name.

click Shared Parameters. 2 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog box. click Create. 3 In the Save As dialog box. and click Save. 9 Add three additional parameters. make sure you save your shared parameter files in a location where other users can access it.You create shared parameters. enter Closure for Name. create a multi-category tag that you use to tag a simple floor plan. and click OK. click OK. 5 In the New Parameter Group dialog box. and click OK. ID. select Text for Type. and Lock Set. and assign Text for Type. enter Hardware. Hinge. enter a file name. If you are working on a network. Create parameters in the Hardware group 6 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog box. Create a shared parameter file 1 On the File menu. 7 Under Parameters. verify that Hardware is selected for Parameter group. add them to a door family. 8 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. Shared parameters are saved to an external file. click New. Create a new parameter group to store individual parameters 4 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog box. You store all of your hardware-related parameters within this group for use in the project. click New. Click OK if the alert box indicates that the shared parameter file does not exist. under Groups. and then generate the multi-category schedule. 402 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . The shared parameter file (TXT) is created. 10 After you add the parameters.

17 In the Shared Parameters dialog box. and click OK. under Parameters. 12 In the left pane of the Open dialog box. 19 Repeat the steps for the other parameters. click the Training Files icon. 15 In the Family Types dialog box. so that you can use it later in this exercise.Add the shared parameters to a family 11 On the File menu. select Shared parameter. setting them as Type parameters. Enter Chrome for Hinge. 20 Assign the new parameters the following values by entering them in the corresponding Value field. 21 Click OK.rfa located in the Common folder. select Instance. select ID. The Family Types dialog box displays the parameters that are currently available for this family category. The parameters are displayed in the Family Types dialog box. You are now working in the Family Editor. click Add. click Close to close the file. 18 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. 16 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. under Parameters. and click OK. 13 Open c_ Door. Enter N/A for Closure. Enter 1 for ID. 22 Save the file as NewDoor in an appropriate location. click Family Types. click Open. 14 On the Design Bar. and click Select. 23 On the File menu. ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter Yale for Lock Set. Scheduling Shared Parameters | 403 .

41 In the Open dialog box. 30 In the Shared Parameters dialog box. the tag cannot attach to any component. click .rvt located in the Common folder. 33 Click OK. 404 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . select ID. 35 On the Design Bar. 37 Draw a rectangle around the tag.e. 39 On the File menu. click Close to close the file. select Hardware. click Label. click Add. 28 In the Select Parameter dialog box.Create a multi-category tag 24 On the File menu. select Filter parameter. click Lines. 38 Save the file as HardwareTag in an appropriate location. click Select. and click Open. A multi-category tag must have at least one label with an external parameter set as a filter parameter. 31 Under Parameters. as shown. Use the multi-category tag in a project 40 On the File menu. 29 In the Parameter Properties dialog box.rft in the Annotations folder.. Open. NOTE If you do not specify a filter parameter for the tag. and click Open. 25 In the New dialog box. ID). under Parameter Group. 34 Zoom in to the tag at the intersection of the reference planes. select c_Hardware_Plan. select Multi-Category Tag. 26 On Design Bar. and click OK twice. 32 In the Select Parameter dialog box. 36 On the Options Bar. This option ensures that this tag attaches only to a component with that same filter parameter (i. click New ➤ Annotation Symbol. 27 Click at the intersection of the reference planes in the drawing window to display the Select Parameter dialog box.

45 In the Type Selector. 53 Click OK. click Tag All Not Tagged to quickly tag all the components with the filter parameter. click Schedule/Quantities. and load into the project the multi-category tag files HardwareTag. and click OK.rfa and NewDoor. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 48 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. select Multi-Category Tags for Category.rfa that you just created. add the following fields to the schedule: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ID Mark Type Family Closure Lock Set NOTE Do not be concerned with duplicate ID and Lock Set fields. and click OK. 46 Move your cursor into the drawing window.42 On the File menu. 47 Click to place the tag. Scheduling Shared Parameters | 405 . Create a multi-category schedule 50 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 43 Replace any existing doors by selecting them and changing their type to the NewDoor type that you just loaded. 44 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 52 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. Notice that you can highlight only those components that have the filter parameter that you set earlier to ID. 49 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog box. click Tag. Notice that the HardwareTag is reading the shared parameter that you created earlier and attached to the Door family. select Multi-Category from the list. 51 In the New Schedule dialog box. select the multi-category HardwareTag that you just loaded.

based on wall area. click the Training Files icon.The multi-category schedule is displayed.M_Single-Flush Vision: 915 x 2134 mm 3 . The second schedule that you create is a wall schedule that calculates the cost of the walls in the project. click Save As. you create two schedules. on the File menu. Creating a Level-Based Door Schedule with a Filter In this exercise.rvt located in the Metric folder. all of the doors in the project would be scheduled. 406 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . Using Formulas and Filters in Schedules In this lesson. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. 54 If you want to save your changes. you want to filter out all doors that are not on level 3 to include only the 11 doors listed above. The first schedule that you create is a level-based door schedule that uses a filter to exclude all of the doors that are not on floor three of the building model. However. View the third floor of the building 1 In the Project Browser. expand Views (all). and save the exercise file with a unique name. The floor plan is displayed. 55 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. and double-click Level 3. expand Floor Plans. you create a level based door schedule.M_Single-Flush Vision: 864 x 2032 mm 3 . You use both filters and a formula to create the second schedule.UK_Single-Flush: SO 1010 x 2410 mm If you created a standard door schedule. click Schedule/Quantities. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. Create a new door schedule for level flr 3 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Open m_First_Project-West_Wing. There are 11 doors of the following types on this level of the building model: ■ ■ ■ 5 . click Open.

and specify the following values for Filter by: ■ ■ ■ Select Level in the first menu. 4 Click OK. and click View Properties. select Hidden Field. 5 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. 14 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. and select (none) for Filter. Clear Itemize every instance to group the like door types into one row. click Edit for Filter. and it causes the schedule to include only the doors on Level 3. 13 In the Element Properties dialog box. 10 Under Fields. click the Fields tab. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. select the following fields. 11 Under Field formatting. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Count Family and Type Sill Height Head Height Width Level 7 Click the Filter tab. and specify the following options: ■ ■ Select Family and Type for Sort by. enter Doors . Select Level 3 in the third menu. The schedule includes the count and type for only doors on floor 3.Level 3. under Other. select Doors. Using Formulas and Filters in Schedules | 407 . click the Filter tab. The counts for the door types represent the door schedule for the entire model. 6 Under Available fields.3 In the New Schedule dialog box. Select equals in the second menu. Verify Schedule building components is selected. 8 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. Under Name. 12 Right-click the schedule. Hide the Level field in the schedule so it is used only to filter the doors that are not on level 3 and not included as a column in the schedule 9 Click the Formatting tab. select Level. Verify New Construction is selected for Phase. This filter checks each door in the project to see which level it is associated with. and click OK. 15 Click OK twice.

Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Verify Schedule building components is selected. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ Count Family and Type Cost Area 6 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. 17 Proceed to the next exercise. 2 In the New Schedule dialog box. 10 Under Fields. select Walls.16 On the Standard toolbar. and then under Field Formatting. The wall type information for each wall is updated when you enter this data. 8 Clear Itemize every instance to group the like wall types into one row. 408 | Chapter 13 Scheduling .rvt. 9 Click the Formatting tab. Creating a Wall Schedule with Filters and a Formula. click once so the schedule represents only the doors on Flr 3. 14 Since no cost has been assigned to these wall types. click Schedule/Quantities. 5 Under Available fields. 13 Click OK. select Area. 11 Under Heading. 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. m to more accurately represent the data. select Calculate totals so that the total area of the each type is calculated. Use the cost values in the following illustration. The schedule is displayed. Create a new schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click the Fields tab. enter a cost value for each type in the schedule. select Cost. 7 Select Family and Type for Sort by. Creating a Wall Schedule with Filters and a Formula In this exercise. Verify New Construction is selected under Phase. you create a wall schedule that provides a total cost of all of the walls in the project based on the total square footage of each wall type. enter Cost/Sq. 12 Under Fields. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Category. m_First_Project-West_Wing. select the following fields. 3 Click OK.

and save the exercise file with a unique name. Scheduling Project Parameters | 409 . NOTE The /(1 m^2) in the formula is required to make the resulting value unitless. on the File menu. 22 Under Field formatting. 24 In the Format dialog box. without the value it would have a unit of area. Notice that there is no grand total displayed for the Cost/Sq. 29 Close the exercise file. select Calculate totals to ensure that a total of all the walls is returned. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use default settings. Select 2 decimal places for Rounding. Select Fixed for Units. click the Sorting/Grouping tab. 17 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. 23 Click Field Format. Project parameters are instance or type parameters that you can use to schedule information specific to the project that you are working with. This is because you did not select to calculate the totals for that field. 26 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. Scheduling Project Parameters In this lesson. 27 Select Grand totals to have the schedule display the sum of any row for which you selected Calculate totals on the Formatting tab. and click OK twice. Verify that Number is selected for Type. click Calculated Value. click Edit for Fields. 28 If you want to save your changes. select Total Cost. Enter Area * Cost/(1 m^2) for Formula. The schedule is displayed. They cannot be shared with other projects and. unlike shared parameters. you cannot use them to tag objects. and click View Properties. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter Total Cost for Name. 16 In the Element Properties dialog box. you learn how to schedule project parameters.Determine the total cost for each wall type by multiplying the total area of the wall by the cost per square foot 15 Right-click the schedule. 20 Click the Formatting tab. m column. under Other. 19 Click OK. click Save As. 25 Click OK. 18 In the Calculated Value dialog box. 21 Under Fields.

or by entering it in the properties of the room tag. Open m_Office_2.rvt located in the Metric folder. and click Drafting. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Project Parameter. 3 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. You begin by adding the Occupant parameter to the project and creating the room schedule to include the Occupant parameter as a column in the schedule. 2 In the Project Parameters dialog box. you create a room schedule for the following office floor plan that includes the project parameter. Assign the new Occupant parameter to the project and create the room schedule 6 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. you can add information to the Occupant column in the schedule. After you create the schedule. click Room Tag. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. click the Training Files icon. click Open. either by entering it directly. right-click in the Design Bar. Create a project parameter 1 On the Settings menu. Under Categories. select Rooms to associate the Occupant parameter with the Room category. TIP If the Drafting tab of the Design Bar is not active. 7 Tag the rooms as shown in the following illustration. Occupant. Enter Occupant for Name. click Add to create the new parameter. The new project parameter Occupant is displayed in the Project Parameters dialog box. 4 Click OK. 5 Click OK.Creating a Room Schedule with Project Parameters In this exercise. click Project Parameters. 410 | Chapter 13 Scheduling .

and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ Number Area Department Occupant 12 Click OK to generate the schedule. and click OK. 10 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. and save the exercise file with a unique name. select Rooms to create a room schedule. 9 In the New Schedule dialog box. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access In this exercise. you learn how to export project information into a Microsoft® Access 2000 database.8 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 11 Under Available fields. click Save As. on the File menu. you learn how to export project information to an ODBC (Open DataBase Connectivity) compatible database. Exporting Project Information with ODBC In this lesson. click Schedule/Quantities. select the following fields. click the Fields tab. under Categories. Exporting Project Information with ODBC | 411 . 15 Close the exercise file. The process that you use to export the database is similar for any other ODBC-compliant database. 13 Add names to the occupant field by entering them directly in the schedule or by entering them in the room tag properties. 14 If you want to save your changes. The Occupant field is displayed in the schedule.

rvt located in the Common folder. click Create. One final table is also exported: Assembly Codes. and some instance tables include a “RoomId” column containing the ID of the room that the instance is in. click OK in the dialog box. under Database Name. 6 Click Finish. select the Microsoft Access driver (*mdb). click OK. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. 412 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . 1 On the File menu. enter Revit_Project. 11 In the OBDC Microsoft Access Setup dialog box. and open the database in Microsoft Access. 8 In the New Database dialog box. a table is also created for each key schedule in a project. as long as the category is one of the categories that Revit Building exports. Additionally. 7 In the ODBC Microsoft Access Setup dialog box. click the File Data Source tab. For example. and click OK to create the database. In addition to the tables for instances and types in a category.Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. The exported columns are the same as the columns in the key schedule. tables that list instances only are created for levels and rooms because these categories do not have types. click the Training Files icon. Open c_Schedules_2. 4 In the Create New Data Source dialog box. 12 Click OK in the remaining dialog boxes. instance tables include a “TypeId” column containing the ID of the instance’s type. used for choosing one of the keys from the key schedule. Elements IDs are also used to establish relationships between elements in different tables. 9 Under Directories.mdb for Database Name. click Export ➤ ODBC Database. 2 In the Select Data Source dialog box. click Open. These parameters are exported as well and contain the ID of the key element. 5 Enter RevitDSN for the name of the DSN. Each key schedule gives elements in its category a new parameter. Revit Building creates two tables for the following categories of elements: one that lists all of the element instances in a project and one that lists all of the element types in a project (see below). 10 When the confirmation displays. in addition to the Id column. so that each table of elements includes an “Id” column. This table contains one row for each Uniformat Assembly Code. The columns of the table are Assembly Code and Assembly Description. select a location for the database file. A unique element ID is used to identify exported elements. and click Next. 3 Click New. 13 Close the exercise file. under Database. and click Next. The table of types includes an Assembly Code column that references the Assembly Codes table.

413 .Annotating and Dimensioning 14 In this tutorial. and how to annotate and dimension your Autodesk Revit Building projects. you learn how to change the base elevation of a project.

click Open. if a project is built on a plateau at 1500 meters and Level 2 is 4 meters above the base elevation. expand Views (all). You can change the base elevation without changing the elevation value of every other level in the project. For example. you learn how to relocate the base elevation of a project. you relocate the base elevation of a small house from 0 m to 10000 m. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. if a project is built on a plateau at 1500 m and Level 2 is 4 m above the base elevation. and not 1504 m. Open m_simple_house. You accomplish this in Revit Building by defining levels as either project or shared levels. Project levels report elevation as it relates to other levels in the project. Level 1 displays an elevation value of 0 mm. as the base elevation of most projects is rarely at sea level. and not 4 m. click the Training Files icon.rvt located in the Metric folder. Define Level 1 as a shared level 1 In the Project Browser. Setting the Base Elevation of a House In this exercise. the elevation value of the second level of the house (4000 mm above Level 1) reports an elevation of 14000 mm. 414 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning . while Level 2 reads 4 m.Setting the Base Elevation of a Project In this lesson. For example. Level 1 reads 1500 m. you can relocate the project at a base elevation of 1500 m and define the levels as shared so that Level 1 reads 1500 m. expand Elevations. and Level 2 reads 1504 m. or you can change the base elevation and add its value to the levels above it. and double-click South. Shared levels report an elevation value relative to an origin that you establish when you relocate the project. After you define the levels as shared and relocate the project.

Setting the Base Elevation of a Project | 415 . The south elevation is displayed. 13 Select the Level 2 line. only the Elevation Base parameter of Level 1 is shared at this time.Shared.Shared. and you must create a new level type. click Project Position/Orientation ➤ Relocate this Project. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit. Relocate the project 9 On the Tools menu. The reported value of Level 2 changes to take the value of the global elevation into consideration. click . you must set the Elevation Base parameter to Shared. However. In order for Level 1 to report the global elevation after the project is relocated. 10 Select the Level 1 line. 6 In the Name dialog box.2 Select the Level 1 line. 5 In the Type Properties dialog box. you specify the point from which you want to relocate the project. 12 On the View menu. under Constraints. 4 In the Element Properties dialog box. 7 In the Type Properties dialog box. By selecting the Level 1 line. 3 On the Options Bar. you specify the new location of the project. 14 In the Type Selector. and click OK. click Duplicate. and press ENTER. The base elevation now reads 10000 mm. 11 Move the cursor above the elevation line. select Shared for Elevation Base. enter 10000 mm. The elevation of the other levels remains the same. you would change the parameter for all the levels in the Project. By entering 10000 mm in this step. select Level : Level . enter Level . to better demonstrate how shared levels work. If you did that now. 8 Click OK twice. click Edit/New.

The changes in elevation have propagated to this view. Permanent dimensions must be explicitly created. as well as other views of the building model. 416 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning . Temporary dimensions display automatically when you create and insert components. 17 If you want to save your changes. Dimensioning In this lesson. define the roof level as shared. click Save As. there are two types of dimensions: temporary and permanent. 18 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. on the File menu. except when you sketch profiles to create families. 16 Using the same method. so it reports an elevation of 18000 mm. and save the exercise file with a unique name. double-click North. In Revit Building. In this case. under Elevations.15 In the Project Browser. although you must turn on their visibility to view them. permanent dimensions are created automatically. you learn how to create permanent dimensions to control and document your designs.

Open m_Dimensions. radial. linear. The different types of dimensions that you can add include aligned. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. dimensions are aligned and snap to wall centerlines. that you can add to your drawings.rvt located in the Metric folder. select it. Dimensioning | 417 . 3 When the centerline of the wall highlights. multi-segmented. 2 Without making any changes on the Options Bar. click the Training Files icon. and angular dimensions.Creating Dimensions In this exercise. click Open. move the cursor over the top straight wall on the floor plan. click Dimension. The default dimensioning options display on the Options Bar. 4 Move the cursor over the wall at the very bottom of the view. and when the centerline of the wall highlights. Create permanent dimensions 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. you learn how to create and modify different types of permanent dimensions. By default. select it.

The lock displays as locked. indicating that you cannot change the distance between the referenced walls without first unlocking the dimension. In addition.5 Move the cursor to the left. indicating that the dimension can be modified. A lock symbol that is unlocked displays next to it. indicating that the dimension segments are not equal in length. The dimension displays in the drawing. an equal symbol with a slash through it is displayed. Create multi-segmented dimensions 7 On the Design Bar. An unlocked lock symbol displays next to each dimension segment. outside of the wall. click Dimension. 8 Dimension the four vertical walls: ■ ■ Select the four vertical wall segments sequentially. Move the cursor below the lowest horizontal wall. Only aligned and angular permanent dimensions can be constrained in this way. 6 Click the lock. and click to set the location of the dimension. and click to place the dimension. 418 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning .

Create a radial dimension 10 On the Design Bar. indicating that the segments are now equal. Dimensioning | 419 . and the are dimensions permanent and constrained to each other. 11 On the Options Bar. Move the cursor to the inside of the curved wall. click Dimension. and click to place the dimension. click 12 Dimension the curved wall: ■ ■ . Select the curved corner wall to display the radial dimension.9 Click the equal symbol to make all dimension segment lengths equal. The slash no longer displays through the equal symbol.

15 On the Design Bar. and press DELETE. and zoom in around the curved wall. select the dimension line of the radial dimension. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. click Dimension. The dimension is snapped to the wall center. 420 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning .13 On the View menu. the default dimension option. 18 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing window. 16 On the Options Bar. 17 Dimension the curved wall again: ■ ■ Move your cursor over the inside face of the wall until it highlights. 14 On the Design Bar. click and select Wall faces for Prefer. Select the inside face of the wall. and place the dimension as shown in the following illustration. click Modify.

The linear dimension tool has a more restricted selection filter so that you can select only points. Dimensioning | 421 . 22 Dimension the vertical wall at the top right in the floor plan: ■ ■ Select the top point on the exterior face of the wall. You can override the cursor tracking by toggling with the spacebar. Move your cursor to the left to size the dimension arc. as shown in the following illustration. and click to place the dimension. 20 Dimension the slanted wall at the top right in the floor plan: ■ ■ Select the inside face of the slanted wall. click and verify that Wall faces is selected for Prefer.You can now view the radial dimension within the floor plan. Create a linear dimension 21 On the Options Bar. The dimension is always constrained to either the horizontal or vertical axis. Move your cursor to the right. and then select the inside face of the vertical wall above it. Notice that the Prefer and Pick options are no longer available on the Options Bar. and depends on the cursor tracking behavior. and then select the bottom point of the exterior face. and click to place the dimension. Create an angular dimension 19 On the Options Bar. click .

5 Hover the cursor near the center of the bottom wall. click Dimension. Override dimension defaults 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and change the origin of dimension witness lines. a different wall selection choice highlights. For example. Controlling Witness Line Location In this exercise. you may want to locate the two outermost witness lines on the exterior face of each wall. 422 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning .rvt. delete. Notice that only the wall faces highlight when you move the cursor over them. 2 On the Options Bar. verify that Wall faces is selected for Prefer.23 On the Design Bar. for a multi-segmented dimension. you may need to override their settings on an instance basis. including the wall centerline. However. where the witness lines referring to interior walls would be located on the centerline of each wall. m_Dimensions. Controlling Witness Line Location. because the Prefer wall face option is selected instead of the Prefer wall centerline option. you learn to add. select it. 3 Move the cursor over the bottom wall. 24 Proceed to the next exercise. and press TAB repeatedly. but do not select anything. When you place dimensions. you specify their origin on the Options Bar. in some cases. 4 Alternate the cursor position over the inner and outer bottom wall face. 6 When the outside face of the wall highlights. click Modify. Each time you press TAB.

8 Move the cursor to the top horizontal wall and select the exterior face. press TAB until the wall centerline highlights. Dimensioning | 423 . click Modify.7 Move the cursor over the middle horizontal wall. Edit dimension witness lines 10 On the Design Bar. 11 Select the dimension line shown in the following illustration. The dimension highlights and control boxes display on each witness line. 9 Place the dimension as shown in the following illustration. and select it.

The witness line moves to the wall centerline. The witness line moves to the inside wall face.12 Click once on the control box on the lowest witness line. 14 Move the cursor to the control box on the witness line at the top wall. 424 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning . 13 Click the control box again. but do not select it.

Modifying Dimension Properties.rvt.15 Right-click the control box. and click Delete Witness Line. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 16 Right-click the remaining dimension line and click Edit Witness Lines. IMPORTANT Be careful to right-click the witness line and not the control box on the witness line. The witness line is deleted. Modifying Dimension Properties In this exercise. click in the drawing area away from the floor plan. click Modify and select the dimension that you modified in the previous exercise. If you right-click the control box. 18 To end the editing command. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. Change the type parameters of the floor plan dimensions 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. The full dimension string is displayed again. 17 Select the outside face of the top wall. a shortcut menu with different options is displayed. m_Dimensions. you learn to modify the type parameters of dimensions. Dimensioning | 425 .

4 In the Type Properties dialog box. Working with Alignments and Constraints. Aligning components is similar to dimensioning components with a value of zero. on the File menu. when sketching walls. enter 5 mm for the Text Size. or close the exercise file without saving your changes. select Right. 3 In the Element Properties dialog box. click . alignments can be made and locked with minimal effort.2 On the Options Bar. and save the exercise file with a unique name. change the following type parameter values: ■ ■ Under Text. then Up for Read Convention. The dimensions update as shown in the following illustration. As you create components. 7 If you want to save your changes. 5 Click OK twice. 6 On the Design Bar. you learn to align components and lock their alignment to better work with them in your drawings. 426 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning . A locked alignment is a constraint that is maintained if any of the components is moved or modified. a lock symbol immediately displays. allowing you to lock the alignment of the walls. For example. click Save As. click Modify. if two or more walls are colinear. 8 Proceed to the next exercise. click Edit/New. Under Text. Working with Alignments and Constraints In this exercise.

rvt located in the Metric folder. Select the exterior face of the uppermost horizontal wall. Align the three short horizontal walls below the two walls that you aligned 4 On the Tools toolbar. The cursor displays two arrows at its tip. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. click 2 Align the walls: ■ ■ . 6 Select the lower center wall to define it as the fixed wall to which the other walls will align. The lock symbol displays as unlocked. indicating the two walls are not constrained to each other. The short horizontal wall on the left moves to align with the upper horizontal wall. When you align two components. and select Wall centerlines for Prefer. Dimensioning | 427 . click the Training Files icon. indicating that the Align command is active. indicating that the alignment of the two walls is now locked. select Multiple Alignment. the first component that you select remains fixed in position. click . 5 On the Options Bar. 3 Click the lock. click Open. Select the exterior face of the short horizontal wall on the left. Open m_Alignment. while the second component moves to complete the alignment. The symbol changes to a closed lock. Align the two uppermost horizontal walls in the floor plan 1 On the Tools toolbar.Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu.

11 Select the middle wall and drag it downward. 9 Select the short horizontal wall on the right. The wall on the left moves with the middle wall when you drag it.7 Select the short wall to the left. Do not lock this segment of the alignment. click Modify. 10 On the Design Bar. 8 Click the lock to lock the alignment of the walls. 428 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning . but the wall on the right does not because the alignment between the two walls is not constrained (locked).

Move the walls to verify the alignment. Align doors in the floor plan 14 On the Tools toolbar. Dimensioning | 429 . click once to undo the move. select Multiple Alignment. NOTE Because you are not aligning walls.12 On the toolbar. click . 16 Select the centerline of Door 4 on the upper right side of the model. 15 On the Options bar. 13 Click the right wall. the Prefer wall faces or centerline option on the Options Bar does not apply to the doors. and then click the lock to align the wall with the middle wall.

21 On the Design Bar. Door 3 aligns with Door 4.17 Select the centerline of Door 3 to the left. 18 Click the lock to constrain the movement of the doors. 22 Slide the door up or down the wall and notice how the other doors move with it. click Modify and select one of the aligned doors. 430 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning . 20 Select Door 1 and lock it to constrain it to the other doors. 19 Select Door 2 and lock it to constrain it Doors 3 and 4.

26 Select the window on the far left in the lower wall. clear Multiple Alignment. and select the dimension between the second window and the right wall. 24 On the Options Bar.Align the windows in the floor plan 23 On the Tools toolbar. 28 Select the far right window in the top wall.28 to align the windows. click Modify. click . Dimensioning | 431 . 25 Select the window in the upper horizontal wall on the left side of the floor plan. 29 To view the constraint. 30 Click the lock to unlock it. 27 Select the far right window in the bottom wall. A lock is displayed. The two windows align. 31 On the Tools toolbar. click and repeat steps 27 . on the Design Bar. The second window does not align because it is already constrained by a locked dimension. indicating the constraint.

you learn how to automatically dimension a linear wall with openings (windows) by selecting the wall. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. m_Alignment.32 Align the remaining windows. instead of selecting the wall and all the openings as dimension references. Creating Automatic Linear Wall Dimensions. as shown in the following illustration. 432 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning . Creating Automatic Linear Wall Dimensions In this exercise. 1 View the lower horizontal wall and notice that it includes five windows. You want to dimension the wall so that the width of each window displays in the dimension string.rvt. 33 Proceed to the next exercise.

click Dimension.2 On the Design Bar. Verify Wall centerlines is selected for Prefer. and save the exercise file with a unique name. These options ensure that the wall dimension includes the openings (in this case. 4 In the Auto Dimension Options dialog box. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click . Dimensioning | 433 . the windows). 7 Move your cursor below the lower horizontal wall and click to add the dimension. select Openings. 6 Select the lower horizontal wall. 9 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. Click Options. The two vertical walls highlight. 5 Click OK. and then Widths. 8 If you want to save your changes. on the File menu. indicating the start and end of the dimension string. click Save As. and that the window widths are referenced in the overall dimension string. 3 On the Options Bar. Select Entire Walls for Pick.

you how to use some of the annotation features included in Revit Building. click Dimension.Annotating In this lesson. 434 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning . click Open. sequentially tag rooms on a floor plan. 4 Dimension the three windows near the east entrance by selecting the centerline of each window and placing the dimensions as shown in the following illustration. Create angular dimensions 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click Level 1. expand Views (all). you dimension the three windows on a floor plan. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. expand Floor Plans. You learn how to create angular dimensions and how to use an equality constraint to space the windows equally. click the Training Files icon. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. 3 On the Options Bar.rvt located in the Common folder. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. click . You learn how to: ■ ■ ■ ■ create angular dimensions. Creating Angular Dimensions In this exercise. tag doors and windows. rotate tags with building components. Open c_Area.

Tag rooms sequentially 1 On the View menu. 6 Proceed to the next exercise. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and click to place the room tag.rvt. 3 Move the cursor to the room at the upper right of the plan view. Sequentially Tagging Rooms. The enclosed area that represents the room highlights to indicate that it will be tagged. Sequentially Tagging Rooms In this exercise. you sequentially tag the rooms on the floor plan.5 Click the equal sign associated with the angular dimension string to equally space the windows. c_Area. Annotating | 435 . click Room Tag. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit to view the entire floor plan.

click it. The room tag number displays in blue. indicating that it can be edited. ■ The second tag that you place displays the sequential number 102. click Room tag. and select the room tag. 7 Continue to place room tags.4 On the Design Bar. and press ENTER. 6 Place another room tag: ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. Click to place the new tag. 5 Zoom in on the tag number. Sequential letters are also supported. Move the cursor into the room below the one previously tagged. enter 101. click Modify. Align the tags by moving the cursor until a dashed green line displays between the placed tag and the one that displays at the tip of the cursor. 436 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning .

click Door. Annotating | 437 . select Tag on Placement to add a tag when you place the door in the floor plan. Tagging Doors and Windows. verify that Tag on placement is selected. c_Area. Place a door with a door tag and leader 5 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and to tag doors and windows that are not tagged. 3 On the Options Bar. and clear Leader. 7 Place the door as shown in the following illustration. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. to add a tag with a leader. click Door. You learn how to add a door to the floor plan that includes a tag. select a door type that you want to add to the floor plan. 4 Place the door with the tag in the room at the bottom left. Tagging Doors and Windows In this exercise. 6 On the Options Bar.8 Proceed to the next exercise. as shown in the following illustration.rvt. 2 In the Type Selector. and select Leader. Add a door and tag 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. you learn how to place door and window tags.

16 Under Leader. and then click OK. The door is tagged with a tag and leader. and click OK. 15 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog box. click Tag All Not Tagged. click Tag All Not Tagged. Notice that the door is placed without a tag. select Window Tags. under Category. 12 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog box. verify that Door Tags is selected for Category. Tag the windows in the floor plan 14 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. clear Tag on placement. 10 Place the door below Door 6. All of the windows that were not tagged are now tagged. Tag a door after placing it 11 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 438 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning .Place a door without a tag 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 13 Under Leader. select Create. clear Create. click Door. 9 On the Options Bar.

on the File menu. Annotating | 439 . or close the exercise file without saving your changes. and save the exercise file with a unique name.17 If you want to save your changes. click Save As.

440 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning .

you learn to create and customize views of building information models. More specifically. you learn how to change the visibility of detail components. You learn how to access and create building model views and how to change the visibility of building components and annotation within views. and how to use plan regions within floor plans and reflected ceiling plans.Viewing 15 In this tutorial. how to control fill pattern colors. 441 .

Open an elevation view of the building model 1 On the left side of the drawing area. and learn how to control the visibility of building components and annotation within them. 442 | Chapter 15 Viewing . you learn how to access different views of the building model. The Project Browser is displayed by default between the Design Bar and the drawing area. You create elevations. locate the Project Browser. A new view displays a wireframe view of the east elevation view of the building model. including elevation and three-dimensional views. You also learn how to control the visibility of different building components and annotation within building model views. Open m_Viewing_Exercise.rvt located in the Metric folder. Exploring the Building Model In this exercise. expand Views (all). expand Elevations. and double-click East.Viewing a Building Model In this lesson. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. and three-dimensional (3D) views. click . you learn to create and customize user-defined views of a building information model. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. scroll down and click the Training Files icon. on the Standard toolbar. TIP If the Project Browser does not display. 2 In the Project Browser. The current file name is displayed in the Project Browser title bar. click Open. Both hidden lines and window tags display in the east elevation view. sections.

This hides the lines that show through to the exterior of the elevation view. 7 Under Visibility. The window tags are no longer displayed in this view. Viewing a Building Model | 443 . 5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides for Elevation: East dialog box.Display the elevation view with hidden lines 3 On the View Control Bar. click Visibility/Graphics. click Model Graphics Style. Turn off the display of window tags in the elevation view 4 On the View menu. click . and click Hidden Line. The default name of the view is {3D}. scroll down and clear Window Tags. The east elevation view displays with hidden lines. Create a 3D view of the building model 9 On the View toolbar. click the Annotation Categories tab. The 3D view is displayed in a new viewing window. 8 Click OK. 6 Select Include categories from all disciplines in the list above. Notice that window tags continue to display in the view. This change is applied only in this elevation view. the east elevation. This change is applied only to the active view.

you can enable pan mode by pressing and holding the middle wheel button while moving the mouse. 16 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. 17 In the Rename View dialog box. zoom. and spin the building model by clicking the appropriate button in this dialog box. enter My 3D View. 20 Proceed to the next exercise. right-click {3D}. You can pan. . 14 View the Dynamic View dialog box in the lower left corner of the screen. NOTE If you have a pointing device with a middle wheel. double-click My 3D View.10 On the View toolbar. and notice that the cursor displays as a magnifying glass This indicates that you are in zoom mode. Notice that the view continues to display with hidden lines and no window tags. and click Rename. Notice that the view name is updated in the title bar of the viewing window and in the Project Browser. under 3D Views. 12 Pan the view by clicking and dragging the cursor in the drawing area. click X to close the view. . 13 Press and hold CTRL. expand Views (all). 19 In the Project Browser. 11 Move the cursor to the drawing window and notice that it now displays as a hand This means you are in pan mode. and click OK. Save the current 3D view 15 In the Project Browser. 18 In the upper right corner of the viewing window. The view follows the movement of the cursor. you can enable zoom mode by rolling the middle wheel. Creating a Perspective View with a Camera. 444 | Chapter 15 Viewing . and expand 3D Views. NOTE If you have a pointing device with a middle wheel. click to reorient the view.

Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. eye height. the new view named 3D View 1 is displayed by default in a perspective view. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. outside of the dimension lines. Cameras define the eye point. and double-click Level 1. Viewing a Building Model | 445 .rvt. and click View. Create the perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. you create a perspective view of the building model with a camera. Specify the second point in one of the rooms in the building. expand Floor Plans. click Camera. right-click in the Design Bar. 3 Add the camera to the view by specifying two points: one for the camera position and the other for the camera target point: ■ ■ Specify the first point in the top right corner of the drawing. expand Views (all). After you specify the second point (the view target). as shown in the following illustration. and distance from the target. m_Viewing_Exercise.Creating a Perspective View with a Camera In this exercise.

down. Move the cursor up and down in the view to move the cursor forward and backward. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit. 8 To move the camera eye position higher or lower: ■ ■ ■ Click Dolly and move the cursor into the perspective view. You can use the walkthrough controls in this dialog box to move the camera position and change the view. and sideways to see how the view changes. 7 In the Dynamic View dialog box. Press and hold the left mouse button. Move the cursor up. Change the camera projection settings 6 On the View menu. Press and hold the left mouse button. click Dynamically Modify View. 446 | Chapter 15 Viewing . click the Walkthrough tab located at the bottom of the dialog box. 5 On the View menu.4 Select the blue grips that display on the crop region of the view and move them to resize the view so the view includes the entire building model. 9 To move the camera forward and backward in the view: ■ ■ ■ Click Forward/Back and move the cursor into the perspective view.

click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit. 13 On the View menu. Viewing a Building Model | 447 . Press and hold the left mouse button. You may need to reposition the view with the other controls. height. Change the camera position. and target 12 On the Window menu. 11 Adjust the view as shown in the following illustration. Move the cursor side to side in the view to rotate the view.10 To rotate the camera around the target: ■ ■ ■ Click Turn and move the cursor into the perspective view. click Tile. Four views of the model display in the drawing area.

double-click Level 1. select the camera target point (the magenta grip). under Floor Plans.14 In the Project Browser. The border of the window that contains the Level 1 view highlights. 448 | Chapter 15 Viewing . The camera and the view direction of the camera are displayed in the appropriate views. 16 Right-click. click 3D View 1. 17 In My 3D View. under 3D Views. 15 In the Project Browser. and move it to another location. and click Show Camera.

TIP The updated view depends on the location of the camera before you change the elevation values. ■ 3D View 1 immediately updates to show the change. click Model Graphics Style. 21 Rotate the view as shown in the following illustration. Use a section box to clip the model 19 On the View toolbar. and click Properties. click to create a new 3D view. and click Shading. enter 15000 for Eye Elevation and 1700 for Target Elevation. Click OK. 20 On the View Control Bar. Viewing a Building Model | 449 .3D View 1 should update immediately after you move the target point of the camera. under Camera. In the Element Properties dialog box. 18 Change the target and eye elevation of the camera by modifying its properties: ■ ■ Select the camera in My 3D View. right-click.

select Section Box. as shown in the following illustration. click View Properties. A section box is displayed around the model. under Extents. and click OK.22 On the View menu. 450 | Chapter 15 Viewing . 25 Select and move the lower right grip on the section box closer to the model. 24 Click the section box. The section box highlights and grips are displayed on its faces. A rotation tool is also displayed. 23 In the Element Properties dialog box.

you create a section view by sketching a section line in a plan view. Creating a Section View In this exercise. Sketch a section line in a plan view 1 In the Project Browser. and maximize this view. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 27 Proceed to the next exercise.26 Click and hold the rotation tool and rotate the section box around the model. expand Floor Plans. Viewing a Building Model | 451 . double-click Level 1.rvt. m_Viewing_Exercise. Creating a Section View.

and click Find Referring Views. and double-click Section 1. You may need to zoom closer to the walls in order to see the fill pattern. select Floor Plan: Level 1. and drag the section depth grip below the middle horizontal wall as shown in the following illustration. The box represents the extents of the section view as well as the viewing direction of the section. Notice a dashed green box with blue grips is displayed on the section line. and click Open View. 7 In the Go To View dialog box. 6 Select the section view. click Modify. expand Sections (Callout 1). 8 Select the section line. View the section 5 To view the section. double-click the section head. 4 On the Design Bar. or in the Project Browser. 452 | Chapter 15 Viewing . click Section. NOTE Fill pattern is dependent on the zoom ratio.2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 3 Click to the left of the left wall of the building model. and then click to the right of the lower right wall to sketch the horizontal section line shown in the following illustration. right-click.

double-click Level 1. Add an elevation symbol 1 In the Project Browser. you learn to create an elevation view in a project by adding an elevation symbol to a plan view. m_Viewing_Exercise. Notice the change in the view direction. Change the view direction of the section 11 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. An elevation symbol displays at the end of the cursor. click Modify. Control arrows are displayed near the section tag. click Modify. 15 Double-click the section head to display the section view. Creating Elevation Views In this exercise. 14 On the Design Bar. 10 Double-click the section head to display the section view. double-click Level 1. Viewing a Building Model | 453 . click Elevation. under Floor Plans. Notice the change in section depth. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. and select and move the section depth grip under the lower wall.rvt. 12 Select the section line. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Creating Elevation Views.9 On the Design Bar. 13 Click the control arrows to flip the section view.

4 To create an elevation view of the building lobby. 8 Select the center of the elevation symbol.a by default. The elevation is named Elevation 1 . Elevation 1 . 7 In the Project Browser. Make sure the elevation symbol is pointing towards the lobby doors. move the cursor around the building model.a. Notice that the elevation symbol arrow points to the nearest wall as you move through the building model. Elevation 1 . You may need to adjust your zoom settings to see the elevation symbol. Do not select the arrow. View the elevation 6 To view the new elevation. under Floor Plans. indicating the possible elevation views that you can create.b. and click.3 Without clicking in the drawing area. place the cursor inside the building facing the lobby entrance. 454 | Chapter 15 Viewing . The elevation symbol is displayed with four check boxes. The check mark in the right box indicates the current elevation view. double-click Elevation 1 .b. 5 On the Design Bar. double-click the elevation symbol arrow. under Elevations. 9 Select the box shown in the following illustration to add a new elevation view. 10 In the Project Browser. click Modify. double-click Level 1.

You change the color of the cut and surface patterns in the brick material assigned to the exterior wall in the building model. roofs. For example. click Save As. and save the exercise file with a unique name. and other families. Controlling Fill Pattern Colors In this lesson. you learn to control the fill pattern color of a material and set the coarse scale fill pattern color of a wall type. In addition. on the File menu. you can choose the wall fill color for a wall type. You can control the fill pattern color of the cut and surface patterns for objects that obtain their fill pattern definition from materials. where each layer is assigned a different material. This includes walls. you can set the fill pattern color for the brick to red. in a compound wall. Controlling the Fill Pattern Color of a Material In this exercise. in this case. and the insulation color to pink. a shade of gray.11 If you want to save your changes. you learn to control the fill pattern colors of a material. This means that in views with a coarse level of detail. 12 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. you can set the color of the coarse scale fill pattern for wall types. Controlling Fill Pattern Colors | 455 . floors. and applies to phasing override materials as well. such as the one below. such as Brick on CMU.

and double-click Wall/Floor Join . 4 Under Cut Pattern. Open c_Showroom. select Masonry . In the left pane of the Open dialog box.Filled). and click OK twice. click Materials.Level 3.rvt located in the Common folder. The surface pattern of the brick is black. 456 | Chapter 15 Viewing . 2 On the Settings menu. expand Views (all). Change the color of the brick cut pattern for the exterior walls 1 In the Project Browser. expand 3D Views. scroll down and click the Training Files icon. 3 In the Materials dialog box.Brick for Name. Notice the different fill patterns assigned to each layer within the floor and wall structure. and double-click 3D. select red.Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. click Color. A color is assigned to both the Surface Pattern and Cut Pattern options in the dialog box. expand Sections (Section Head . 7 Zoom in on the brick pattern of the exterior walls. Each layer is designated by the material settings of the layer. The brick cut pattern is displayed as red. click Open. View the surface pattern of the exterior brick walls 6 In the Project Browser under Views. 5 In the Color dialog box.

rvt. The floor plan in the view is displayed in the Coarse level of detail as indicated by the Detail Level icon on the View Control Bar. The surface pattern of the brick is now white. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. Setting the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Color for a Wall Type In this exercise. 10 Under Surface Pattern. and double-click Level 1. expand Floor Plans. 9 In the Materials dialog box.Change the brick surface pattern from black to white 8 On the Settings menu.Brick for Name. select white. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. click Materials. and click OK twice. click Color. You change the coarse scale fill pattern from the default color of black to a shade of gray for a wall type. Setting the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Color for a Wall Type. The walls in the floor plan that you work with are displayed with a gray fill pattern when displayed in a view with a coarse level of detail. c_Showroom. select Masonry . View the detail level setting of the view 1 In the Project Browser. expand Views (all). you learn to set the coarse scale fill pattern color for a wall type. Controlling Fill Pattern Colors | 457 . 11 In the Color dialog box.

on the File menu. including the current view. 13 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. 6 In the Type Properties dialog box. under Graphics. click in the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern parameter value field. select a shade of gray. click Edit/New. 4 In the Type Properties dialog box. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 3 In the Element Properties dialog box. click the button in the Coarse Scale Fill Color value field. The wall type is displayed as solid gray within any view where the Detail Level is set to Coarse. select Solid fill. 5 In the Color dialog box. click Detail Level. By default. right-click. Notice that the surface pattern and color of the brick wall are not applied because the detail level is set to Fine. 7 In the Fill Patterns dialog box under Name. click Save As. and click Properties. and click OK three times. under Floor Plans. the Coarse Scale Fill Color parameter (under Graphics) is set to black and the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern is set to none. 11 Zoom in on the arced wall. and click Fine. 458 | Chapter 15 Viewing .Change coarse scale fill pattern color of the arced wall 2 Select the south arced wall. and click OK. double-click Level 2. click Modify. and click . View the arced wall in fine detail 9 In the Project Browser. 10 On the View Control Bar. 8 On the Design Bar. 12 If you want to save your changes. under Graphics.

you create a plan region in the Level 1 floor plan of the following building model. Creating a Plan Region in a Floor Plan In this exercise. the plan regions cannot overlap each other. although they may have coincident edges. By creating a plan region in the view with a different cut plane height. you can display the stepped portion of the walls in the Level 1 floor plan. Because the stepped portion of the walls in the building model is above the cut plane height in the Level 1 floor plan view. Plan regions do not work with linked Revit Building files. line color. you work with a split-level building model that requires a different view range than the rest of the view.Creating a View Plan Region In this lesson. If you are not familiar with view ranges in Revit Building. If you create more than one plan region in a file. or pattern. Plan regions are closed sketches that you can create in floor plan and reflected ceiling plan (RCP) views only. line type. it does not display in the Level 1 floor plan. Creating a View Plan Region | 459 . and you cannot control their visibility. refer to the online Help for more information.

click Plan Region. Add a plan region to view the stepped portion of the model 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. the south elevation is also displayed. In the left pane of the Open dialog box.rvt located in the Metric folder. 460 | Chapter 15 Viewing . click Open. View the Level 1 floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. expand Floor Plans. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. Open m_Plan_Region. so you can view the height of the walls and windows. The stepped portion of the project walls and windows are not displayed because the cut plane does not intersect any of the model geometry above this height.Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. and click View. expand Views (all). In the following illustration. right-click in the Design Bar. scroll down and click the Training Files icon. and double-click Level 1. The cut plane height of the view range for this view is 1200 mm.

3 In the Level 1 view. as it is displayed with hidden lines in this view. the plan region is displayed as a red dashed rectangle. Creating a View Plan Region | 461 . and the view depth plane. On the Options Bar. enter 4000 for the Top Offset. 4 Move the cursor across the area where you sketched the plan region. This means that the plan region view is going to cut all geometry at 2800 mm above Level 1. click Modify. you specify that the level used to define each plane (cut plane. ■ ■ On the Design Bar. 7 In the View Range dialog box. click Edit for View Range.Plan regions have a single property. 5 Select the red dashed line. 8 Because the top clip plane value cannot be set lower than the cut plane. As the cursor moves across it. click Finish Sketch. Press ESC to end the command. right-click. click Lines. The Level 1 floor plan should display as shown in the following illustration. and view depth) in the view range is the same as the level used to define the corresponding plane in the parent view. select Parent View’s Level (Level 1) for Cut plane. You use the view range property to control cut plane. and click Properties. sketch the plan region using the blue tick marks for guidance: ■ On the Design Bar. top and bottom clip planes. click . that is similar to the view range for plan views. ■ ■ ■ Specify a point at the intersection of the two dashed blue lines on the top left. view range. 10 On the Design Bar. The plan region is no longer visible. and enter 2800 for the Cut plane Offset. under Extents. 9 Click Apply. Specify a point at the intersection of the two dashed blue lines on the bottom right. the top and bottom clip planes. and then click OK twice. By selecting Parent View’s Level. 6 In the Element Properties dialog box.

12 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. 11 If you want to save your changes. click Save As. and save the exercise file with a unique name.The following illustration demonstrates how the level 1 floor plan view is being viewed with the plan region. 462 | Chapter 15 Viewing . on the File menu.

to place and render decals to create signs. 463 . and posters. AccuRender is the rendering engine incorporated into Revit Building that is used to produce rendered views. and to create walkthroughs of your building information model. you learn to use the AccuRender® Radiosity and Raytrace features in Autodesk Revit Building to create rendered interior and exterior views of your building information model.Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs 16 In this tutorial. billboards.

you raytrace a region of the building that includes the exterior wall. and the curtain wall to view and verify the material and texture changes. When you complete these changes. you select a scene that defines the model environment. Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model In this exercise. You also learn to create a new material and apply it to a building component. you learn how to view and modify the material that is applied to a building component in a building model. You learn to create and apply materials to a building model. 464 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . add realistic three-dimensional trees to the building site. and create the perspective view that you want to render.Rendering an Exterior View In this lesson. change the material of the front terrace of the building from the default material to asphalt. and then raytrace the view to produce the final rendered exterior view. you: ■ ■ ■ change the texture of the brick material applied to the exterior walls of the building. define a new polished aluminum material and apply it to the curtain wall mullions on the front curtain wall. the floor. you learn how to create an exterior perspective view of a building model and render it with the AccuRender Raytrace feature. After you create the perspective view. You work with a building model that already has material applied to it. In this exercise.

2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Edit for Structure. In the left pane of the Open dialog box.Cavity Wall .Brick. TIP If the tab that you need does not display in the Design Bar. 3 On the Options Bar. under Construction. 4 In the Element Properties dialog box. verify that Co-house . Rendering an Exterior View | 465 . Verify that the material defined for the exterior finish layer (Layer 1) of the building model is Masonry .Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. click . and click Edit/New. click the Training Files icon. right-click in the Design Bar. 5 In the Type Properties dialog box. click Open. 6 Click Cancel three times to return to the 3D view of the building model without making any changes to the exterior finish at this time. View the finish material of the exterior walls 1 Verify that the 3D view of the townhouse building model is displayed. click Wall. Open m_Cohouse.Heavyweight block is displayed for Type. and click the tab in the context menu.rvt located in the Metric folder.

under _accurender. 11 Under Name. select Carib. 19 Click OK four times. Change the material of the terrace from the default material to asphalt 13 On the Design Bar. select Polished. and click Aluminum. under Name. Define a new polished aluminum material and apply it to the curtain wall mullions 20 On the Settings menu. Polished and click OK. under Name. . click Materials. under Construction. 14 On the Options Bar. select the curtain wall mullion again.Brick. expand Metals. 9 Under AccuRender. enter Aluminum. 466 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . click next to Texture to display the Material Library. 10 In the left pane of the Material Library dialog box. 8 In the Materials dialog box.Running. select Masonry . 28 Select one of the curtain wall mullions on the exterior face of the building. click Modify. 25 Under Name. 24 In the Material Library. A preview of the brick texture that is currently assigned to the walls is displayed in the right pane of the Material Library.200mm. expand Masonry and click Brick.Plain.Change the brick texture of the exterior wall finish material 7 On the Settings menu. click Edit/New. and click 15 In the Element Properties dialog box. click next to Texture to display the Material Library. click in the Material field that contains Default Floor. click Edit for Structure. for Layer 2. click Duplicate. 26 Click OK twice. select Site . under Name. click Materials. press TAB to cycle your selection through different building model components. 17 In the Edit Assembly dialog box. When Curtain Wall Mullions: Rectangular Mullion displays in the Status Bar at the bottom of the screen. and click . 22 In the New Material dialog box. 21 In the Materials dialog box. 27 On the Design Bar. You can view the new brick texture when you raytrace a region of the building in a later step.Asphalt. 23 Under AccuRender. 18 In the Materials dialog box. verify that Floor : Floor 1 displays in the Type Selector. under _accurender. 16 In the Type Properties dialog box. click Modify and select the terrace in front of the building. TIP If you do not select the curtain wall mullion on the first selection. 12 Click OK twice.

37 If you are prompted to turn off the lights in the scene. 31 In the Type Properties dialog box. select Exterior under Type. Make sure the region includes the exterior walls. verify that New is selected. and click OK. under Name. This completes the changes in materials and textures that you make for the building model. 30 In the Element Properties dialog box. . select Aluminum. under Materials and Finishes. Rendering an Exterior View | 467 . click No. Polished. floor. 35 Move the cursor over the building model. and draw the rectangular region shown in the following illustration. click Region Raytrace. 36 In the Scene Selection dialog box. click . and curtain wall mullions to which you made material changes. Raytrace a region of the building to view the material changes that you made 34 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. The portion of the building that you selected is raytraced and the materials that you changed and applied to the exterior walls. floor. click in the Material field.29 On the Options Bar. and curtain wall mullions are rendered (this takes a few moments). and then click 32 In the Materials dialog box. producing a photorealistic effect. 33 Click OK three times. click Edit/New.

expand Floor Plans. In a later exercise. Cnst. 39 Proceed to the next exercise. Adding Trees to the Site In this exercise. you place two different types of trees on the building site. click Display Model to end the Region Raytrace command and redisplay the building model in hidden line wireframe. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. when you render an exterior view of the model.38 On the Design Bar. Adding Trees to the Site. Add red maple trees to the site 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click 1st Flr. the leaves of the trees display as indicated by the season and location specified in the render scene settings. m_Cohouse. expand Views (all). 468 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .rvt.

click Site Component.9 Meters.Deciduous : Acer Rubrum . Continue to place trees until you have added several red maples to the building site as shown in the following illustration. select M_Tree . 4 In the Type Selector. right-click in the Design Bar. The tree that you selected in this step is a red maple. Rendering an Exterior View | 469 . 3 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. TIP If the Site tab is not displayed. Available tree types are listed in the Type Selector by their Latin names.2 Zoom out so you can easily view the area surrounding the building model. and click to place a tree. 5 Move the cursor to a location on the building site. and click Site.

and place two black oak trees. Creating a Perspective View. Black. 15 Under Other. 9 In the Type Properties dialog box. and then click display the Plant Library. and click Site Component. and click OK. enter 7000mm for Plant Height.rvt. 10 In the Name dialog box. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 470 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 18 Proceed to the next exercise. 16 Move the cursor to the building site. under Other. select Black Oak for Type Comments. click Duplicate. Creating a Perspective View In this exercise.Create a new type of tree. and add it to the site 6 On the Design Bar. and click OK twice. enter Black Oak. under accurender. and click Deciduous. m_Cohouse. 11 In the Type Properties dialog box. 12 In the Plant Library. 13 Under Name. expand Trees and Shrubs. and click OK. 14 In the Type Properties dialog box. and click 8 In the Element Properties dialog box. The black oak is shorter than the red maple trees that you added to the site. you define the exterior perspective view of the building model that you want to render. select Oak. to . 7 In the Type Selector. as shown in the following illustration. 17 Press ESC to end tree placement. click Edit/New. click in the Value field for Plant Name. select any of the deciduous trees. under Identity Data. click Modify.

Place a camera in the first floor view 1 With the 1st Flr. click Camera. view open. on the View tab of the Design Bar. Specify the second point in front of the building facade to define the target point of the camera. Cnst. The new perspective view is displayed. 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and the camera target point: ■ ■ Specify the first point on the site facing the building to position the camera. 3 Select and move the crop boundary grips until the perspective view displays as in the following illustration. Rendering an Exterior View | 471 .

The camera position is displayed in the 1st Flr. expand 3D Views. Cnst. 5 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. Cnst. 472 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . The red triangle represents the FOV (field of vision) angle and the back clipping plane of the view. and click Show Camera. view.Modify the camera position and back clipping plane in the perspective view 4 In the Project Browser under Views (all). 6 Select and move the FOV boundary grip to adjust the field of vision and back clipping plane as shown in the following illustration. right-click 3D View 1 (the default perspective view name). double-click 1st Flr.

Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View. enter Exterior.rvt. 8 In the Rename View dialog box.7 In the Project Browser. place. and click Rename. and click OK. m_Cohouse. lighting. Display the perspective view 1 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. date. and environment settings that you use to render the view. double-click Exterior. Rendering an Exterior View | 473 . You must define a scene because this is the first time settings are being applied to this view. right-click 3D View 1. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. you select a scene and specify time. under 3D Views. 9 Proceed to the next exercise. Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View In this exercise.

3 In the Scene Selection dialog box. 5 In the Sun and Sky Settings dialog box. clear Use Sun and Shadow Settings from view. enter 10 (October) for Month and 5 for Day. and click Sun. click the Solar Angles tab. 7 Under Date. 6 Select By Date. 4 In the Render Scene Settings dialog box. Notice that the name of the tab changes to Date and Time. TIP Use the left and right arrow keys to adjust the minutes precisely. click Settings. under Scene Settings. 8 Under Time. and drag the slider to set the time to 2:30 PM. 474 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . Time.Select the render scene settings 2 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. click OK to accept the existing scene (Scene 1). and Place from the Specify Solar Angles list. verify that Daylight Savings Time is selected.

00 (many clouds. 16 In the Environment dialog box. select Autumn for Plant Season. Rye. MA. and select Boston. Render the perspective view 24 On the Design Bar. The Ground Plane tab displays. select Good for Quality. 26 On the Design Bar. 25 Enter 150 for Resolution. 27 On the Options Bar. under Scene Settings. 28 If you are prompted to turn off the lights in the scene. click . 15 In the Render Scene Settings dialog box. Dark. 20 In the Name list. The rendered exterior perspective view is displayed. 11 Scroll down.20 for Cloudiness. Rendering an Exterior View | 475 . under Background Color. click Environment. USA.9 Click the Place tab. select Ground Plane. 19 In the Material Library. and click OK. 22 In the Render Scene Settings dialog box. 12 Click the Settings Tab. under Scene Settings. This setting produces a level of cloudiness in the sky that ranges from 0 (no clouds) to 1. click Image Size. and enter bo. 13 Enter . under _accurender. 17 Under Advanced. click Site. and click OK. click No. 10 Click in the Cities list. 18 Click Material. verify that Automatic Sky is selected. select Grass. click Raytrace.) 14 Click OK. 23 Under Raytrace Settings. 21 Click OK twice.

The rendered view is saved in the project and can be accessed from the Project Browser. Redisplay the rendered view 31 In the Project Browser under Views (all). click Display Model to end rendering and redisplay the wireframe perspective view of the building model. you render an interior view of the building model that you worked with in the previous lesson. 30 On the Design Bar.Save the rendered view 29 On the Design Bar. Rendering an Interior View In this lesson. click Save As. click Capture Rendering. and finally. you add two RPC people to the interior view that you render in a later exercise. use both Radiosity and Raytracing to render the view. Rendering an Interior View. 476 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . RPC people are represented by a circle in plan view and resemble real people only when rendered in a 3D view. on the File menu. 33 Proceed to the next lesson. To create the rendered scene. define the view and render scene settings. and save the exercise file with a unique name. Adding RPC People In this exercise. and double-click Exterior to display the rendered view of the townhouse that you saved. 32 If you want to save this exercise. expand Renderings. you add ArchVision realpeople (RPC people) to the floor plan of the second floor.

2 Zoom in on the left side of the living room as shown. select M_RPC Female: Cathy. Cnst. expand Floor Plans. 4 In the Type Selector. Open second floor plan to display the interior scene that you will render 1 In the Project Browser under Views (all). 3 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar.6 to select and place M_RPC Male: Alex to the right of Cathy and facing up and to the left (northwest).rvt. 6 Click to place Cathy to the right of the sofa and below the table. click Component. and double-click 2nd Flr. 5 On the Options Bar. Rendering an Interior View | 477 . 7 Repeat steps 4 . select Rotate after placement. m_Cohouse.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and then move the cursor to rotate her so she is facing up and to the right (northeast).

Creating the Interior Perspective View In this exercise. Specify the target point of the camera in front of the corner of the table. 478 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .8 Proceed to the next exercise. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Creating the Interior Perspective View. click Camera.rvt. Add a camera 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. you create the interior perspective view that you will render in the final exercise in this lesson. m_Cohouse. 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and target point: ■ ■ Specify the first point on the floor plan facing the table and RPC people to place the camera.

double-click 2nd Flr. 5 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. double-click 3D View 1 to redisplay the interior perspective view. 4 Select and move the FOV boundary grip to adjust field of vision and back clipping plane as shown in the following illustration.The interior perspective is displayed. Cnst. 3 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. but you must adjust the field of vision and far clipping plane to display more of the view. Rendering an Interior View | 479 .

click View Properties. 13 In the Element Properties dialog box. 7 In the Crop Region Size dialog box. click Modify. and click OK. under Extents. right-click 3D View 1. Grips are displayed on the section box. 12 On the View menu. click the dimensions for Size. 14 On the Design Bar. select Section Box. 11 On the View menu. and select the section box.Resize the perspective view 6 On the Options Bar. and click OK. 480 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . click Shading to view the effects of the section box when you add it. enter Interior. under Size. 9 In the Rename View dialog box. Add a section box to limit the extents of the rendered view 10 On the View toolbar. 8 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. A section box is displayed around the building model. and click Rename. enter 178 mm for Height. click to display the 3D view of the building model. and click OK. enter 229 mm for Width.

Creating a New Render Scene In this exercise. date. This process allows you to limit the geometry that will be rendered when you create a rendering of your interior view. double-click Interior to display the interior perspective view. Display the interior perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. place. Rendering an Interior View | 481 . By limiting the geometry.rvt. m_Cohouse. you create a render scene to specify the time. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. under 3D Views. Creating a New Render Scene.15 Select and move the section box grips until only the room that you added RPC people to and that you want to render is visible. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and environment settings used to render the view. you reduce the rendering time.

24 Under Scene Settings. select Summer for Plant Season. select Ground Plane. under 3D Views. click OK. and select Boston. as daylight sources. select Interior. 17 In the Environment dialog box. under accurender. The 3D view of the building model with the section box is displayed. and click OK. 15 In the Sun and Sky Settings dialog box. 7 Select By Date.rvt. click Environment. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. you define daylights for the glazed panels of the curtain wall and render the view. you allow sunlight to pass through the panels when you render the view. clear Use Sun and Shadow Settings from view. When you define daylights for the curtain wall panels. Define daylights for the glazed panels of the curtain wall 1 In the Project Browser. and Place from the Specify Solar Angles list. double-click {3D}. 16 In the Render Scene Settings dialog box. 10 Click the Place tab. under Scene Settings. select {3D}. 25 Proceed to the next exercise. 6 In the Sun and Sky Settings dialog box. click Settings. Rye. select Grass. 22 Click OK twice. Time. under Scene Settings. select New. TIP Use the left and right arrow keys to precisely adjust the minutes. and click Save. Notice that the name of the tab changes to Date and Time. such as windows and doors. Dark. 12 Scroll down. MA. m_Cohouse. click the Solar Angles tab. verify that Automatic Sky is selected. 13 Click the Settings tab. 14 Click Save. 482 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . click Site. You can select families with transparent materials. and drag the slider to set the time to 8:30 PM. verify that Daylight Savings Time is selected. 5 In the Render Scene Settings dialog box.Select the render scene settings 2 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. on the Main tab. 21 In the Name list. specify a file location and name for the scene settings. The Ground Plane tab displays. and enter Interior Scene for Name. and click Sun. 3 In the Scene Selection dialog box. and click OK. 18 Under Advanced. enter 6 (June) for Month and 6 for Day. 20 In the Material Library. 8 Under Date. 19 Click Material. USA. 23 In the Render Scene Settings dialog box. Defining Daylights and Rendering the View In this exercise. 11 Click in the Cities list. under Background Color. under Use View’s Section Box. and enter bo. 4 Under Type. Defining Daylights and Rendering the View. 9 Under Time.

which can take several minutes. When radiate completes. 3 Select the curtain wall on the second floor (Walls: Curtain Wall. Curtain Wall 1). 7 On the Design Bar. Render the perspective view 4 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. click OK. Light bounce is calculated for each individual light. the following rendered view is displayed. . and click The raytraced perspective view is displayed and now includes the RPC people. click Radiate. 8 On the Options Bar. select Medium (150 dpi) for Resolution. The radiosity process. Rendering an Interior View | 483 .2 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. begins. double-click Interior. click Daylights. 5 On the Design Bar. The RPC people do not display in the view until you raytrace them in the next steps. 6 In the Radiosity Information dialog box. click Raytrace.

you learn how to create and record animated walkthroughs of your building model in Autodesk Revit Building. elevation. A walkthrough is created in a 3D perspective view by default. you learn how to create and edit a walkthrough of the first floor of a townhouse. you can select one of the following display options for the building model in your walkthrough: ■ ■ ■ ■ Wireframe Hidden Line (wireframe view with hidden lines) Shaded or Shaded with Edges AccuRender (Raytrace) IMPORTANT If you record your walkthrough AVI with the AccuRender display option. Usually you define the walkthrough path in a plan view. you rendered an exterior and an interior view. or section view. In a plan view. and you create it by specifying points that create the spline. but you can also create it in a 3D orthographic view. The walkthrough path is a spline. on the File menu. By completing the two rendering lessons included in this tutorial. When you export your walkthrough to an AVI. You learned to use both the Radiosity and Raytracing features included in the AccuRender render engine. You can edit the walkthrough path by selecting and moving the key frames.9 If you want to save your changes. you must select or define a scene. click Save As. you can also specify the height of the camera along the walkthrough path. Creating and Recording Walkthroughs In this lesson. you can record the walkthrough by exporting it to an AVI file that you can play with any available video player independent of your Revit Building software. which is the path that a camera will follow through your building model. Additional frames that comprise the walkthrough are created between the key frames. Recording a Walkthrough After you create a walkthrough. Each point becomes a key frame in the walkthrough. Creating and Editing a Walkthrough The first step in creating a walkthrough is to define the walkthrough path. Creating a Walkthrough In this exercise. and save the exercise file with a unique name. but you can also define it in a 3D. 484 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 10 Close the exercise file.

of the walkthrough. expand Floor Plans. and ends in the far corner of the living room. 4 Move the cursor under the text label in the Breakfast room. 3 On the Options Bar. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click the Training Files icon. and double-click 1st Floor. click Walkthrough. The floor plan of the first floor of the townhouse is displayed. If you prefer to use Metric values.You create a walkthrough that begins in the breakfast room of the townhouse. right-click in the Design Bar. or the first key frame. TIP If the tab that you need does not display in the Design Bar. 5 Specify four additional points to define key frame positions on the walkthrough path as shown in the following illustration. and click to specify the start point. Create a walkthrough of the first floor of the building model 1 In the Project Browser. click Open.rvt located in the Common folder. Open c_Townhouse. and click the tab in the context menu. proceeds through the dining room. verify that Perspective is selected to create the walkthrough in a 3D perspective view. Creating and Recording Walkthroughs | 485 . expand Views (all). Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. NOTE Some Imperial values are used by default in this exercise. click Settings ➤ Project Units. and change unit formats as desired. In the left pane of the Open dialog box.

6 After you specify the final point of the walkthrough path in the Living room. select the crop boundary. If it is not. click the dimensions for Size to change the size of the walkthrough frame crop region. 486 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . verify Field of view is selected. and double-click Walkthrough 1. click Zoom ➤ Zoom Out (2x). 11 Under Change. click . The last frame of the walkthrough is displayed. Your frame may look a bit different from the frame in the illustration because the walkthrough path is not precisely the same. Two options are displayed on the Options Bar: Edit Walkthrough and Size. Edit and play the walkthrough 7 In the Project Browser under Views (all). on the Options Bar. surrounded by a crop boundary with grips as shown in the following illustration. 8 Verify that the crop boundary of the walkthrough frame is selected and is displayed as red with blue grips. 10 In the Crop Region Size dialog box. enter 16" for Width and 9" for Height. 12 On the View menu. 9 On the Options Bar. and select the crop boundary. and click OK. expand Walkthroughs.

The walkthrough plays. NOTE To stop playing the walkthrough at any time. The current display is wireframe with hidden lines.rvt. enter 60 to reduce the total number of frames in the walkthrough from 300 to 60. and click OK.13 On the Options Bar. 15 In the Walkthrough Frames dialog box. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position. click Edit Walkthrough. enter 1 for Frame. Creating and Recording Walkthroughs | 487 . and press ENTER to set the walkthrough to play from the beginning (the key frame). 17 Click . 16 On the Options Bar. press ESC. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position In this exercise. proceed to the next exercise. The frame that is displayed is frame 300 of 300 frames in the walkthrough. The walkthrough controls are displayed on the Options Bar. you learn how to edit the walkthrough path and change the camera position in the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise. c_Townhouse. 18 When the walkthrough stops playing. 14 Click .

488 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . select Path for Controls. The walkthrough path is displayed in the floor plan of the first floor. Your walkthrough path may vary from the one in the illustration so do not be concerned if the camera displays at a slightly different location. Blue grips are displayed at each key frame. under Extents. clear Far Clip Active. Clearing this option disables the far clipping plane of the camera. 3 In the Element Properties dialog box. Edit the walkthrough path 4 On the Options Bar. The camera is displayed at the first key frame position on the walkthrough path in the breakfast room. 6 On the Options Bar. double-click 1st Floor. click . 2 On the Options Bar.Change the properties of the camera 1 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. and click OK. and adjust it to view the kitchen as shown in the following illustration. click Edit Walkthrough. 5 Select the target point of the camera (the magenta grip). You can move any camera target or key frame position.

If you had 150 frames and a frame rate of 15 seconds. 3 Under Output Length. The AVI is recorded. under Walkthroughs. 2 In the Save As dialog box. on the File menu. c_Townhouse. and click OK. select <Shading> for Display mode. without opening Autodesk Revit Building. Recording the Walkthrough. hidden line. and click Save. If you are unsure of what option to use. 7 Try creating other walkthroughs. to play the walkthrough. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. the Full Frames (Uncompressed) option is available to all users.7 Click the third key frame position. reducing the size of the image. you record the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise by exporting it to an AVI. Reducing the size of the output images and managing the frame rate lets you create realistic and smooth movement. click Export ➤ AVI. shaded with edges. click Save As. but that do not suffer loss due to compression quality. and with a frame rate of from 15-30 frames per second. and save the exercise file with a unique name. double-click Walkthrough 1. shaded. 4 Under Format. Recording the Walkthrough In this exercise. 5 In the Video Compression dialog box. or with AccuRender raytracing. and drag it to the location shown in the following illustration. 8 If you want to save this exercise. Play the walkthrough to view the changes that you made 8 In the Project Browser. 6 Double-click the AVI file to play the walk-through from the location that you specified in step 3.rvt. 9 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. specify 10 for Frames per Second. It produces files that are larger than compressed files. select any codec (compression/decompression) that is available on your system for Compressor. specifying the number of frames. and then click 10 Proceed to the next exercise. perhaps to 6” wide x 4” height. click Edit Walkthrough. 1 On the File menu. NOTE The available Compressor options are specific to your current computer system. 9 On the Options Bar. Creating and Recording Walkthroughs | 489 . specify a path and a file name for the AVI. then you are moving from the breakfast area to the living room window in 10 seconds. you can select to display the walkthrough in wireframe. When you export the walkthrough.

490 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .

elevations. and Section Boxes. and other quantifiable elements within the context of contract documents. you learn various methods of effectively communicating your design intent to your audience by creating presentation views. you learn several graphic techniques using these above mentioned tools to create an "analytique. 491 . To express texture beyond material specifics. A majority of tools in Autodesk Revit Building are intended to describe number. They include the Accurender® Plug-in for Rendering. you explore the stylistic approach. there are several options for expressing the architecture. tutorials on the Accurender features of Revit Building can be found under Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs. For the realistic approach. You can use the analytique to graphically compare the organization and forms of a particular building or space by superimposing and overlapping measured drawings at multiple scales. The architect's primary goal in documentation is to communicate the intent of the design. you organize an analytique by creating and modifying several views. and details. Advanced Model Graphics. sections. and line quality without the measurement of its thickness is to transcend "building" and to recognize the "architecture. In this series of exercises. the Linework Tool. length. Co-house." In Revit Building. or the client. Using the pre-built building model. Whether the audience is the general contractor. There are two directions you can choose when organizing presentation graphics: realism and stylistics. an outside reviewer. There remain many options in the software that do not quantify specific dimensions so much as they explain the subjective complexity of the work. a consultant.Presentation Views 17 In this tutorial. In this tutorial. tailoring the presentation is just as important as the accuracy of the content." The analytique is a classic Beaux Arts method of representing a work of architecture for analysis by graphically showing the relationship among plans. type.

Copy the floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog box.rvt located in the Metric folder. A copy of the floor plan is created and opened. you create a copy of the plan. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. you create a copy of a floor plan in preparation for the analytique. In order for the floor plan to fit into the analytique. right-click 2nd Flr. click the Training Files icon. 492 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique In this exercise. you create a presentation floor plan.Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique In this lesson. change the visibility settings to remove unwanted documentation. Cnst. and place the plan on a dark background for contrast. expand Floor Plans. Open m_Cohouse. click Open. and click Duplicate. expand Views (all).

Notice the immediate change in the line weights. dimensions. 10 On the File menu. click Visibility/Graphics.rvt. navigate to the folder of your choice. Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique | 493 . and click Rename. This turns off the visibility of all tags. under Floor Plans. 12 Proceed with the next exercise. Cnst. NOTE Stair text is considered part of a stair component rather than an annotation. expand the Stairs category. and clear DOWN Text. and so on in this view. UP Text. 3 In the Rename View dialog box. enter Presentation Second Floor Plan. click the Annotation Categories tab. and Up Arrow. elevations.2 In the Project Browser. right-click Copy of 2nd Flr. and click Save. Modify view scale 9 On the View Control Bar at the bottom of the frame. name the project m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. sections. Using Advanced Model Graphics. 7 Under Visibility. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. Notice that no annotations display in this view. 11 In the Save As directory. this represents the view getting smaller. Modify visibility/graphics 4 On the View menu. click the Scale control and select 1: 100. 8 Click OK. 5 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog box. 6 Click the Model Categories tab. Down Arrow. and click OK. click Save As.

you use advanced model graphics to cast shadows and add a sense of texture to the new floor plan view. double-click it in the Project Browser. you can create. and click OK. select By Date. 3 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box. The Sun and Shadows Settings are shared with Accurender and can also be used when rendering. select Cast Shadows. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. Under Shadows Properties. and click Advanced Model Graphics. The Shadow intensity dictates the darkness of the shadow display. Changes made within the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box are applied only to the active view. click . you can specify one place where the project resides within the world. the darker the shadows. The higher the number. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog box. 5 Under Sunlight Settings. MA. modify. 6 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog box. At that place. ■ ■ Under Sun and Shadows Settings. 494 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views .Using Advanced Model Graphics In this exercise. specify 35 for Shadow. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. click for Place. Under Intensity. specify the following: ■ ■ Select Hidden Line for Style. 2 On the View Control Bar. under Sunlight Settings. Modify advanced model graphics settings 1 If the Floor Plan: Presentation Second Floor Plan is not the active view. NOTE Shadows can be cast in all view styles except Wireframe. 7 Select Boston. and delete multiple locations in order to analyze a single prototype. Time and Place. USA for City.rvt. click the Place tab. Within a Project.

Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet. 10 Click OK. This gives the plan depth and creates a sensation of space beyond what you can normally express in a plan view. 17 Proceed with the next exercise. Notice the series of shadows based on the specified sun angles. click OK. under Sunlight Settings. however. 11 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box. click This turns off the shadows cast on the ground. Turn off the ground plane shadows 12 On the View Control Bar. Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique | 495 . This plan view is now ready to be added to a sheet. specify 10/27/2004 for Date and 1:00:00 PM for Time. click Save.NOTE For this step. . 15 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box. This is the level the shadow will be cast upon. 13 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. and click Advanced Model Graphics. Cnst. under Sun and Shadows Settings. 9 Under Sunlight Settings. for At Level. 16 On the File menu. click OK. 8 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog box. clear Ground Plane. 14 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog box. and click OK. select Ground Plane and select 1st Flr. most of the images in the remainder of this tutorial may differ from those on your screen depending on the settings that you choose. you can enter any city you wish. be aware that if you enter a different city.

select Floor Plan: Presentation Second Floor Plan. 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 4 In the Views dialog box. you add the floor plan to a sheet and modify the view to enhance the contrast. 7 Zoom in around the viewport. and click OK. 6 On the Design Bar. click Add View. TIP If the View tab is not available. click Sheet. and click View. and click Add View to Sheet. select Arch Portrait.Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet In this exercise. click Modify. and notice a view title displays. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. and click to place it. right-click the Design Bar. 5 Move the cursor to the center of the sheet as shown. Notice the blank sheet is portrait oriented. Create a new sheet 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. The viewport displays at the tip of the cursor. 496 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views .

11 In the Type Properties dialog box. For this analytique. To accomplish this. enter Presentation. click .Because the view title needs to be removed for the analytique. click OK. Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique | 497 . 14 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Duplicate. 9 On the Options Bar. Notice the viewport no longer displays a view title. you need to create a new viewport type that does not display the view title. 13 In the Type Properties dialog box. Create a new viewport type 8 Select the viewport in the center of the sheet. under Graphics. click Edit/New. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box. 12 In the Name dialog box. you will create a dark filled region for the floor plan view. and click OK. and click OK. you need to create a base of contrast for the centered plan. select No for Show Title.

Now that you have defined the outer perimeter of the filled region. 16 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. select Invisible Lines.Create a solid fill background for contrast 15 Right-click the viewport. and click Activate View. You enter sketch mode where you define the line type. click Filled Region. This activates the Presentation Second Floor Plan within the context of the sheet. and the boundary of the region. The space between the perimeter of the building model and each line should be equidistant. If necessary. fill properties. draw a chain of lines around the exterior face of the building model as shown. 498 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . 18 On the Options Bar. The lines shown below are enhanced for training purposes. and select Chain. you must define the inner perimeter by drawing a chain of lines around the perimeter of the building model. click . and you should take advantage of endpoint snapping when available. 19 On the Options Bar. use the Trim tool to clean up gaps or overlapping intersections. and draw a rectangle around the view as shown. 17 In the Type Selector. TIP Use care when sketching this chain. 20 Starting at the upper-left corner of the building model. You may want to zoom in while sketching some details. click .

click Duplicate. select Solid Fill. 28 In the Element Properties dialog box. and click OK. click Region Properties. Notice how the filled region enhances the view contrast. 26 In the Fill Patterns dialog box. When you are finished drawing the chain. 27 In the Type Properties dialog box. 30 Right-click anywhere on the sheet. 23 In the Type Properties dialog box. enter Solid Black.TIP If you have difficulty sketching using invisible lines. create the interior chain of lines using Medium or Wide lines. click OK. 32 In the Element Properties dialog box. Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique | 499 . under Name. verify that the Background is Opaque and the Color is Black. click Save. 34 Proceed with the next lesson. 22 In the Element Properties dialog box. under Graphics. and click Deactivate View. click Finish Sketch. select the entire chain (use TAB ) and change the line type back to Invisible lines by selecting it from the Type Selector. 33 On the File menu. scroll down. Name the sheet 31 Right-click the edge of the sheet. 21 On the Design Bar. click Edit/New. and click OK. enter Presentation for Sheet Name. 29 On the Design Bar. and click Properties. and click OK. Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique In this lesson. you create an elevation and add it to the Presentation sheet that you created in the first exercise. under Identity Data. 25 In the Type Properties dialog box. 24 In the Name dialog box. Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique. and click OK. click the Fill Pattern value and the arrow that displays within it.

under Views (all). you copy an elevation view and use advanced model graphics to cast shadows on the view. and click Duplicate. expand Elevations. Copy and rename the elevation view 1 In the Project Browser. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. 500 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . A copy of the south elevation view becomes the active view. right-click South.rvt. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.Preparing the Elevation View for the Analytique In this exercise.

and clear Elevation Swing. click Visibility/Graphics. click OK. This turns off the visibility of all wall surface patterns in this view. expand the Walls category. 15 In the Name dialog box. Changes made within the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box are applied only to the active view. Modify visibility/graphic overrides 4 On the View menu. By changing the angle of the sun. 8 Click OK. you can create more interesting shadows on the elevation view. and click OK. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box. and clear Surface Pattern. 6 Under Visibility. and click Rename. 7 Click the Annotation Categories tab. This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. right-click Copy of South. verify that Hidden Line is the selected Style. specify 2:30:00 PM for Time. 5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog box. Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique | 501 . under Elevations. click . on the Model Categories tab. 13 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. 3 In the Rename View dialog box. Apply advanced model graphics 9 On the View Control Bar. click Duplicate. 16 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog box. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. 12 Under Intensity. and click OK. expand the Doors category. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Elevation. enter Presentation South Elevation. 14 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog box. under Sunlight Settings. and click Advanced Model Graphics. select Cast Shadows. under Visibility. specify 35 for Shadow. scroll up. and click OK. 17 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box. scroll down.2 In the Project Browser. 11 Under Shadow Properties.

18 On the File menu.rvt. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 19 Proceed with the next exercise. you add the Presentation South Elevation view to the Presentation sheet. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. expand Sheets. TIP Use the snap feature to snap the viewport to the center reference plane. 3 In the Views dialog box. click Save. Adding a Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet. Add view to sheet 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click A105 . under Views (all). 4 Center the viewport above the presentation plan view as shown. Adding a Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet In this exercise. select Elevation: Presentation South Elevation. 502 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . click Add View.Presentation. and click Add View to Sheet. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise.

Notice the viewport displays a view title. Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique | 503 . Notice the view title no longer displays. 5 In the Type Selector. select Viewport: Presentation.

click Modify. Adding Section Views to the Analytique In this lesson. 9 Proceed with the next lesson. You also create a view template for presentation views and apply it to other views.6 Drag the Presentation South Elevation viewport downward until it shares an edge with the presentation floor plan. Adding Section Views to the Analytique. click Save. 504 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . you create section and callout views and place them in the analytique. 7 On the Design Bar. You add silhouette edges and filled regions to the views. 8 On the File menu.

m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Cnst. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Adjust the controls to modify the extents.Preparing a Section View for the Analytique In this exercise. and use the flip arrows if necessary. Add a section in a plan view 1 In the Project Browser. select 1: 100 for Scale. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 505 . double-click 1st Flr. 4 Add the section shown below. click Section. you create and modify the section view that you later add to the analytique. The section should cut through the center of the building model and extend past the front of the building (lower wall). Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. TIP You can also change the scale of the section view after you create it. under Floor Plans. 3 On the Options Bar.rvt.

expand Sections (Callout 1). you will create a callout around the building model components within the section view. 7 On the Options Bar. To fit correctly in the analytique. Create a callout of the section view 5 In the Project Browser. 506 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . To accomplish this. this view needs to be rotated 180 degrees. 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Use the controls to adjust the precise location of the boundary and to move the callout head so it is readily identifiable. select 1: 100 for Scale. and double-click Section 2.Section 2 is added to the building model. click Callout. 8 Draw a callout around all the building model components within the section view as shown.

click the Model Categories tab. under Sections (Callout 1). expand the Walls category. TIP You can also open the callout in the Project Browser by double-clicking Callout of Section 2 under Sections (Callout 1). click Modify. and clear Surface Pattern. 14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog box. 15 Under Visibility. 12 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. click Visibility/Graphics. and click OK. scroll up. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 507 . scroll down. double-click Presentation Section 2. 11 In the Rename View dialog box. 16 Under Visibility. right-click Callout of Section 2.Rename the callout 9 On the Design Bar. enter Presentation Section 2. Modify Visibility/Graphic Overrides 13 On the View menu. and clear Elevation Swing. under Sections (Callout 1). expand the Doors category. 10 In the Project Browser.

24 Proceed with the next exercise. clear Crop Region Visible. Hide the crop boundary 20 Select the crop boundary. Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View. 19 Click OK. click Save. Notice the crop region no longer displays. 508 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . 21 On the Options Bar. click . under Extents. and click OK. 22 In the Element Properties dialog box. and clear Show annotation categories in this view.17 Turn off the visibility of the following model categories: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Casework Ceilings Furniture Lighting Fixtures Specialty Equipment 18 Click the Annotation Categories tab. This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view. 23 On the File menu.

under Sunlight Settings. 2 On the View Control Bar. and click Advanced Model Graphics. Notice the shadows on the view provide more contrast and a sense of depth. you apply silhouette edges to contrast the edges of the view. 6 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog box. double-click Presentation Section 2. click Apply. 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box. click Duplicate. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. and click OK. specify an Azimuth of 135 degrees. and click OK. select Cast Shadows. select Directly. Under Shadows Properties. you use advanced model graphics to cast shadows on the section view. specify 35 for Shadow. 5 In the Name dialog box. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. In the steps that follow. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 509 . enter Sun and Shadow Settings Section. under Sections (Callout 1). TIP You may need to move the dialog box off to the side in order to see the view. Add shadows to the section view 1 If Presentation Section 2 is not the active view. Click Apply. specify an Altitude of 70 degrees. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog box.Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View In this exercise. ■ Under Sun and Shadows Settings.rvt. In addition. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. 3 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box. select Relative to View. you create a new Sun and Shadow setting in order to make a presentation view with more contrast. Notice that the shadows displayed do not offer much contrast. Under Intensity. open the Project Browser and. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Hidden Line for Style. click .

TIP The current view of your model may vary from the illustrations in the tutorial based on the placement of the section line in the previous exercise. Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique. NOTE The line style. you add the Presentation Section 2 view to the analytique and rotate the view 180 degrees. was added to this dataset for training purposes. 10 On the File menu. select Silhouette Edges for Silhouette style. and click OK. Notice application of heavy line weights to the edges of the building model. under Silhouette Edges. Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique In this exercise. Apply silhouette edges 8 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box. You can modify this line style by selecting Line Styles from the Settings menu. Silhouette Edges. 510 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . 11 Proceed with the next exercise. click Save. select Override Silhouettes. TIP You can also use the linework tool to emphasize individual surface edges. 9 Under Silhouette Edges.

select Viewport: Presentation. under Sheets (all). 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 5 In the Type Selector. select Section: Presentation Section 2.Presentation. double-click A105 .rvt.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 511 . 3 In the Views dialog box. and click Add View to Sheet. The view title no longer displays. click Add View. 4 Move the cursor under the centered plan view as shown. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Add the view to the presentation sheet 1 In the Project Browser. and click to place the selected view. click Modify. 6 On the Design Bar.

Notice the section needs to be rotated 180 degrees. under Sections (Callout 1). Using a clock as a reference. 11 Move the cursor a slight distance counter-clockwise. 10 Specify the start radius to the right of the callout. double-click Section 2. Rotate the callout view 7 In the Project Browser. and either enter the degrees of rotation or click to specify the end radius. 8 Select the callout that you added previously. 9 On the Edit toolbar. and press ENTER. specify 3 o’clock as the rotation start point. 512 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . In the steps that follow. and enter 180 to specify the number of degrees of rotation. move the cursor in the direction of the rotation. click . To rotate an object. you accomplish this by rotating the callout within the section view. you click to specify the start radius.

Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 513 .Presentation.After you enter the rotation value and press Enter. double-click A105 . under Sheets (all). Notice that the extents need to be adjusted to fit around the edges of the building model. Reposition the viewport 13 In the Project Browser. the callout rotates 180 degrees. 12 Drag the callout extents until they extend just past the perimeter of the edges of the building model as shown. Notice the Presentation Section 2 view has rotated 180 degrees and now needs to be repositioned.

Working with a Presentation View Template In this exercise. 16 On the File menu. Working with a Presentation View Template. 514 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . and drag it up and to the left as shown.14 Select the Presentation Section 2 viewport. you add the modified view to the presentation sheet. 15 On the Design Bar. 17 Proceed with the next exercise. you create a view template for presentation views in order to reduce repetitive work while creating subsequent views. click Modify. click Save. After applying the view template to a new section view.

Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 515 . and click Duplicate. enter Presentation. Create a presentation view template 1 In the Project Browser. rather than repeat numerous steps to prepare this view for the analytique. 7 In the Rename View dialog box. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. right-click Section 1. enter Presentation Section 1. Now. Apply presentation view template 8 On the View menu. under Sections (Type 1). double-click Presentation Section 2. click Apply View Template.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. and click OK. 4 In the View Templates dialog box. under Sections (Callout 1). right-click Copy of Section 1. click OK. and click OK.rvt. click Save as View Template. and click Rename. under Sections (Type 1). Create a new presentation view 5 In the Project Browser. 2 On the View menu. 6 In the Project Browser. you can simply apply the presentation view template. 3 In the New View Template dialog box.

11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select Viewport: Presentation. double-click A105 . select Presentation. 13 Place it to the left of the plan view. under Graphics. 16 On the View menu. and click OK. click View Properties.9 In the Select View Template dialog box. annotations. 18 Right-click the viewport. under Sheets (all). click Add View. 14 In the Type Selector. select 90 degrees Counterclockwise for View Rotation on Sheet. 17 In the Element Properties dialog box. and click Activate View. 516 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . and click OK. 15 Right-click the viewport. you can use a view property to accomplish the same thing. Rather than use a callout to rotate this view after it is added to a sheet. and click Deactivate View. 19 Move the view so the walls line up similar to the image shown. lighting fixtures. Notice the furniture. and click Add View to Sheet. Add the view to the presentation sheet 10 In the Project Browser. 12 In the Views dialog box. and elevation swings no longer display. select Section: Presentation Section 1.Presentation.

21 Proceed with the next exercise. you create a wall section and add it to the right side of the analytique. click Save. Working in a Callout Analytique Traditional analytiques typically contain a detail.20 On the File menu. such as a tracery window or column capital. In this exercise. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 517 . Working in a Callout Analytique.

Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. click Callout. select the callout. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Create callout 1 In the Project Browser. 518 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . enter Presentation Callout. and click Rename. under Sections (Callout 1). 5 In the Rename View dialog box. and modify the extents and the callout head location as shown. 4 In the Project Browser. double-click Section 1. 3 Draw a callout around the front balcony as shown. click Modify.rvt. After you add the callout. and click OK. under Sections (Type 1). right-click Callout of Section 1. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar.

and click View Properties. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 519 . and click OK. under Extents.6 In the Project Browser. under Sections (Callout 1). 7 Select the crop boundary and adjust the bottom so that there is a small gap as shown. double-click Presentation Callout. clear Crop Region Visible. 8 Right-click. 9 In the Element Properties dialog box. This gap is used later in the exercise to place a fill region.

Modify presentation callout on sheet 16 Right-click the presentation callout viewport. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click View Properties. click Modify. 18 In the Element Properties dialog box. 17 On the View menu. select Viewport: Presentation. 20 Select the callout presentation viewport. 15 On the Design Bar. and move it into the position shown below. 19 Right-click the callout presentation view. select Custom for View Scale. click Add View. 14 In the Type Selector. under Sheets (all). and click Activate View. 520 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . 13 Place it on the right side of the presentation sheet.Add callout to presentation sheet 10 In the Project Browser. and click Add View to Sheet. 12 In the Views dialog box. double-click A105 . select Section: Presentation Callout. specify a value of 22 for Scale Value 1. and click Deactivate View. and click OK.Presentation.

hide the crop region and deactivate the viewport. The composition set for the analytique is now complete. under Sections (Callout 1). Although there are several methods you could use to create these areas of contrast. Apply filled regions to presentation callout 21 In the Project Browser. sketch the filled regions on the floors and roof shown below. 25 Using the drawing tools on the Options Bar. you add a heavy base to the floors and a poche to the base. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 521 . 24 In the Element Properties dialog box. and click OK. double-click Presentation Callout. activate the viewport. the easiest method is to apply filled regions to the presentation callout. 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. You do not have to replicate the image exactly. The intent of the analytique is not so much a measured construction document as it is a stylized representation of the architectural forms. click Region Properties. You can sketch all of them at once or one filled region at a time. click Filled Region. In the steps that follow. select Solid Black for Type. When finished. Click Finish Sketch on the Design Bar when you are finished.NOTE If the presentation callout view does not fit properly on the sheet. 23 On the Design Bar. turn on the crop region from the view properties dialog box. and make adjustments as necessary.

click . 522 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . and click Activate View. under Sheets (all). Add poche region 27 Right-click the presentation callout viewport. double-click A105 . and sketch the rectangle shown below. 28 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Filled Region. 29 On the Options Bar.26 On the Project Browser.Presentation.

Notice the entire poche region does not display because the crop region does not encompass the new filled region. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 523 . and drag the left and bottom extent until the entire poche region displays. 31 On the View menu. click View Properties. under Extents. click Finish Sketch.30 On the Design Bar. 32 In the Element Properties dialog box. and click OK. select Crop Region Visible. 33 Select the crop region.

you create isometric 3D views and use section boxes to create cutaways with shadows. 38 Proceed with the next lesson. and click Deactivate View. clear Crop Region Visible. 37 On the File menu. 35 In the Element Properties dialog box. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes.34 On the View menu. You then add perspective views to the presentation and annotate the sheet. click Save. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes In this lesson. click View Properties. 36 Right-click the presentation callout viewport. 524 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . under Extents. and click OK.

2 On the View menu. you create three similar isometric views with different cutaway. click Orient ➤ Southwest. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes | 525 . under 3D Views. Create southwest isometric view 1 In the Project Browser. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. You then add each view to the presentation sheet. 3 On the View Control Bar. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. and click 1: 200.s and apply shadows to the views.rvt. click the Scale control. and click Advanced Model Graphics.Creating Cutaway Isometric Views In this exercise. double-click Isometric. Apply advanced model graphics 4 On the View Control Bar.

right-click Copy of Isometric 1. 16 In the Rename View dialog box. Specify an Azimuth of 135 degrees. 13 In the Rename View dialog box. Under Shadows Properties. under Sunlight Settings. 7 In the Name dialog box. for At Level. under Extents. Select Relative to View. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box. Rename and duplicate isometric views 12 In the Project Browser. Cnst. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Directly. under 3D Views. 6 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog box. and click OK. and click OK. under 3D Views. Notice the section box that displays around the building model. click Duplicate. 526 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . Under Intensity. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Isometric.5 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box. Select Ground Plane. under 3D Views. select Override Silhouettes. Under Sun and Shadows Settings. and click Duplicate. and click OK. select Cast Shadows. double-click Isometric 2. 15 In the Project Browser. Select 1st Flr. under Silhouette Edges. and click Rename. Specify an Altitude of 45 degrees. click View Properties. 19 In the Element Properties dialog box. Add a section box to Isometric 2 17 In the Project Browser. select Section Box. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Hidden Line for Style. enter Isometric 1. select Silhouette Edges for Silhouette style. and click OK. 8 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog box. 14 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. and click OK. right-click Isometric 1. 11 Under Silhouette Edges. enter Isometric 2. 18 On the View menu. right-click Isometric. and click Rename. click . specify 35 for Shadow. 9 Click OK.

21 Select the controls for the top plane of the section box. click Modify on the Design Bar.20 Select the section box. and drag the plane downward until it cuts halfway through the second floor as shown. These allow you to modify the extents of the section box. You can use this to rotate the section box. TIP Notice there is also a rotation symbol. When you are finished. Notice the grips that display on each face of the section box. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes | 527 .

Before turning off the visibility of the section box. When you are finished. 27 In the Element Properties dialog box. 30 Select the controls for the top plane of the section box. right-click Copy of Isometric 2. 26 On the View menu. and click OK. under Extents. clear Crop Region Visible. and click Duplicate. and click Rename. Notice the section box no longer displays. 32 In the Element Properties dialog box. 23 In the Project Browser. 528 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . under Extents. clear Crop Region Visible. 29 Select the section box. enter Isometric 3. under 3D Views. click View Properties. under 3D Views. either adjust the plane location. click View Properties. 24 In the Rename View dialog box. click Modify on the Design Bar. and click OK. make a copy of the view. In such a case. Modify the section box of Isometric 3 28 In the Project Browser. double-click Isometric 2. under 3D Views. double-click Isometric 3. the stairs and railings may display. and click OK. 22 In the Project Browser. NOTE Depending on the precise location of the top plane of the section box. 31 On the View menu. right-click Isometric 2. and drag the plane downward until it cuts halfway through the first floor as shown. select Crop Region. select Crop Region. under 3D Views. or turn off the visibility of railings and stairs using the Visibility/Graphics dialog box. 25 In the Project Browser.

Presentation. in the Type Selector. Notice the filled region partially covers the view. 34 In the Project Browser. select Viewport: Presentation. 36 In the Project Browser. Add isometric views to the presentation sheet 33 In the Project Browser. you stack the three isometric views in a vertical column on the presentation sheet to show the continual erosion of the structure. under 3D Views.Next. drag Isometric 1 underneath Isometric 2 as shown and. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes | 529 . 35 In the Project Browser. double-click A105 . in the Type Selector. under Sheets (all). select Viewport: Presentation. drag Isometric 3 underneath the left section view as shown and. You resolve this problem in the steps that follow. select Viewport: Presentation. in the Type Selector. under 3D Views. under 3D Views. drag Isometric 2 underneath Isometric 3 as shown and.

redraw the portion of the filled region so it follows the boundary of Isometric 1.Modify filled region boundaries 37 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. and click Activate View. and on the Options Bar. 44 Using the drawing tools. 42 Click OK twice. 40 In the Element Properties dialog box. select Transparent for Background. The image below shows the lines redrawn. click Lines. 38 Select the poche filled region. select Concrete for Type. 530 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . You may need to use the split tools and trim tools to modify lines along the way. 43 On the Design Bar. 41 In the Type Properties dialog box. and then click Edit/New. click Region Properties. 39 On the Design Bar. You change this back to solid fill when you are done. click Edit. This will make it easier to draw lines. under Graphics.

45 On the Design Bar. 46 In the Element Properties dialog box. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views In this exercise. you add it to the presentation sheet. you create the final view for the analytique. select Solid Black for Type. click Finish Sketch. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes | 531 . click Region Properties. 50 Proceed with the next exercise. and click OK. and click Deactivate View. 47 On the Design Bar. 49 On the File menu. 48 Right-click the Presentation Callout view. a cutaway perspective view. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views. click Save. After adding shadows and silhouette edges to the view.

3 Place the camera in the southwest corner of the view as shown. Cnst. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.rvt. The view opens immediately. double-click 1st Flr. click Camera. and specify the range and direction just outside the upper right corner of the building model. 532 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views .Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. Create a perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. then you specify the eye direction and range. Adding a camera is a two-click process: first you specify the eye location. under Floor Plans.

Under Sun and Shadows Settings. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Hidden Line for Style. select Cast Shadows. and click OK.4 Adjust the crop boundary so the entire building model fits within it. and click Advanced Model Graphics. select Override Silhouettes. select Sun and Shadow Settings Isometric for Name. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes | 533 . select Silhouette Edges for Silhouette style. 5 On the View Control Bar. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. 8 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box. Under Intensity. 9 Under Silhouette Edges. specify 35 for Shadow. 7 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog box. click . Under Shadows Properties. 6 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box. and click OK. under Silhouette Edges.

A section box now cuts through the building model. 534 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . and click OK. click View Properties. under Extents. You may need to adjust the location of the crop boundary as well.Add a section box 10 On the View menu. select Section Box. Notice the controls that display on each plane. 13 Use the section controls to modify the location of each respective plane until your view resembles the following image. 12 Select the section box. 11 In the Element Properties dialog box.

and click OK.14 Select the crop boundary. under 3D Views. 19 In the Element Properties dialog box. under Change. 21 In the Project Browser. under Extents. enter 165 mm for Width. 15 On the Options Bar.Presentation. double-click A105 . and place it in the upper-left corner as shown. 18 On the View menu. go to the Type Selector and select Viewport: Presentation. and click OK. clear Crop Region Visible. 16 In the Crop Region Size dialog box. select Scale (locked proportions). drag 3D View 2 onto the presentation sheet. 17 Under Size. Because scale does not apply to perspective views. After placing it. click Size. Add the view to the presentation sheet 20 On the Project Browser. under Sheets (all). you must specify the actual size of the image. click View Properties. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes | 535 .

enter Title. 7 In the Element Properties dialog box. 3 In the Element Properties dialog box. 4 In the Type Properties dialog box. under Text.22 On the File menu. and click OK. select a font. 6 In the Type Properties dialog box. and click OK. 9 In the Name dialog box. click Edit/New. click Save. 23 Proceed with the next exercise. Annotating the Analytique In this exercise. click Edit/New. click . specify a text size of 40 mm. enter Description. 5 In the Name dialog box. click Duplicate. 536 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . specify a text size of 6 mm. 13 Add a title to the analytique as shown. Create new text types 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click OK. click Duplicate. select Title. Add a title and description 12 In the Type Selector. 2 On the Options Bar. and click OK. 11 In the Element Properties dialog box. you complete the analytique by adding text to the presentation sheet. select the same font as the title. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. and click OK. Annotating the Analytique.rvt. 8 In the Type Properties dialog box. 10 In the Type Properties dialog box. under Text. click Text. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise.

This completes the Presentation Views tutorial. 17 On the Design Bar. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes | 537 . click Save. select Description. 16 Add a description of your choosing and add it to the analytique as shown. 18 On the File menu.14 Click in the drawing window to complete the title text. 15 In the Type Selector. click Modify.

538 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views .

shape. In this tutorial. Each family element can have multiple types defined within it. or other parameter variables as designed by the family creator. This keeps everything coordinated and saves you the time and effort of manually keeping components and schedules up to date. 539 . Changes to a family type definition ripple through the project and are automatically reflected in every instance of that family or type within the project. material set. each with a different size.About Families and the Family Editor 18 All elements in Autodesk Revit Building are “family based. you learn about the various types of families and the Family Editor. Even though various types within a family can look completely different.” The term family describes a powerful concept used throughout Revit Building to help you manage your data and make changes easily. they are still related and come from a single source. thus the term family.

The basic walls system family. for example.Using Families and the Family Editor One of the many advantages of using Revit Building is the ability to create your own families of components without having to learn a complex programming language. there is another type of family that allows you create any shape or form required for a particular project and have Revit Building recognize it as a particular component type. while many more are stored in component libraries. because there is only one file to track. Some family types are pre-defined within Revit Building and cannot be created or modified outside of the project environment. Using the Family Editor. if you create a family called "double-hung window" that includes types with several sizes. floors. This makes file management much easier. Walls. and partition wall styles. has wall types that define interior. floors. 540 | Chapter 18 About Families and the Family Editor . but you cannot create new system families. such as a dome roof.rfa extension. You can duplicate and modify existing system families. you learn about the three types of families and how they are used within a project and how they are created. foundation. the types would all be saved as one file which can then be loaded into any project. generic. The following illustration shows different types within the basic walls family. Standard Component Families Standard component families are loaded by default in project templates. You work with the Family Editor to create and modify components. and roofs. You can either duplicate and modify an existing component family or create a new component family based on a variety of family templates. and roofs are examples of these types of families. For example. There are. In addition. You also learn about the Family Editor. you create a family within predefined templates that contain the intelligent objects needed to create the particular family type. In this lesson. Revit Building has three types of families: ■ ■ ■ System Standard Component In-place System Families System families are pre-defined within Revit Building and comprise principle building components such as walls. Introduction to Families Most families are created in the Family Editor and saved as separate files with an . You provide the information necessary to uniquely describe the family geometry. exterior. The following dialog box shows how you can select a specific family template to start your family design project. and when and how to use it. however. NOTE You can use “Transfer Project Standards” to copy system families from one project to another. All different types that you create are stored with the master family file. exceptions to this rule.

Standalone families include columns. Using Families and the Family Editor | 541 . You create in-place families only within the current project. Standard component families can exist outside of the project environment and have an . The following illustration shows a building model of the Pantheon without a roof and with an in-place roof family. You can load them into projects. and furniture. Family templates assist you in creating and manipulating component families. and also a standalone furniture family component. so they are useful for objects unique to that project.rfa extension.Family templates are either host-based or standalone. The following illustration shows host-based window and door family components in a wall. and save them from a project file to your library if needed. In-place Families In-place families are either model or annotation components in a particular project. Host-based families have components that require hosts. You have a choice of categories when you create in-place families. transfer them from one project to another. An example is a door family hosted by a wall family. custom wall treatments. for example. trees. and the category that you use determines the component’s appearance and display control within the project.

When the family opens. After the family has been loaded in the project. You do not have to carry the original family file along with the project. This will be apparent because the only Design Bar tab available is Family. you can click File ➤ Open. you can double-click any file with an . click File ➤ New ➤ Family. how to access it. such as newsgroups. consider checking the web library and other web resources. modify it as needed. Family element visibility can be dependent of your viewing direction. or you can load it using the Load From Library. and then load it into the project. 542 | Chapter 18 About Families and the Family Editor . 3 Navigate to the library or location of the family. It is far easier to modify an existing component within the Family Editor than to create it from scratch. You can have a project open and the Family Editor open simultaneously. 2 On the File menu. you need to reload the family in the project to see the updated family. 4 Select the family file name and click Open. 4 If you can’t find the component you require.Adding a family to a project 1 Open or start a project. open it in the Family Editor. Within the Windows® environment. you learned about the different types of Revit Building families and when to use them. click Load From Library ➤ Load Family. In this exercise. navigate to a family file. and when to use it. In this section. you can drag it into the document window. such as plan.rfa extension and it will open Revit Building in the Family Editor. you can search the component library loaded on your local hard drive. and click Open. as well as the level of detail associated with that view. if you change the original family. elevation. you will inevitably come to a point where you need a specific component for your design. Load Family command on the File menu. you learn about the Family Editor. 3 Next. presume it is a bay window that you require. However. In the final exercise. and click Open. How to use the Family Editor You can access the Family Editor in several ways. Also consider any internal family libraries that may exist on the network. or 3D. you should then try to find the component that most closely resembles it. it is saved with the project. select the appropriate template. To start a new family. you learn when to use the Family Editor. it should be available within the Type Selector. and the general procedure for creating a standard component family. it opens within the Family Editor. 5 Finally. if you have exhausted your external resources. Introduction to the Family Editor You can use the Family Editor to create both real-life building components and graphical/annotation components. you should create a new component family using one of the family templates as a starting point. how to access it. To add a family to your project. When to use the Family Editor During the design process. There is a logical thought process that you should follow: 1 Is there a component of this type already loaded into this project? If so. If you find a close match. In this case. With Revit Building open. 2 If there isn’t a component family loaded in the project. Families are listed in the Project Browser under their respective component category. Families store all of the necessary geometry to display the two-dimensional (2D) and three-dimensional (3D) versions of particular objects.

5 Add label dimensions to create type or instance parameters. Using Families and the Family Editor | 543 . 4 Add dimensions to specify parametric component geometry.General procedure for creating a standard component family 1 Select the appropriate family template. and then load it into a new project and see how it performs. 9 Save the newly-defined family. 7 Specify 2D and 3D geometry display characteristics with sub-category and entity visibility settings. 8 Define family type variations by specifying different parameters. 6 Flex the new model to verify correct component behavior. 2 Define sub-categories for the family to aid in controlling visibility of the object. 3 Lay out reference planes to aid in drawing component geometry.

544 | Chapter 18 About Families and the Family Editor .

Using the installed templates. you learn how to create specific Autodesk Revit Building families. not within the Family Editor. and several annotation families. In each lesson. You create a furniture family. a lighting fixture. you create it within the project file. 545 . you learn how to create a different type of component. When you create an in-place family. In addition. This allows you to create the family in the context of the current project.Creating Components in the Family Editor 19 In this tutorial. you create an in-place family. you start with a simple door family and then move onto a window family.

546 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . After you create the door leaf as an extrusion. and thickness. The door type has a variable height and width. you draw the plan view components for the new door family. height. Drawing the Door Plan View Components In this exercise. you create a custom door family based on the definition of a flush exterior door.Creating a Door Family In this lesson. you create new door types based on size and assign parameters respectively. You also learn how to constrain the door design by adding labelled dimensions to specify values for the door width.

5 On the Window menu. Select Metric Door. 2 On the File menu. 4 On the View menu. and represent the door opening profile. click New ➤ Family. select Training Files and navigate to the Metric ➤ Metric Families and Templates ➤ Templates folder. Labelled dimensions.Create a new family based on the default door template 1 Close any open projects or families.rft. click Tile. click Symbolic Lines. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog box. 9 In the Type Selector. Level. The reference planes that display are part of the default door template. select Doors [projection]. 11 Starting at the door hinge point on the lower left corner of the door opening. this is the keyboard shortcut for Zoom to Fit. part of the door properties. sketch a 1000 mm x 50 mm rectangle for the door leaf as shown. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All to Fit. Creating a Door Family | 547 . Draw the door panel plan view representation 8 On the Design Bar. are also displayed. Floor Plan: Ref. Notice the four tiled views. The door opening is aligned and locked to the reference planes. click . 7 Enter ZF. 6 Maximize the window. and click Open. 10 On the Options Bar.

13 Add a horizontal dimension from the left edge to the right edge of the door panel as shown. 548 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Dimension.Dimension the door panel 12 On the Design Bar. 14 Add a vertical dimension from the top edge of the door panel to the bottom edge as shown.

click Modify. 17 On the Options Bar. NOTE This same label is applied to the dimension referencing the door opening. 16 Select the vertical dimension that controls the door width. select Thickness for Label. Creating a Door Family | 549 . select Width for Label. 18 Select the horizontal dimension that references the door thickness.Add dimension labels to the door leaf 15 On the Design Bar. 19 On the Options Bar. a user can change the value of the Width parameter and all dimensions labelled with it change accordingly. Because labelled dimensions are parameters.

the arc is selected so you can see the arc center and each end point. 26 Select the upper left corner of the door leaf for the arc endpoint. 21 On the Design Bar. Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry In this exercise. click the down arrow button. 24 Enter SI. you create the solid geometry of the door leaf with an extrusion. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. along with the witness line controls. 22 In the Type selector. and select the intersection at the upper left corner of the door opening for the arc center point. you first specify the arc center. Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry. 25 Select the upper right corner of the door opening for the arc start point. click Symbolic Lines. click . so it doesn’t visually interfere with the door swing location. In the image below. select Plan Swing [cut]. and select the command from the menu.Draw the door opening plan view arc 20 Select the dimension with the two EQ symbols and move it. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. as shown. TIP If the Arc from Center and End Points command is not visible on the Options Bar. When drawing an arc from center and end points. 550 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 23 On the Options Bar. then you specify each end point.

double-click Exterior. under Specify a new Work Plane. 6 On the Options Bar. click Lines. enter 50 mm for Depth. 8 On the Design Bar. 4 In the Work Plane dialog box. 3 On the Design Bar. under Elevations. click Finish Sketch. Creating a Door Family | 551 . double-click Left. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 2 On the Design Bar. 7 Select the upper left corner of the door opening for the first corner of the rectangle. click Set Work Plane.1 In the Project Browser. and then select the lower right corner of the door opening for the second corner of the rectangle. and click OK. select Reference Plane: Exterior for Name. 9 In the Project Browser under Elevations. and click . 5 On the Design Bar.

TIP When you add the witness line to the exterior face of the extrusion. click Modify. select Thickness for Label. Specify the visibility of the door leaf in plan view 15 On the Design Bar. Level. 12 On the Design Bar.10 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. then click to specify the dimension witness line. 13 On the Options Bar. double-click Ref. use the TAB key to toggle to the extrusion reference. 11 Add a horizontal dimension from the exterior face of the door extrusion to the interior face of the door extrusion. 14 In the Project Browser. 552 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Modify and select the dimension. under Floor Plans.

Medium. Creating a Door Family | 553 . click 11 In the Materials dialog box. select Front/Back.Red/Stained. Left/Right. and Fine are selected. 13 On the Design Bar. you assign a material to the door leaf. Assign the Oak Door material to the door leaf 8 Select the door leaf extrusion. enter Oak Door for Name. Assign the Oak Door material to the door frame 14 Select the interior door frame extrusion. This material designation controls how it displays in shaded and hidden line views. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. under View Specific Display. under Materials and Finishes. click Modify. for Material. and click OK. verify that Coarse.No Gloss. click OK. click . and click OK. 21 In the Element Properties dialog box. 9 On the Options Bar. 12 In the Element Properties dialog box. The solid geometry of the door is now complete. select Oak Door. 6 Click OK. 18 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog box. under Name.16 Select the door leaf extrusion. Assigning Materials to the Door Components In this exercise. under AccuRender. 5 In the Material Library dialog box. 3 In the New Material dialog box. click Duplicate. The door leaf is assigned the new Oak Door material. select Panel for Subcategory. click Materials. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box. 4 In the Materials dialog box. and click OK. click . click Visibility. 7 In the Materials dialog box.Dark. and click OK. and When cut in Plan/RCP. 2 In the Materials dialog box. navigate to AccuRender/Wood/Oak. Create a new material based on the existing red oak material 1 On the Settings menu. 19 Under Detail Levels. It also defines its appearance when rendered. 20 On the Options Bar. click for Texture. 17 On the Options Bar. and clear Plan/RCP. click OK. Assigning Materials to the Door Components. 22 Proceed to the next exercise.

click . and click OK. select Oak Door for Name. 22 Zoom in on a door corner. click the Model Graphics Style control. 21 On the View Control Bar. 19 Repeat the previous five steps for the exterior frame extrusion. 18 In the Element Properties dialog box.15 On the Options Bar. and select Shading with Edges. double-click View 1. click 17 In the Materials dialog box. for Material. click OK. The door frame is assigned the new Oak Door material. under 3D Views. under Views (all). 554 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . View the new door 20 In the Project Browser. 16 In the Element Properties dialog box.

Enter 1500 mm for Width. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. By flexing the new component. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Flexing the new family is an important part of the design process. Click Apply. This allows you to apply changes made in the dialog box and see how the new door reacts. enter 2000 mm for Height.The Oak Door material is now assigned to the door leaf and door frame. Click Apply. enter 125 mm for Frame Width. Under Other. Notice the door geometry adapts to the new dimension values. Under Other. you ensure it adjusts to the changes it may encounter once loaded into a project. 28 Proceed to the next exercise. click Family Types. enter 2500 mm for Height. In the Family Types dialog box. Flex the door model 23 Zoom out to view the entire door. Defining New Door Types Creating a Door Family | 555 . Try to move the dialog box off to the side so you can still see the door family next to it. 27 Click OK. enter 75 mm for Frame Width. Enter 1000 mm for Width. 26 Return the door parameters to their original values. 25 In the Family Types dialog box. 24 On the Design Bar.

Click Apply. 20 Draw a wall segment 8000mm long. 5 Under Family Types. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. click New. Enter 750 mm for Width.Defining New Door Types In this exercise. select Project. enter 2100 mm for Height. 18 In the Open dialog box. 17 On the Options Bar. and click OK. under Family Types. Define the second new door type. verify that DefaultMetric.rfa. 2 In the Family Types dialog box. and click OK. click Load. 15 In the New Project dialog box. Use the default wall selection in the Type Selector. select it. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Enter 1220 mm for Width. Training Door. 7 In the Family Types dialog box. you define new door types based on the door model that you have created. 13 Navigate to the folder of your choice and save the new door family with the name. Enter 925 mm for Width. Define new door types with various heights and widths 1 On the Design Bar. click Wall. and click Open. Under Create new. Load the new door family into a new project 14 On the File menu. 3 In the Name dialog box. 11 Click OK. enter 1220 x 2134mm for Name. Training Door. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. You now have three new door types defined within your door family. click Family Types. navigate to the location where you saved the door family. Click Apply. 556 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click New ➤ Project. 6 In the Name dialog box. Place new door types in the project 19 On the Design Bar. click New. enter 2000 mm for Height. 4 In the Family Types dialog box. 8 Under Family Types. enter 2134 mm for Height. and click OK. Click Apply. and click OK. click New. click Save. click Door.rfa. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. 9 In the Name dialog box. 12 On the File menu. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Define the third new door type. enter 925 x 2000mm for Name.rte is the Template file. 10 In the Family Types dialog box. enter 750 x 2100mm for Name. under Template file.

26 In the Type Selector.21 On the View toolbar. 25 Add the door to the left side of the wall as shown. Creating a Door Family | 557 . select Training Door : 750 x 2100mm. click Door. 27 Add this door to the center of the wall as shown. and select Shading with Edges. click . 24 In the Type Selector. select Training Door : 925 x 2000mm. 22 On the View Control Bar. click the Model Graphics Style control. 23 On the Design Bar.

You now have three new flush exterior doors based on the new door family prototype. and mullion offset. default sill height. This completes the lesson. 30 You can close all files without saving. and specify values for the window width. 29 Add the third door type to the right side of the wall as shown. height. and create the window sash as a sweep. Creating a Window Family In this lesson. glazing and mullions as extrusions. you create a custom window family based on the definition of a fixed rectangular window with nine lights. 558 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . You create the window frame. select Training Door : 1220 x 2134mm. You then assign parameters to the window family to allow for the creation of different-sized versions of the nine-light prototype.28 In the Type Selector. you assign new dimension values to the window to create new types within the window family. Creating a Door Family. Finally.

7 Enter ZF. select Training Files and navigate to the Metric ➤ Metric Families and Templates ➤ Templates folder.Specifying the New Window Parameters In this exercise. click Tile. you specify the parameters for the new window family. 2 On the File menu. Select Metric Window. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All to Fit. 6 Maximize the exterior elevation view. this is the keyboard shortcut for Zoom to Fit. part of the window properties. Four views are tiled on your display. Labelled dimensions. The window type has a variable height and width. 5 On the View menu. equally spaced vertical mullions. and click Open. 4 On the Window menu.rft. and the height of the top and bottom row of lights is adjustable. click New ➤ Family 3 In the left pane of the New dialog box. Creating a Window Family | 559 . The window opening is aligned and locked to the reference planes. Create a new family based on the default window template 1 Close any open projects or families. The reference planes that display are part of the default window template and represent the window opening profile. are also displayed.

This is the starting point for the new window. The label name. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. 10 In the Family Types dialog box. This process is called “flexing the model. Change the height and width values again. then sketching the sweep profile. Click Apply. click Family Types. Enter 1800 mm for Width. you create the solid geometry of the window frame with a sweep. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. The profile is swept along the path to create the solid geometry. these specific type parameters are adjustable once the window is part of a project.” and it is done to avoid conflicts and to ensure that all model geometry adjusts to changes as designed. When you add labels to dimensions. Creating sweep geometry requires first sketching the sweep path.8 Two dimension strings display with their labels. 12 Click OK. Move the dialog box off to the side so you can see the window opening. Modify the new window type height and width parameters 9 On the Design Bar. Height and Default Sill Height. 13 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry In this exercise. 11 Enter 1000 mm for Height and 2000 mm for Width. and click Apply. also one of the window properties. 560 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Notice how the window opening adapts to the changing dimension values. and click Apply. enter 1300 mm for Height. is one of the type parameters. Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry.

click . Snap the cursor to each corner. click Finish Path. 13 Pick the exterior wall face so that a reference line is offset 50 mm to the left of the exterior wall face as shown. 2 On the Design Bar. and specify an offset of 50 mm. select Elevation: Right. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Sweep. The red dot indicates the intersection of the sweep path and the profile plane. 12 On the Options Bar. and select 1:10. 9 On the View Control Bar. click Sketch 2D Path. and click Open View. 8 In the Go To View dialog box. click the Scale control. 11 On the Design Bar. 5 Sketch a rectangle to represent the sweep path starting at the upper left corner of the opening and ending at the lower right corner. Creating a Window Family | 561 . click Ref Plane. 6 On the Design Bar. 3 On the Design Bar. click Lines.Create a sweep path for the window frame solid geometry 1 On the Design Bar. 4 On the Options Bar. click Sketch Profile. 10 Zoom in on the red dot in the middle of the wall. Add a reference plane for the sweep profile 7 On the Design Bar. click .

click Dimension. 21 In the Element Properties dialog box. 17 On the Design Bar. 16 Add a dimension between the exterior wall face and the new reference plane. and select the dimension. sketch the frame profile approximately as shown.14 On the Design Bar. 19 On the Design Bar. under Identity Data. 20 On the Options Bar. click Modify. select Chain and click . select Prefer: Wall faces. 15 On the Options Bar. and select the reference plane. Sketch the window frame profile 22 On the Design Bar. click . 23 On the Options Bar. 24 Below the red dot. 562 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and click OK. enter Sash for the Name. click Lines. click Modify. 18 Drag the value control off to the side as shown.

click it to constrain the frame to the exterior wall face. and drag it to the interior face of the wall. 26 Select the right edge of the frame section. the frame profile should extend beyond the edges of the wall. click Modify. Creating a Window Family | 563 . Precise dimensions are assigned to the frame profile in subsequent steps. 25 On the Design Bar.NOTE When you sketch the frame profile. 27 Select the left edge of the frame section. the exact dimensions are not critical. However. and drag it to the exterior face of the wall. click it to constrain the left edge of the frame to the interior face. When the lock displays. When the lock displays.

as shown. 564 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Drag it to the left and align it with the Sash reference plane. and specify the dimension value. 29 On the Design Bar. 30 Add a vertical dimension of 40 mm to the left side of the frame and another vertical dimension of 20 mm to the right side of the frame. select the line you want to move. TIP After adding the dimension. When the lock displays. click Dimension.28 Select the short line parallel and to the right of the Sash reference plane. click it to lock the line to the reference plane. click Modify.

click Finish Profile. Next. Lock the alignment when the lock icon displays. 35 On the Design Bar. this is the top of the window opening. When the lock displays. click the lock to constrain the present value. Creating a Window Family | 565 . spin the model so you can see the interior of the frame. and double-click View 1. under Views (all). TIP If you don’t see the lock icon. The window frame profile is swept around the window opening. expand 3D Views. If necessary.Modify each dimension if necessary. 36 On the Design Bar. click . click Finish Sweep. click the lock to constrain the present value. When the lock displays. Align the new profile to the window opening edge 31 Select the 40 mm dimension. 32 Select the 20 mm dimension. zoom out until it displays. select the top horizontal line of the frame profile. 37 In the Project Browser. 34 Select the horizontal reference plane that intersects the red dot. 33 On the Tools toolbar.

39 Proceed to the next exercise. double-click Exterior. Chain of walls or lines. click Set Work Plane. under Specify a new Work Plane. Creating the Window Sash Solid Geometry. 5 On the Options Bar. 2 On the Design Bar. click Lines. and select Lock. 566 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. Pick the sash profile lines 6 Place the cursor over the left side of the frame. under Elevations. click .45 mm for Depth.38 In the Project Browser. and select the option. Creating the Window Sash Solid Geometry In this exercise. select Reference Plane: Sash for Name. Specify the window sash extrusion parameters 1 On the Design Bar. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 4 On the Design Bar. and click OK. press TAB to cycle through the selection options. 3 In the Work Plane dialog box. you create the solid geometry of the window sash with an extrusion. and enter .

The entire sash outline is selected. Creating a Window Family | 567 . ■ Click . 8 Specify the upper left inside corner of the window frame for the first corner of the rectangle. Draw offset extrusion lines 7 On the Options Bar. You specify a negative offset value to indicate an extrusion direction inside of the window frame.50 mm for Offset. and lock icons display on each line. and then specify the lower right inside corner for the second corner of the rectangle. set the following options: ■ ■ Click . Enter .

568 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 11 In the Project Browser. The window sash extrusion is now complete. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. double-click Right. Spin the model if necessary to view the sash and frame at various angles. Notice the sash is aligned with the Sash reference plane. double-click View 1. click Finish Sketch.9 On the Design Bar. Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry. 10 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. under Elevations.

3 On the Options Bar. under Elevations. 4 Select the left edge of the sash so that a vertical reference plane is added 30 mm to the right.Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry In this exercise. click Ref Plane. Add a reference plane to specify the glass work plane 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Right. as shown. 2 On the Design Bar. Creating a Window Family | 569 . you create the solid geometry of the window glass with an extrusion. click . and enter 30 mm for Offset. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise.

click Dimension.5 On the Design Bar. 570 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 6 Add a horizontal dimension of 30 mm between the left edge of the sash and the reference plane.

14 In the Work Plane dialog box. 17 Place the cursor on one of the sash extrusion lines. 13 On the Design Bar. Creating a Window Family | 571 . 9 On the Options Bar. and click to create the glass boundary. 16 On the Options Bar. click Modify. click Lines. click Set Work Plane. under Identity Data. 15 On the Design Bar. 8 Select the reference plane. Pick lines to define the glass extrusion 12 On the Design Bar.7 On the Design Bar. enter Glazing for the Name instance parameter. under Elevations. double-click Exterior. under Specify a new Work Plane. press TAB until the chain of lines is preselected. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. select Reference Plane: Glazing for Name. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box. and select Lock. and click OK. and click OK. enter 12 mm for Depth. click . 11 In the Project Browser. click .

23 On the Design Bar. 24 In the Project Browser. click Modify. you can control subcategory visual style using the Objects Styles dialog box. under Elevations. Spin the model if necessary to view the sash and frame at various angles. 21 On the Options Bar. double-click Right. 572 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 22 In the Element Properties dialog box. and glass 19 In the Project Browser. sash. 20 Select the glass extrusion. NOTE Assigning subcategories to model elements is important. After the family is loaded into a project. under Identity Data. View the window model with frame. specify Glass for the Subcategory instance parameter. and click OK. click . double-click View 1.18 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. under 3D Views.

Click Apply.Flex the window model 25 On the Design Bar. You should flex the model at regular intervals to catch problems early. it is important to verify that all model elements adapted to the changes as expected. 28 Proceed to the next exercise. Notice the window adapts to the new dimension parameters. Click OK. Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry. NOTE After flexing the model. make sure the window frame stretched with the opening and that the glass extrusion remains attached to the interior edge of the sash. enter 500 mm for Default Sill Height. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. 26 In the Family Types dialog box. Click Apply. Under Other. For example. return the window to its original dimensions: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. 27 In the Family Types dialog box. Most problems can be resolved by aligning and locking lines. Creating a Window Family | 573 . Under Other. Enter 1500 mm for Width. Move the Family Types dialog box off to the side so you can see the window model. click Family Types. Enter 2000 mm for Width. enter 1500 mm for Height. enter 1000 mm for Height. enter 800 mm for Default Sill Height.

double-click Exterior. 574 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . you create the solid geometry of the window mullions based on reference planes and extrusions. 2 On the Design Bar. under Elevations. click Dimension. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. NOTE When you draw each reference plane. click Ref Plane. Add a multi-segmented dimension referencing all of the vertical reference planes except the center (Left/Right) as shown. the exact location is not critical. After adding the dimension.Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry In this exercise. Add reference planes to specify the location of the new window mullion centerlines 1 In the Project Browser. Precise dimensions are assigned to the reference planes in subsequent steps. 4 On the Design Bar. 3 Add two horizontal and two vertical reference planes inside of the window opening to approximate the mullion centerline locations as shown. click the EQ symbol to make the dimension segments equal.

Add a mullion offset family parameter 7 On the Design Bar. 6 Add a dimension between the bottom of the window opening (bottom reference plane) and the horizontal reference plane above it. Creating a Window Family | 575 .. click Modify. Do not be concerned with dimension values. as shown.> for Label. 9 On the Options Bar. Do not be concerned with dimension values. as shown.5 Add a dimension between the top of the window opening (top reference plane) and the horizontal reference plane below it. select <Add parameter. 8 Select the dimension on the upper-right that references the top two horizontal reference planes..

576 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and click OK. enter Mullion Offset for Name. specify the following parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Type. Under Group parameter under. click Modify. Click OK. 13 Select the horizontal reference plane second from the bottom. enter 350 mm for Mullion Offset. 15 On the Design Bar. 14 Click the dimension value.10 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. Notice the dimension value becomes editable. under Dimensions. Under Parameter Data. Select Instance. 12 In the Family Types dialog box. click Family Types. 11 On the Design Bar. select Dimensions. TIP Due to the length of the dimension label. you may want to drag the dimension value as shown. 16 Select the dimension on the lower-right. and enter 350 mm as the new value. select Family parameter.

and click . and click OK. notice lock icons display on the interior horizontal edges of the sash. As you did before. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. enter 14 mm for Depth. 24 Sketch a rectangle centered on the left vertical mullion reference plane approximately as shown. select Reference Plane: Glazing for Name. 20 On the Design Bar. Do not be concerned with precise dimensions. select Mullion Offset for Label. under Specify a new Work Plane. After you complete the sketch. click Modify. Watch the Status Bar to be sure that the lines are snapping to the sash. it is critical that the short horizontal lines align with the horizontal edges of the sash. 18 On the Design Bar.17 On the Options Bar. click Lines. Creating a Window Family | 577 . 22 On the Design Bar. 25 Click both of the locks so the mullion adapts to changes in window height. click Set Work Plane. However. 23 On the Options Bar. Create the vertical mullion extrusions 19 On the Design Bar. 21 In the Work Plane dialog box. move the dimension value as shown.

click Dimension. 30 On the Options Bar. 29 On the Design Bar. Click the EQ symbol to make both horizontal dimensions equal. and place it above the dimension you placed in the previous steps. 27 Add a horizontal dimension from the left edge of the mullion extrusion to the reference plane centered between the vertical mullion extrusion sketch lines. select <Add parameter> for Label. 578 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor .26 On the Design Bar. 28 Add a horizontal dimension from the left edge to the right edge of the mullion extrusion. and to the right edge of the mullion extrusion. and select the dimension you added in the previous step. Move the dimension values as shown. click Modify.

Dimension mullion edges and the reference plane at the center of the mullion and click the equality constraint. Under Group parameter under. click Finish Sketch. and on the Options Bar. select Mullion Width for Label. Remember. Under Parameter Data. follow these basic steps: ■ Sketch the rectangle similar to the mullion on the left. select Dimensions. 32 Repeat the previous steps to create an identical mullion centered on the right vertical reference plane as shown. This is changed in later steps. Move the Mullion Width value to the left as shown.31 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. Creating a Window Family | 579 . specify the following parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Type. Add a dimension between the left and right mullion edges. Click OK. enter Mullion Width for Name. Select Type. ■ ■ ■ Do not be concerned with the value of the mullion width. Select the dimension. 33 On the Design Bar. select Family parameter. NOTE Do not lock the lines to the sash edge as you did previously.

Click Apply. or undoing the same. and the mullions stretch with the new window height. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. You should flex the model at regular intervals to catch problems early. Notice the window adapts to the new dimension parameters. Move the dialog box off to the side so you can see the window in the drawing area. Flex the window model 36 In the Family Types dialog box. 35 In the Family Types dialog box. Notice the mullions remain centered and equally spaced on the reference planes. you should pay close attention to the new mullions and make sure they remain centered. enter 40 mm for Mullion Width. and click Apply. and aligned with the sash edge. Under Other. enter 1500 mm for Height. Enter 1500 mm for Width. enter 500 mm for Default Sill Height. it is important to verify that all model elements adapted to the changes as expected. In this case. Most problems can be resolved by aligning and locking lines. click Family Types. NOTE After flexing the model.Specify the mullion width parameter 34 On the Design Bar. evenly spaced. 580 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

and move the EQ values off to each side as shown. under Specify a new Work Plane. and then to the bottom edge of the mullion extrusion. Click Apply. click Dimension. 44 On the Design Bar. click Lines. 39 On the Design Bar. Under Other. Creating a Window Family | 581 . Click the EQ symbol to make both vertical dimensions equal.37 In the Family Types dialog box. 45 Add a vertical dimension from the top edge of the mullion extrusion to the reference plane at the center of the mullion. return the window to its original dimensions: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. and then click the lock icons to lock the left and right edges to the edge of the sash. 41 On the Design Bar. Do not be concerned with the dimension value. Notice the Depth value on the Options Bar remains at the previously specified value. 47 Add a vertical dimension from the top edge to the bottom edge of the mullion extrusion. as shown. select Reference Plane : Glazing for Name. 42 On the Options Bar. enter 1000 mm for Height. click Dimension. Sketch the horizontal mullion extrusions 38 On the Design Bar. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. Enter 2000 mm for Width. click Set Work Plane. Click OK. click . and click OK. 40 In the Work Plane dialog box. 43 Sketch a rectangle centered on the upper horizontal mullion reference plane approximately as shown. 46 On the Design Bar. enter 800 mm for Default Sill Height.

and on the Options Bar. NOTE Do not lock the lines to the sash edge as you did previously. select Mullion Width for Label. follow these basic steps: ■ Sketch the rectangle similar to the mullion you just completed. 50 Repeat the previous steps to create an identical mullion centered on the lower horizontal reference plane as shown. Remember. Add a dimension between the upper and lower mullion edges. Select the dimension. ■ ■ ■ 51 On the Design Bar. and select the dimension you added in the previous step. Dimension mullion edges and the reference plane at the center of the mullion and click the equality constraint. select Mullion Width for Label.48 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. click Modify. 49 On the Options Bar. 582 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Move the dimension value as shown.

click Join Geometry. If necessary. and select the vertical mullions. Creating a Window Family | 583 . so when you open the Family Types dialog box. click Family Types. Flex the window model 55 Adjust the location of the window model within the drawing area. 54 In the Project Browser. Join the mullion geometry 52 On the Tools menu. 53 Select the horizontal mullions. Notice the mullion extrusions are joined. 56 On the Design Bar. spin the model to get a good view of the mullions. you can still see the window. under 3D Views.The horizontal mullion extrusions are now complete. double-click View 1.

Click Apply. enter 800 mm for Default Sill Height. return the window to its original dimensions: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Click Apply. Assigning Materials to the Window Components In this exercise. 58 In the Family Types dialog box. Notice the window adapts to the new dimension parameters and the mullions stretch with the new window height. sash. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Assigning Materials to the Window Components. Enter 1500 mm for Width. 584 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Under Other. enter 1500 mm for Height. enter 500 mm for Default Sill Height. enter 1000 mm for Height. 59 Proceed to the next exercise. Under Other. Click OK. you assign materials to the frame. and mullions that you want to display in renderings of the new window.57 In the Family Types dialog box. Enter 2000 mm for Width.

under AccuRender. and mullions 7 In the Project Browser. click Materials. sash. TIP Hold the CTRL key down as you select the sweep and various extrusions. enter Pine Frame for Name. click for Texture. and click OK. navigate to AccuRender/Wood/Pine. select Stained. 9 Select the window frame sweep. click the Model Graphics Style control. Creating a Window Family | 585 . double-click Exterior. and select Shading with Edges. and the mullions. under Elevations. 6 In the Materials dialog box. 8 On the View Control Bar. 4 In the Materials dialog box. Create a new material based on the existing yellow pine material 1 On the Settings menu. the sash. Assign the Pine Frame material to the frame. click Duplicate. 3 In the New Material dialog box. click OK. Dark. 5 In the Material Library dialog box. No Gloss. 2 In the Materials dialog box. and click OK. Yellow/.Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise.

and Fine are selected. 14 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Visibility. and Fine are selected. 20 Select the glass extrusion. under View Specific Display. and click OK. verify that Coarse. Medium. 24 In the Project Browser. 11 In the Element Properties dialog box. Medium. click OK. 17 In the Element Properties dialog box. 18 On the Design Bar. under View Specific Display. and click OK. click for Material. double-click Right. click Modify. 12 Under Materials and Finishes. select Front/Back and When cut in Plan/RCP (if category permits). The window frame is assigned the new Pine Frame material. select Edit for Visibility. select Front/Back and When cut in Plan/RCP (if category permits). Modify the glass visibility 19 In the Project Browser under Elevations. select Pine Frame for Name. and click OK. 16 Under Detail Levels. double-click View 1. 22 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog box. 586 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click . clear the other view options.10 On the Options Bar. 23 Under Detail Levels. under 3D Views. verify that Coarse. 21 On the Options Bar. 15 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog box. under Graphics. 13 In the Materials dialog box. select Frame/Mullion for Subcategory. under Identity Data.

26 Proceed to the next exercise. sash. you define new window types based on the window model that you just created.25 Zoom in on a window corner. and glass display their assigned materials. Defining New Window Types. Defining New Window Types In this exercise. mullions. You begin by adding a formula to the mullion offset parameter to specify horizontal divisions of one third the overall height of the window. Creating a Window Family | 587 . The window frame. You then create multiple window types that will be available to the user after the family is loaded into a project.

it is also a good idea to flex the model after a new formula is applied. Flex the window model 4 In addition to flexing the model after the addition or modification of model geometry. enter Height/3 in the Formula column for Mullion Offset. Add a mullion offset formula to the family type 1 Zoom to fit and move the window model off the side of the drawing area so it will be visible after you open the Family Types dialog box. 588 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor .Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. enter 2000 mm for Height. In the Family Types dialog box. and click Apply. click Family Types. 2 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 3 In the Family Types dialog box. The horizontal mullions are now spaced apart at one third the height of the window.

5 In the Family Types dialog box. Click Apply. enter 2600 w x 1300mm h for Name. Enter 1250 mm for Height. and click OK. under Family Types. and click OK. 9 Under Family Types.The window height is doubled. and click Apply. enter 1000 mm for Height. click New. enter 2500 w x 1250mm h for Name. 8 In the Family Types dialog box. Define new window types with various heights and widths 6 In the Family Types dialog box. specify the following parameter values: ■ ■ ■ Enter 2500 mm for Width. 10 In the Name dialog box. but the one third height spacing is maintained in the horizontal mullions. 7 In the Name dialog box. click New. Creating a Window Family | 589 .

11 In the Family Types dialog box. 590 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 25 In the Type Selector. 29 In the Type Selector. Enter 1500 mm for Height. 26 Add the window to the left side of the wall.rfa. click Load. 15 On the File menu. 27 In the Type Selector. select it. Define the final window type 12 Under Family Types. select Training Window :2600 w x 1300mm h. click Wall. 28 Add this window to the center of the wall. click New. 20 In the Open dialog box. Enter 1300 mm for Height. click Thin Lines. click Save. Training Window. 19 On the Options Bar. click Modify. enter 1800 w x 1500mm h for Name and click OK.rfa file. 30 Add the third window to the right side of the wall. 32 On the View menu. specify the following parameter values: ■ ■ ■ Enter 2600 mm for Width. Click Apply. 16 Navigate to the location of your choice and save the new window family with the name. 22 Draw a generic wall segment 12000 mm long. 33 Zoom in on the center window. navigate to the location of your Training Window. Click OK. specify the following parameter values: ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter 1800 mm for Width. clear Tag on Placement. and click Open. 14 In the Family Types dialog box. 23 On the Design Bar. 31 On the Design Bar. Place new window types in the project 21 On the Design Bar. You now have three new window types defined within your window family. click to start a new project based on your default template. 13 In the Name dialog box. Notice the detail that displays. This is because you set the visibility values to display when cut in plan/RCP. click Window. 24 On the Options Bar. select Training Window : 1800 w x 1500mm h. select Training Window : 2500 w x 1250mm h. 18 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Click Apply. click Window. Load the new window family into a new project 17 On the Standard toolbar.

You have three new fixed nine-light windows based on a new window family prototype. 35 On the View Control Bar. Creating a Furniture Family | 591 . You then assign parameters to the furniture family to allow for the creation of different-sized versions of the prototype. and drawers as extrusions. You begin by creating the desktop. you assign new dimension values to the furniture to create new types within the furniture family. you create a custom furniture family based on the definition of a rolltop desk. Creating a Furniture Family In this lesson. and specify values for the furniture length and depth. This completes the Creating a Window Family lesson. Finally. click the Model Graphics Style control. click .34 On the View toolbar. rolltop. and select Shading with Edges. drawer base.

click Dimension. Create a new family based on the default furniture template 1 Close all open projects or families. 592 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Level. 7 Draw two horizontal reference planes.Specifying the New Rolltop Desk Parameters In this exercise. 4 Maximize the view. NOTE When you draw the reference planes. Select Metric Furniture. one to the left and one to the right of the existing vertical centerline reference plane as shown. click Ref Plane. 6 On the Design Bar. Floor Plan: Ref.rft. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. 5 On the View menu. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog box. 2 On the File menu. their exact location is not critical. select Training Files and navigate to the Metric ➤ Metric Families and Templates ➤ Templates folder. Precise dimensions are assigned to the reference planes in subsequent steps. 9 On the Design Bar. The reference planes that display are part of the default furniture template. they represent the furniture centerline axes. you add reference planes and specify the parameters for the new rolltop desk furniture family. and click Open. one above and one below the existing horizontal centerline reference plane as shown. click New ➤ Family. 8 Draw two vertical reference planes.

and ending at the right reference plane. 12 On the Design Bar. 11 Add an overall horizontal dimension underneath the dimension you just added. 14 Change the horizontal dimension to 2000 mm. proceeding to the centerline reference plane. It should reference the left reference plane and the right reference plane as shown.10 Near the bottom of the drawing area. Click the EQ icon to make the segments equal. click Modify. as shown. Creating a Furniture Family | 593 . 13 Select the left reference plane. add a horizontal dimension string beginning at the left reference plane.

594 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . as shown. as shown. proceeding to the centerline reference plane. 16 On the right side of the drawing area.15 On the Design Bar. 17 To the right of the dimension you just created. click Dimension. add an overall vertical dimension from the upper reference plane to the lower reference plane. Click the EQ symbol to make both segments equal. add a vertical dimension string beginning at the upper reference plane. and ending at the lower reference plane.

horizontal reference plane. click Modify. 21 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 20 Change the vertical dimension to 1000 mm. Creating a Furniture Family | 595 . select each reference plane and drag the extents to the new position. TIP To do this. select each dimension and drag the witness line controls as needed. 19 Select the upper.18 On the Design Bar. Afterwards. 22 Clean up the extents of the reference planes and the dimension witness lines as shown.

25 In the Parameter Properties dialog box.. Under Parameter Data.. Select Type. 27 On the Options Bar. Click OK.23 Select the 2000 mm dimension. select <Add parameter.. 28 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. select Dimensions. For Group parameter under. enter Length for Name. Under Parameter Data.> for Label. select <Add parameter. select Dimensions.> for Label. select Family parameter. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter type.. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter type. Click OK. enter Depth for Name. 26 Select the 1000 mm dimension. 596 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . For Group parameter under. Select Type. select Family parameter. 24 On the Options Bar.

Notice the reference planes adapt to the new dimension parameters. click Family Types. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry. Therefore. Click Apply. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Creating a Furniture Family | 597 . Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry In this exercise. 30 On the Design Bar. Click OK. Click Apply. 32 In the Family Types dialog box. When the solid geometry is snapped to the reference planes. Enter 1500 mm for Depth. Flex the design 29 Adjust the location of the reference planes within the drawing area. enter 3000 mm for Length. you can still see the model. 31 In the Family Types dialog box. enter 2000 mm for Length. it will also adapt to the same changes. Enter 1000 mm for Depth. return the parameters to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. you create the solid geometry of the desktop with an extrusion. so when you open the Family Types dialog box. you should flex the design now to ensure the reference planes and labelled dimensions adapt to changes as expected.These reference planes will be the skeleton that you snap the solid geometry to.

under Specify a new Work Plane. and enter 100 mm for Depth. 7 On the Design Bar. 5 On the Design Bar. Create the desktop using an extrusion 1 On the Design Bar. and click to select all four symbolic lines. and click OK. 8 On the Options Bar. click Finish Sketch. select Level: Ref. under Elevations. and then select the lower right reference plane intersection for the second corner of the rectangle. 598 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Level for Name. double-click Front. 10 On the Design Bar. click Set Work Plane. 2 On the Options Bar. Your lines may have a lighter weight. NOTE In the image below. click Lines. 11 In the Project Browser. 9 Move the cursor over one of the symbolic lines. press TAB until the chain of lines is offered as a selection option. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. the symbolic line thickness was modified for training purposes. 4 On the Design Bar. click Symbolic Lines. click . 3 Select the upper left reference plane intersection for the first corner of the rectangle. click . 6 In the Work Plane dialog box.Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise.

13 Move the cursor over the top edge of the desktop. Add height and thickness family parameters 20 On the Design Bar.> for Label. as shown.. Add height and thickness dimensions 17 On the Design Bar. 15 Move the cursor over the bottom edge of the desktop.. 14 Drag the top edge of the desktop upward until the temporary dimension value is 750 mm. and select the bottom edge. click Modify. 16 Drag the bottom edge of the desktop up until the desktop is 100 mm thick. click Dimension. and select the top edge. Creating a Furniture Family | 599 . 22 On the Options Bar. 18 Add a vertical dimension from the reference level to the top edge of the desktop. click Modify. press TAB until Extrusion : Shape handle displays in the Status Bar.The desktop extrusion extends 100 mm above the reference level. 21 Select the 750 mm dimension. 12 On the Design Bar. select <Add parameter. 19 Add a vertical dimension from the bottom of the desktop to the top edge. press TAB until Extrusion : Shape handle displays in the Status Bar.

enter 2000 mm for Length. Flex the design 28 Adjust the location of the model within the drawing area. enter Thickness for Name. Enter 750 mm for Height.. and click Apply. Select Type. 24 Select the 100 mm dimension. Select Type.. you can still see the model. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter type. select Family parameter. Under Parameter Data. Enter 1200 mm for Height. For Group parameter under. 25 On the Options Bar. click Modify. Enter 100 mm for Thickness. and click Apply. click Family Types.23 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. Click OK. enter 4000 mm for Length. For Group parameter under. Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry. 29 On the Design Bar. Enter 150 mm for Thickness. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter type.> for Label. you create the solid geometry of the desk drawer base. select Dimensions. select Dimensions. Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry In this exercise. 30 In the Family Types dialog box. Click Apply. 600 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . select <Add parameter. enter Height for Name. 26 n the Parameter Properties dialog box. Click OK. return the parameters to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. 31 In the Family Types dialog box. Under Parameter Data. Click OK. Notice the desk top adapts to the new dimension parameters. 27 On the Design Bar. select Family parameter. and click Apply. so when you open the Family Types dialog box. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions.

and click to locate a new horizontal reference plane offset 100 mm below it. 2 On the Design Bar. Creating a Furniture Family | 601 . 3 On the Options Bar.Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. 4 Move the cursor over the left vertical reference plane. and enter 100 mm for Offset. Offset two reference planes to locate the first drawer base corner 1 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. double-click Ref. 6 On the Design Bar. 5 Move the cursor over the upper horizontal reference plane. click Dimension. 7 Add a dimension referencing the left vertical reference plane and the offset plane you added. Level. and click to locate a new vertical reference plane offset 100 mm to the right. Click the lock icon as shown. click Ref Plane. click .

and then specify a point 300 mm to the right and 800 mm down for the second corner of the rectangle. 14 Select the intersection of the new offset reference planes for the first corner of the rectangle. Sketch the left drawer base 9 On the Design Bar. select Level: Ref. 13 On the Options Bar. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. Lock the dimension as shown. click Lines. as shown. 11 In the Work Plane dialog box.8 Add a dimension to the top horizontal reference plane and the offset plane below it. click . Level for Name. under Specify a new Work Plane. click Set Work Plane. 12 On the Design Bar. 10 On the Design Bar. 602 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and click OK.

click Dimension. 16 On the Design Bar. 17 Add a vertical dimension from the lower reference plane to the lower edge of the drawer base.After you complete the rectangle. Creating a Furniture Family | 603 . two lock icons display. 15 Click both of the lock icons to lock the edges of the extrusion to the reference planes. and then click the lock icon to lock the dimension.

select the horizontal reference plane second from the top. 21 Select the vertical centerline reference plane as the mirror axis. as shown below at the cursor. TIP You can select multiple elements by holding the CTRL key down. 22 On the Tools toolbar. click Modify.18 On the Design Bar. 20 On the Tools toolbar. 604 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . You can also highlight the entire line chain. 19 Select the four sketched lines. . click . A duplicate of the left drawer base is mirrored to create the right drawer base. 23 For the align-to reference. using the TAB key. click the Mirror tool.

Add a dimension from the lower reference plane to the lower edge of the drawer base. and then click the lock icon to lock the dimension. A lock icon displays. 25 Click the lock icon to lock the extrusion edge to the reference plane. ■ Creating a Furniture Family | 605 .24 Select the top horizontal line of the right drawer extrusion as shown. 26 On the Design Bar. and then click the lock icon to lock the dimension. click Dimension. 27 Add and lock the following two dimensions to the right drawer extrusion: ■ Add a dimension from the right vertical reference plane to the right edge of the drawer base.

. 32 Select the dimension referring to the drawer width on the right extrusion. Click OK. one on each extrusion that references the width of the drawer base. click Modify. select Drawer Base Width for Label. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter type. select Dimensions. 606 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 33 On the Options Bar. select <Add parameter. enter Drawer Base Width for Name. as shown.. 31 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. 34 On the Design Bar.> for Label.28 Add two final dimensions. 29 Select the dimension referring to the drawer width on the left extrusion. Under Parameter Data. Select Type. 30 On the Options Bar. For Group parameter under. select Family parameter.

Extend the drawer base extrusions up to the desktop 36 In the Project Browser. click it to lock the alignment.35 On the Design Bar. After the alignment. Creating a Furniture Family | 607 . 38 Select the lower edge of the desktop as the align-to reference. click Finish Sketch. 37 On the Tools toolbar. double-click Front. a lock icon displays. click . 39 Select the upper edge of the drawer base. under Elevations.

43 Click the Annotation Categories tab. Click Apply. enter 4000 mm for Length.40 On the Design Bar. click Family Types. 49 In the Family Types dialog box. 41 On the View toolbar. 50 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry. click the Scale control and select 1:20. click Modify. Enter 1200 mm for Height. Click OK. Notice the desk adapts to the new dimension parameters. Flex the design 46 Adjust the location of the model within the drawing area so when you open the Family Types dialog box. 48 In the Family Types dialog box. notice that annotations display in this view. and click Apply. 44 Clear Show annotation categories in this view. 47 On the Design Bar. click Visibility/Graphics. and click Apply. Enter 750 mm for Height. you can still see the model. Enter 150 mm for Thickness. enter 2000 mm for Length. 608 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Enter 100 mm for Thickness. and click Apply. However. click . 45 On the View Control Bar. and click OK. return the parameters to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. The solid geometry for the desk drawer base is now complete. 42 On the View menu. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions.

Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. 5 On the Design Bar. click . click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 4 In the Work Plane dialog box. select Reference Plane: Center (Left\Right) for Name. click Set Work Plane. double-click Right. you create the solid geometry of the desk rolltop. 6 On the Options Bar. then move the cursor up 300mm and to the left 400mm.Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry In this exercise. under Specify a new Work Plane. as shown. 2 On the Design Bar. click Lines. Create the rolltop extrusion 1 In the Project Browser. and click OK. and click to specify the upper left corner. Creating a Furniture Family | 609 . 3 On the Design Bar. 7 Sketch the rectangle beginning at the intersection of the desktop and the right reference plane. under Elevations.

and lock the alignment.8 On the Tools toolbar. then select the right parallel sketch line. 9 Select the desk top. 10 Select the right vertical edge of the desktop extrusion. Add another dimension to both horizontal sketch lines. and lock it. 610 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Dimension. and click the lock icon to lock the alignment. 12 Add one dimension referring to both vertical sketch lines. then the lower horizontal sketch line. click . and lock it. 11 On the Design Bar.

16 On the Design Bar. The rolltop extrusion outline is complete. TIP You may need to click the down arrow button. Do not be concerned with the precise dimension of the arc radius. . and then select the fillet arc tool from the menu. Creating a Furniture Family | 611 . and then move the cursor down and to the right until you create and arc similar to the image below. click Lines. the upper sketch line. 15 Select the left vertical sketch line. click Finish Sketch. click the Fillet arc tool. 14 On the Options Bar.13 On the Design Bar.

20 Select the right edge of the right drawer base. under Elevations. 18 On the Tools toolbar. 19 Select the left edge of the left drawer base. select the left edge of the rolltop. click . and click the lock icon.Align the left and right edges of the rolltop with the drawer bases 17 In the Project Browser. and click the lock icon. 612 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . select the right edge of the rolltop. double-click Front.

you may need to align and lock problematic edges that did not remain aligned. you can still see the model. click Family Types. The solid geometry of the rolltop is now complete. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. The desk should adapt to all the changes. Enter 1500 mm for Depth. 23 On the Design Bar. If not. click .21 On the View toolbar. Flex the design 22 Adjust the location of the desk model within the drawing area so when you open the Family Types dialog box. and click Apply. and click Apply. 24 In the Family Types dialog box. Creating a Furniture Family | 613 . Enter 1500 mm for Height. and click Apply. and click Apply. You can also use dimension constraints. Enter 200 mm for Thickness. enter 4000 mm for Length.

25 In the Family Types dialog box, return the parameters to their original values:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Under Dimensions, enter 2000 mm for Length. Enter 1000 mm for Depth. Enter 750 mm for Height. Enter 100 mm for Thickness. Click Apply. Click OK.

26 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry.

Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry
In this exercise, you create the solid geometry of the drawers and apply material to the desk.

Dataset
Continue using the family file from the previous exercise.

Create the desk drawer extrusions
1 On the Design Bar, click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 2 On the Design Bar, click Set Work Plane. 3 In the Work Plane dialog box, under Specify a new Work Plane, select Pick a Plane, and click OK. 4 Select the front plane of the right drawer base.

5 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Front. 6 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 7 On the Options Bar, click .

8 Sketch six drawers similar to the image below.

614 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor

NOTE The exact configuration of the rectangles representing the drawer fronts is not critical. 9 On the Design Bar, click Dimension. 10 Add a dimension between the vertical edges of the drawer base and the vertical lines of each bottom drawer. Lock each dimension as you add it. There should be four dimensions as shown.

NOTE Adding and locking these dimensions is very important. If you modify the desk length or the drawer base width, these locked dimension assure that the drawers flex as expected. If you cannot see the locks on the dimensions, zoom the view until you do.

11 On the Tools toolbar, click

.

12 On the Options Bar, select Multiple Alignment. 13 To constrain the four upper drawers, select the left vertical line on the left lowest drawer first, and then select the corresponding left vertical lines of the two drawers above it. After selecting the line of an upper drawer, click the lock that displays to lock the alignment. 14 On the Tools toolbar, click set on the left. 15 On the Tools toolbar, click , and repeat the previous step by selecting the right vertical lines of the drawer

, and repeat the previous two steps on the right set of drawers.

These steps ensure the top drawers remain aligned and flex with the constrained bottom drawer. 16 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 17 On the Design Bar, click Extrusion Properties. 18 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Constraints, enter 20mm for Extrusion End, and click OK. 19 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 20 On the View toolbar, click .

Creating a Furniture Family | 615

Apply material to the desk
21 Draw a pick box around the entire desk to select all the extrusions. 22 On the Options Bar, click . for Material.

23 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Materials and Finishes, click 24 In the Materials dialog box, click Duplicate. 25 In the New Material dialog box, enter Desk - Wood, Cherry, and click OK. 26 In the Materials dialog box, under AccuRender, click for Texture.

27 In the Material Library dialog box, navigate to AccuRender/Wood/Cherry and select Stained, Dark, Polished. 28 Click OK. 29 In the Materials dialog box, click OK. 30 In the Element Properties dialog box, click OK. 31 On the View Control Bar, click the Model Graphics Style control, and select Shading with Edges.

Flex the design
32 Adjust the location of the desk model within the drawing area so when you open the Family Types dialog box, you can still see the model. 33 On the Design Bar, click Family Types.

616 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor

34 In the Family Types dialog box, do the following:
■ ■ ■

Under Dimensions, enter 4000 mm for Length, and click Apply. Enter 1500 mm for Depth, and click Apply. Enter 200 mm for Thickness, and click Apply.

The desk should adapt to all the changes. If not, you may need to align and lock problematic edges that did not remain aligned. You can also use dimension constraints. 35 In the Family Types dialog box, return the parameters to their original values:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Under Dimensions, enter 2000 mm for Length. Enter 1000 mm for Depth. Enter 750 mm for Height. Enter 100 mm for Thickness. Click Apply. Click OK.

36 Proceed with the final exercise in this lesson, Defining New Furniture Types.

Defining New Furniture Types
In this exercise, you define new furniture types based on the rolltop desk model that you just created.

Dataset
Continue using the family file from the previous exercise.

Creating a Furniture Family | 617

Define new furniture types with various widths and depths
1 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 2 In the Family Types dialog box, under Family Types, click New. 3 In the Name dialog box, enter Rolltop Desk 2000 x 1000mm for Name, and click OK. 4 In the Family Types dialog box, verify that Length is 2000 mm and Depth is 1000 mm, and click Apply. 5 Under Family Types, click New. 6 In the Name dialog box, enter Rolltop Desk 2100 x 1100mm for Name, and click OK. 7 In the Family Types dialog box, enter 2100 mm for Length and 1100 mm for Depth, and click Apply. 8 Under Family Types, click New. 9 In the Name dialog box, enter Rolltop Desk 2250 x 1250mm for Name, and click OK. 10 In the Family Types dialog box, enter 2250 mm for Length and 1250 mm for Depth, click Apply, and click OK. You now have three new furniture types defined within your furniture family. 11 On the File menu, click Save. 12 Navigate to the folder of your choice and save the new furniture family project with the name, Training Furniture.rfa.

Load the new window family into a new project

13 On the Standard toolbar, click 14 On the View toolbar, click .

to start a new project based on your default template.

15 On the View Control Bar, click the Model Graphics Style control and select Shading with Edges. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Component. 17 On the Options Bar, click Load. 18 In the Open dialog box, navigate to the location of your Training Furniture.rfa file, select it, and click Open. 19 In the Type Selector, select Rolltop Desk 200 x 100mm. 20 Specify a point in the drawing area to add the first desk.

21 In the Type Selector, select Rolltop Desk 2100 x 1100mm. 22 Specify a point to the right of the first desk, and add the second desk.

618 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor

23 In the Type Selector, select Rolltop Desk 2250 x 1250mm. 24 Specify a point in the drawing area to the right of the previous two desks, and click to add the third desk.

You now have three new rolltop desks based on the new rolltop desk furniture family prototype. This completes the Creating a Furniture Family lesson.

Creating a Baluster Family
In this lesson, you create a custom baluster and apply it to a set of stair railings. Balusters are simply profile extrusions with an assigned height family parameter.

Drawing a Baluster
In this exercise, you draw a baluster with an extrusion.

Dataset
■ ■

On the File menu, click New ➤ Family. In the left pane of the New dialog box, select Training Files and navigate to the Metric ➤ Metric Families and Templates ➤ Templates folder. Select Metric Baluster.rft, and click Open.

Create a new family based on the default profile template
1 Expand the left elevation view. 2 On the View menu, click Zoom ➤ Zoom All to Fit.

Creating a Baluster Family | 619

The reference planes that display are part of the default baluster template. The bottom of the baluster is at the reference level and the baluster has an assigned default height of 750mm. Top and bottom cut angles for the baluster are also displayed.

Draw the baluster plan profile
3 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Ref. Level.

4 On the Design Bar, click Solid Form  ➤  Solid Extrusion. 5 On the Design Bar, click Set Work Plane. 6 In the Work Plane dialog box, select Ref. Level for Name, and click OK. 7 On the Design Bar, click Lines. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines and arcs, their exact location is not critical. However, the baluster profile should be centered on the vertical and horizontal reference planes. Draw your profile approximately 30mm wide by 60mm deep. 8 Draw the closed baluster plan profile as shown.

9 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 10 In the Project Browser under Elevations, double-click Front.

620 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor

By default, the extrusion has a height of 250mm. 11 On the Design Bar, click Modify and select the extrusion. 12 On the Options Bar, click .

13 Select the top reference plane and select the top edge of the extrusion. 14 Click the lock icon.

15 Save the new baluster family with the name Training Baluster.rfa. The new custom baluster is now complete.

Assigning the New Baluster to a Stair Run
In this exercise, you assign the new baluster that you just created to a stair run.

Load the new baluster family into a new project
1 On the File menu, click New ➤ Project. 2 In the New Project dialog box, click Browse, and in the left pane of the New dialog box, select Training Files. Navigate to the Metric ➤ Metric Families and Templates ➤ Templates folder. Select the DefaultMetric.rtefile, and click Open. In the New Project Dialog box, click OK.

Draw a straight stair run
3 On the Design Bar, click the Modelling tab. 4 On the Design Bar, click Stairs. 5 Draw a straight stair run as shown.

Creating a Baluster Family | 621

6 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 7 On the File menu, click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 8 In the Open dialog box, navigate to the location of your Training Baluster.rfa file, select it, and click Open. 9 On the View toolbar, click .

10 On the View menu, click Orient ➤ Southwest. 11 On the View menu, click Shading with Edges.

Apply the custom baluster to the stair run
12 On the Design Bar, click Modify and select the existing railing. 13 On the Options Bar, click .

14 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 15 In the Type Properties dialog box, click Edit for Baluster Placement. 16 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box, under Baluster Family, select Training Baluster : Training Baluster for the Regular baluster.

17 Clear Use Balusters Per Tread on Stairs. 18 Specify Start and End posts as Training Baluster. 19 Click OK. 20 In the Type Properties dialog box, click OK. 21 In the Element Properties dialog box, click OK. 22 Zoom in on the new balusters.

622 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor

The stair run is now assigned the new baluster that you created. This completes the Creating a Baluster Family lesson.

Creating Profile Families
A profile is a series of closed two-dimensional lines and arcs. Use profiles to define object cross sections such as railings, balusters, soffits, cornices, and other sweep-defined objects. Create profiles to define frequently used shapes in your details. In this lesson, you create five different profiles: a sweep, a railing, a stair nosing, a reveal, and a host sweep. You then create an in-place sweep based on a 2D path and apply the host sweep to a wall.

Drawing a Sweep Profile
In this exercise, you draw a sweep profile.

Dataset
■ ■

On the File menu, click New ➤ Family. In the left pane of the New dialog box, select Training Files and navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Templates folder. Select Metric Profile.rft, and click Open.

Create a new family based on the default profile template
1 On the Design Bar, click Lines. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines and arcs, their exact location is not critical. However, the sweep profile should begin at the reference plane intersection. 2 Starting at the reference plane intersection, draw the sweep profile with line and arc segments as shown.

3 Save the new profile family with the name Profile - Sweep.rfa. The new sweep profile is now complete.

Creating Profile Families | 623

Drawing a Rail Profile
In this exercise, you create a rail profile.

Dataset
■ ■

On the File menu, click New ➤ Family. In the left pane of the New dialog box, select Training Files and navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Templates folder. Select Metric Profile-Rail.rft, and click Open.

Create a new family based on the default rail profile template
1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, verify that Ref. Level is open. The reference planes that display are part of the default rail profile template, with the vertical reference plane labeled as the rail centerline and the horizontal reference plane labeled as the rail top. The rail height is measured from the floor elevation to the rail top.

Draw the rail profile
2 On the Design Bar, click Lines. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines and arcs, their exact location is not critical. However, the top of the rail profile should coincide with the rail top reference plane. 3 Starting at the reference plane intersection, draw the rail profile with line segments as shown.

4 Save the new profile family with the name Profile - Rail.rfa. The new rail profile is now complete.

Drawing a Stair Nosing Profile
In this exercise, you create a stair nosing profile.

624 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor

Dataset
■ ■

On the File menu, click New ➤ Family. In the left pane of the New dialog box, select Training Files and navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Templates folder. Select Metric Profile-Stair Nosing.rft, and click Open.

Create a new family based on the default stair nosing profile template
1 Notice the existing planes and text provided within the template. The reference planes that display are part of the default stair nosing profile template, with the vertical reference plane labeled as the riser face and the horizontal reference plane labeled as the tread surface. Additional text specifies the lower-left quadrant as the location for the stair nosing.

Draw the stair nosing profile
2 On the Design Bar, click Lines. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines and arcs, their exact location is not critical. However, you must draw the stair nosing in the lower-left quadrant. In addition, the top of the stair nosing profile should coincide with the tread surface reference plane and the right edge of the stair nosing profile should coincide with the riser face reference plane. 3 Starting at the reference plane intersection, draw the stair nosing profile with line and arc segments as shown.

4 Save the new profile family with the name Profile - Stair Nosing.rfa. The new stair nosing profile is now complete.

Drawing a Reveal Profile
In this exercise, you create a reveal profile. Reveal profiles are used with the Reveal tool in the project environment to define a wall cutout.

Dataset
■ ■

On the File menu, click New ➤ Family. In the left pane of the New dialog box, select Training Files and navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Templates folder. Select Metric Profile-Reveal.rft, and click Open.

Creating Profile Families | 625

Create a new family based on the default reveal profile template
1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, verify that Ref. Level is open. The reference planes that display are part of the default reveal profile template, with the vertical reference plane labeled as the wall face, and the wall body indicated to the right of the wall face reference plane. The horizontal reference plane represents the offset from floor level to the reveal.

Draw the reveal profile
2 On the Design Bar, click Lines. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines, their exact location is not critical. However, the left edge of the reveal profile must coincide with wall face reference plane and the reveal must be drawn within the wall body (to the right of the wall face reference plane). 3 Starting at the reference plane intersection, draw the reveal profile with line segments as shown.

4 Save the new profile family with the name Profile - Reveal.rfa. The new reveal profile is now complete.

Drawing a Host Sweep Profile
In this exercise, you create a host sweep profile. Host Sweep profiles are similar to reveal profiles and are used with the Host Sweep tool in the project environment to define a shape to add to a host surface, which may be any vertical surface.

Dataset
■ ■

On the File menu, click New ➤ Family. In the left pane of the New dialog box, select Training Files and navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Templates folder. Select Metric Profile-Hosted.rft, and click Open.

626 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor

Create a new family based on the default host sweep profile template
1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, verify that Ref. Level is open. The reference planes that display are part of the default host sweep profile template, with the vertical reference plane labeled as the host face and the host body indicated to the left of the host face reference plane. The reference plane intersection is the origin of the host sweep profile.

Draw the host sweep profile
2 On the Design Bar, click Lines. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines, their exact location is not critical. However, the left edge of the host sweep profile must coincide with the host face reference plane, and the host sweep profile must be drawn outside of the host body (to the right of the host face reference plane). 3 Starting at the reference plane intersection, draw the reveal profile with line and arc segments as shown.

4 Save the new profile family with the name Profile - Host Sweep.rfa. The new host sweep profile is now complete.

Applying a Sweep Profile to a 2D Path
In this exercise, you apply the sweep profile that you just created to a 2D path.

Create a new project
1 On the File menu, click New ➤ Project. 2 In the New Project dialog box, click Browse, and in the left pane of the New dialog box, select Training Files. Navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Templates folder. Select the DefaultMetric.rte file, and click Open. In the New Project Dialog box, click OK.

Creating Profile Families | 627

Specify the family category
3 On the Modelling menu, click Create. 4 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog box, select Generic Models for Family Category, and click OK. 5 In the Name dialog box, enter Sweep for Name, and click OK.

Sketch the 2D sweep path
6 On the Family tab of the Design Bar, click Solid Form  ➤  Solid Sweep. 7 On the Design Bar, click Sketch 2D Path. NOTE When you sketch the 2D path, the exact location of the path is not critical. 8 On the Design Bar, click Lines and sketch the 2D path approximately as shown.

9 On the Design Bar, click Finish Path.

Apply the sweep profile to the 2D path
10 On the Options Bar, click Load Profiles. 11 In the Open dialog box, navigate to the location of Profile - Sweep.rfa, select it, and click Open. 12 In the Type Selector, beside Load Profiles, select Profile - Sweep. 13 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sweep. 14 On the Design Bar, click Finish Family. 15 On the View toolbar, click .

Modify the sweep profile configuration
16 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Elevations, and double-click South.

628 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor

17 Zoom in on the right end of the sweep.

18 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Ref Plane. 19 Draw a vertical reference plane coincident with the left edge of the profile as shown.

20 Select the sweep profile and, on the Options Bar, click Edit. 21 Select the sweep profile again and, on the Options Bar, click 22 In the Element Properties dialog box, do the following:
■ ■ ■

.

Under Constraints, enter 600 for Vertical Profile Offset. Enter 25 degrees for Angle. Under Other, select Profile Is Flipped.

23 Click OK. 24 On the Design Bar, click Finish Family.

25 On the View toolbar, click

.

The sweep profile application is now complete.

Applying a Host Sweep Profile to Walls
In this exercise, you apply the host sweep profile that you created to a group of walls.

Create a new project
1 On the File menu, click New ➤ Project.

Creating Profile Families | 629

2 In the New Project dialog box, click Browse, and in the left pane of the New dialog box, select Training Files. Navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Templates folder. Select the DefaultMetric.rte file, and click Open. In the New Project Dialog box, click OK.

Draw a wall group
3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Wall. NOTE When you draw the walls, their exact location is not critical. 4 Draw four walls as shown.

5 On the View toolbar, click

.

6 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Host Sweep ➤ Wall Sweep. 7 On the Options Bar, verify that Horizontal is selected. 8 Select a point on the left wall for the wall sweep.

9 Select a point on the right wall for the next wall sweep.

630 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor

10 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Replace the default wall sweep with the new host wall sweep
11 On the File menu, click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 12 In the Open dialog box, navigate to the location of Profile - Host Sweep.rfa, select it, and click Open. 13 Select the wall sweep and, on the Options Bar, click 14 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 15 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, select Profile - Host Sweep : Profile - Host Sweep for Profile, and click OK. 16 In the Element Properties dialog box, click OK. 17 On the View toolbar, click . .

18 In the Dynamic View dialog box, click Spin [Shift]. 19 Move the cursor to rotate your viewpoint to view the host sweep from underneath.

The default wall sweep is replaced with your host sweep profile. This completes the Creating Profile Families lesson.

Creating a Room Tag
In this lesson, you create a room tag which displays room name, floor and ceiling finish, and area with labels added to extract project data.

Specifying Room Tag Parameters
In this exercise, you specify the room tag parameters.

Dataset
■ ■

On the File menu, click New ➤ Annotation Symbol. In the left pane of the New dialog box, select Training Files, and navigate to the Metric ➤ Metric Families and Templates ➤ Templates folder. Select M_Room Tag.rft, and click Open.

Creating a Room Tag | 631

Create a new tag based on the default room tag template
1 On the View menu, click Zoom ➤ Zoom All to Fit.

The reference planes that display are part of the default room tag template.

Edit the 3mm label
2 On the Family tab of the Design Bar, click Label. 3 On the Options Bar, click .

4 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 5 In the Type Properties dialog box, select Underline, and click OK.

Add a 2mm label
6 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 7 In the Type properties dialog box, click Duplicate. 8 In the Name dialog box, enter 2mm for Name, and click OK. 9 In the Type Properties dialog box, enter 2 for the Text Size parameter, clear Underline, and click OK. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box, click OK.

Combine labels into a room tag
11 On the Design Bar, click Label. 12 In the Type Selector, verify that Label : 3mm is displayed. 13 On the Options Bar, verify that Center and Middle are selected for Text Alignment. 14 Specify the location for the first label as shown.

15 In the Select Parameter dialog box, select Name, and click OK. 16 Zoom in on the label.

The name label is displayed with the text underlined. 17 In the Type Selector, select Label : 2mm. 18 Specify a point below the Name label for the next label location. 19 In the Select Parameter dialog box, select Floor Finish, and click OK.

632 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor

select Area. The new room tag is now ready for use.rft. The reference planes that display are part of the default generic annotation template. and click OK. click New ➤ Annotation Symbol. select Training Files. In the left pane of the New dialog box. 23 In the Select Parameter dialog box. Select Generic Annotation. you create a custom north arrow annotation symbol and place it in a new project. and click Open. 21 In the Select Parameter dialog box. Notes included with the template specify annotation parameters. Creating an Annotation Symbol | 633 . 22 Specify a point below the Ceiling Finish label for the last label location. and click OK.rfa. and navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Templates folder. select Ceiling Finish. notice that there is only one view available. Create a new annotation symbol based on the default generic annotation template 1 In the Project Browser. 24 Save the new room tag with the name Finish Area Tag. Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. Creating an Annotation Symbol In this lesson. This completes the Creating a Room Tag lesson.20 Specify a point below the Floor Finish label for the next label location. The Area label has a predefined value of 150 SF. Creating a Custom North Arrow Annotation Symbol In this exercise. you create a custom north arrow annotation symbol with a circle and lines.

7 Draw a horizontal line from the left side to the right side of the circle through the center point. 4 Specify the reference plane intersection for the circle center point. click Lines. click . 8 Draw a vertical line from the top to the center point of the circle. 3 On the Options Bar. 5 Drag the cursor and specify a radius of 8mm.Sketch a north arrow symbol 2 On the Design Bar. 6 On the Options Bar. click . 634 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

14 In the Object Styles dialog box. click Modify. 17 On the Design Bar. and click OK. The new north arrow annotation symbol is ready to edit. verify that Generic Annotations is selected for Subcategory of. click Modify. 16 In the Type Selector. select North Line. enter North Line for Name. click New. click Object Styles. under Modify Subcategories. 12 In the Object Styles dialog box. 10 On the Design Bar. 13 In the New Subcategory dialog box. select 3 for Line Weight. Creating an Annotation Symbol | 635 . Add an annotation objects subcategory 11 On the Settings menu. in the North Line row.9 Draw a vertical line from the center point to the bottom of the circle. and click OK. click Modify. and select the upper vertical line. Apply the new line weight to the upper vertical line 15 On the Design Bar.

click New ➤ Project. select A1 metric. This completes the Creating an Annotation Symbol lesson. 636 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . select Training Files. Navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Templates folder. 12 On the Design Bar. navigate to the location of Training North Arrow. click Browse. 2 In the New Project dialog box.rfa. 19 Save the new north arrow with the name.rte file. In the New Project Dialog box. 4 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. click Sheet.18 Select the template notes and press DELETE.rfa. and click Open. you add the new north arrow annotation symbol that you created to a project. Load the new north arrow into a new project 1 On the File menu. 5 Click OK. Creating a Titleblock Family In this lesson. The north arrow annotation symbol is now complete. 7 On the File menu. 8 In the Open dialog box. click OK. Training North Arrow. and in the left pane of the New dialog box. you create a custom titleblock sheet based on the A0 metric titleblock template. 10 In the Type Selector. 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select Training North Arrow. click Modify. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. select it. 11 Specify a point in the lower right corner of the sheet to place the symbol. click Symbol. 9 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Adding the New North Arrow to a Project In this exercise. and click Open. Select the DefaultMetric. 6 Zoom in on the lower right corner of the sheet.

Creating a Titleblock Family | 637 . In the left pane of the New dialog box. text.The titleblock has linework.rft. click . click New ➤ Titleblock. Create a new family based on the default titleblock template 1 The default titleblock template consists of 4 border lines. Drawing Linework for a Titleblock Sheet In this exercise. click Lines. and click Open. Select A0 metric. 4 Specify the upper left corner of the sheet for the first rectangle corner. graphics. You customize the titleblock with a new text style. Sketch the inside border 2 On the Design Bar. you draw all of the linework necessary to create a custom A0-size sheet. select Training Files and navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Templates folder. and then specify the lower right corner of the sheet for the second corner of the rectangle. Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. 3 On the Options Bar. and labels. and your project data. and enter -25 for Offset.

and click to draw a new vertical line. click 8 Enter 0 for Offset. 638 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 10 Draw a horizontal line 120mm below the last horizontal line as shown. click .Add vertical and horizontal lines 5 On the Options Bar. 7 On the Options Bar. 9 Draw a horizontal line 140mm below the upper inside border as shown. 11 Draw a horizontal line 120mm above the lower inside border as shown. and click . . and enter 140 for Offset. 6 Move the cursor over the right inside border line.

17 On the Options Bar. 19 Move the cursor over the fourth horizontal line. and click to draw a new horizontal line 30mm above the existing line.12 On the Design Bar. 14 Zoom in on the lower right corner of the sheet. Creating a Titleblock Family | 639 . and click to draw a new horizontal line 20mm below the existing line. 23 Move the cursor over the seventh horizontal line. press CTRL. enter 30 for Offset. 21 On the Options Bar. click Modify. and select the second and third horizontal lines. and click to draw a new horizontal line 20mm below the existing line. and enter 20 for Offset. click . 16 In the Type Selector. 13 In the Type Selector. select Title Blocks. 18 Move the cursor over the third horizontal line. 15 On the Design Bar. select Wide Lines. 24 Move the cursor over the eighth horizontal line. and click to draw a new horizontal line 20mm below the existing line. and click to draw a new horizontal line 30mm above the existing line. 22 Move the cursor over the third horizontal line. and click to draw a new horizontal line 30mm above the existing line. click Lines. 20 Move the cursor over the fifth horizontal line.

navigate to Training Files/Common. 3 Place the image in the upper right corner of the sheet as shown. and click Open. you add a company logo. text notes. 640 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 26 Zoom out to view the entire sheet. 2 In the Open dialog box. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock In this exercise. and labels to your titleblock.25 On the Design Bar. click Modify.jpg. select Company Logo. Add a company logo 1 On the File menu. click Import/Link ➤ Image. The titleblock linework is now complete.

4 Zoom in on the logo. 11 Click OK twice. enter 10mm Bold for Name. 7 In the Element Properties dialog box. in the text box. click . 14 Click outside of the text box to complete the text. 13 Enter Arch Design Inc. 10 In the Type Properties dialog box. Creating a Titleblock Family | 641 . Create a new 10mm text style 5 On the Design Bar. and select Bold. click Edit/New. click Duplicate. under Text. Add company name text 12 Draw a text box under the first horizontal line as shown. 9 In the Name dialog box. 8 In the Type Properties dialog box. enter 10 for Text Size. and click OK. click Text. 6 On the Options Bar.

and phone number text 20 On the Design Bar. 16 Draw a text box below the initial text. 17 On the Design Bar. and enter the following text: ■ ■ ■ ■ Consultant: Address: Address: Telephone: 642 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 18 Select the drag handle. address. and add an address and phone number as shown.Add company address and phone number text 15 In the Type Selector. click Text. 21 Draw a text box below the second horizontal line. and select the last text note. 19 Click outside the text box to complete the modification. select Text : 8mm. and drag the text note down as shown. Add consultant name. Press ENTER to add each new line of text and click outside of the text box to complete the text. click Modify.

click . Creating a Titleblock Family | 643 . 26 Move the cursor down 120mm and click to specify the first copied text note position. click Modify. 23 On the Edit toolbar. 24 On the Options Bar. and select the consultant text note. 25 Click inside the Consultant text group. select Constrain and Multiple.22 On the Design Bar.

27 Move the cursor down another 120mm and click to specify the second copied text note location. 644 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

and enter Drawn By:. 32 In the Name dialog box. 30 In the Element Properties dialog box. Add drawing data text 35 In the Type Selector. enter 5mm for Name. and enter Date:. 36 Draw a text box in the lower right space of the titleblock. select Project Issue Date. and enter Sheet Number:. 38 Draw a text box in the next space up. click Text. select Right and Bottom for Text Alignment. 31 In the Type Properties dialog box. and enter Checked By:. and click to specify the label location. and click OK. click Edit/New. under Text. enter 5 for Text Size. Creating a Titleblock Family | 645 . Add drawing data labels 40 On the Design Bar. 43 In the Select Parameter dialog box. 34 Click OK twice. 42 Place the cursor at the lower right corner of the Date field. select Text : 5mm. and click OK. click Label. 41 On the Options Bar.Create a new 5mm text style 28 On the Design Bar. The label displays a default value wrapped to 3 lines. 37 Draw a text box in the next space up. 33 In the Type Properties dialog box. click Duplicate. 39 Draw a text box in the next space up. 29 On the Options Bar. click .

and click to specify the label location. 45 Place the cursor at the lower right corner of the Drawn By field. NOTE Move the label if necessary to line up properly with the existing text.44 Select the left drag handle on the label. 48 In the Select Parameter dialog box. select Drawn By. select Checked By and click OK. 46 In the Select Parameter dialog box. and click OK. 47 Place the cursor at the lower right corner of the Checked By field. and drag to the left until the label displays on one line. 646 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . NOTE Move the label if necessary to line up properly with the existing text. and click to specify the label location.

Add sheet number and project data labels 56 In the Type Selector. 59 On the Options Bar. and click OK. Create a new 15mm label style 49 On the Design Bar. 57 Place the cursor at the lower right corner of the Sheet Number field. enter 15mm Label for Name. and drag to the left until the label displays on one line. and click OK. 61 In the Select Parameter dialog box. Creating a Titleblock Family | 647 . click Label. under Text. click Center and Middle. enter 15 for Text Size. click Edit/New. 62 Select the left drag handle on the label. select Label : 15mm Label.NOTE Move the label if necessary to line up properly with the existing text. 51 In the Element Properties dialog box. 58 In the Select Parameter dialog box. select Project Number. click . 53 In the Name dialog box. and click to specify the label location. and click to specify the label location. 54 In the Type Properties dialog box. 60 Place the cursor near the center of the field above the Date field. 50 On the Options Bar. and click OK. select Sheet Number. 52 In the Type Properties dialog box. click Duplicate. 55 Click OK twice.

63 Place the cursor near the center of the field above the Project Number field. 66 Place the cursor near the center of the field above the Project Name field. 73 In the Name dialog box. click Edit/New. and click OK. select Client Name. 75 Click OK twice. Create a 4mm label style 69 On the Design Bar. 68 Select the left drag handle on the label. 64 In the Select Parameter dialog box. 74 In the Type Properties dialog box. click Label. 70 On the Options Bar. under Text. 648 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . enter 4mm Label. select Project Name. click . and click OK. and drag to the left until the label displays on one line. enter 4 for Text Size. and click to specify the label location. 72 In the Type Properties dialog box. 71 In the Element Properties dialog box. 67 In the Select Parameter dialog box. click Duplicate. and click to specify the label location. and click OK. 65 Select the left drag handle on the label. and drag to the left until the label displays on one line.

click Modify.rfa file. select Training Files. 80 On the Design Bar. 7 Click OK. click New ➤ Project. 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and in the left pane of the New dialog box. and click Open. The titleblock graphics. 4 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. and click to specify the label location. click OK. 2 In the New Project dialog box. you add the titleblock that you created to a new project. 77 On the Options Bar. In the New Project Dialog box. 79 In the Select Parameter dialog box. Creating a Titleblock Family | 649 . and click OK. 6 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. Select the DefaultMetric. navigate to the location of Training A0Horizontal Titleblock. click Load. click Browse.rte file. select 4mm Label. select it. Navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Templates folder. Load the new titleblock family into a new project 1 On the File menu. click Left and Middle. Adding the Titleblock to a New Project In this exercise. click Sheet. and labels are now complete. 81 Save the new titleblock family with the name Training A0Horizontal Titleblock. select Training A0Horizontal Titleblock. text. and click Open. select File Path.rfa. and then adjust the width of the File Path field so that it is approximately equal to the width of the Sheet Number field. 5 In the Open dialog box.Add Project Path label 76 In the Type Selector. 78 Place the cursor in the border area below the left side of the Sheet Number field.

12 On the Settings menu. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter January 1. 13 In the Type Properties dialog box. 9 On the Options Bar. 650 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 10 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Modify and select the titleblock. and add a dome roof and a concave floor with revolved forms as in-place families.Modify titleblock properties 8 On the Design Bar. You create an in-place family in your current project rather than in the Family Editor. and click OK. In-place families interact with the building model according to their assigned family category. This completes the Creating a Titleblock Family lesson. 14 Click OK. Enter 2005-01 for Project Number. 2005 for Project Issue Date. Enter Office Building for Project Name. Enter Jane Smith for Client Name. under Other. Creating In-Place Families In this lesson. click . enter Name for Drawn By. you start with an incomplete building information model of the Pantheon. 11 Zoom in on the lower right corner of the sheet. click Project Information. Enter In Progress for Project Status.

Set the Length units to millimeters. and double-click South. Creating the Dome Roof In-Place Family In this exercise.NOTE This project was created using an imperial template and components.rvt. and click Open. click Project Units. click Open. you create the dome roof with a revolved form. format the Area to use 2 decimal places. Sketch the roof cross-section with a closed profile in an elevation view. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. click Orient ➤ Southeast. on the Settings menu. and set the suffix to None. Select c_Pantheon. Creating In-Place Families | 651 . expand Views (all). Open the existing Pantheon building model 1 On the View menu. set the Area to Square meters. you add a dome roof with oculus (circular opening) to the Pantheon building model. Next. 2 In the Project Browser. select Training Files and navigate to the Common folder. expand Elevations. To change the units of measurement to meters.

The center wall section view is displayed. enter Dome for Name. click Axis. click Set Work Plane. click . 8 In the Work Plane dialog box. 4 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog box. Draw the axis of rotation for the dome roof revolved form 11 On the Design Bar.Specify the Roofs family category 3 On the Modelling menu. 9 Select the Center East/West reference plane as shown. click Solid Form  ➤  Solid Revolve. 5 In the Name dialog box. and click OK. 10 In the Go To View dialog box. 13 Specify the bottom endpoint of the Center East/West reference plane for the start point of the axis. 7 On the Design Bar. and click Open View. select Pick a Plane. Specify the dome roof revolved form parameters 6 On the Design Bar. click Create. and then specify the top endpoint of the reference plane for the endpoint of the axis.Center. 652 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and click OK. select Section: Wall Section . select Roofs for Family Category. and click OK. 12 On the Options Bar.

Creating In-Place Families | 653 . 16 Specify the intersection of the Upper Cornice horizontal reference plane and vertical axis as the circle center point. click Lines. 15 On the Options Bar. until it creates an intersection with the level 1 reference plane.Draw the lower face of the dome roof 14 On the Design Bar. 17 Move the cursor out. click .

20 Specify the reference plane intersection for the start point of the rim profile as shown. 19 On the Options Bar. 21 Snap to reference plane intersections. Draw the oculus rim profile 18 Zoom in on the top of the circle. and draw the five rim profile line segments in the shape of a reverse C as shown. click . 654 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . The reference planes that display are guides for drawing the oculus rim profile.The circle is tangent to the interior wall face and the level 1 reference plane at the floor line. and select Chain.

28 Specify the endpoint of the upper left rim profile line segment as the arc start point. The circle is trimmed between the rim profile and the first split point. 25 Select the intersection of the circle and the lower left vertical line of the profile as shown. 27 On the Options Bar. click Lines. select Delete Inner Segment. 23 On the Options Bar. Draw the upper face of the dome roof 26 On the Design Bar. Creating In-Place Families | 655 . click . click .Split the circle 22 On the Tools toolbar. 24 Select a point on the circle to the right of the rim profile.

click and select Chain.29 Specify the top of the stairs in the wall section as the arc endpoint. Draw two lines to close the dome roof profile 31 On the Design Bar. click Lines. and then draw a vertical line down the interior wall face to the lower dome roof face tangent point. 656 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 30 Specify a point on the arc approximately as shown. 32 On the Options Bar. 33 Draw a horizontal line from the arc endpoint to the interior edge of the wall.

42 On the View toolbar. Creating In-Place Families | 657 . 39 In the Element Properties dialog box. click for Material. Specify lightweight concrete for the dome roof material 36 On the Design Bar. select Concrete .Cast-in-Place Lightweight Concrete for Name. 41 On the Design Bar. and click OK. click . and then select a point on the arc above the tangent point as the segment to keep. The dome roof closed profile is now complete. The dome roof in-place family is now complete. 35 Select the interior face of the wall. 37 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Revolution Properties.Trim the arc below the tangent point 34 On the Tools toolbar. click . click Finish Sketch. under Materials and Finishes. click OK. 40 On the Design Bar. 38 In the Materials dialog box. click Finish Family.

4 In the Project Browser under Elevations. click Solid Form  ➤  Solid Revolve. click . and click OK. click Create. select Section: Wall Section . 5 On the Design Bar. Specify the concave floor revolved form parameters 1 On the Modelling menu. 2 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog box. and click OK. 7 In the Work Plane dialog box. double-click South. Draw the axis of rotation for the floor revolved form 10 On the Design Bar. 3 In the Name dialog box. enter Concave Floor for Name. and click Open View. 9 In the Go To View dialog box. 8 Select the Center East/West reference plane as shown. 6 On the Design Bar. 11 On the Options Bar. you create the concave floor slab for the Pantheon building model. 658 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . select Floors for Family Category. select Pick a Plane.Creating the Concave Floor In-Place Family In this exercise. click Axis. and click OK.Center. click Set Work Plane.

click Lines. 14 On the Options Bar. and specify the next point for the floor profile as shown.O. 15 Specify the intersection of the T. 16 Drag the cursor up 800 mm. NOTE You may need to zoom in closer to the intersection to select the first point. and select Chain. Draw the concave floor profile 13 On the Design Bar. Creating In-Place Families | 659 . for the start point of the floor profile as shown.12 Specify the bottom endpoint of the Center East/West reference plane for the start point of the axis. 17 Specify the intersection of the level 1 reference plane and the interior wall edge for the next point of the floor profile as shown. Footing level line and the axis. click . and then specify the top endpoint of the reference plane for the endpoint of the axis.

22 In the Materials dialog box. click OK. double-click 3D Section View. click Finish Family. click Finish Sketch. The concave floor closed profile is now complete. Footing level line and the axis for the last point of the floor profile. and click OK.18 Specify the intersection of the T. This completes the Creating In-Place Families lesson. 23 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Revolution Properties.O. select Cobblestone for Name. Footing level line and the interior wall edge for the next point of the floor profile. click for Material. 24 On the Design Bar. 19 Specify the intersection of the of the T. 21 In the Element Properties dialog box. 25 On the Design Bar.O. 26 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. Specify cobblestone for the concave floor material 20 On the Design Bar. 660 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

you create a new parametric component within the Family Editor. you learn specific techniques and best practices that you can apply broadly when creating other families in Autodesk Revit Building. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you the proper approach to parametric component creation. 661 . In this case. and detail level controls. not specifically how to make a floor truss. In exercises that become increasingly complex. In the center of the truss is a mechanical service clearance to accommodate HVAC systems. The truss also has multiple types. During this tutorial. formula-based parameters.Parametric Component Design Techniques 20 In this tutorial. you will understand the process. methodology. At the end of this tutorial. assigned subcatecories. The parametric component that you design in this tutorial is an open-joist wood floor truss. and the specific techniques for creating a parametric component. the length of the trimmable truss determines the size and grade of the truss chords. This type of component uses a broad spectrum of design techniques within the Family Editor. you learn the process and methodology of creating a new family.

In this case. this must be a structural beam component. 2 What additional design requirements affect the design plan for this beam family? ■ ■ ■ The truss should automatically adjust depth as the length changes. If the component did not have to interact so closely with other structural components. you determine the requirements of the new component. Determining Component Needs In this exercise. a 2x3 truss and a 2x4 truss. Using the new family within a project 3 How will you use the family within a project? 662 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . there is a computing performance cost that must be paid within the project. imagine that your firm specializes in light commercial and residential design. It should also be an available option within a beam system. it is an open-joist wood floor truss. A rectangular mechanical clearance opening must be centered within the beam. and structural walls. Decide component type and design requirements 1 What type of component are you designing? In this case. Knowing why you are creating a particular family and what you need it to do will drive the specific design process. you select the best available template with which to begin the new structural beam family. you accomplish two main tasks: you determine the component needs and select the family template that is suited to those needs.Planning a Parametric Component Family Creating a new parametric component family is no different than any other design process. Your assignment is to create a truss that adapts parametrically to changes in the building design. For training purposes. The design requirements dictate how simple or complex a family must be. For every complexity added to a family. then you should design only what is needed to satisfy the requirements. Take this into consideration during your design planning. the design spec requires that the floor truss snaps to columns. beams. NOTE When creating a new family. In this lesson. planning ahead is one of the most important steps. In addition. the component should use the point-to-point insertion method with the joist web members adjusting parametrically. you should avoid over-designing the component. Because this component has to interact closely with other structural components. Two types should be created. If the design requirements can be met with a simple design. This decision dictates which family template you begin with. a generic floor-based component might work. Although this solution is possible. and also works intuitively with them. the beam design must be advanced in order to have the flexibility that the specs require. In this case. it is not the best solution. In the next exercise.

■ What materials need the most control? These materials. only the 2x3 and 2x4 trusses with wood web members are required. Depending on the family you are designing. What materials remain constant throughout a project? The chord and web material will always be wood. the means in which to gather the information you require within the schedule needs to be built into the component. Selecting the Family Template In this exercise. you determine which family template provides the best starting point for the new beam family. the planning stage and questions may differ. especially if you are going to be nesting subcomponents that may require separate scheduling. In addition. such as wood type. What types are most commonly used? In this training case. 4 Continue with the next exercise. Selecting the Family Template. This critical decision reduces the quantity of template options. would require Instance or Type parameters. you determined that the component type is a structural beam. ■ ■ ■ You have completed the planning stage for the new family. Planning a Parametric Component Family | 663 . How will the component need to be scheduled? This is an important question. These materiails can be applied using Object Styles. In the previous exercise.

it is not the best starting point for the beam family. These planes are designed specifically to accommodate point-to-point beam insertion and the special snapping and display requirements of beam components. If you are not in this folder. navigate to it. 2 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. scroll through the various template options.Beams and Braces.rft. the template name often includes information how the component would be used with a project. There are two structural framing templates provided.Beams and Braces. For training purposes.rft This template is designed for complex framing components and trusses.Complex and Trusses. notice the preview.Review the template options 1 Close any open projects or families. scroll to the structural framing templates. do not open this template. and display functions required by structural beams.rft This template is design specifically to accommodate point-to-point insertion and the specific snapping. NOTE Do not double-click the template or open it. 4 In the New dialog box. 664 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . select Metric Generic Model floor based. Although the template name suggests this is the appropriate template. for example: wall based or floor based. 7 Select Metric Structural Framing . and notice the preview. Like most generic family templates. In addition. Because of its simplicity. 5 In the New dialog box. 6 Select Metric Structural Framing . On the right side of the New dialog box. ■ Metric Structural Framing . You should be in the Metric Templates folder. spacing. Select it so that the preview displays. it provides two intersecting reference planes: Center (left/right) and Center (front/back). NOTE Although this is the template you use to start the tutorial. This template is the best starting point for the new family. ■ Metric Structural Framing .rft and notice the preview. The New dialog box opens to the templates folder that is specified in your Settings ➤ Options dialog box.rft. Notice this template offers three horizontal planes on each side of the center (left/right) reference plane. It provides two intersecting reference planes: Center (left/right) and Center (front/back). this template resides within the training folders and should be opened from there. it is not designed to create a component capable of point-to-point insertion. Notice that most of the template names include the component type. 3 In the New dialog box.Complex and Trusses.

Level In this view. lines. Creating the Component Skeleton.Beams and Braces. Dimensioning the solid geometry directly also works. Floor Plan: Ref. Therefore. 9 Open Metric Structural Framing . NOTE When creating or modifying a family.Open the family template 8 In the left pane of the New dialog box. double-click View 1. As you add solid geometry later in the tutorial. the top of the beam extrusion is aligned to the associated level of the plan view. under Elevations. Notice that the beam extrusion is centered on the level line. under 3D Views. you add the reference planes. and dimensions that provide a skeleton for the solid geometry. double-click Front. click the Training Files icon. This beam extrusion is supplied within the template as a starting point. creating a skeleton to build upon is the foundation of a new component family. the geometry supplied can be used or discarded as needed. Level. Floor Plan: Ref. it is not necessary to create a skeleton of reference planes or lines and then align and lock the solid geometry to it. When a beam family based on this template is added to a project. 12 In the Project Browser. Creating the Component Skeleton | 665 . Creating the Component Skeleton In this lesson. you snap and lock the solid geometry to these reference planes and lines. 10 Maximize the view. however. Like many templates. 13 Proceed to the next lesson. 11 In the Project Browser.rft located in the Metric  ➤ Metric Families and Templates ➤ Templates ➤  folder. using reference planes and lines is considered more reliable and is therefore a best practice. you can see the rectangular beam extrusion and a symbolic line.

In the project plan view image below. you add reference planes to the beam design. The six reference planes shown in the project below were added as a training reference. 2 Place the cursor over the leftmost vertical reference plane until the tooltip displays the name of the plane. under Floor Plans. double-click Ref. ■ Left and Right: These two planes mark the points where the beam intersects with other columns. TIP The name also displays on the Status Bar. notice the location of the beam extents. Reference Plane: Left. they do not display when the family is loaded into a project. Review existing reference planes 1 In the Project Browser. In the image below. two steel columns and a steel beam have been added to a project. Reference planes that display within a family file do not display within a project. Level. The reference planes and their respective explanations are listed below. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you started in the previous exercise. 3 Repeat this step for the other two vertical planes on the left side. The reference planes in this template are designed to accommodate the point-to-point insertion of a beam component. 666 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . NOTE The reference planes shown in the project image below were added as a training reference. ■ Member Left and Member Right: These two planes refer to the left and right extent of the beam solid geometry when displayed in a medium or fine display view of a project. The two arrows point to the snap points that the left and right reference planes refer to. These reference planes act as part of the skeleton to which the solid geometry will align and lock.Adding Reference Planes In this exercise.

■ Stick Symbol Left and Stick Symbol Right: These two planes refer to the extents of the stick symbol when it is loaded into a project and the plan view display setting is coarse. Add new reference planes 6 On the Design Bar. click Ref Plane. Delete existing solid geometry 4 Select the rectangular beam extrusion. NOTE Be careful not to select the symbolic line. you add the solid geometry for the truss as a sweep. it is important to be familiar with the template so you do not create duplicate or conflicting planes. 5 On the Edit Toolbar. In a later exercise. Before adding new reference planes. Creating the Component Skeleton | 667 . Each family template has a different set of reference planes established within it. click . 7 Add a reference plane approximately 50 mm above the horizontal reference plane: Center (Front/Back).

668 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . 12 Add a reference plane approximately 150 mm above the Level: Ref.8 Add a reference plane approximately 50 mm below the horizontal reference plane: Center (Front/Back). select the lower horizontal reference plane. under Elevations. click Ref Plane. planes to control beam depth 9 In the Project Browser. TIP You can also use the mirror tool to accomplish this task. and select the Level: Ref. click on the Edit toolbar. To do this. Level as the mirror axis. Level. Add ref. double-click Front. 11 Add a reference plane approximately 150 mm below the Level: Ref. 10 On the Design Bar. You will use these two reference planes to control the beam width and keep it centered on the reference plane: Center (Front/Back). Level.

click Ref Plane. and when a copy of the reference plane displays to the right of it. This beam requires additional reference planes to complete the truss skeleton. 16 Place the cursor over the lower horizontal reference plane and when a copy of the reference plane displays above it. click to place it as shown. When a copy of the reference plane displays below it. and specify an Offset of 38 mm. Creating the Component Skeleton | 669 . click to place it as shown. 18 Place the cursor over Reference Plane: Member Right. and when a copy of the reference plane displays to the left of it. 15 Place the cursor over the top horizontal reference plane. click .These two reference planes mark the top and bottom extents of the beam. click to place it. TIP You can control the direction of the offset by moving the cursor slightly to either side of the line you intend to pick. click to place it as shown. 14 On the Options Bar. 13 On the Design Bar. The next four reference planes that you add mark the thickness of the truss chords. 17 Place the cursor over Reference Plane: Member Left.

670 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . and when a copy of the reference plane displays to the right of it. specify an Offset of 200 mm. 20 Place the cursor over Reference Plane: Center (Left/Right). 19 On the Options Bar. and when a copy of the reference plane displays to the left of it. you must add four additional reference planes to accommodate the center chase. cleaning up some of the extents would make the view easier. 21 Place the cursor over Reference Plane: Center (Left/Right). 22 On the Options Bar. 23 Use the Reference Plane: Center (Left/Right) to add reference planes to the left and right of it as shown below. double-click Ref. Although there is nothing technically incorrect regarding the reference planes in this view. Notice the reference planes that you added in the elevation view. Before you move on to the next exercise.You have completed the reference planes that make up the skeleton of the chords. Level. specify an Offset of 238 mm. which you do in the next exercise. click to place it as shown. under Floor Plans. click to place it as shown. 24 In the Project Browser.

25 On the Design Bar. Creating the Component Skeleton | 671 . Dimension chord width 1 On the Design Bar. click Modify.rfa. click Dimension. Adding Dimensions and Constraints. 3 Select each of the horizontal reference planes and place the dimension to the left as shown. After adding the dimension. separate the overriding values by dragging the value controls as shown. Make sure you remember where you saved it. NOTE You use this family for the remainder of this tutorial. navigate to the folder of your choice. and click Save. 28 In the Save As dialog box. TIP You may need to adjust your zoom settings during this procedure. you can make sure the new family adapts to changes in geometry as expected before adding solid geometry to it. By applying dimensions and constraints directly to the skeleton of the family. This tool is the aligned dimension tool. enter Wood Floor Truss for File name. 27 Click File menu ➤ Save. Dataset Continue to use the dataset. Adding Dimensions and Constraints In this exercise. It allows you to dimension between parallel lines. 29 Proceed to the next exercise. click . you add some of the dimensions and constraints that control how the open web floor truss adapts to changes in its geometry. that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. 2 On the Options Bar. Wood Floor Truss.

672 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . 10 Select the upper horizontal reference plane. NOTE The center horizontal reference plane overlaps the level line: Ref. You may need to use the TAB key to toggle the selection to the reference plane. and the lower horizontal reference plane. place the dimension to the left as shown.4 On the Design Bar. 9 On the Design Bar. Level. 6 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. click Modify. under Elevations. and click the EQ symbol when it displays. double-click Front. 5 Select the dimension you added in the previous step. the Center reference plane. Add the depth dimension and equality constraint 8 In the Project Browser. 7 Add a dimension referring to the upper horizontal reference plane and the lower horizontal reference plane. Place the dimension as shown. and click the EQ symbol to apply the equality constraint. This ensures that changes to the chord width are distributed equally across the center reference plane. click Dimension.

11 Add a dimension referring to the upper horizontal reference plane and the lower horizontal reference plane and move it to the left of the equality constrained dimension you added previously. Dimension chord thickness 14 On the right side of the model. Dimension and constrain the center chase width 12 Add a dimension referring to the three vertical reference planes in the center of the model. These dimensions refer to the chord thickness. and place it below the dimension you added previously. add two dimensions as shown. place the dimension under the lines as shown and click the EQ symbol to apply the equality constraint. Creating the Component Skeleton | 673 . 13 Add a dimension referring to the reference planes to the left and right of the Center (Left/Right) reference plane.

16 Click File menu ➤ Save. When you label a dimension in the Family Editor. Throughout the tutorial. and constraints as needed. it is important to decide how much control over the component will be required after the component is loaded into a project. you label the dimensions that you added in the previous exercise. If the component is something that is cut or otherwise extremely flexible. The parameters that you create when designing a family are the same parameters used within a project to control the instance and type parameters of that family. you label the dimensions to create instance and type parameters. under Floor Plans. that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. double-click Ref. Creating New Length Parameters In this exercise. If the component has material that varies per component. consider making it a type parameter. they allow you to “flex” the model in order to test your design. 17 Proceed to the next exercise. When you design a new family. Level. These dimensions refer to the chord thickness of the vertical members and the members that border the center chase.rfa. you create new length parameters that control the basic dimensions of the floor truss. consider making it an instance parameter. Things to consider when deciding “instance” or “type:” ■ ■ If the component comes in standard sizes that must be maintained. In this exercise. There are many types of parameters and various ways to create them. consider making the material parameter an instance parameter. In the next exercise. you will add additional reference planes. These parameters are the key to providing flexibility within a project. You should lean towards simplicity whenever possible. You have finished adding the dimensions and constraints that control how the truss skeleton adapts to changes. consider making it a type parameter. ■ ■ Dataset Continue to use the dataset. Wood Floor Truss. You choose whether to make it an instance or type parameter.15 Add four dimensions as shown. If the parameter controls something that usually remains constant by its nature. it becomes a parameter. Creating New Length Parameters. 674 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . dimensions. In addition. Create the chord width parameter 1 In the Project Browser.

3 On the Options Bar. Select Dimensions for Group parameter under. enter Chord Width for Name. 8 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. Select Type. select Add parameter for Label. enter Depth for Name. double-click Front. select Add parameter for Label. under Elevations. Under Parameter Data. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Type. 7 On the Options Bar. ■ Create truss depth parameter 5 In the Project Browser. Select Dimensions for Group parameter under.2 Select the dimension that refers to the width of the chord as shown. select Family parameter. Click OK. 6 Select the dimension on the left that refers to the depth of the truss. Creating the Component Skeleton | 675 . Select Type. select Family parameter. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Type. Click OK. This indicates whether the parameter is a type or instance parameter. Under Parameter Data.

Create center chase width parameter 9 Select the dimension that refers to the width of the center chase interior. Under Parameter Data. Under Parameter Data. Select Dimensions for Group parameter under. select Family parameter. enter Chord Thickness for Name. Select Dimensions for Group parameter under. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Type. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Type. select Add parameter for Label. select Family parameter. Click OK. Select Type. 14 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. Select Type. select Add parameter for Label. 10 On the Options Bar. enter Center Chase Width for Name. 676 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . 11 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. select the dimension that refers to the thickness of the lower horizontal truss chord as shown. Click OK. 13 On the Options Bar. Create chord thickness parameter 12 On the right side of the model.

17 Apply the Chord Thickness label to the vertical chords and the vertical members on the left and right side of the center chase as shown.TIP You may need to drag the text label downward as shown. Creating the Component Skeleton | 677 . Apply chord thickness label to other dimensions 15 On the right side of the model. select Chord Thickness for Label. 16 On the Options Bar. select the dimension that refers to the thickness of the upper horizontal truss chord.

you need to be able to see the model within the drawing area and also apply new values within the Family Types dialog box: ■ Maximize the Revit window and adjust the zoom settings so the model is in one corner of the drawing area. ■ 678 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . 20 On the File menu. In this exercise. Nesting a component. If you add a new material parameter. you can drag it to the opposing corner. or Reduce the Revit window and keep the model centered in the drawing area. you flex the model to test the various length parameters that you added in the previous exercise. Wood Floor Truss. Flexing the Component Model. Dataset Continue to use the dataset. click Family Types. Preparing the family for flexing 1 When flexing the model. After you verify this. When you open the Family Types dialog. you can drag it off the Revit window as shown. This is not limited to length parameters. Adding a new constraint. rather than by manually stretching or manipulating the objects within the family. You should flex the model after any major change to the design. click Save. Dimensions. you should always do it from the Family Types dialog box. notice the labelled dimensions display under the list of parameters and under the group.18 On the Design Bar. Adding or modifying a parameter. it is important to verify that the reference lines adjust to changes as constraints are maintained. When you load this family into a project. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. When you flex a family. In the Family Types dialog box. You should flex a new family after: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Adding or modifying an element. you should also test it to make sure it works as expected. When you change a parameter value and apply the change. Flexing the model means to change parameter values. this is the most accurate way of testing how the family will behave within a project. you can add the model geometry to the skeleton and be relatively certain that it will also flex as expected. that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. Flexing the Component Model One of the most important steps in the process of creating a new parametric component is the flexing of the model. these parameters will be available within the Type Properties dialog box for the beam. Adding or modifying a parameter formula. 19 Click Cancel. Even though you have yet to add any model geometry to the family. When you open the Family Types dialog box. thus forcing the model to adapt to the changes.rfa.

Adjust your display using one of the two methods before opening the Family Types dialog box. Notice the depth of the truss adapts to the change in dimension value. Level. Creating the Component Skeleton | 679 . 4 Enter 450 mm for Depth. In addition. 800 mm for Center Chase Width. click Family Types. Verifying that the entire model adapts to changes and making sure nothing “breaks” is the essence of flexing. and click Apply. 80 mm for Chord Thickness. 2 On the Design Bar. Flex the truss depth 3 In the Family Types dialog box. Also notice the equality constraint spreads the additional depth evenly above and below the Ref. enter 600 mm for Depth. notice that the reference planes marking the chord thickness adapted to the change in depth while maintaining their specified value. under Dimensions. and drag the dialog box so that you can view the model. and click Apply. Notice that the model adapts to all of the changes.

Wood Floor Truss. that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. under Elevations. Click Apply. Click OK. 680 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . Adding Solid Geometry. 2 Zoom in around the center of the truss design. 6 On the File menu. you constrain them using a combination of locked alignments and labelled dimensions. Enter 400 mm for Center Chase Width. Creating Solid Extrusions In this exercise. you should always flex the design after you add new elements or modify the existing design in any way.rfa. When working within the Family Editor. 7 Proceed to the next lesson. Dataset Continue to use the dataset. After creating the extrusions. Add chord extrusions 1 In the Project Browser. After adding the chords. click Save. Enter 38 mm for Chord Thickness. you align and lock their position. double-click Left. reset the parameters back to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter 300 mm for Depth. you load the truss into a project to verify that it works as designed. you create the top and bottom chords of the truss.Reset parameters 5 In the Family Types dialog box. Adding Solid Geometry In this lesson. After flexing the design. you add the solid geometry using extrusions for the chords and trimmable plywood ends.

click the part of the line you want to keep. 10 On the Design Bar. click Name. When using the Trim tool. NOTE A warning dialog displays notifying you that there are overlapping lines. click Lines. the lines will no longer overlap.3 On the Design Bar. and select Lock. 6 On the Options Bar. click Lines. 9 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to create the top chord sketch as shown. Notice that the sketch lines are automatically locked to the reference planes. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. click . 4 In the Work Plane dialog box. 12 Select the four reference planes that border the bottom chord as shown. and verify that Lock is selected. and click OK. Adding Solid Geometry | 681 . 5 On the Design Bar. select Reference Plane: Member Left. 8 On the Tools toolbar. click . You can ignore this warning because after you finish trimming. 7 Select the four reference planes that border the top chord as shown. click . 11 On the Options Bar.

Dataset Continue to use the dataset. 18 Proceed to the next exercise. Constrain the extrusion ends 1 In the Project Browser. Adding Constraints to the Solid Geometry In this exercise. under Elevations. 3 Select the chord extrusions. Adding Constraints to the Solid Geometry.rfa. Notice the chord extrusions and the symbolic line. click Finish Sketch. 15 On the Design Bar. that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. click Save. 16 In the Project Browser. click . double-click View 1. 17 On the File menu. under 3D Views. This makes the chord extrusions more visible within the view. you add constraints to the chord extrusions and then flex the family to verify that it works as designed. 14 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to create the bottom chord sketch as shown. double-click Front. Wood Floor Truss.13 On the Tools toolbar. The chords need to be aligned and locked to the correct reference planes in order for them to flex with changes in the geometry. 682 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . 2 Enter SD. this is the keyboard shortcut for Shading with Edges.

Add a new dimension and constraint 9 On the Design Bar. 7 In the Family Types dialog box. Click the lock symbol to lock the extrusion edge to the reference plane. This is because the length dimension references the extreme left and right reference planes.4 Drag the right arrow control to the right until it snaps to the reference plane: Member Right. 8 In the Family Types dialog box. click Dimension. Therefore. Notice that the extrusions did not move or change their length. as shown. as shown. Adding Solid Geometry | 683 . 5 Drag the left arrow control to the right until it snaps to the reference plane: Member Left. You’ll want to set up your screen so you can see the model truss while the Family Types dialog box is open. click Family Types. 10 Add a dimension between the reference plane: Left and the reference plane: Member Left as shown. click Apply. On the Design Bar. Flex the design 6 Prepare the view for flexing in the same way you did during the flexing exercise. you must add a new constraint before flexing the length. and click OK. and click Apply. not the member right or member left reference planes. Click the lock symbol to lock the extrusion edge to the reference plane. Click the lock symbol to lock the dimension value. enter 6000 for Length. enter 3000 for Length.

enter 6000 for Length. In a later exercise. and click Apply. click Family Types. Notice that the extrusions adjusted to the change in length.11 Add a dimension between the reference plane: Right and the reference plane: Member Right as shown. depth. 13 In the Family Types dialog box. In this particular case. Click the lock symbol to lock the dimension value. Therefore. Afterwards. Later in this lesson. you add the web members. flex the model once again to make sure the fix works as expected. 14 Click OK. This tells you that the constraints on the extrusion ends are working. and thickness 15 In the Project Browser. TIP If one of the extrusion ends did not adjust as expected. under 3D Views. 684 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . you need a truss long enough to add web arrays and do not need to return the truss back to its original length value. Flex the length 12 On the Design Bar. This is a two-point placement beam family that uses the member left and member right reference planes as the determining extents of this component. adding this constraint to the model has no impact on how it works within a project. use the Align tool and add the constraint. you load this family into a project to test how it works within a project environment. Flex the chord width. double-click View 1.

Dataset Continue to use the dataset. Enter 200mm for Chord Width. TIP When flexing. you add the extrusions for the truss ends and the center chase. Click Apply. that you saved at the end of the previous exercise.rfa. click Save. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter 600mm for Depth. Enter 76mm for Chord Thickness. 17 On the Design Bar. Creating Additional Solid Geometry. Creating Additional Solid Geometry In this exercise. it is important to remember the original values so you can reset them afterwards. Enter 38mm for Chord Thickness. Click Apply. Enter 89mm for Chord Width. 18 In the Family Types dialog box. click Family Types. such as doubling. try picking a method. ■ The chords should adjust to each of the new values. 19 Specify the beam values shown below: ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter 286mm for Depth. that allows you to easily return to the original values. Wood Floor Truss. 20 On the File menu. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. Therefore. and click OK.16 Enter SD for Shading with Edges. Adding Solid Geometry | 685 .

You can ignore this warning because after you finish trimming. click Lines. vertical member of the center chase as shown. double-click Ref. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. click the Hide/Isolate control. click Lines. the lines will no longer overlap. 12 Select the four reference planes that border the right. 8 On the Tools toolbar. 7 Select the four reference planes that border the left. click . under Floor Plans.Add the center chase extrusions 1 In the Project Browser. Level. 13 On the Tools toolbar. 6 On the Options Bar. vertical member of the center chase sketch as shown. 686 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . and verify that Lock is selected. This will make it easier to sketch the center chase extrusions. 2 Zoom in on the center of the truss and select the model line that represents the beam stick symbol. click . 9 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to create the left. 3 On the View Control Bar. 5 On the Design Bar. 11 On the Options Bar. and verify that Lock is selected. NOTE A warning dialog displays notifying you that there are overlapping lines. 14 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to complete the center chase sketch as shown. vertical member of the center chase as shown. Notice that the sketch lines are automatically locked to the reference planes. 10 On the Design Bar. and click Hide Object. 4 On the Design Bar. click . click .

it is considered a best practice to align and lock to reference planes. click the lock symbol to lock the alignment. under Elevations. select the reference line on the top of the lower chord as shown.15 On the Design Bar. 16 In the Project Browser. and after the alignment. 17 Zoom in on the center chase. click Align. Adding Solid Geometry | 687 . The ends of the chase extrusions must be aligned and locked to the horizontal reference planes coincident with the interior edges of the chords. click Finish Sketch. 21 Align the top edge of the chase extrusions with the reference line coincident with the lower edge of the upper chord. double-click Front. and lock the alignment as shown. 20 Click the bottom edge of one of the chase extrusions. Although you can align and lock extrusion to extrusion. You may need to press TAB to toggle the selection options. Align and lock the new extrusions 18 On the Tools menu. 19 For the align-to reference. This next process is very important.

and click OK. 27 Clean up the view by moving the dimensions off to the side as shown. reset the values as follows: ■ ■ ■ Enter 286mm for Depth. Click Apply. The truss should adapt to all the changes. 25 In the Family Types dialog box. Enter 400mm for Center Chase Width. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter 486mm for Depth. click Modify. click Family Types. If it does not. redo any problematic alignments and constraints.22 On the Design Bar. Click Apply. 29 On the Options Bar. select Add Parameter for Label. Enter 800mm for Center Chase Width. Flex the center chase 23 On the Design Bar. 24 In the Family Types dialog box. Clean up the view 26 Zoom to Fit. 688 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . This will make subsequent work much easier. Add the truss end extrusions 28 Select the Chord Thickness dimension in the lower-left corner as shown.

select Reference Plane: Member Right for Name. Select Dimensions for Group parameter under. and click OK. 38 In the Work Plane dialog box. on the lower chord. Click OK. under Dimensions. 43 Select the Center (Front/Back) reference plane twice to add a sketch line to each side as shown. Adding Solid Geometry | 689 . These two lines represent the upper and lower boundary of the sketch. select the upper horizontal reference plane. 33 On the Design Bar. 31 Select the Chord Thickness dimension in the lower-right corner of the view. under Parameter Data. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter Trimmable End Length for Name. under Elevations. Sketch the right end extrusion 35 In the Project Browser. 36 Zoom around the truss elements. 42 On the Options Bar. enter19mm for Offset. 32 On the Options Bar. and click OK. 40 On the Options Bar. click Apply. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. enter 300mm for Trimmable End Length. 37 On the Design Bar. 41 On the upper chord. click . click Family Types. and verify that Lock is selected.30 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. click Lines. 39 On the Design Bar. select Trimmable End Length for Label. double-click Right. select the lower horizontal reference plane. 34 In the Family Types dialog box. Select Instance.

double-click Left. and verify that Lock is selected. Sketch the left end extrusion 49 In the Project Browser.44 On the Tools toolbar. 690 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . 55 On the upper chord. click Finish Sketch. click Extrusion Properties. These two lines represent the upper and lower boundary of the sketch. 51 On the Design Bar. and click OK. click Lines. click . click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. verify that 300mm is specified for the Extrusion End value. click . under Constraints. 48 On the Design Bar. 54 On the Options Bar. 45 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to complete the end sketch as shown. 56 On the Options Bar. 50 Zoom around the truss elements. 52 In the Work Plane dialog box. under Elevations. enter 19mm for Offset. select the upper horizontal reference plane. on the lower chord. 53 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 46 On the Design Bar. select the lower horizontal reference plane. 57 Select the Center (Front/Back) reference plane twice to add a sketch line to each side as shown. select Reference Plane: Member Left for Name. 47 In the Element Properties dialog box.

click Extrusion Properties. NOTE This extrusion value must be negative in order to push the extrusion towards the center of the truss. 65 On the Tools menu. 59 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to complete the end sketch as shown. 60 On the Design Bar.58 On the Tools toolbar. under Elevations. double-click Front. click Finish Sketch. specify -300mm for the Extrusion End value. 61 In the Element Properties dialog box. click . and click OK. under Constraints. Adding Solid Geometry | 691 . 64 Zoom in on the left end of the truss. Add alignment constraints 63 In the Project Browser. click Align. Although the truss ends line up with the reference planes controlling the length of the trimmable ends. 62 On the Design Bar. 66 Select the Member Left reference plane as the align-to point. they are not aligned and locked to those reference planes and would not pass a flex test.

71 On the Design Bar. a lock displays on each side indicating the constraints to the reference planes. Flex the design 72 On the Design Bar. if you select the end extrusion. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter 486mm for Depth. Make adjustments to account for the right side. 69 Select the right edge of the left end extrusion.67 Select the left edge of the left end extrusion. Enter 600mm for Trimmable End Length. click Family Types. and lock the alignment. 74 In the Family Types dialog box. 73 In the Family Types dialog box. this is the align-to point. Click Apply. 68 Select the reference plane coincident with the right edge of the left end extrusion. reset the values as follows: ■ ■ ■ Enter 286mm for Depth. Enter 300mm for Trimmable End Length. TIP When you finish the alignments. under 3D Views. Click Apply. click Modify. If it does not. fix any problematic alignments and constraints. and click OK. double-click View 1. 70 Repeat the previous five steps for the right end of the truss. and lock the alignment. 692 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . 75 In the Project Browser. The truss should adapt to all the changes.

click Open. 77 Proceed to the next lesson. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. Testing the Family in a Project.rfa file located in the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Families folder. click the Training Files icon. Loading a Family into a Project In this exercise. a sill. you load the truss family into a project that consists of foundation walls. Testing the Family in a Project In this lesson. you should close the file and begin with a fresh dataset. Open the m_Wood Floor Truss_1. NOTE Close any open families or projects. and a rim joist. you add several beam instances and then modify the shape of the foundation to see how the beams adapt. you load the family into a project to test it in a real-world environment. Testing the Family in a Project | 693 . If you are comfortable with your design. The truss family that you use in this lesson is identical to the truss you have created in the previous exercises. If you have experienced any errors or have deviated from the exercises in any way. After you load it into the project. you can continue using it in the next lesson. Datasets Open the truss family ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. it is recommended that you use the new family in order to ensure consistency. A new dataset is provided for you beginning with the next lesson. It is identical to the truss you have been designing. Although you could continue using the previous family.76 Save the Family.

694 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . and then modify the project to see how the beams adapt. click Load into Projects. Testing a Family Instance in a Project. Load the truss family into the project 1 On the Window menu.Open the project file ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. a dialog box would have displayed asking for you to specify which projects you wanted to load the family into. click the Training Files icon. 3 In the Project Browser. Notice that the project file is now active.rfa. 4 Proceed to the next exercise. 2 On the Design Bar. If you had multiple projects or families open. click Open. you add several instances of the truss family to the project. Dataset Continue to use the datasets that you used in the previous exercise. Testing a Family Instance in a Project In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. The truss family is loaded directly into the only other open file. expand Families. and notice that the Wood Floor Truss_1 family has been loaded. expand Structural Framing.rvt file located in the Metric folder. Open the m_WWF1. click m_Wood Floor Truss_1.

6 In the Project Browser. NOTE Do not be concerned with the exact location of the three beams. This project consists of foundation walls. expand 3D Views. The rim joist was added as a beam. a slab. click Beam. select m_Wood Floor Truss_1. 2 In the Project Browser. expand Views. double-click 3D . 4 In the Type Selector. a wood sill. therefore. add three vertical beams that snap to the rim joist at each end. and double-click 3D . under 3D Views. Testing the Family in a Project | 695 . 5 Using point-to-point insertion. Try to make them approximately equidistant as shown. and a wood rim joist. 3 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar.Add beams to project 1 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. double-click Level 1.Southeast Isometric.Southeast Isometric. the truss family you loaded will interact with it as one beam does to another.

double-click Level 1. under Floor Plans. 9 In the Project Browser. you are merely testing the new floor truss to verify that it adapts to the changes. NOTE Make sure you drag the grid line. under 3D Views.Southeast Isometric. double-click 3D . You do not need to be precise. not the wall or rim joist.Notice the wood truss sits on top of the sill and attaches to the rim joist as expected. 7 In the Project Browser. 696 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . 8 Select Grid 2 and drag it downward until the walls form an approximate square.

In the next lesson. 12 In the Save as dialog box. 14 On the Options Bar. Working with Nested Subcomponents | 697 . 11 On the File menu. The project and family need to interact based on a consistent file name. Because the family is already open. IMPORTANT Do not change the name of the family. the wood floor truss family becomes the active view. click Yes. you nest the web components into the truss and create an array that adapts to changes in length. The center chase remained the same width while remaining centered. 15 When prompted to open the truss family for editing. click Edit Family. Edit a family from within a project 13 Select one of the wooden truss components. ■ ■ The truss ends remained constant and adapted to the new beam length. click Save as. navigate to a folder of your choice and save the project with its existing name.Notice the wood truss adjusted to the changes. 16 Proceed to the next lesson. you nest wood web members into the floor truss. Working with Nested Subcomponents. This should return the project to its original dimension. click Undo Drag. and create a formula controlled array to fill in the truss. Working with Nested Subcomponents In this lesson. 10 On the Edit menu.

This family is a single extrusion as shown. Add two wood web components 6 On the Design Bar. Leave a slight gap between the chase and the web. IMPORTANT Make sure you snap the center line of the web components to the center reference line of the truss. double-click Ref. ■ ■ In the left pane of the Open dialog box. 7 In the Type Selector. 2 In the Project Browser. You then align and lock the web extents before applying a formula-controlled array.Adding a Nested Component In this exercise. Dataset Continue to use the datasets from the previous exercise. 3 Select the symbolic line in the center of the truss. Place one wood web on each side of the center chase.rfa file located in the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Families folder. Prepare the view for nesting 1 Make sure that m_Wood Floor Truss_1. you nest two wooden web members into the truss. click Hide/Isolate. This will make aligning the wood web easier. 5 On the File menu. The geometry is driven by formula-based parameters that link to the host family. This will aid in the placement of the wood web. Level.rfa is the active file. under Floor Plans. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. Snap the center line of the web to the center reference plane of the truss. 4 On the View Control Bar. click Component. 698 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . Open the m_Wood_Web. click the Training Files icon. verify that m_Wood_Web: Wood Web is selected. The extrusion is aligned and locked to invisible model lines that make it easier to array within the truss. and click Hide Object. 8 Add two instances of the wood web component as shown.

In the following steps. Align the nested web components 12 Enter . double-click Front. select the reference plane that is coincident with the left edge of the left center chase extrusion. You will align the left web component first. they are visible only when you place the cursor over the component. Notice the model lines that surround the web component. 11 Place the cursor over the left wood web. IMPORTANT Do not lock the alignment 15 Repeat the previous two steps to align the left edge of the right web component to the right edge of the center chase as shown. click Modify. Also notice that the depth of the web members needs to be changed. 14 Select the right vertical model line of the left web component as shown. 10 In the Project Browser. 13 For the align-to point. This will be accomplished in the next exercise when you link the nested parameter with the host parameter. under Elevations. this is the keyboard shortcut for Align. Working with Nested Subcomponents | 699 .9 On the Design Bar. you align the web panel using these lines rather than the extrusion edges. Do not select it.

20 Select the center of the left web component as the align-to point. you align the reference planes to the center of the web components. it is important to note that you should avoid adding unnecessary constraints. 18 Add two reference planes as shown. 21 Select the reference plane that you added to the left of the web components center as shown. click Ref Plane. The reference plane you added in the previous step represents half the web width. click Align. 700 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . 22 Click the lock to lock the reference plane to the centerline of the web component. In addition. 16 On the Design Bar. Place each reference plane just to the outside of the center of the web components. 19 On the Tools menu. NOTE You do not have to align the top or bottom the web components because the height of the web members will adapt to the truss height after you create and link the parameters in the next exercise. Add reference planes for array anchors 17 On the Design Bar.Each of these web components represents the starting point of the web arrays that you add later in this lesson. In the steps that follow. click Modify.

Place the dimension as shown. Place the dimension as shown. click Dimension. Dimension and label array anchors 24 On the Design Bar.23 Repeat the previous two steps to align and lock the right web component and the reference plane as shown. Select the reference plane that is coincident with the left edge of the right web component and the outside edge of the center chase. 25 Add the following two dimensions: ■ ■ Select the reference plane that you aligned to the center of the left web component. ■ Working with Nested Subcomponents | 701 . ■ ■ ■ Select the reference plane that you aligned to the center of the right web component. Select the reference plane that is coincident with the right edge of the left web component and the outside edge of the center chase.

Creating Formula-controlled Parameters In this exercise. or the width of the center chase. length. under Constraints. You also add a formula to the parameter in order to maintain the web position as the truss changes depth. select WebDepth. 9 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog box. 2 In the Family Types dialog box. and click Properties. 702 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . 7 In the Element Properties dialog box. 4 In the Family Types dialog box. 8 In the Type Properties dialog box. When you refer to another parameter within a formula. In the Type Parameter dialog box. click Edit/New. 26 On the Design Bar. under Parameter Data. under Parameters. Select Type. click the button to the right of the WebHeight value. ensure you enter it exactly as it is named. click Modify. 11 In the Element Properties dialog box. 27 On the File menu. you label these dimensions. navigate to the same directory in which you saved the project file and save this family there with its current name. 28 In the Save As dialog box.In the next exercise. 29 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating Formula-controlled Parameters. You then link the nested web parameters to the new host parameters.(Chord Thickness * 2) for the WebDepth Formula. click Add. Select Common for Discipline. click Save As. and click OK. Create a new parameter for web depth 1 On the Design Bar. NOTE Formulas are case sensitive. Select Constraints for Group parameter under. 3 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. notice that “= “displays within the WebHeight button. Dataset Continue to use the datasets that you saved in the previous exercise. click OK. click OK. enter Depth . This formula ensures that the web depth will account for any changes in the chord thickness or truss depth. 5 Click OK. 10 In the Type Properties dialog box. click Modify. under Other. TIP You can expand the width of the Family Types dialog box to facilitate typing within the formula field. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter WebDepth for Name. 12 On the Design Bar. you add new parameters to control the web components. Link the nested component to the new parameter 6 Right-click the left web component. Select Length for Type. Click OK. click Family Types.

Select Instance. Create new formula-controlled parameter for center chase 13 On the Design Bar. do the following: ■ Enter CC for Name. notice the center of each nested web component is locked to the reference plane that bisects it. 16 Under Other. the resulting value is displayed as an inactive field. Create WebArrayNum formula-controlled parameter 20 In the Family Types dialog box. click Add. This parameter is primarily for convenience. The additional 300mm is to account for the ends. After you enter the formula. 19 Under Constraints. Create WebArrayLength formula-controlled parameter 17 In the Family Types dialog box. In addition. Click OK. click Family Types. 14 In the Family Types dialog box. Select Constraints for Group parameter under. Working with Nested Subcomponents | 703 . under Parameters. Select Common for Discipline. This formula subtracts the length of the center chase and its two bordering chords plus an additional 300mm before dividing it in two to specify the length of each array. Select Common for Discipline. under Parameters. under Parameter Data. Select Length for Type. 18 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. under Parameter Data. Select Instance. which must remain at least 150mm long.(CC+300))/2 for WebArrayLength Formula. click Add. Select Length for Type. enter Center Chase Width + (2*Chord Thickness) for CC Formula.Notice the web members are resized to fit more precisely between the chords. It will use a formula to add the center chase width and the thickness of the two bordering chords. under Parameters. Click OK. click Add. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter WebArrayLength for Name. 15 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. enter (Length . ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Other for Group parameter under.

click Modify. Select Instance. 704 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . enter WebArrayLength/(2*WebDepth) for WebArrayNum Formula. Select Instance. Add parameter to anchor web array 24 Select the dimension that refers to the midpoint of the left web as shown. Select Integer for Type. select Webhalflength for Label. 32 Click OK. Select Constraints for Group parameter under. 29 On the Design Bar. 22 Under Constraints. under Parameter Data.21 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. Click OK. 25 On the Options Bar. Notice the location of the web components has adapted to the formula. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter Webhalflength for Name. under Parameter Data. 27 Select the dimension that refers to the midpoint of the right web. Click OK. Select Common for Discipline. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter WebArrayNum for Name. enter (WebArrayLength/WebArrayNum)/2 for Webhalflength Formula. select Add parameter for Label. 26 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. 28 On the Options Bar. 31 Under Constraints. Add formula for Webhalflength 30 On the Design Bar. 23 Click OK. click Family Types. Select Constraints for Group parameter under.

It is especially important to flex the model before arraying the truss so that you don’t multiply any existing problems. click OK. 39 On the Design Bar. 34 In the Element Properties dialog box. Working with Nested Subcomponents | 705 . and click Properties. under Other. click the button to the right of the WebArrayLength value. The truss should adapt to all the changes. it is very important that you flex the model to ensure the nested components and the formulas that controls them work as expected. fix any problematic alignments and constraints. 40 In the Project Browser. If it does not.Associate web component parameters 33 Right-click the left web component. click Edit/New. select WebArrayLength. under 3D Views. 38 In the Element Properties dialog box. and click OK. Because you have added and constrained new components. In the Type Properties dialog box. double-click View 1. click OK. the button next to the WebArrayLength value should have an equals sign within it. click Family Types. Click Apply. click Modify. 43 In the Family Types dialog box. Enter 76mm for Chord Thickness. 37 In the Type Properties dialog box. 36 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog box. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter 686mm for Depth. Flex the design 41 Adjust the view so you can flex the truss while in the Family Types dialog box. 42 On the Design Bar. 35 In the Type Properties dialog box.

44 In the Family Types dialog box. Enter 3 for Number. and link the arrays to the WebArrayNum parameter. you array the nested web components. Creating an array requires two basic steps. 2 Select the nested web component left of the center chase. 45 On the File menu. When picking the corner. You must use precision when arraying because any error is multiplied as the array grows. 706 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . add alignment constraints. 3 On the Edit menu. Dataset Continue to use the datasets that you saved in the previous exercise. then you specify the move end point. 46 Proceed to the next exercise. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Group and Associate is selected. under Elevations. Arraying Nested Subcomponents In this exercise. and click OK. 4 On the Options Bar. 5 Select the bottom-right corner of the nested web extrusion as the move start point. Array the left web component 1 In the Project Browser. reset the values as follows: ■ ■ ■ Enter 286mm for Depth. Arraying Nested Subcomponents. use the TAB key to toggle to the endpoint of the vertical model line within the nested family. Enter 38mm for Chord Thickness. Click Apply. Select 2nd for Move to. click Array. double-click Front. Select Constrain. First. click Save. you specify the move start point.

Select Constrain. When picking the corner. click Align. place the cursor over the boundary between the two left web components until the reference highlights. click Array. 19 In the left array.6 Select the bottom-left corner of the nested web extrusion as the move end point. 8 On the Design Bar. use the TAB key to toggle to the endpoint of the vertical model line within the nested family. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Group and Associate is selected. Array the right nested web component 9 Select the nested web component right of the center chase. Align and lock the arrays 17 Zoom in on the left array of web components. click Modify. When picking the corner. Working with Nested Subcomponents | 707 . 18 On the Tools menu. 11 On the Options Bar. click Modify. When picking the corner. 12 Select the bottom-left corner of the nested web extrusion as the move start point. 13 Select the bottom-right corner of the nested web extrusion as the move end point. 16 Zoom out to view the truss. then select the line twice. use the TAB key to toggle to the endpoint of the vertical model line within the nested family. 7 Press ENTER to complete the array. Select 2nd for Move to. 15 On the Design Bar. Enter 3 for Number. 14 Press ENTER to complete the array. use the TAB key to toggle to the endpoint of the vertical model line within the nested family. 10 On the Edit menu.

26 Select the middle web component of the right array. 27 Select the array line over the web components on the right. NOTE Do not select the array value. align and lock the two right web components. If you do not lock the edges of the array. 20 Click the lock symbol to keep the web components locked at their edges. you are aligning the two bordering web components to each other. align and lock the two boundaries between the three web components. 24 Notice the array line displays above the components with the array value. Use the same techniques as you did in the previous three steps. the web components overlap each other when you change the depth of the truss. 21 Within the left array. 708 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . Label the arrays 23 Select the middle web component of the left array. click Modify. select WebArrayNum for Label. NOTE This step is very important.Because there are two overlapping lines at this location. 22 Within the right array. 30 Zoom out until you can see the entire truss. 25 On the Options Bar. Place the cursor over the array line as shown and select it. 29 On the Design Bar. 28 On the Options Bar. select WebArrayNum for Label.

Working with Nested Subcomponents | 709 . This is because earlier in the tutorial. you added a dimension to lock the Member Left and Member Right reference plane to the outer Left and Right reference planes. Member Left.Notice the arrays appear to be too long. The primary reason for this was to allow for flexing the length. You will fix this in later steps by changing the parameter value. 34 On the Tools menu. as the align-to point. 36 Select the reference plane. click Align. 31 Zoom around the left side of the truss. and lock the alignment as shown. 35 Select the reference plane. Notice the end of the array still overlaps the trimmable end. 33 Delete the dimension. Left. 32 Select the dimension between reference plane Left and Member Left as shown.

under 3D Views.NOTE With most beam families. 37 On the Design Bar. however. this solution has little. 710 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . double-click View 1. click Family Types. click Family Types. in this case. Therefore. enter 150mm for Trimmable End Length. Change trimmable end length value 42 On the Design Bar. Enter 12000mm for Length. significant impact. and click OK. 39 Delete the dimension between reference plane Right and Member Right. 47 In the Family Types dialog box. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter 686mm for Depth. 43 In the Family Types dialog box. 38 Zoom in around the right side of the truss. Notice the web arrays fit within the truss without overlapping the ends. fix any problematic alignments and constraints. 44 Click Apply. under Dimensions. and prepare the view for flexing. 40 Align and lock reference plane Right and Member Right. the wood floor truss normally sits on a sill bordering a rim joist. The truss should adapt to all the changes. you would not want to align and lock these two reference planes. Enter 900mm for Center Chase Width. 41 Zoom out until you can see the entire truss. If it does not. Click Apply. if any. 46 On the Design Bar. Flex the design 45 In the Project Browser. click Modify.

Reload the truss into the project. Reloading a Family into a Project In this exercise. Notice the project file becomes active and the beam has updated with the latest changes. and click Yes. You then increase the distance between the foundation walls to see how the truss adapts to the changes in length. and click OK.TIP When flexing a complex model such as this. Reloading a Family into a Project. 1 Verify that the truss family is active and the 3D View. Enter 400mm for Center Chase Width. these steps have been reduced. displays. Click Apply. In addition to the truss family. however. Working with Nested Subcomponents | 711 . click Load into Projects. should be open. you should flex the model in as many ways as possible to verify it is working correctly. 3 In the Reload Family dialog box. reset the values as follows: ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter 286mm for Depth. 50 Proceed to the next exercise. the project.rvt. select Override parameter values of existing types. for training and time purposes. you reload the truss family into the project. 49 On the File menu. Dataset Continue to use the datasets that you saved in the previous exercise. 2 On the Design Bar. 48 In the Family Types dialog box. click Save. You have completed the design of the primary components of the truss. View 1. m_WWF1. Enter 6000mm for Length.

712 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques .4 In the Project Browser.Southeast Isometric. 7 On the Edit menu. Applying Subcategories. double-click Level 1. 9 Proceed to the next lesson. click Undo Drag. Notice the truss has adapted to the changes. under Floor Plans. double-click 3D . 5 Drag Grid 2 downward until the shape of the building footprint is almost square. you begin with a new dataset which is identical to both of these files. Applying Subcategories. In the next lesson. You then create a parameter to specifically control material application. 8 Save and close the project file and the family file. and Parameters In this lesson. you create and apply subcategories and materials. 6 In the Project Browser. Materials. Materials. and Parameters. under 3D Views.

the material values were set to By Category by default. click Open. four instances of the floor truss were added to the other end of the structure. Applying Subcategories. Notice no material has been applied to the truss. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. You then reload the family into the project and apply a material to the subcategory. the truss was added to a beam system that occupies approximately half the building footprint.rvt file located in the Metric folder. Within the family. In addition.Creating and Applying Subcategories In this exercise. and Parameters | 713 . you create new subcategories within the truss family. Open the m_WWF2. In this dataset. Apply Object Styles 1 Zoom in around beam system. Materials. click the Training Files icon. Datasets ■ ■ ■ On the File menu.

click OK. 10 On the Options Bar. notice that the subcategories do not apply to the wood floor truss that you have designed. Notice the Wood . and click OK. 8 On the Edit menu.2 On the Settings menu. 714 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . If there was a metal beam in this building model. 3 In the Object Styles dialog box. under Modify Subcategories. 11 Click Yes to open the family for editing. click Wood . click Object Styles. it would also have the wood material applied to it. Create subcategories within the truss family 9 Select a truss that is not part of the beam system. and expand the category Structural Framing. 6 In the Materials dialog box. click in the material field until the button displays as shown. click Edit Family. 4 On the Structural Framing category line. verify that the Model Objects tab is selected. 5 Click the button that displays in the Structural Framing Material field. In addition. 7 In the Object Styles dialog box. and click OK. enter Wood Floor Truss for Name. click Object Styles. click Undo Object Styles. If you create subcategories as you design in the Family Editor.Timber for Name. 13 In the Object Styles dialog box. When you apply a material to the Structural Framing category. all subcomponents of that category are assigned that material. Notice that the Structural Framing category and all of the subcategories have no material value defined. click New. you have more control over component visibility within a project.Timber material has been applied to all Structural Framing components. 12 On the Settings menu. 14 In the New Subcategory dialog box.

enter Wood Floor Truss. and Parameters | 715 . press TAB to toggle to the web component and click to select it. click Duplicate. 16 In the Materials dialog box. Materials. and click the button to open the Materials dialog box. 17 In the New Material dialog box. and click OK. 27 On the Design Bar. select Other. under Identity Data. and click OK. select Natural. click . 23 On the Options Bar. select Wood Floor Truss for Subcategory. click . 25 On the Options Bar. 24 In the Filter dialog box. Notice the chords and end extrusions remain selected. click Modify. 19 In the Material Library dialog box. Apply the subcategory to the truss components 22 Draw a pick box around the entire truss. Yellow. and click OK. and click OK. Apply a subcategory to the nested web components 28 Place the cursor over one of the arrayed web components. Applying Subcategories. The web component family opens in a 3D view. 18 In the Materials dialog box. 29 On the Options Bar. 21 In the Object Styles dialog box. under AccuRender. click . click Edit Family. 30 Click Yes to open the family for editing.Apply material to subcategory 15 Click in the Material field for the Wood Floor Truss subcategory. click Check None. navigate to _accurender\Wood\Pine. click OK. 26 In the Element Properties dialog box.No Gloss for Name. click OK. 20 In the Materials dialog box.

rfa. 32 In the Object Styles dialog box. click Duplicate. click Object Styles. click Load into Projects. and click the button to open the Materials dialog box. click .rvt. under AccuRender. 37 In the Materials dialog box. under Identity Data. 36 In the New Material dialog box. navigate to _accurender\Wood\Pine. click New. click OK. click OK. select m_Wood Floor Truss_1. 34 Click in the Material field for the Wood Floor Truss . select Wood Floor Truss . 48 In the Load into Projects dialog box. Reload truss into project 47 On the Design Bar. click Load into Projects. select m_WWF2. 35 In the Materials dialog box. 33 In the New Subcategory dialog box. 43 In the Element Properties dialog box. Reload web component into truss family 44 On the Design Bar. and click Yes. you can apply a different material to all web components when using this truss within a project. and click OK. 38 In the Material Library dialog box. By creating a separate subcategory for the web components. and click OK. click . select Override parameter values of existing types. 40 In the Object Styles dialog box.Webs for Name. and click OK.No Gloss for Name. under Modify Subcategories.Webs for Subcategory. and click OK. 41 Select the web extrusion. 716 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . 46 In the Reload Family dialog box.31 On the Settings menu. select Natural. and click OK. 45 In the Load into Projects dialog box. Yellow. 39 In the Materials dialog box. 42 On the Options Bar. enter Wood Floor Truss .Webs. and click OK.Webs subcategory. enter Wood Floor Truss .

clear Wood Floor Truss Webs. and click OK. 50 On the Settings menu. 53 On the View menu. and click Yes. 54 In the Visibility Graphics dialog box. Creating Material Parameters In this exercise. Open truss family for editing 1 Select a truss that is not part of the beam system. 56 On the File menu. select Override parameter values of existing types. Applying Subcategories. click Object Styles. click Visibility/Graphics. 57 In the Save as dialog box. 3 Click Yes to open the family for editing. expand Structural Framing. 51 In the Object Styles dialog box. and Parameters | 717 . under Visibility. You can change the style of only the wood truss components without impacting other structural framing components. the stick symbols continue to display. Creating Material Parameters. Notice the web extrusions not longer display. Notice the two new subcategories are listed. Materials. 2 On the Options Bar. expand Structural Framing. click Edit Family. click Undo Visibility/Graphics. 55 On the Edit menu. navigate to a folder of your preference and save the project with the current name. 52 Click OK. however. Notice the new object subcategory styles are applied to the truss components. 58 Proceed to the next exercise. click Save As. you add a new material parameter that allows you to specify a material for each truss instance. under Categories. Dataset Continue to use the dataset that you saved in the previous exercise.49 In the Reload Family dialog box.

rvt. under Parameter Data. and click OK. 13 In the Element Properties dialog box. notice the default material is By Category. click OK. under Materials and Finishes. 16 Place the cursor over one of the web components. When reloaded into a project. do not assign a material to the parameter. select Override parameter values of existing types. click the Floor Truss Material field and click the button that displays. 22 On the Design Bar. In this case. click the button to the right of the WebMaterial value field. Select Material for Type. 11 In the Filter dialog box. and click OK. and click OK. 21 Click OK twice. 30 In the Element Properties dialog box. click OK. Notice the appearance of the floor trusses has not changed. Select Common for Discipline. 10 On the Options Bar. 24 In the Load into Projects dialog box. select Metal . 718 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . this component will continue to use the material assigned to the subcategory by default. Select Materials and Finishes for Group parameter under. under Materials and Finishes. 14 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog box. under Other. Notice the chords and end extrusions remain selected. Reload truss into project 23 On the Design Bar. click Family Types. click Add.Steel for Name. 15 In the Element Properties dialog box. 27 On the Options Bar. 18 In the Element Properties dialog box. 19 In the Type Properties dialog box. 25 In the Reload Family dialog box. Click OK. 8 Click OK. click Load into Projects. and select the component.Create material parameter 4 On the Design Bar. select Floor Truss Material. 5 In the Family Types dialog box. and click OK. 20 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog box. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter Floor Truss Material for Name. click the button to the right of the Material value field. click . This material parameter allows you to assign a material on an instance parameter. click . click Edit/New. and click Yes. 26 Select a floor truss that is not part of the beam system. select Structural Framing (Wood Floor Truss). 17 On the Options Bar. click . 6 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. 12 On the Options Bar. click . click Modify. Select Instance. 7 In the Family Types dialog box. 28 In the Element Properties dialog box. Link truss extrusions to material parameter 9 Draw a pick box around the entire truss. select m_WWF2. select Floor Truss Material. and click OK. click Check None. press TAB. under Parameters. 29 In the Materials dialog box.

click Close. Notice the material is applied only to the selected beam. Assigning Detail Level and View Controls In this exercise. all elements display at all times in all views. and click Coarse. Notice the rim joist no longer displays. click Open. click Save. Controlling Component Visibility In this lesson. Controlling Component Visibility | 719 . However. You can save the open files if you wish. Currently within the truss. 34 Close any open files. click Detail Level. In the left pane of the Open dialog box.rvt file located in the Metric folder. 33 On the File menu. a new dataset is supplied. Change detail levels 1 On the View Control Bar. 35 Proceed to the next lesson.31 On the Design Bar. 32 On the File menu. you designate the display of elements in specific views and at specific detail levels. Open the m_WWF3. Datasets ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. you add controls to specify the views in which each element displays and at what detail level. notice the floor truss has not changed appearance. In the next lesson. because you have yet to assign a detail level to each of the elements within the truss family. click Modify. click the Training Files icon. Controlling Component Visibility.

clear Coarse. Under Detail Levels. Assign detail level to center chase extrusions 14 Select the center chase extrusions. 15 On the Options Bar.2 Select a floor truss. select m_Wood Floor Truss_1. Clear Left/Right. Apply detail level controls to web components 5 Select a web component. clear Plan/RCP. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under View Specific Display. clear Coarse. click Visibility. Under Detail Levels. 16 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog box. click Visibility. 11 On the Design Bar. 8 Select the web extrusion. and click OK. click Load into Projects. clear Coarse. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under View Specific Display. 4 Click Yes to open the family for editing. clear Plan/RCP. and click Yes. 12 In the Load into Projects dialog box. Notice the appearance of the floor trusses has not changed. 7 Click Yes to open the family for editing. 720 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . 18 On the Options Bar. Under Detail Levels. 9 On the Options Bar. 3 On the Options Bar. clear Plan/RCP. 13 In the Reload Family dialog box. Clear Left/Right. Click OK. 6 On the Options Bar. 19 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog box. Click OK. click Edit Family. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under View Specific Display. select Override parameter values of existing types. click Edit Family. Click OK. Assign detail level to truss ends 17 Select the end extrusions.rfa. 10 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog box. click Visibility.

Assign detail level to truss chords 20 Select the truss chords. specify the following: ■ ■ Under Detail Levels. 26 On the View Control Bar. 25 In the Reload Family dialog box. clear Coarse. 24 In the Load into Projects dialog box. 21 On the Options Bar. click Detail Level. double-click Level 1. Notice that the floor truss solid geometry is not displayed. and click Yes. Reload truss into project 23 On the Design Bar. Click OK. select m_WWF3. 22 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog box. click Load into Projects. Notice the floor truss solid geometry is displayed. select Override parameter values of existing types. Controlling Component Visibility | 721 . click Detail Level. Notice the symbolic representation of the beams. under Floor Plans.rvt. 27 In the Project Browser. and click Medium. and click OK. and click Coarse. click Visibility. 28 On the View Control Bar.

click Save As. and click Apply. click Edit Family. Although you can change the parameters of a truss within a project. you create a conditional formula that adjusts the truss depth based on the truss length. 6 In the New dialog box. 10 Select 89x38 for Name. 31 Proceed to the next lesson. The truss returns to its original designed value. 8 In the New dialog box. 3 Click Yes to open the family for editing. create types for those most frequently used in your projects. In the final exercise. 5 In the Family Types dialog box. creating predefined types can speed up the design process. click New. navigate to your preferred location and save the project with the current name. enter 64mm for Chord Width. TIP You can also use new types to flex the model. NOTE When creating new components. and click Apply. Creating Component Types. click Family Types. under Family Types. and click OK. Creating Component Types In this lesson. 2 On the Options Bar. 722 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . and click OK. Creating Multiple Component Types In this exercise. 9 In the Family Types dialog box.29 On the File menu. you create multiple floor truss types to speed up the design process when working in a project. Create new types 4 On the Design Bar. 30 In the Save As dialog box. click New. under Dimensions. 7 In the Family Types dialog box. enter 89x38 for Name. Open the truss family for editing 1 Select a floor truss. 11 Click OK. under Family Types. you create multiple types for a 89x38 truss and a 64x38 truss. Notice the chord changes width. enter 64x38 for Name.

400))) 6 Click Apply. and click OK. click Modify.rvt. select 89x38. 13 In the Load into Projects dialog box. 286. under 3D Views. click Save. enter 8000 for length. under Dimensions. click Apply. 18 In the Type Selector. Creating Conditional Formulas In this exercise. 19 Add a beam next to the 64x38. 21 In the Project Browser. 23 Proceed to the final exercise. if(Length < 7500. 350. <result-if-true>. double-click 3D . 400. Creating Component Types | 723 . click Beam. and click Yes. 17 Add a beam in the center of the open space. enter 6000 for length. click Edit Family.Southeast Isometric. if(Length < 9000. You are going to enter a conditional formula that follows this basic rule: IF ( <condition>.Load new types into the project 12 On the Design Bar. <result-if-false>) 5 In the Family Types dialog box. and click OK. 22 On the File menu. 8 In the Family Types dialog box. Notice the two beam types. 3 Click Yes to open the family for editing. 16 In the Type Selector. Adding a conditional formula 4 On the Design Bar. 2 On the Options Bar. Open the truss for editing 1 Select a floor truss. click Load into Projects. Flex the design 7 In the Family Types dialog box. 20 On the Design Bar. select 64x38. Notice the truss depth increases. 14 In the Reload Family dialog box. you create a conditional formula that changes the depth automatically as the truss increases in length. 15 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. and click Apply. select Override parameter values of existing types. click Family Types. select m_WWF3. enter the follow formula for Depth: if(Length < 6600. Creating Conditional Formulas.

and click OK. double-click 3D . select Override parameter values of existing types. 16 On the File menu. 11 In the Reload Family dialog box. 14 In the Project Browser. 15 Notice the change in floor truss depth. click Load into Projects. you probably noticed a change in the amount of time the view needed to regenerate. 724 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . select m_WWF3. 10 In the Load into Projects dialog box. and click Yes. under 3D Views.Load the truss into the project 9 On the Design Bar. Regeneration time and overall performance can be affected by over-designed families.Southeast Isometric. IMPORTANT When you changed the width of the building footprint. 17 Close any open files. NOTE You would have to change the depth of the sill and rim joist to accommodate this change.rvt. You have completed this tutorial. click Save. double-click Level 1. under Floor Plans. Test the conditional formula within a project 12 In the Project Browser. 13 Select Grid 2 and drag it downward until it is between 8000-9000mm from Grid 1.

you create area schedules and color fill plans based on the area schemes and plans. You can edit the rentable scheme and create additional schemes.Area Analysis 21 In this tutorial. you learn how to use area analysis tools to define and label spatial relationships. Finally. Each area scheme can have multiple area plans. Two schemes are provided by default: Gross Building and Rentable. 725 . You then create area plans for each scheme as needed. The first step in area analysis is the definition of area schemes.

For Unit Suffix. Rentable: Area measurements based on the standard method for measuring floor area in office buildings. Open the c_Area. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. select 2 decimal places. click Format and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Units. You add and modify the area boundaries and apply area tags. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. you create a color fill plan and area schedule based on the area schemes and plans. For Rounding. click Open. click the Training Files icon. 2 In the Project Units dialog box. For Unit Suffix. click Project Units. click Area Settings. Creating Area Schemes and Plans In this exercise. View predefined area schemes 5 In the Project Browser. right-click in the Design Bar. Set units of measurement to metric 1 On the Settings menu. If you are using metric units. Click OK. you use the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. select m2 Click OK.Using Area Analysis Tools In this lesson. and verify that Level 1 is the active view. 726 | Chapter 21 Area Analysis . click OK. select mm. NOTE Images in this exercise reflect Imperial values. and click Area Analysis. expand Views (all). ■ ■ Gross Building: Total constructed area of a building. select Square meters. In the final exercise. Although you can create new schemes that are based on the Rentable scheme. expand Floor Plans. it is not necessary in this exercise. click Format and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ For Units. you use the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. 4 In the Project Units dialog box. 6 On the Area Analysis tab of the Design Bar. In the Area Settings dialog box. 3 Under Area. under Length. You add and modify the area boundaries and apply area tags. These schemes define spatial relationships. select Millimeters. TIP If the Area Settings tab is not visible. there are two schemes currently defined: Gross Building and Rentable. your values will be different.rvt file located in the Common folder.

■ At System Computed Height: Generally defaults to or 1000 mm above the level. When you select Yes in this dialog box. NOTE If the room area includes a room separation line. Create a gross building area plan 9 On the Area Analysis tab of the Design Bar. click Yes to create the boundary lines automatically. Click OK. 10 In the New Area Plan dialog box. and notice that the Level 1 area plan is the active view.7 In the Area Setting dialog box. ■ 11 When the informational dialog box displays. 14 Click in the middle of the room on the lower left corner of the building model to place the tag. You can specify the height where the room area is calculated. the system-computed height defaults to the level. click Area Plan. ■ 8 Click Cancel. Using Area Analysis Tools | 727 . If you select No. click Area Tag. 12 In the Project Browser. under Views (all). At Specified Height: You specify the height above the level that area is calculated. Verify that Do not duplicate existing views is selected. you can create a copy of the area plan with subsequent changes to the original area plan duplicated in the copied plan. you must manually add these boundary lines. click the Room Calculations tab. forming a closed loop. Expand Area Plans (Gross Building). notice there is a new view type called Area Plans (Gross Building). Select Level 1 for Area Plan views. NOTE If you clear Do not duplicate existing views. 13 On the Area Analysis tab of the Design Bar. or 0. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Gross Building for Type. area boundary lines are automatically placed on the exterior walls of the building model.

18 Zoom out until you can see the entire building model. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Rentable for Type. click Area Boundary. if the window glass is greater than 50% of the wall height. common areas. Notice that there is a new view type called Area Plans (Rentable). 17 Click Yes to automatically define the area boundary lines. NOTE The area lines follow some of the windows hosted by the exterior wall. you create a new area plan for rentable space. and store area. Expand Area Plans (Rentable). Select Level 1 for Area Plan views. Add area boundary lines 19 On the Design Bar. 728 | Chapter 21 Area Analysis . Next. Create a rentable area scheme and plan 15 On the Area Analysis tab of the Design Bar. You add and use area boundary lines to define the office areas. click Area Plan. the area boundary lines are placed on the face of the glass. Verify that Do not duplicate existing views is selected. A room tag measures the area enclosed within the exterior face of room-defining walls.NOTE An area tag measures area based on the area plan boundary lines. Notice that the area boundary lines are on the inner face of the exterior walls. and notice that the Level 1 area plan is the active view. Although the rule for these lines is to follow the inside face of the wall. Click OK. 16 In the New Area Plan dialog box.

24 On the Design Bar. click Area Tag. click . the area boundary lines do not update automatically. click inside the middle of the room to place the tag. 23 In the upper left corner of the building model. When you pick the walls. you can either draw them or pick them. 25 Select the area tag you added to the room in the upper left corner of the building model. verify that Pick Lines and Apply Area Rules are selected. 21 Select all the interior walls by clicking them one at a time. When you add area boundary lines. 26 On the Options Bar. Using Area Analysis Tools | 729 . 22 On the Design Bar.20 On the Options Bar. you can select the option "Apply Area Rules" so that the area boundary lines adjust to the area type. If you do not select this option. click Modify.

Click OK. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter Tenant 1 for Name. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter Tenant 2 for Name. 28 On the Design Bar. click Modify and select the tag.27 In the Element Properties dialog box. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter Circulation for Name. 33 Using the techniques learned in previous steps. Select Building Common Area for Area Type. Select Office area for Area Type. 31 On the Options Bar. Click OK. 32 In the Element Properties dialog box. click . add a tag in the common area to the right of the double doors hosted by the west exterior wall. 730 | Chapter 21 Area Analysis . 29 Add the tag to the room on the lower left corner of the building model. 30 On the Design Bar. Click OK. Select Office area for Area Type. In the Element Properties dialog box. click Area Tag.

and select Store Area for Area Type.34 Add an area tag to the building model core. the area boundary lines have adjusted to the new area type. 35 Add the last two area tags to the two areas on the right side of the building model. enter Core for Name. Using Area Analysis Tools | 731 . and Tenant 4 in the lower right. Notice that within the two store areas. Name the areas Tenant 3 and Tenant 4. Tenant 3 should be in the upper right. and select Major Vertical Penetration for Area Type.

2 Move the cursor under the left corner of the building model. click to place it. and when the color legend displays. 37 Navigate to your preferred directory. name the project Area-in progress. You added and modified the area boundaries and applied area tags to define spaces. 732 | Chapter 21 Area Analysis . you create a color fill area plan and an area schedule. NOTE This project is required in its current state if you intend to continue with the next exercise. Create a color fill plan 1 On the Area Analysis tab of the Design Bar. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise.36 On the File menu.rvt. you create a color fill area plan and an area schedule. click Save. click Color Fill. you used the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. In the next exercise. In this exercise. Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans In this exercise. and click Save.

3 When the dialog box displays. 5 In the New Schedule dialog box. Create an area schedule 4 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Schedule/Quantities. click OK to make the required visibility setting changes. select Areas (Rentable). click the Fields tab. Using Area Analysis Tools | 733 . 6 In the Schedules Properties dialog box. and click OK. under Category. 7 Under Available fields. select Area Type and click Add. 8 Add the fields Area and Name.

The fields you selected in the Schedule Properties dialog box are displayed as column headings within the schedule.9 Click OK. 734 | Chapter 21 Area Analysis .

floors. you create a new building model using the various massing tools to add and cut mass. You then modify the building model in both the massing view and the shell view to see how changes propagate throughout the project.Massing 22 You can use massing tools during the initial design process to convey a potential design concept without the level of detail usually found in a project. 735 . or both. you can specify the view to display massing elements. In this tutorial. you then need to update the building face. After you create the basic geometric shape of the building model. If you modify a massing face. you convert to the basic shell elements of the building model. Massing elements and building elements are not linked automatically. and roofs. You can create and modify the geometric shapes that aggregate to form the building model shell. you can pick massing faces and make building model elements such as walls. building elements. curtain systems. At any time. After you make building elements.

and roof types so that when you convert the massing elements to shell elements in the final exercise. 5 On the Sketch Design Bar. click the Training Files icon. under Floor Plans. TIP You may want to dimension and constrain the lines to maintain the exact dimensions. 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. and click 6 Sketch the shape as shown using the exact values. TIP If the Massing tab is not available on the Design Bar. 3 Click OK in the Name dialog box to accept the default name Mass 1. floor. You assign the default wall. and cutting geometry. double-click Level 1. Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model In this exercise. Open the m_Massing_Start. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. The Design Bar title changes to Mass. right-click anywhere over the Design Bar. under Views (all). sweeps. and floors. click Lines. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. click Create Mass. and click Massing. Adding a mass element 1 In the Project Browser. click Open. on the Options Bar. you create the basic geometric shape of the building model using various massing tools. roofs.Using Massing Tools In this lesson. 4 On the Design Bar. you create the basic geometric shape of a building model by adding solid and void extrusions. the building model uses those element types to define the walls.rvt file located in the Metric folder. 736 | Chapter 22 Massing .

10 In the Element Properties dialog box. and then click . and then click . 20 In the Element Properties dialog box. under Constraints. on the Options Bar. 18 Click the edges of the form to create sketch lines as shown. 14 On the Design Bar. under Constraints. click the Value for Material. Be sure to click to the inside of the extrusion. Create next extrusion form 13 In the Project Browser. enter 1550 mm for the Offset. select Mass (Transparent) for Name. This means the sketch line is placed 1550 mm from the position you pick with the cursor. 22 In the Element Properties dialog box. enter 25000 for Extrusion End. under Views (all). and click OK.7 On the Design Bar. under Materials and Finishes. 15 On the Sketch Design Bar. 11 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. enter 25000 for Extrusion Start and 27500 for Extrusion End. select Mass (Opaque) for Name. click the Value for Material. 19 On the Design Bar. 8 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. Using Massing Tools | 737 . and click 16 On the Options Bar. and click OK. click . Watch the Status Bar in the lower-left corner of the screen to be sure you are highlighting the Form : Extrusion : Reference. click Extrusion Properties. 23 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. click Extrusion Properties. 9 In the Materials dialog box. and click OK. and click OK. 17 Place the cursor in the drawing area on an edge of the existing form so that the edge is highlighted. double-click Level 1. click Lines. 21 In the Materials dialog box. under Materials and Finishes. 12 On the View toolbar.

27 In the Work Plane dialog box. and click on the Options Bar. TIP If necessary. Sketch the blend base 31 Select the top of the larger extrusion as shown. 26 On the Design Bar. double-click {3D} to see the results.24 In the Project Browser. 28 In the drawing area. under Elevations (Building Elevation). The second form is on top of the first form. 30 On the Sketch Design Bar. and click OK. under Views (all). 29 Click to select the face. select Pick a plane. under Views (all). click Lines. 738 | Chapter 22 Massing . press TAB to highlight the entire face. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Blend. Continue creation of next massing form 25 In the Project Browser. double-click West. highlight the larger form.

33 Place the cursor at the midpoint of the sketch line as shown. Next. click . 36 Sketch the arc as shown with the top of the arc snapping to the top of the construction line. and click to select the line start point. click the arrow next to the drawing options. you draw a sketch line that acts as a construction line to create an arc. 37 On the Design Bar. 38 Select the arc and the horizontal line. The triangle indicates that the cursor is at the midpoint. 35 On the Options Bar. click Modify. click . 34 Sketch a line 6000 mm up as shown. click .32 On the Options Bar. Using Massing Tools | 739 . and delete the vertical construction line. 39 On the Edit toolbar. TIP If you do not see this option. and click Arc passing through three points from the menu.

41 Move the cursor straight up and click at the top horizontal line of the smaller extrusion as shown. click Lines and. 49 In the Element Properties dialog box. 43 In the Project Browser. . click Edit Top. 50 On the Design Bar. under Views (all). . verify that Mass (Opaque) is selected for Material and that -92000 is specified for Second End. click 47 Create an arc as shown. on the Options Bar. click 45 Sketch the horizontal line as shown. click Finish Sketch. and click OK. 48 On the Design Bar. click . Sketching the blend top 42 On the Design Bar. 46 On the Options Bar. 44 On the Design Bar. double-click East.40 Click the cursor at the midpoint of the horizontal sketch line as shown. under Elevations (Building Elevation). click Blend Properties. 51 On the View toolbar. 740 | Chapter 22 Massing .

1 In the Project Browser. place three more reference planes 15000 mm apart from left to right. 6 Place another reference plane 15000 mm to the right of the first reference plane. you created two extrusions and a blend that form the basic geometric shape of the building model. Using Massing Tools | 741 . as shown. m_Massing_Start. 7 Using the same technique. Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model. 5 Place the cursor near the left edge of the massing element so that the edge is highlighted. under Views (all). click Ref Plane. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Add reference planes 3 On the Mass tab of the Design bar.52 Proceed to the next exercise. under Floor Plans. 2 In the drawing area. and place the first reference plane 15000 mm to the right.rvt. 4 On the Options bar. you use the massing tools to cut geometry from the shapes you have created. In this exercise. double-click Level 1. you use a void extrusion to cut geometry from one of the massing shapes you added in the previous exercise. select the mass. Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model In this exercise. In the next exercise. click and enter 15000 for Offset. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and the resulting building model.

10 Enter SI for intersection snap. click Save As.rvt. These reference planes act primarily as sketching aids. 13 In the Element Properties dialog box. enter 12000 for Extrusion End. click Finish Mass. click and select Chain. 9 On the Design Bar. 742 | Chapter 22 Massing . 14 Under Constraints. snap the corners to the intersections. 18 On the Mass Design Bar. 12 On the Design Bar. Sketch extrusion voids 8 On the Design Bar.When sketching the void extrusions in the steps that follow. and sketch the first void extrusion as shown. 17 On the View toolbar. 15 Click OK. click . and 0 for Extrusion Start. click Finish Sketch. When sketching each extrusion. 20 Save the file as m_Massing_Complete. you cut voids through an extrusion you added in the first exercise. you specify the intersection of the reference planes and the top and bottom edges of the massing element. under Materials and Finishes. 16 On the Design Bar. In this exercise. click NOTE If the file is currently in shaded mode. 19 On the File menu. click Void Form ➤  Void Extrusion. on the View Control Bar. and then click Hidden Line. click Lines and. on the Options Bar. specify Mass (Transparent) for Material. 11 Sketch two additional void extrusions as shown. click Extrusion Properties.

In this exercise. and 9000 mm for Depth. 10 On the File menu. and 18000 mm for Depth. you opened a mass family file and created three new types of this family file. and click Apply. click New. click Open. Navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Families\Massing folder. enter 15000 mm for Width. You then load that mass family file and others into a project. 6 Enter 68000 mm for Width. You place several instances of the mass families into the project. 7 Click New and enter 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm for Name. and click Apply. Creating three new family types 1 On the Design Bar. click Family Types. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. Using Mass Family Files in a Project | 743 . Creating New Mass Family Types In this exercise. 9 Click OK. 11 Save the file as Box-Training. under Other. and 6000 mm for Depth. 2 In the Family Types dialog box. you open a predefined mass family file and create new types from it. you create new family types from a mass family file. and click OK. 5 Click New and enter 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm for Name.Using Mass Family Files in a Project In this lesson. and click OK. you use the Join Geometry command to join several instances of the mass elements.rfa. 4 In the Family Types dialog box. 11000 mm for Height.rfa. and click OK. Open Box. 3 In the Name dialog box. 18000 mm for Height. 8 Enter 46000 mm for Width. click Save As. 12000 mm for Height. click the Training Files icon. Finally. enter 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm for Name. Dataset ■ ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. and click Apply.

TIP You may want to use the Move tool to accurately place the mass families. select Box-Training: 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm.rfa. 7 Open the Box-Training. under Views (all). In the left pane of the Open dialog box. Arc Dome. click the Training Files icon. double-click Site.rfa. you load and place the new family types that you created from the previous exercise. 744 | Chapter 22 Massing . 5 In the left pane of the Open dialog box. You also load other existing mass families and place them. 3 On the View Control Bar. and Triangle. 1 If not already selected.rvt file located in the Metric folder. click Place Mass. 2 In the Project Browser.rfa family files. 6 Navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Families\Massing folder. click Open.rfa. 9 In the Type Selector. Semi Barrel Vault. under Floor Plans. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. click the Training Files icon. 8 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 10 Place the box mass family on the in-place mass family as shown. click on the View toolbar to show the massing model. 4 On the File menu. Open the m_Massing_In-place.Loading and Placing New Mass Families In this exercise. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe.

20 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. and click to place the mass. 22 On the Options Bar. 18 Press CTRL. select Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm. select the 3 boxes. select Rotate after placement. and use the Move command on the Edit toolbar to place the triangle as shown. and click OK twice. click Place Mass. enter 90 for Angle. 25 On the Design Bar. 16 Place 3 of these box families on the larger box family as shown. Using Mass Family Files in a Project | 745 . 13 Specify Mass (Transparent) for the Material instance parameter. 26 In the drawing area. 21 In the Type Selector. select Triangle: 15000 x 45000 x 10500. 14 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. 24 On the Options Bar.11 On the Design Bar. and click . 17 On the Design Bar. click Modify. and click OK twice. 23 Place the cursor in the drawing area. click Modify. and click . click Place Mass. select the triangle. 15 In the Type Selector. 12 Select the box. 19 Specify Mass (Opaque) for the Material instance parameter.

and click OK twice. 35 On the View menu. 32 Select the box and click . 33 Specify Mass (Opaque) for the Material instance parameter.27 Select the triangle. you join these mass elements. 30 In the Type Selector. In the next exercise. and click OK twice. select Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm. you loaded and placed the new family types that you created in the previous exercise. 29 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. In this exercise. click . Notice that the triangle and the box masses that you just placed all overlap. 746 | Chapter 22 Massing . 28 Specify Mass (Transparent) for the Material instance parameter. You also loaded other existing mass families and added them to the building model. click Place Mass. and click . 34 On the View toolbar. click Orient ➤ Northeast. 31 Place the box mass family as shown.

and then press ESC to see the result. NOTE When you join geometry. Join geometry 1 On the View toolbar.rvt file. . click 2 On the Tools toolbar. 3 Select the middle Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm mass element as shown. Dataset ■ Continue using the m_Massing_In-place.Joining Mass Elements In this exercise. you join and modify the mass elements you placed from the previous exercise. click . the first mass element selected cuts volume from any subsequently selected mass element. 4 Select the triangle. Using Mass Family Files in a Project | 747 .

under Views (all). TIP Pressing SHIFT while dragging the cursor locks the axis orthogonally. on the Edit toolbar.Modify existing massing elements 5 In the Project Browser. 9 Position the cursor over the upper edge of the middle box. under Floor Plans. enter SM. 748 | Chapter 22 Massing . click 8 On the Options Bar. click for Axis. 10 Click to select the mirror axis start point. 6 Select the right edge of the Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm and drag it to the left edge of the middle Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm as shown. Mirror the modified mass element 7 With the smaller box still selected. 11 Drag the cursor down to create a vertical axis of reflection as shown. double-click Site. and snap to the midpoint of the edge.

You also modified and mirrored a mass element before joining its geometry with that of another element. . you joined mass elements together. Join geometry 13 On the View toolbar. and then select the triangle. The first selected mass element cut geometry from the subsequently selected mass element. 16 Repeat for the other instance of the modified mass element and the triangle. 15 Select one instance of the modified Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm first.12 Click to mirror the existing massing element. Using Mass Family Files in a Project | 749 . 17 Press ESC to see the result. In this exercise. click . click 14 On the Tools toolbar.

3 On the Design Options toolbar. 2 On the Window menu. click Modify. 9 Place the cursor in the drawing area and click to place the mass. 5 In the Project Browser. 750 | Chapter 22 Massing . under Floor Plans. and select the triangle mass element. 1 On the Design Bar. select Rotate after placement. click . You add mass elements to design options to experiment with different versions of the design. 7 In the Type Selector. Mass Elements in Design Options In this exercise. Dataset ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_In-place. select Sloped (primary). you continue using the same file from the previous lesson. You then switch between different design options to get different versions of the design. click Toolbar ➤ Design Options. double-click Site. 8 On the Options Bar. under Views (all). 11 Place a semi barrel vault where shown. enter 90 degrees for Angle. TIP You may want to use the Move tool to place the mass precisely.rvt. click Place Mass. and then click OK.Using Mass Elements with Design Options In this lesson. 12 Place another semi barrel vault as shown. select Semi Barrel Vault: 10000 x 15000 x 7500. Placing semi barrel vaults 6 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. clear Curved. You then make one of the design options the primary one for the model. you place the mass elements from the previous exercise into Design Options. 10 On the Options Bar. 4 In the Add to Design Option Set dialog box.

click . select Arc Dome: 6000R x 2750H. 23 In the Project Browser. select the three arc domes. click Modify. Using Mass Elements with Design Options | 751 . under Elevations. under Views (all). 15 Specify Mass (Transparent) for the Material property. and click . 22 Specify Mass (Transparent) for the Material property. Placing arc dome mass elements 17 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 20 On the Design Bar. click . double-click North. select the 2 semi barrel vaults. 16 On the View Control Bar. 24 On the View Control Bar. and click . click Modify.13 On the Design Bar. 25 Move the three arc domes to the position shown. and click Wireframe. and click Wireframe. TIP Use the snap control lines to assist in placing the domes. 19 Place 3 arc domes as shown. and click OK twice. 21 In the drawing area. and click OK twice. click Place Mass. 18 In the Type Selector. 14 In the drawing area.

select Curved from the Design Option menu. select Curved. and click OK. select Curved and. double-click {3D}. click the Design Options tab. 35 Click Close and close the warning that displays. 33 On the Design Options toolbar. and click OK. clear Sloped. 31 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog box. 29 In the Project Browser. click . 30 On the View menu. you use building component creation tools to make building components from mass faces. you can make it the primary option. under Option. 32 Click the value for Design Option. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements In this lesson. click Visibility/Graphics.rvt. click . 34 In the Design Options dialog box.Create a Design Option set 26 Select the three arc domes and the two semi barrel vaults. under Views (all). You can now see the shapes that are part of the curved design option. 28 In the Add to Design Option Set dialog box. You then switched between different design options to get different versions of the design. click Save As and save the file as m_Massing_Design_Options. 36 On the File menu. you placed mass elements into Design Options. 752 | Chapter 22 Massing . click Make Primary. In this exercise. 27 On the Design Options toolbar. Because it is likely that your client prefers the design option with curved shapes.

5 In the Type Selector. double-click {3D}. 6 On the Options Bar. 3 On the View menu.Creating Walls by Picking Faces In this exercise.Brick on CMU. click to show the massing model. under Views (all). The southeast wall of the mass model is now Brick on CMU. click Open. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 753 . Open the m_Massing_Building_Components. click Wall by Face. click . click Orient ➤ Southeast. select Basic Wall: Exterior . Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu.rvt file located in the Metric folder. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. 2 On the View toolbar. Creating walls 4 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 7 Place the cursor in the drawing area and select the face of the in-place mass family as shown. you pick massing faces to create walls. 1 In the Project Browser. click the Training Files icon. and select Wall Centerline for Loc Line.

double-click Level 5. 12 On the Design Bar. 15 On the Design Bar. Click Wall by Face. alerting you that the highlighted walls overlap. 9 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. 13 Select the face indicated by the arrow as shown. click Wall by Face. NOTE If a Warning dialog box is displayed. under Views (all). double-click Level 1. under Views (all). under Views (all). 16 In the Type Selector. under Floor Plans. select Curtain Wall : Storefront. 11 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. 754 | Chapter 22 Massing .8 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 3. ignore the warning and continue selecting wall faces. 10 Select all the faces shown in red. 17 Select the 3 faces shown in red. 14 In the Project Browser. click Wall by Face.

and click Edit Profile on the Options Bar. click Wall by Face. under Floor Plans. 19 In the Project Browser. 20 On the View Control Bar. you can select the overlapping curtain wall.18 Select all the faces shown in red. You can then edit the profile to clean up the overlapping geometry. 23 Open the 3D view to see the results. You can ignore the warnings about walls overlapping. Creating Floors by Picking Faces In this exercise. If desired. In this exercise. 21 On the Design Bar. you picked several massing faces and created both basic walls and curtain walls. double-click Level 9. 22 Select all the faces shown in red. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 755 . under Views (all). click . you pick massing faces to create floors. and click Wireframe.

clear Curtain Panels. and click OK. 7 In the Floor Area Faces dialog box. under Views (all). select all levels. double-click {3D}. click Floor Area Faces. Curtain Systems. 2 On the View menu.Dataset ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. Creating floors 5 Select the in-place mass family Mass 1. 756 | Chapter 22 Massing . and Walls.rvt. 4 Click OK. 3 On the Model Categories tab. click Visibility/Graphics. 1 In the Project Browser. 6 On the Options Bar.

clear Exclude Options. click Orient ➤ Northeast. 10 On the Options Bar. click Floor Area Faces. 12 On the Options Bar. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 757 . and select the three 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements and the mirrored 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm box masses as shown. 9 Press CTRL. 11 In the Floor Area Faces dialog box.8 On the View menu. and click OK. select Levels 1-4.

double-click Level 1. 22 In the Project Browser. 21 On the View toolbar. 18 On the Options Bar. click .13 Press CTRL. under Schedules/Quantities. click Floor Area Faces. click Create Floors. double-click Mass Schedule. 19 Drag a pick box over the entire model to select all the floor area faces. verify that Select Multiple is selected. 758 | Chapter 22 Massing . 15 In the Floor Area Faces dialog box. and select the semi vault barrel mass elements and the 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm box mass element as shown. 20 On the Options Bar. under Floor Plans. under Views (all). 16 In the Project Browser. This shows you the gross floor area of each mass. 17 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. click Floor by Face. 14 On the Options Bar. and click OK. select Level 1.

1 In the Project Browser.In this exercise. under Views (all). double-click {3D}. Creating Roofs by Picking Faces In this exercise.rvt. You then viewed a massing schedule that listed the gross floor area of each mass in the model. you pick massing faces to create roofs. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 759 . you created floors by first creating floor area faces and then picking those faces to create floors. Creating roofs 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. Dataset ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. 3 Select the top face of the left 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass element as shown. click Roof by Face.

NOTE Each time you select a face on an instance of the 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass element family. 10 Repeat these steps to create a sloped glazing roof on the other semi barrel vault mass element.400mm. click Create Roof. 5 On the Options Bar. 8 Select the left semi barrel vault mass element. click Visibility/Graphics. select Basic Roof : Generic . click Create Roof. 12 Click the Model Categories tab.4 In the Type Selector. Your model should now look as shown. 11 On the View menu. and then click OK. This creates the roof and lets you pick another face to create a new roof. 6 Create the same roof on the remaining 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements. and Walls. select Sloped Glazing in the Type Selector. select Curtain Panels. 7 With the Roof by Face command still selected. Curtain Systems. 760 | Chapter 22 Massing . and also on the top faces of the 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm box mass elements. 9 On the Options Bar. click Create Roof.

1 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Type Selector. 5 Press CTRL.rvt. you create curtain systems by picking non-planar massing faces. select Curtain System: 1500 x 1500mm. 4 On the Options Bar. you created roofs by picking faces of massing families. under Views (all). 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. double-click {3D}.In this exercise. Dataset ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. be sure that Select Multiple is selected. Creating Curtain Systems In this exercise. and select both halves of the left arc dome mass element as shown. click Curtain System by Face. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 761 .

762 | Chapter 22 Massing . 7 Repeat the same steps for the two other domes.6 On the Options Bar. click Create System.

click Create System.8 With the Curtain System by Face command still selected. 9 On the Options Bar. select the blended form on the in-place mass. you created curtain systems on non-planar faces. you create curtain systems by picking non-planar massing faces. In this exercise. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 763 . Editing Elements Created from Massings In this exercise. 10 Click Modify to exit the command.

click OK. 5 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Edit/New. 764 | Chapter 22 Massing . 7 Enter Larger Size for Name. click Duplicate. Roofs. enter 30000 for Width. 6 In the Type Properties dialog box. and click OK. Curtain Systems. Floors. 1 In the Project Browser. and click OK. under Views (all). Next. and Walls. under Floor Plans. 2 On the View menu. 3 On the Model Categories tab. 8 In the Type Properties dialog box. click Visibility/Graphics. and then click OK. double-click Site. 9 In the Element Properties dialog box. clear Curtain Panels.Dataset ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. 4 Select the box mass family as shown and click . you resize one of the 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements.rvt.

12 Drag a selection box over the box family and the dome family. click Modify. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 765 . 14 Open the 3D view to see the result. 13 Use the Move tool to position the box and dome families as shown.10 On the Design Bar. clear Exclude Options. 11 On the Options Bar.

18 In the Exclude Hosts dialog box. under Views (all). 17 On the Options Bar. 16 Zoom in to the upper right-hand portion of the model and select the three walls shown. you want to select the smaller one. click OK. double-click Level 1. you remake several of the building elements to fit to the new size of the massing family.The curtain system is no longer aligned with the dome family. under Floor Plans. 766 | Chapter 22 Massing . TIP To select the curtain wall. press TAB several times until the Status Bar indicates you are highlighting the Walls : Curtain Wall : Storefront. 15 In the Project Browser. remember that there are two curtain walls of this type that are overlapping here. Also. 19 On the View toolbar. click Remake. In the next steps. click .

20 Select the roof as shown. click Remake. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 767 . 21 On the Options Bar. you will notice that Revit Building resized the floors.TIP If you temporarily hide one of the resized walls.

rvt. In this exercise. 768 | Chapter 22 Massing . and click Remake. you switch the visibility of the view between the massing elements and the model (shell) elements. you changed the size of an existing mass family. The 3D view now shows only the building shell. 1 Open the 3D view. Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility In this exercise. Turn off massing 2 Click on the View toolbar to turn off massing.22 Select the arc dome curtain system. Dataset ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. You then modified building elements to resize with the new mass family.

This concludes the massing tutorial. right-click on the 3D view. 8 Click None to clear the selection. You might create the model shown.Massing only. to the building shell. you can continue adding additional Revit modeling components. 6 On the Model Categories tab. and click OK. click Visibility/Graphics. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 769 . In this exercise. such as columns and an extruded roof. 4 Rename the view 3D . 5 On the View menu. If desired. 3 In the Project Browser.Now you create a 3D view that shows only the massing. 9 Select Mass. 7 Clear one of the check boxes. click All to select all categories. you switched the visibility of the 3D view to show either the building shell or the mass model. and click Duplicate.

770 | Chapter 22 Massing .

Site 23 In this tutorial. 771 . you use the site tools in Autodesk Revit Building to add and modify site components within a project.

You add property lines manually. In the final exercises. You add subregions to the area to define parking areas. This project file was created using the default metric template. The exercises are sequential and must be done in order. convert the data to a table. you add a building pad to the site. and walkways. and double-click Site. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. In the second part of this exercise. you add parking and planting components and create a parking space schedule. 4 On the Options Bar. The scale of this view is 1 : 100. You start by importing the site contour data and converting it to 3D contour data. Create a toposurface by adding elevation points 1 In the Project Browser. Creating a Toposurface In this exercise. and click Site. click Point. expand Views (all). islands. you create a toposurface by manually placing elevation points in the site plan. After grading the topography to create a slightly elevated and flat surface. 772 | Chapter 23 Site . expand Floor Plans.rvt file located in the Metric folder. TIP If the Site tab is not displayed. you create a toposurface using two different methods. 3 On the Design Bar. 5 Click in the drawing area to specify a point. right-click in the Design Bar. you import contour data from a DWG file and use it to create the project toposurface. Open the m_First_Project. click Toposurface. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. click Open. and then modify the data. Using the first method.Using Site Tools In this lesson. you use site tools to add and modify site components within a project. click the Training Files icon. enter an absolute elevation of 3000 mm.

enter an absolute elevation of 6000 mm. A toposurface must have at least three elevation points. 8 On the Options Bar. Using Site Tools | 773 .6 Add two additional points to create a triangle. TIP Do not be concerned with the exact quantity or placement of the points. 9 Add a concentric circle of 6000 mm elevation points inside the 3000 mm contour. Use the following illustration as a reference. 7 Add additional points to create a contour circle similar to the following illustration. The circle should be approximately 55000 mm wide. Triangulation boundaries display only after you add the third elevation point.

click Model Graphics Style. 774 | Chapter 23 Site . click . 11 On the Design Bar. and 18000 mm absolute elevations. enter 1500 mm.10 Repeat the previous step for 9000 mm. 12 On the Settings menu. under Increment. 14 On the View toolbar. click Finish Surface. Use the following illustration as a reference. and click OK. 13 In the Site Settings dialog box. Try to add each circle concentrically inside the previously created circle. and click Shading with Edges. 15000 mm. under Additional Contours. This setting reduces the quantity of contour lines in the view. 15 On the View Control Bar. 12000 mm. click Site Settings.

23 Click the Level 1 text. modify the level names and elevations. and press ENTER. enter 1000 mm. 21 Click the Level 2 text. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). click Modify. and press ENTER. click the Training Files icon. 29 Select the imported topography. click Yes. Until it is exploded. DXF.16 On the View toolbar. 27 In the Select Layers/Levels to Import/Link dialog box. Click Open. clear layer 0 and layer C_bench_mark. You are immediately prompted to select the layers you want to import. click to delete it. 19 On the Design Bar. double-click Site. Select the c_Import_Site file located in the Common folder. select Preserve colors. under Floor Plans. Before importing the contour data. under Views (all). select Current view only and choose Select for Layers. Click Yes when prompted to rename corresponding views. rename the level Base Site Elevation. and click OK. 26 In the Import/Link dialog box: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. 25 On the File menu. 22 When you are asked if you want to rename corresponding views. Under Layer/Level Colors. SAT. and double-click South. click the elevation value. click Import/Link ➤ DWG. on the Standard toolbar. Use imported contour data to create a toposurface 17 Select the toposurface and. 18 In the Project Browser. and zoom out until you can see the entire topography within the view. Under Import or Link. Using Site Tools | 775 . click and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. DGN. it is considered an import symbol. and press ENTER. rename the level Basement. under Views (all). 28 On the Design Bar. 20 Zoom in around the Level 2 head. click Modify. 24 In the Project Browser.

This ensures the import symbol is not accidently moved. When you select the import symbol. 36 On the Design Bar. 31 On the Design Bar. Notice the elevation symbols are displayed. 34 Under Visibility. clear Elevations. click Toposurface. when the edges highlight. click Visibility/Graphics. 32 On the View menu. click Modify. 37 Place the cursor over the imported symbol and. and click OK. 35 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. clear C_INDX. 776 | Chapter 23 Site . 33 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog box. click Use Imported ➤ Import Instance. The import symbol is converted to elevation points and contours. 38 In the Add Points from Selected Layers dialog box. click the Annotations Categories tab.30 On the Edit menu. and then click OK. click Pin Position. you are prompted to select the layer that will generate the elevation points. select it.

45 Proceed to the next exercise. Adding Property Lines In this exercise. 40 On the View toolbar. Using Site Tools | 777 . and click Save. click Save As. 44 Navigate to your preferred folder. this project file is required in its current state. 42 On the View toolbar. Using the second method.rvt. 43 On the File menu. Adding Property Lines. Using the first method. 41 Enter ZF to zoom to the extents of the image. you create property lines by entering survey data into a table of distances and bearings. you add property lines using two methods. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. Notice the change in this toposurface elevation is minor. click and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. click Finish Surface. you sketch the property lines and then convert the sketch into survey data.39 On the Design Bar. click . name the project Site-in progress.

add an arc line on the right. Using the 3-point Arc tool. select Create property lines by sketching.This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and the project file in its current state. NOTE The weight of the sketch lines has been increased in the illustration for training purposes. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. double-click Site. sketch the shape shown in the following illustration. 6 On the Design Bar. you can quickly create the shape by doing the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Sketch the rectangle first. The property lines are displayed with a dash-dot line type on the topography. 4 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. 778 | Chapter 23 Site . click Lines. 3 In the Property Line Creation dialog box. Sketch property lines 1 In the Project Browser. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and click OK.rvt. do so before continuing. click Lines. On the Design Bar. 5 Using the sketching tools available on the Options Bar. Select and delete the right vertical line. If you have not completed the previous exercise. click Finish Sketch. Click Modify. Site-in progress. Although you can use your preferred sketching method. click Property Line.

click OK.7 Move the cursor over the property lines and. enter the following deed data for rows 1 through 4: ■ ■ ■ ■ 100000 S 0°0'0" E 80000 N 90°0'0" W 100000 N 0°0'0" E 80000 N 90°0'0" E Using Site Tools | 779 . select Create property lines by table of distances and bearings. Create property lines using a table of distances and bearings 11 Select the property lines and. click OK. informing you that converting a property line sketch to a table cannot be undone. select Edit Table. click Property Line. 14 In the Property Lines dialog box. and click OK. 8 On the Options Bar. A warning dialog box is displayed. select the lines. when they highlight. 13 In the Property Line Creation dialog box. click Insert three times until there are four rows of deed data. NOTE The values displayed in the Property Lines dialog box depend on the exact dimensions and location of your sketch. to delete them. 10 In the Property Lines dialog box. 9 In the warning dialog box. click 12 On the Design Bar. 15 Starting in Row #1. on the Standard toolbar.

This means there is no gap in the property lines. Before adding property line segment tags. 21 In the left pane of the Open dialog box. and click Shading with Edges. 17 Move the cursor over the topographic surface and using the following illustration as a reference. click Model Graphics Style. click Training Files. and click Drafting. The tags display more prominently in this view.dwg and click OK. the visibility of the imported symbol needs to be turned off.rfa and click Open. 20 Click Load. 22 Select M_Property Line Tag. 23 In the Tags dialog box. click Visibility/Graphics. click Tag. and open the folder. 27 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. clear Leader. 24 On the View menu. 30 Tag the three remaining property lines. 26 Under Visibility. 25 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog box. review your data entry and make necessary corrections. Even though you converted the symbol to elevations points and contours. 28 On the Options Bar. click Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. When the tag displays at the tip of the cursor. The property lines are displayed at the tip of the cursor. 31 On the View Control Bar. right-click in the Design Bar. 19 In the Tags dialog box. the original DWG file remains visible in the view. If the gap is not closed. notice a tag is now loaded for property line segments. scroll down the list of categories until you find Property Lines and notice there are no tags loaded for Property Line Segments. click the Imported Categories tab. clear the checkbox for c_Import_Site. 16 Click OK. Tag property lines 18 On the Settings menu. open the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Families\Annotations folder. click to place the property lines.Notice that after you complete the last line. the distance that displayed under From last to first point now displays Closed. 29 Zoom in and place the cursor over the center of the north property line. 780 | Chapter 23 Site . click to place it. and click OK. NOTE If the Drafting tab of the Design Bar is not visible.

Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Create an object style subcategory for specific elevation 1 On the View Control Bar. click Model Graphics Style. click New.rvt. In the next exercise. In the final step. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings. you loaded and tagged the property line segments. In this exercise. this project file is required in its current state.32 On the File menu. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. 4 Under Modify Subcategories. In the Object Styles dialog box. You also modify the site settings so that the new subcategory is displayed at the specific elevation. Site-in progress. Using Site Tools | 781 . 3 On the Model Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog box. you created two sets of property lines. the new object style subcategory is displayed under Topography. you create a new object style subcategory to mark a specific elevation. click Save. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. you modify site settings and contour line visibility. 5 In the New Subcategory dialog box. and click Wireframe. click Object Styles. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings In this exercise. 2 On the Settings menu. scroll down the list of categories and expand Topography. You created the second set of property lines directly from deed data and located it on the topography. verify that it is a subcategory of Topography. and click OK. The first set you sketched and then converted into deed data. enter the name Working Contour.

click Close. under Contour Line Display. select Single Value. 782 | Chapter 23 Site . Creating Topographic Subregions. The next exercise requires a new dataset. 12 On the File menu. specify an interval of 1000 mm passing through elevation 0. select a shade of Brown.6 In the Object Styles dialog box. Click Yes when prompted to save changes. you created a new object style subcategory for topography. 10 Under Additional Contours. click Site Settings. 11 Click OK. Under Range Type. 7 Click OK. The object style subcategory. enter 1000. select Dash dot. Under Subcategory. select Working Contour. You then modified the site setting to distinguish a specific contour interval using this subcategory. Working Contour. specify the following settings for the Working Contour subcategory: ■ ■ ■ Verify that the Line Weights are 1. Under Line Color. Under Line Pattern. specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ Under Start. In this exercise. Modify site settings 8 On the Settings menu. displays on the topography only at the elevation you specified.0 mm. 9 In the Site Settings dialog box. 13 Proceed to the next exercise.

sketch the shape highlighted in the illustration below. NOTE In the Metric dataset. Sketch initial parking area 1 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. you may see fewer contour lines than in the images shown in this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. parking areas. you create subregions in order to define roads. it merely defines an area of the surface where you can apply a different set of properties. and islands. Open the m_Site. 3 Using the sketching tools on the Options Bar. such as material.rvt file located in the Metric folder. and islands. try to replicate the location and proportion. you create topographic subregions to define roads. 2 On the Design Bar. TIP You can either sketch the shape freehand or draw two perpendicular rectangles. The horizontal rectangle is approximately 7500 mm wide. click Lines.In the next exercise. use the trim tool to create just one closed loop. and use the fillet arc sketching tool to add the curved corner. Using Site Tools | 783 . Creating Topographic Subregions In this exercise. Although the exact dimensions are not important. click Subregion. Creating a subregion does not result in separate surfaces. click Open. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. click the Training Files icon. parking areas. the vertical rectangle is approximately 19500 mm wide.

expand Schedules/Quantities. 5 In the Element Properties dialog box. click the Value for Material. and double-click Topography Schedule. the toposurface and its contour data remain one element. the subregion will end at the edge of the defined topography.Tarmacadam for Name. 9 On the View menu. select Site . click Properties. When you finish the sketch in a later step. 8 On the Design Bar. 6 In the Materials dialog box. and click OK. Open the topography schedule 10 In the Project Browser. click Shading with Edges. and click OK. enter Parking for Name. under Identity Data. You can create a toposurface schedule to report information regarding each toposurface region. 7 In the Element Properties dialog box. Notice that the new subregion uses the material Site . Specify subregion properties for parking area 4 On the Design Bar. 784 | Chapter 23 Site . and then click the down arrow to open the Material dialog box. under Materials and Finishes. Although you can select each toposurface region separately and apply different properties to each. click Finish Sketch.Tarmacadam.Notice that the left edge of the subregion overhangs the site topography.

double-click Site. click Finish Sketch. 16 On the Design Bar. they display within this schedule. As you create new subregions. Using Site Tools | 785 . TIP Add the two upper parking areas as rectangles. click Lines. click Model Graphics Style. 14 On the Options Bar. use the sketching tools available on the Options Bar to sketch the parking island shown in the following illustration. under Floor Plans. Within each subregion. 13 Select the subregion you created in the previous steps. double-click Site. double-click Topography Schedule. 12 On the View Control Bar. Notice that the project area has increased. Add additional subregions 19 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. under Schedules/Quantities. In this training project. The two additional parking areas in the top portion of the sketch must be at least 5500 mm deep to accommodate parking spaces. 18 In the Project Browser. Mirror the arc line to create an exact duplicate. and use the split and trim tools to clean up the sketch.NOTE Your values may differ depending on your sketch. Delete overlapping lines. click Edit Boundary. 21 On the Design Bar. 20 On the Design Bar. 15 Add new lines and modify the existing lines to create a boundary similar to the one shown in the following illustration. This topography schedule uses a filter to omit unnamed topographic regions. 17 On the View Control Bar. click Model Graphics Style. you apply different materials such as grass and concrete. and click Hidden Line. additional subregions are required to create a more attractive parking area. and click Shading with Edges. click Subregion. Modify the subregion 11 In the Project Browser. Precise dimensions are not important at this time. 22 In the upper-right parking area.

27 On the Design Bar. Name each region Island . Notice that the schedule has been updated with the new information. and then click the down arrow to open the Material dialog box. 29 In the Project Browser. 24 In the Element Properties dialog box. under Schedules/Quantities. 786 | Chapter 23 Site .23 On the Design Bar. 25 In the Materials dialog box. click Properties. double-click Topography Schedule. enter Island . and click OK. under Identity Data. double-click Site. 28 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans.Grass for Name.Grass.Grass for Name. click the Value for Material. click Finish Sketch. and click OK. You must sketch each region separately. select Site . Using the techniques learned in previous steps. add the three additional subregions shown in the following illustration. and apply the material Site . under Materials and Finishes.Grass. 26 In the Element Properties dialog box.

click Subregion. under Floor Plans.walkway. Notice that the schedule has been updated. Using Site Tools | 787 . double-click Topography Schedule. and apply the material Concrete .Cast-in-Situ Concrete . click Finish Sketch. WARNING Subregions cannot intersect. click Lines. double-click Site. under Schedules/Quantities. 32 On the Design Bar. 34 Use the sketching tools available on the Options Bar to sketch the new concrete walkway shown in the following illustration.30 In the Project Browser. so you need to offset coincident lines between the subregions by 100 mm. 33 On the Design Bar. Add the concrete walkway 31 In the Project Browser. 35 On the Design Bar. Name the subregion Walkway.

36 In the Project Browser. Grading the Toposurface. there is still only one toposurface. 788 | Chapter 23 Site . 37 On the File menu. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. 39 Proceed to the next exercise. and click Save. name the project Site tutorial-in progress. double-click Topography Schedule. Notice that the schedule has been updated. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 38 Navigate to your preferred folder. this project file is required in its current state.rvt. click Save As.NOTE Although several toposurface subregions now exist within this project. the existing topography is demolished and a new toposurface is created where you can edit the elevation points. When you use the grading tool.rvt. under Schedules/Quantities. you grade the toposurface to create a slightly elevated and flat parking area. If you want to modify the elevation points of a particular subregion. Grading the Toposurface In this exercise. you must either edit the entire toposurface or split the toposurface. Site tutorial-in progress.

click . under Phasing.Modify toposurface phase assignment 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Select the toposurface. The display settings are controlled by the phase filter. Copying internal points lets you delete only the points in the parking area without altering the remaining elevation points. click Graded Region. 7 In the Graded Region dialog box. A warning dialog box is displayed. Notice that the toposurface displays differently. stating that subregions must have the same Phase Created parameter and the same Phase Demolished parameter as the host toposurface. click Modify. see the tutorial. under Floor Plans. 5 On the Design Bar. 8 Select the topographic surface. select Copy Internal Points. Using Phasing. RELATED For more information regarding phasing. Using Site Tools | 789 . and click Select and Edit. 4 In the Element Properties dialog box. 3 On the Options Bar. double-click Site. 6 On the Design Bar. select Existing for Phase Created. and click OK. Click OK to set the subregion phase to match the toposurface.

Make sure the pick box allows a significant buffer around the area. The intent is to select all the elevation points inside and around the parking area.Delete elevation points 9 Draw a pick box outside the main parking area as in the following illustration. 10 Press DELETE. demolished. and new. Notice the toposurface displays with different colors representing the different phases: existing. 790 | Chapter 23 Site .

and click Hidden Line.11 On the View Control Bar. specify an Absolute Elevation of 5500 mm. Using Site Tools | 791 . 13 Press DELETE. 15 On the Options Bar. 16 Add elevation points outside the perimeter of the entire parking area and walkway as in the following illustration. click Point. click Model Graphics Style. 12 Draw another pick box around the driveway and remaining parking area as in the following illustration. Place the points until there are no contour lines crossing the parking area or walkway. Add new elevation points 14 On the Design Bar.

19 On the View Control Bar. click Finish Surface. and click Shading with Edges. 792 | Chapter 23 Site . This accounts for the red surface that you see in this view. 20 On the View toolbar. click Model Graphics Style. The phase filter for this view allows both the new and demolished surfaces to display. and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. click View Properties.17 On the Design Bar. click . Delete the demolished toposurface from the project 21 On the View menu. The parking and walkway areas are now elevated and flat. click . 18 On the View toolbar.

click Lines. and click OK. this project file is required in its current state. Using Site Tools | 793 . Adding a Building Pad In this exercise. and click OK. 26 On the File menu. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. sketch an approximate replica of the outline shown in the following illustration. you can pick the exterior walls to define the building pad. click View Properties. Only the components created in or assigned to the Existing phase display in this view. double-click Site. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. under Phasing. under Phasing. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. If you have an existing building model. Only the graded topography displays. Add a building pad to the project 1 In the Project Browser. the Pick Walls command is active. specify Existing for Phase. nor can you add it without first adding a topographic surface. Adding a Building Pad. click Pad. NOTE By default. click Save. Site tutorial-in progress. Because this toposurface is no longer required for this project. it automatically cuts a hole in the toposurface and places it at the depth you specify. 23 Select the toposurface. 4 Using the sketching tools available on the Options Bar. 3 On the Design Bar. 25 In the Element Properties dialog box. you create a building pad.rvt. When you add a building pad. 24 On the View menu. under Floor Plans. only the original toposurface displays. because you assigned it to the Existing phase before grading. A building pad is a toposurface hosted element and cannot be added to any other element. The building pad should border the concrete walkway on the right and the upper parking area. Therefore.22 In the Element Properties dialog box. and delete it. you can delete it. specify New Construction for Phase.

. and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. click pad. click Finish Sketch. 6 On the View Control Bar. and click Shading with Edges. 7 On the View toolbar. Notice the new building 794 | Chapter 23 Site . click 8 On the View toolbar.5 On the Design Bar. . click Model Graphics Style.

6 Use the flip arrows so it displays as shown below and move it toward the lower left corner of the parking area.90 deg. you add parking and planting components to the site surface. click Save. NOTE Make sure you place the parking space a slight distance above the building pad. Site tutorial-in progress. Using Site Tools | 795 . NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. 4 Zoom in on the upper parking area that borders the building pad and add a parking component to the area. this project file is required in its current state. 3 In the Type Selector. click Parking Component. and select the parking space.9 On the File menu. Adding Site Components In this exercise. Add parking components 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Site. Adding Site Components. select M_Parking Space: 4800 x 2400mm . 10 Proceed to the next exercise. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. click Modify.rvt. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. 5 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans.

click 9 On the View toolbar. 12 In the Type Selector. . Notice the new parking Add planting components to the site 10 In the Project Browser. and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. Verify that the spaces are horizontally aligned and the left edge of each space is aligned with the right edge of the previous space. 11 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. click Site Component.7 Add 6 additional parking spaces to the right of the first space. click spaces. and add a tree to each of the two round parking islands as shown below. choose any tree type. . 796 | Chapter 23 Site . under Floor Plans. TIP You could also use the Array tool to accomplish this task. double-click Site. 8 On the View toolbar.

15 On the View toolbar. Using Site Tools | 797 . click . click . and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. 14 On the View toolbar.13 Add some more trees outside the parking area as shown below. Notice how the trees vertically attach to the toposurface.

double-click Site. In the following exercise. Tag site components 1 In the Project Browser. 798 | Chapter 23 Site . and click Apply.rvt. Tagging Site and Parking Components In this exercise. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. this project file is required in its current state. 6 Zoom in to the upper parking area and around the trees. Tagging Site and Parking Components. click Save. under Floor Plans. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. and click OK. 16 On the File menu. 3 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog box. 4 Select the line for the category Planting Tags that uses the loaded tag M_Planting Tag: Boxed. 5 On the View menu. Notice each is tagged with no instance mark. 17 Proceed to the next exercise. you tag the planting and parking components that you added previously. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. click Hidden Line. you use a parking schedule to number the parking spaces. click Tag All Not Tagged. click Apply. the landscape shown in the previous illustration has been rendered. In the following illustration. Site tutorial-in progress.NOTE Plants are displayed as simple geometry unless rendered. select the line for the category Parking Tags that uses the loaded tag M_Parking Tag: Boxed.

7 Under Fields. this project file is required in its current state. 6 Click the Formatting tab. Using Site Tools | 799 . Creating Parking Space Schedules In the final exercise of this tutorial. Create a parking schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. you create a parking schedule. select Parking for Category. If necessary. and under Heading. 8 Proceed to the next exercise. select Mark. 7 On the File menu. and click Add. 4 Under Available fields. Site tutorial-in progress. enter Space. 2 In the New Schedule dialog box.NOTE Site components can also be numbered by clicking the tag number and changing the value. and under Heading. 8 Under Fields. 5 Under Available fields. and click Add. and click OK. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. click Save. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. you can resize the column width by dragging the column edges. enter Size. Creating Parking Space Schedules. select Mark. and click OK. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. click the Fields tab. You can use a parking schedule to report the quantity and area of each type of parking space. click Schedule/Quantities. select Type.rvt. select Type. The parking schedule is displayed.

Notice that the parking spaces in the Site plan update automatically. under Views (all). 12 In the Site plan. under Floor Plans. Also notice that when you place the cursor in the parking schedule. This closes all the views except the parking schedule. 10 In the Project Browser. number the first three spaces consecutively. 11 On the Window menu. 15 On the File menu. finish numbering the remaining spaces. 13 In the Parking Schedule. under Space. click Close Hidden Windows. 14 In the Parking Schedule. under Space. 800 | Chapter 23 Site . zoom in around the upper parking lot where you previously added the parking spaces. click Save. the selected space highlights in the Site plan.9 On the Window menu. This allows you to know which space you are numbering. click Tile. This tiles the Site plan next to the parking schedule. double-click Site.

you can create reusable entities that represent layouts common to many building projects. you also simplify the modification process. It also gives all those with access to the library the ability to load any group from the library into their project drawing. 801 . Because existing groups can be duplicated and then customized for another purpose. You can also nest groups within other groups. and modify repetitive units. creating a library of groups for your office can reduce the amount of work needed to create.Grouping 24 Using the grouping functionality in Autodesk Revit Building. when you make changes to a single instance of a model group. or with those working on a different project. In this tutorial. place. all instances in the building model are updated. By grouping objects. you not only simplify their placement. you create a model group for a typical hotel guest room. This functionality ensures consistency within and across projects. Modifications to the nested group are automatically included in the host group. Saving a group to a library gives you the ability to share the group with other team members working on the same project. and then you create a group for a typical toilet room that is nested within the guest room group. For example. and all new instances that you place contain the modifications.

Placing a Group. classrooms. 3 Draw a rectangle around the populated room. The view is zoomed in to the selected room. chair. You zoom in so that you can select objects in the room accurately. The objects are now grouped and can be placed in the drawing as a single entity. Creating a Group In this exercise. Open the m_Grouping. click Open. and click Save. 2 Enter ZR to zoom to a specific region. Create a group from drawing objects 4 Press and hold CTRL. 9 On the File menu. you learn how to use model groups to collect related elements to simplify placement of repetitive units. expand Groups. In the left pane of the Open dialog box.rvt. click Save As. After you create a model group. and typical office layouts. 7 Right-click Group 1.Creating Groups In this lesson.rvt file located in the Metric folder. 6 In the Project Browser. and two nightstands. you can place instances of the group in the building model using various methods. 8 Enter Typical guest room. 5 On the Edit toolbar. and select the bed. expand Floor Plans. You can also update all instances of a group in the building model by editing a single instance of the group and saving the changes. click . 10 Navigate to your preferred directory. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. and double-click Level 2. 802 | Chapter 24 Grouping . expand Views (all). Specify a view 1 In the Project Browser. and press ENTER. desk. You create the group by selecting drawing objects and grouping them as a single entity. click the Training Files icon. Examples of the types of units for which groups are intended include hotel rooms. name the file Grouping-in progress. you create a model group for a typical hotel room. 11 Proceed to the next exercise. and click Rename. and expand Model.

Placing a Group In this exercise. click . Creating Groups | 803 . Mirror a group 6 In the drawing area.rvt. Grouping-in progress. A second instance of the group is added to the drawing. You also mirror an existing instance of a group. Drag a group into position 3 In the Project Browser. you use drag and drop functionality to place a new instance of a group in the floor plan. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous exercise. click Finish. Modify the origin of a group 1 In the drawing area. using an adjacent wall as the axis of reflection. 4 Snap the origin to the wall intersection below the entry door. 5 On the Options Bar. as shown. 8 Select the wall abutted by the desk and tub of the original instance as the axis of reflection. 2 Drag the group origin to the wall intersection directly below the entry door. 7 On the Edit toolbar. select the group. select the original instance of the group. select Typical guest room and drag it to the room below the original instance of the group.

When you finish the editing routine. Modifying a Group. Modifying a Group In this exercise. 9 On the File menu. 2 On the Options Bar. click Edit Group. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. 1 In the drawing area. all instances of the same group in the drawing are updated. you make changes to a single instance of a group. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous exercise. click Save.You should now have three instances of the Typical guest room group in your model: two with the original orientation and one mirrored. 804 | Chapter 24 Grouping .rvt. Grouping-in progress. select the mirrored instance of the Typical guest room group. as shown.

7 On the Design Bar. 9 Proceed to the next lesson. 8 On the File menu. All instances of the Typical guest room are updated to reflect the change. The new group is considered nested within the host group. click Finish Group. Creating Nested Groups. All other elements in the model are grayed out. 5 Click near the left edge of the desk as the move start point. When you make changes to a nested group. 4 On the Edit toolbar. and is contained in every new instance of the host group that you place in the building model. The edge of the desk is aligned with the exterior wall. Creating Nested Groups In this lesson. the host group is also updated. and select the desk and chair. This ensures that the modifications are propagated when each new instance of the host group is added to the building model and also when each stand-alone instance of the nested group is added. Creating Nested Groups | 805 . 6 Click the exterior wall as the move end point. 3 Press and hold CTRL.The elements in this instance of the group remain displayed in their object style. you create a group that you add to a previously created group. click Save. click .

806 | Chapter 24 Grouping . In the selection. click . When you nest the toilet room in the guest room.Creating a Nested Group In this exercise. and click Rename. 2 On the Edit toolbar. and the wall separating the bathroom and closet. Grouping-in progress.rvt. 3 In the Project Browser. make sure you also include both doors and their host walls. all instances of the host group are updated to contain the nested group. 4 Enter Typical toilet room. select all the elements that make up the toilet room and closet. expand Model. The new group is then nested within the original group. 6 Drag the origin of the group to the intersection of the corridor wall and the guest room wall nearest the tub. Change the origin of a group 5 Select the original instance of Typical guest room. Create a group 1 In the original instance of the Typical guest room group. right-click Group 1. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous lesson. expand Groups. which acts as the host. and press ENTER. you create a group for a toilet room that you add to the guest room group.

and all instances are updated to include the nested group. click Component. Add a component to the model 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. all instances of the nested group are updated in the building model. The elements of the group are grayed out in every instance. When you edit the group to add the component. verify that Multiple is clear. select the Typical toilet room group. 11 On the Design Bar. The Typical toilet room group is nested in the Typical guest room group. Creating Nested Groups | 807 . Modifying a Nested Group In this exercise. 8 On the Design Bar. 13 Proceed to the next exercise.rvt. the host group is also updated so that new instances of either group contain the new component. 10 In the drawing area. click Edit Group. 3 In the drawing area. 12 On the File menu. Grouping-in progress. place the cursor over one of the toilet rooms and press the spacebar three times to rotate the sink to the orientation shown. click Add To Group. Modifying a Nested Group. click Finish Group. everything else is available for selection.Create a nested group 7 On the Options Bar. select m_Pedestal_Sink-3D. click Save. 2 In the Type Selector. you add a component to a single instance of the nested toilet room group. Because the modified group is nested. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous exercise. 9 On the Options Bar.

9 On the Design Bar. 8 On the Options Bar. and select the nested toilet room group. Edit a nested group 6 Move the cursor over the same instance of the toilet room group in which you placed the sink. click Edit Group. click Add To Group. 7 Press TAB. click Modify. 5 On the Design Bar. 11 On the Design Bar. select the sink.4 Place the sink on the wall with the toilet in any instance of the Typical toilet room. click Finish Group. 808 | Chapter 24 Grouping . 10 In the drawing area.

12 On the File menu. Use Project Browser to duplicate a group 1 In the Project Browser. you can then work with it in the context of the new project. and then save the tags as an attached detail group. You then customize the new group for use in the current building model. and click Rename. click Save. When you load the group from the library into a new project. you save it to a library where it can be accessed by other team members for use in other projects. Working with Groups. You also create a detail group in the level 2 floor plan that you add to the building model in a different floor plan view. After you finish the modified group. 2 Right-click Typical guest room 2. A new group definition (Typical guest room 2) is displayed in the Project Browser. Grouping-in progress. 13 Proceed to the next lesson. and press ENTER. because attached detail groups require more manual manipulation.rvt. You work with the attached detail group in a different way than you had previously worked with host and nested groups. but automatically create a new group as part of the process to fix the group. you use the Duplicate command to create a group based on an existing group. having created a group that represents a typical layout. Working with Groups In this lesson. Lastly. Duplicating a Group In this exercise. You then place the new group in the building model. right-click Typical guest room. you work with groups in order to use them in the most efficient manner within and across projects. under Groups. In subsequent exercises. and click Duplicate. Working with Groups | 809 . You use functionality that allows you to not only fix inconsistencies among instances of a group. 3 Enter Corner guest room. you draw an axis of reflection at the midpoint of the building model so that the group is mirrored from its location at the top of the building model to a location at the bottom.All instances of the nested group are updated with the change. You create a group based on an existing group by using the Duplicate command. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous lesson. and customize it so that it fits in the available space and has the correct group nested within it. you add door tags to a group.

Edit a duplicated group 8 In the drawing area. This is because the corner room is smaller than the interior rooms. 11 On the Edit toolbar. 14 Select the toilet room. 5 Click at the upper-right corner of the room. click Finish. 7 After a warning message displays. 6 On the Options Bar. Notice that the desk overlaps the exterior wall. Nest a group 17 In the Project Browser. and select the desk and chair. where the corridor wall and the exterior wall intersect. click OK. 16 Select the same toilet room group. select Corner toilet room. select the Corner guest room group. 13 On the Design Bar. 10 Press and hold CTRL. click Remove From Group. click Edit Group. and press DELETE. click Finish Group. to specify the group origin. click . 9 On the Options Bar. and drag it into the corner guest room. 15 On the Design Bar.Place a duplicated group 4 Drag Corner guest room from the Project Browser to the vacant room in the northwest corner of the building. 810 | Chapter 24 Grouping . 12 Move the desk and chair so that they are within the room.

click Add To Group. click . staying perpendicular to the corridor wall. 25 On the Edit toolbar. TIP To help find the midpoint of the wall. click Save. click Edit Group. 28 Drag the cursor to the left. click 26 On the Options Bar. Creating a Detail Group. 21 On the Design Bar. Mirror along a drawn axis of reflection 24 In the drawing area. for Axis. click Finish to finish placing the group. 27 Click the midpoint of the corridor wall as the start point of the axis of reflection as shown. 29 On the File menu. 22 In the drawing area. enter SM on your keyboard to limit snaps to midpoints. click Finish Group. TIP If a warning appears indicating that there are errors that cannot be ignored. 30 Proceed to the next exercise.Use the inside corner of the exterior wall and the corridor wall as the origin of the group. and click to specify the end point. select the Corner guest room group. select the Corner toilet room group. Working with Groups | 811 . A new instance of the Corner guest room group is added to the southwest corner of the building model. 23 On the Design Bar. past the exterior wall. 20 On the Options Bar. 18 On the Options Bar. click Unjoin Elements to resolve the errors. select the Corner guest room group. 19 In the drawing area.

Draw a filled region 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 5 On the Design Bar. 8 Click in the filled region to specify the leader start point. click to add an arc leader. you sketch and annotate a rectangular filled region that represents an area of tiled flooring in front of the elevators in the building model. 10 Enter Tile. click Text. click Finish Sketch. 812 | Chapter 24 Grouping . 9 Click below the filled region to end the leader and specify the text start point. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous exercise. You can add the detail group to other views of the building model. 3 Click the lower-left endpoint below the elevators as the start point of the rectangle. 4 Move the cursor down and to the right. and select a point on the interior of the vertical wall.rvt. and click Modify on the Design Bar. Add a text note 6 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Filled Region. The text note with arc leader is added to the building model. 7 On the Options Bar. Grouping-in progress. You then save the region and the text note as a detail group.Creating a Detail Group In this exercise. 2 On the Options Bar. click to draw a rectangular region. A rectangular region with a diagonal cross hatch pattern is added in front of the elevator doors.

13 In the Project Browser. click Tag. and click Rename. Grouping-in progress. you add door tags to the Typical toilet room group. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and then use the door tags to create an attached detail group. click Save. Using Attached Detail Groups In this exercise. 12 On the Edit toolbar. and expand Detail. as shown. Working with Groups | 813 . 3 On the Options Bar. double-click Level 2. and press ENTER. select the instance of the Elevator lobby tile group. 4 Place two door tags in the original instance of the Typical toilet room. you must manually attach it to each instance of the Typical toilet room group. 14 Right-click Group 1. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. 17 Move the origin of the group to the corner of the elevator shaft. as shown. click . Modify a group origin 16 In the drawing area. and select the note and the filled region.Create a detail group 11 Press and hold CTRL. Because the detail group contains variables. Add a group instance to a different drawing view 18 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. expand Groups. Place door tags 1 In the Project Browser. 20 On the File menu.rvt. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous lesson. 15 Enter Elevator lobby tile. it cannot be added to a group in the same manner that a drawing component can be added. double-click Level 3. clear Leader. 19 Drag an instance of the Elevator lobby tile group from the Project Browser into the level 3 view. under Floor Plans. Using Attached Detail Groups.

and press ENTER. 9 Right-click Group 1. A warning dialog box is displayed. Create an attached detail group 6 In the drawing area. expand Groups. informing you that an attached detail group has been created for the Typical toilet room group. and expand Typical toilet room. Place a detail group in another group instance 11 Move the cursor over the Typical toilet room group. The new instance of the attached detail group is added at the same relative position and orientation as in the original instance of the model group. press and hold CTRL. 13 In the Attached Detail Group Placement dialog box. 8 In the Project Browser. select Door tags.5 On the Design Bar. 10 Enter Door tags. and select the two door tags. (this group is just below the original instance of the Typical guest room group). press TAB. expand Attached Detail. 814 | Chapter 24 Grouping . and click OK. and select the nested Typical toilet room group. and click Rename. 7 On the Edit toolbar. 12 On the Options Bar. click Place Detail. click Modify. click .

click Save. 7 In the Load Group dialog box. click OK. and click Open. 14 On the File menu. as shown. Load the group in a new project 4 On the File menu.rvg. Sketch walls 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and then drag the cursor so that all the walls in the square are 6000 mm long. Place an instance of the loaded group 12 In the Project Browser. Select the m_Tutorial_Default. click Wall. and expand Model. click OK. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. click Save to Library ➤ Save Group. This enables you to create a library of groups that can be shared with other team members and used on multiple projects. and place it in the upper-right corner of the square. select Typical toilet room for Group To Save. 6 On the File menu. you save a group to a library so that you can use the group in a new project. NOTE Groups containing nested groups cannot be saved. and click Open.NOTE Component instance numbering is sequential. click Load from Library ➤ Load Group. 3 Click Save. click to draw a square. Grouping-in progress. Using groups from a library ensures consistency and increases productivity for projects that reuse similar typical layouts for repetitive units.rte file located in the Metric folder. 10 On the Options Bar. Saving and Loading Groups In this exercise. click the Training Files icon. click Browse. Working with Groups | 815 . navigate to the directory where you saved the group. expand Groups. In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog box. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous lesson. drag it into the drawing area. ■ ■ ■ In the New Project dialog box. 11 In the drawing area. 2 In the Save Group dialog box. 5 In the New Project dialog box. click New ➤ Project. 8 In the Duplicate Types dialog box. select Typical toilet room. therefore. Saving and Loading Groups. under Template file. click to specify the start point of the square.rvt. 13 Select Typical toilet room. the doors are numbered based upon the order in which you placed each group. Save a group to a library 1 On the File menu.

so it is important to place the group accurately in order to use the walls you sketched. click Save. except for the wall-hosted component for which there is no wall. the software gives you the option of fixing the inconsistency by creating a new group. Because one of the wall-hosted components in the group does not have a wall in the mirrored group. Automatically Creating a Group. 16 Enter Loaded_Group for File name. The toilet and the tub are wall-hosted components whose hosts are not part of the group. Loaded_Group. 14 On the Options Bar. 1 In the drawing area. Automatically Creating a Group In this exercise. and click Save. 17 Proceed to the next exercise. The Typical toilet room model group is added to the new project. you mirror the instance of the Typical toilet room group you added to the new project in the previous exercise. 2 On the Edit toolbar. 15 On the File menu. The new group is created automatically and contains the same components as the existing group. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous exercise. click Finish. select the instance of Typical toilet room.IMPORTANT Be sure to line up the outline of the group with the exterior surface of the walls. 3 Select the wall shared by the toilet and the sink as the axis of reflection. 816 | Chapter 24 Grouping . click .

6 On the Design Bar. 5 In the Fix Inconsistent Groups dialog box.Because there is no wall to host the tub in the mirrored instance. and click OK. The tub component is not included in the new group because there is no wall to host it. click Close. and a new group (Typical toilet room 2) is created. Working with Groups | 817 . 4 In the warning dialog box. a warning dialog box is displayed. click Fix Groups. click Create new group types. The Typical toilet room model group is mirrored. 7 On the File menu. click Modify. Click Yes when prompted to save the drawing.

818 | Chapter 24 Grouping .

and beams to Level 1. you copy the entire structure and use the paste-align command to add the structure to the three levels above it. 819 .Structural 25 In this tutorial. you use the structural tools in Autodesk Revit Building to create a building model skeleton. In the final lesson. After completing level 1. You begin by adding the structural walls. columns. you create framing elevations and add structural braces to the building model.

click Open. You use an imported DWG file as an underlay to trace the initial outline of the structural walls. You then sketch additional walls to which you add dimensions and constraints. Open the m_Structural. 820 | Chapter 25 Structural .rvt file located in the Metric folder. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. you add structural walls to a project file where only the grid lines have been added. The DWG file contains walls that you trace in the next exercise to create the structural walls. Importing a DWG for Use as an Underlay In this exercise. you import a DWG file into the Level 2 floor plan. click the Training Files icon.Adding Structural Walls In this lesson. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu.

click Import/Link ➤ DWG.dwg from the Metric folder. This file is used in the next exercise. click the Training Files icon. This project file is required for all subsequent exercises in this tutorial. select Automatically place. go to the Project Browser. 7 Click Open. select Invert colors. 8 On the File menu. expand Views (all). specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Link (instead of import). you use the linked DWG file to trace the initial set of structural walls. verify that the Level 2 floor plan is open. to trace the initial set of structural walls. 2 On the File menu. 3 In the left pane of the Import/Link dialog box. DXF. 5 Under Layer/Level Colors. 4 In the Import/Link dialog box. 6 Under Positioning. you turn off the visibility of the DWG file. expand Floor Plans. and select m_wall-import. Select All for Layers. click Save As. Adding Structural Walls | 821 . Sketching Structural Walls In this exercise. Sketching Structural Walls. under Import or Link. SAT. In this exercise.rvt. and select Origin to origin.Import the DWG file 1 Before importing the DWG file. you imported a DWG file. After you trace the walls. DGN. 9 Navigate to a folder of your choice and save the project as Structural_tutorial. The DWG file is displayed on the Level 2 floor plan. If necessary. and double-click Level 2. Select Current view only. and add the remaining structural walls to the building model.

their Structural Usage parameter is automatically set to Bearing.Dataset This exercise requires the project file. you can add a structural wall by specifying the depth of the wall. 5 In the Type Selector. Right-click the Design Bar. First. 3 Draw a zoom region around the upper set of lines. In addition. click Structural Wall. Display the Structural tab of the Design Bar 1 If the Structural tab already displays on the Design Bar. proceed to Step 2. select Basic Wall: Generic . 822 | Chapter 25 Structural . and click Structural. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. 4 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. Structural_tutorial. rather than the height. Sketch structural walls by tracing the DWG 2 On the View menu. This requires the bottom of the primary view range to be set to the level below in order to see the walls as you sketch them.200mm. Structural walls differ from non-structural walls in several ways.

and click to specify the wall endpoint. Select Finish Face: Exterior for Loc Line.6 On the Options Bar. 10 Move the cursor to the right. Click . In the steps that follow. specify the following: ■ ■ Select Depth. and click to specify the next wall endpoint. Adding Structural Walls | 823 . 8 Move the cursor over the top right intersection of the line. Specify Level 1. you sketch a chain of walls over the path highlighted in the following illustration. ■ ■ ■ Select Chain. 7 Begin the first wall by selecting the intersection of the upper left corner of the line chain. and click the next line intersection. 9 Move the cursor downward to the next line intersection.

824 | Chapter 25 Structural . Use the tools to modify 14 In the Project Browser. 13 On the View toolbar. and double-click Level 2. 15 Zoom around the second chain of lines. and click to complete the chain of walls. 12 On the Design Bar. in the View toolbar. click Modify to finish the sketch. expand Floor Plans. click . TIP If necessary. expand Views (all). you can spin the model in a 3D view by clicking the 3D view.11 Move the cursor to the top of the line chain until a reference plane displays indicating the cursor is on a parallel plane with the slanted wall on the left.

■ Begin the wall chain by clicking the lower left intersection where the end of the line chain adjoins grid C. click . click Structural Wall.16 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 17 Using the bulleted steps below. On the Options Bar. Adding Structural Walls | 825 . Click each exterior line intersection in a clockwise direction. notice that the wall options you used previously are still selected. sketch a chain of walls over the path highlighted in the following illustration. 19 On the View toolbar. you may want to zoom in to ensure you select the intersection of the imported lines and grid C. ■ ■ 18 On the Design Bar. click Modify to end the wall chain. When you reach the endpoint on the lower right corner of the chain.

■ ■ ■ Select the endpoint of the left vertical wall. click . Click to create a three-point arc. and click OK. 23 Under Visibility. Move the cursor upward and specify an arc radius of 180 degrees. 25 In the Type Selector. Select Wall Centerline for Loc Line. double-click Level 2. This is the right extent of the arc. click the Imported Categories tab.Turn off the DWG visibility 20 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. clear m_wall-import.dwg. 26 On the Options Bar. Sketch additional structural walls 24 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 28 On the Options Bar. select Basic Wall: Generic .200mm. This is the left extent of the arc. ■ 27 Follow the sequence of steps in the illustration below to add a 180 degree three point arc. click Visibility/Graphics. 22 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog box. click Structural Wall. 826 | Chapter 25 Structural . Select the right endpoint of the horizontal wall. Unselected categories are not visible in the referenced view. 21 On the View menu. specify the following: ■ ■ Clear Chain.

29 Add a horizontal wall beginning at the midpoint of the left vertical wall as shown. click Modify. click the value. If it is not. Adding Structural Walls | 827 . and press ENTER. enter 1500. 33 Select the vertical wall you added in the previous step and make sure the temporary dimension between the wall and the centerline of the left vertical wall is equal to 1500 mm. 30 Move the cursor to the right until it intersects with the slanted wall on the right. 31 Add a vertical wall between the two horizontal walls as shown. 32 On the Design Bar.

36 On the Design Bar. click Structural Wall and on the Options Bar. 828 | Chapter 25 Structural . click the temporary dimension value between it and grid C. enter 1500. In the steps that follow. you create the final structural walls for the project.34 Select the lower horizontal wall. and press ENTER. Create the final structural walls 37 Begin the first wall on the endpoint shown in the illustration below. Both walls are 1200 mm long. 35 Zoom around the upper set of walls as shown. clear Chain.

38 Draw the 1200 mm wall parallel to the adjoining wall as shown. Adding Structural Walls | 829 . Begin the wall at the top of the right vertical wall and draw it inward so that it is parallel with the wall you sketched in the previous steps. click . 40 On the Design Bar. 39 Create an additional 1200 mm wall as shown. click Modify. 41 On the View toolbar.

to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial. 2 Zoom around the lower set of walls.42 On the File menu. 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. you add dimensions and equality constraints to the walls. click Save. Add an aligned dimension 1 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. you used the DWG file to trace the initial set of structural walls. You then make minor modifications to their position. Dimensioning and Modifying Walls. Dataset This exercise requires the project file.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. double-click Level 2. 830 | Chapter 25 Structural . You also reposition the walls to see how they adapt to changes in the design. Structural_tutorial. After turning off the visibility of the linked DWG. In this exercise. in its current state. you dimension the structural walls and add an equality constraint to the dimension to keep the walls equidistant. In the next exercise. click Dimension. you added the remaining structural walls required for this building model. This project file is required. Dimensioning and Modifying Walls In this exercise.

Create an equality constraint 7 On the Design Bar. and when it highlights. Adding Structural Walls | 831 . click Options to specify the wall pick options. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Select . In the Auto Dimension Options dialog box. Select Wall Centerlines for Prefer. ■ ■ 5 Move the cursor over the left vertical wall. Select Entire Walls for Pick. 8 Select the dimension you added in the previous steps.4 On the Options Bar. 6 Move the cursor to the left. After you select Entire Walls. and click to place the dimension as shown. select Intersecting Walls. click Modify. select it. the Options button becomes available. On the Options Bar. and click OK.

9 Click the EQ symbol to make each of the segments equal. 832 | Chapter 25 Structural . and enter 4000 for the distance between the wall centerline and grid B. 11 Click the temporary dimension value. Modify wall position 10 Select the upper horizontal wall as shown.

click Undo Edit dimension length. you added a dimension to the structural walls and used an equality constraint to keep the walls equidistant. and purlins to complete the Level 1 structure. Adding Structural Columns and Beams | 833 .Notice the horizontal walls remain equally spaced. You also repositioned the walls and observed how they adapted to the change in the design. 12 On the Edit menu. In the next lesson. to continue with the next lesson in this tutorial. Adding Structural Columns and Beams. joists. in its current state. This project file is required. 13 On the File menu. you add structural columns. Adding Structural Columns and Beams In this lesson. you add structural columns and different beam types to the building model. click Save. In this exercise. several different beam types.

you rotate columns by pressing the SPACEBAR when necessary. TIP When adding the column. 6 Add a column to C1 as shown. 3 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. select Height. Structural_tutorial. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. if the column orientation is not similar to the callout shown below.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. you use the grid intersection tool. double-click Level 1. If necessary. press the SPACEBAR to rotate the column. 5 On the Options Bar. In addition. and Level 2. Add columns to grid intersections manually 1 In the Project Browser. and you place a column outside of the grids.Adding Structural Columns In this exercise. 4 In the Type Selector. under Floor Plans. you use several different methods to add structural columns: you manually select grid intersections. 2 On the View menu. select M_W-Wide Flange-Column: W250x80. zoom in to place the column. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. 834 | Chapter 25 Structural . click Structural Column.

TIP To create the crossing selection. click Grid Intersection. Add columns using selected grid intersections 8 On the Options Bar.7 Add similar columns to C2. and drag your cursor up and to the left as shown below. specify a point under grid A and to the right of grid 5. and C5. C3. and select grids 1-5. 9 Use a crossing selection. and A. Adding Structural Columns and Beams | 835 . This option allows you to place columns at the intersections of selected column grids.

10 Notice columns are added to A1-5. 14 If necessary. All of the columns on grid A rotate until they are parallel with the vertical grids. Columns A3-5 are shown below. zoom out until you can see all the grids. Rotate the columns 11 Press the SPACEBAR. 15 On the Options Bar. 13 Press the SPACEBAR until the columns return to their original position. 12 Press the SPACEBAR again. click Finish. This completes this set of columns. 836 | Chapter 25 Structural . Notice the columns rotate until they are parallel with grid A.

That is why you finished the first set and then reentered the grid intersection mode to add columns B1-5. The column should be 4200 mm to the left of grid 5.Add columns B1-5 16 On the Options Bar. press the SPACEBAR to rotate them. 19 On the Options Bar. click Modify. 18 If the columns are not aligned as in the illustration below. the columns on A1-5 do not rotate. Although you could have added columns B1-5 with the first set of columns. 24 On the Design Bar. click Grid Intersection. click Modify. 21 Select column A5 and delete it. B3-5 are shown below. TIP Notice that as you rotate these columns using the SPACEBAR. Adding Structural Columns and Beams | 837 . you could not have rotated them independently of each other. 20 On the Design Bar. 17 Create a crossing selection that includes B1-5. click Structural Column. Add a column outside of the grid 22 On the Design Bar. and 6900 mm below the exterior face of the horizontal wall above it. 23 Add a M_W-Wide Flange-Column: W250x80 between B4 and C5. click Finish.

and use the grid tools to add beams automatically. Different structural conditions exist within the building model that require specific beam conditions.25 On the View toolbar. Start the beam at the column and move your cursor up until it connects with the wall. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial. you add structural beams to the building model. To add a beam using point-to-point insertion. and you rotate the columns using the SPACEBAR. Adding Structural Beams and Girders. As you use the beam tool. 2 On the View menu. expand Floor Plans. expand Views (all). you learn how to work with these varied conditions. click Beam. 4 In the Type Selector. in its current state. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. you add beams manually. In this exercise. double-click Level 2. 3 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. you specify the start and endpoint of the beam. 838 | Chapter 25 Structural . you used various methods to add structural columns. click Save. 5 Zoom around the right side of the building model. 26 On the File menu. Add beams using point-to-point insertion 1 In the Project Browser. In the next exercise. 6 Add a beam between the column shown below and the horizontal wall above it. Structural_tutorial. click . Adding Structural Beams and Girders In this exercise. This project file is required. Dataset This exercise requires the project file.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. select M_W-Wide Flange: W310x67.

click Beam. select Girder for Usage.7 On the Design Bar. select M_W-Wide Flange: W310x32.7. 8 Zoom around the upper set of walls as shown. click Modify. and then move the cursor up to grid A. 9 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 11 On the Options Bar. 12 Add a beam between the midpoint of the structural wall shown and grid A. Adding Structural Columns and Beams | 839 . 10 In the Type Selector. TIP Select the midpoint of the wall first.

the Structural Usage parameter is automatically set to Girder. 840 | Chapter 25 Structural . the Structural Usage parameter of each beam is automatically specified depending on the join conditions. For example. When you use the grid tool to place beams. 15 Create a crossing selection that includes grids 1 and 2. select M_W-Wide Flange: W310x67. Use the following table for other conditions.Use the grid tool to add beams between columns 13 In the Type Selector. if a beam is joined column-to-column. click Grid. 14 On the Options Bar. Column Brace Ho o tal riz n Bracing Other Girder Joist Purlin Other Column* Girder Horizontal Bracing Other Horizontal Bracing Girder Joist Purlin Other Brace Horizontal Brace Girder Joist Purlin Other Other Other Horizontal Bracing Joist Other Horizontal Bracing Joist Purlin Other Horizontal Bracing Purlin Purlin Purlin Other Other Other Other Other Other *Structural walls produce the same result as columns.

click Modify. 22 In the Type Selector. select M_W-Wide Flange: W310x67. press and hold CTRL. click Finish. 23 On the Options Bar. Adding Structural Columns and Beams | 841 . 18 On the Design Bar. 24 Select grid 3. click Beam. enter 8200. 17 On the Options Bar. 19 Zoom in the upper-right quadrant of the building model.16 Notice that beams are added at the grids and connected to each column. 21 On the Design Bar. Add beams to an intersecting structural wall 20 Select the structural wall that spans grids 3 and 4. and select grid C. click the temporary dimension value. and press ENTER. click Grid.

Click the intersection of grid 5 and the structural wall as shown to add the final beam in the chain. select Chain. refer to the following steps and illustration to add two beams to grid 5. select Girder. notice that beams connect to the structural walls that intersect grids. 28 On the Options Bar. 842 | Chapter 25 Structural . In addition. Press ESC to end the chain. 27 Using point-to-point insertion. Add a chain of beams 26 On the Options Bar. 25 On the Options Bar. click Finish. ■ ■ ■ ■ Click column C5 to start the beam chain.Notice beams are added between columns. Click column B5 to add the first beam. select Girder for Usage. and for Usage.

Press ESC to end the chain.29 Add a beam between A4 and the structural wall that intersects grid 4 as shown. 35 Zoom around the beam between A3-4. to snap only to intersections. Add beams that intersect other beams 32 On the Options Bar. 30 On the Options Bar. click Grid. SI. click Finish. make sure you select the intersection of the grid lines. and ending with the structural wall that intersects grid 4 as shown. connecting the column at B4. 34 On the Options Bar. 33 Select grid A. Adding Structural Columns and Beams | 843 . You may need to zoom in significantly to accomplish this. 31 Add a chain of beams beginning with the end of the structural wall at C4. You can also use the shortcut key. select Girder for Usage. Press ESC to end the chain. NOTE When you begin the beam chain at C4.

7 beam that intersects it perpendicularly.7 beam had crossed grid A. it would have become the supporting beam because it was placed first. If the W310x32. 37 Select grid B. 36 On the Options Bar. click Finish. 844 | Chapter 25 Structural . click . and the W310x67 beam spanning A3-4 would have been two separate beams.The W310x67 beam spanning A3-4 supports the W310x32. 39 On the View toolbar. 38 On the Options Bar. click Grid.

41 Zoom around the upper structural walls between A4-5. double-click Level 2. select M_Concrete-Rectangular Beam: 200 x 500mm. select Girder for Usage. 45 Specify the beam start point at the centerline and endpoint of the short wall segment adjacent to grid 4 as shown below. 46 Move the cursor to the right. click Modify. enter SE (shortcut key for endpoints). 47 On the Design Bar. click Beam. you use point-to-point insertion to add the beam between the two short wall segments that adjoin grids 4 and 5. 48 On the View toolbar.Add a concrete beam 40 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. Adding Structural Columns and Beams | 845 . and click the endpoint of the short wall segment adjacent to grid 5 as shown below. In the steps that follow. click . 42 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 44 On the Options Bar. 43 In the Type Selector.

Notice the concrete beam you added in the previous step. and click when it intersects grid 2. 54 Begin the beam chain by selecting the intersection of the wall centerline and grid 3. 55 Move the cursor to the left and parallel to the wall and grid A. double-click Level 2. select Girder. and select Chain. 53 On the Options Bar. In the steps that follow. Add remaining girders 49 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. 846 | Chapter 25 Structural . click Beam. 50 Zoom around the A1-B3 region. you add two W310x67 beams parallel to the wall that intersects grid 3. for Usage. select M_W-Wide Flange: W310x67. 51 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 52 In the Type Selector.

and click when it intersects grid 1. 57 On the View toolbar. Adding Structural Columns and Beams | 847 . Press ESC twice to end the beam placement mode.56 Move the cursor to the left and parallel to the wall. click .

Structural Framing. You used the grid tool to add beams to selected grids and learned how varied structural conditions affect the outcome of the automatically placed beams. 2 Zoom around the A1 . you added beams and girders using the point-to-point insertion method. when you use the automatic beam tool to add beams between joists. while allowing the automatic beam tool to assign the Structural Usage parameter value depending on the join conditions. In this exercise. Do not worry about the exact placement at this time. in its current state. Adding Joists and Purlins In this exercise. click Beam. click W310x32. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. You begin by adding W-Wide Flange joists. click Save. You also add joists and purlins to the building model. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial.7. Add the beam a few feet to the right of grid 1. For example. the structural usage of the beams is automatically set to purlin. Adding Joists and Purlins. In the next exercise. 848 | Chapter 25 Structural . M_W-Wide Flange. This project file is required. 3 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. 5 Add one beam between the A1-2 girder and the parallel girder below it. Structural_tutorial. under Floor Plans. you add joists. You then create a joist array.B3 quadrants. Add a W-Wide Flange joist 1 In the Project Browser. under Families.58 On the File menu. and purlins to the building model. you replace some of the existing girders with trusses. and their display within the plan view adjusts accordingly. double-click Level 2. 4 In the Project Browser.

6 On the Design Bar. click on the Options Bar. notice that the Structural Usage parameter value is Joist. The beam needs to be 1250 mm right of grid 1. click Array. This value was set automatically because when you created the beam. 7 Select the beam you added in the previous steps. 10 Click OK. 8 With the beam selected. Adding Structural Columns and Beams | 849 . according to the table shown at the beginning of this lesson. In addition. any beam added between two girders becomes a joist when the Automatic option is selected. Create a joist array 11 On the Edit menu. the Automatic option was selected by default in the Options Bar. Modify the temporary dimension value if necessary. click Modify. 9 In the Element Properties dialog box.

specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click . 13 Enter SI to snap only to intersections. 14 Click the intersection of the upper extent of the joist and grid A as shown to specify the array start point. Clear Group and Associate.12 On the Options Bar. This creates an array of 14 joists that are parallel to grid A. Once the direction is set. 850 | Chapter 25 Structural . Select 2nd for Move to. Enter 14 for Number. Make sure the cursor is over grid A. enter 1250 and press ENTER. 15 Move the cursor to the right and parallel to grid A.

7 beam from the midpoint of the first joist to the right of grid 2 that stretches perpendicularly to the next joist on the right as shown. click Beam. 17 Add a W310x32. 18 Zoom in around the area surrounding the purlin. Adding Structural Columns and Beams | 851 .Add purlins 16 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar.

852 | Chapter 25 Structural . Clear Group and Associate. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click . Their display in plan view is dependent on their Structural Usage value. click Array. 21 On the Options Bar. 19 Select the purlin you created in the previous steps. Select 2nd for Move to. NOTE You can control the structural framing line weight. Enter 7 for Number. and purlins. style. and color within the Object Styles dialog box. 23 Move the cursor to the endpoint of the next joist on the right. 20 On the Edit menu. 22 Click the endpoint of the left joist as shown. This is the array start point. joists.Notice the difference between the line weights and patterns of the girders. and click.

27 On the Options Bar. 26 In the Filter dialog box. click . click . clear all options except Structural Framing. and create a crossing selection that includes all the structural framing members in this portion of the view. and click OK. Turn on connection symbol visibility 24 Zoom in around the structural framing below A1-2. 25 On the Options Bar. Adding Structural Columns and Beams | 853 .The purlins array along the midpoints of the joists.

to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial. change the following instance parameters: ■ ■ ■ Select Moment Connection Last Select Moment Connection First Click OK. you create new levels. in its current state. 30 On the View toolbar. click Modify. click Save. This project file is required. you create new levels and copy the level one structure to the upper levels of the building model. and adjust the view until it resembles the image below. This technique saves significant design time and ensures consistency on each level.28 In the Element Properties dialog box. 29 On the Design Bar. In the next lesson. 854 | Chapter 25 Structural . and notice the connection symbols display. Copying Level 1 Structure to Upper Levels. In this exercise. You then copy the entire structure that you have designed up to this point and use the paste-align command to create the structure on the upper levels. Copying Level 1 Structure to Upper Levels In this lesson. click . 31 On the File menu. you added different joist types and allowed the automatic beam tool to assign the Structural Usage parameter value depending on the join conditions.

You need at least 3 meters of space. Create three new levels 1 In the Project Browser. 6 Sketch the new level line 3000 mm above Level 2 as shown below using the following steps: ■ ■ ■ Click the level line starting point 3000 mm above the left extent of Level 2. 5 On the Options Bar. 4 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. you create several new levels. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. and double-click Building Elevation.Defining New Levels In this exercise. click Level. Copying Level 1 Structure to Upper Levels | 855 . 3 Drag the upper grid control up to move the grid heads out of the way of the new levels.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. Structural_tutorial. 2 Select grid 1. These levels are required in the next exercise where you copy the existing structural components to the new levels. select Make Plan View. Move the cursor over the right extent of Level 2. Click to add Level 3. under Views (all). expand Elevations.

Each level is 3000 mm high. This project file is required. where you copy the structural elements and paste align them to the new levels. This technique saves you significant time compared to manually recreating the design on each level. Duplicating the Existing Design.In the Project Browser. you copy the structural elements and use the paste-align command to add them to the new levels. 8 On the File menu. click Save. These levels that are required in the next exercise.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. you created three new levels. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial. in its current state. Copy the structural elements 1 On the View toolbar. In this exercise. Duplicating the Existing Design In this exercise. 856 | Chapter 25 Structural . Structural_tutorial. click . notice that the Level 3 floor plan is displayed. 7 Repeat the steps above to create Levels 4 and 5 as shown.

Copying Level 1 Structure to Upper Levels | 857 . click OK. Although you can select and copy the components from any view. it is often easier and more certain to copy from a 3D view if your intent is to select the entire building model. Paste the structural components on the new levels 4 On the Design Bar. select Level 2. click Modify. press and hold CTRL.2 Draw a selection box around the entire design. 6 In the Select Levels dialog box. click Modify. 5 On the Edit menu. 8 On the Design Bar. click Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. click Copy to Clipboard. 3 On the Edit menu. Make sure the entire building model is included. 7 In the Select Levels dialog box. and select Levels 3 and 4.

Creating a Framing Elevation In this exercise. You use this elevation view in the next exercise to place structural braces. You copied the Level 1 structure elements and use the paste-align command to create the structure on the upper levels. you create a framing elevation in order to provide a view in which to place structural bracing members. This project file is required. Adding Braces in a Framing Elevation. click Save. 10 On the File menu. In this exercise. You then add C-channel bracing to one level and array it to the remaining levels. In the next lesson. double-click Building Elevation. you create a framing elevation. Adding Braces in a Framing Elevation In this lesson.9 In the Project Browser under Elevations. 858 | Chapter 25 Structural . you create a framing elevation in order to add structural braces. in its current state. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial.

under Floor Plans. click Modify. 4 Place the cursor over grid C. Create a framing elevation 1 In the Project Browser. click Framing Elevation. double-click Level 2. make sure Attach to Grid is selected.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. and click. Adding Braces in a Framing Elevation | 859 . 2 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. at the midpoint between grids 2 and 3. 5 On the Design Bar. You can now view the new elevation.Dataset This exercise requires the project file. in the Project Browser. Structural_tutorial. 3 On the Options Bar. 6 Double-click the elevation head in order to open the view. Elevation 1-a.

in its current state. Structural_tutorial. Adding Structural Braces. In the next exercise. You are ready to add the structural braces. Adding Structural Braces In the final exercise of this tutorial. click Save. you add c-channel bracing to the building model. You then array the braces to the remaining levels. This is because the Detail Level of this view is automatically set to coarse. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. 7 On the File menu. In this exercise.Notice the stick framing representation. You begin by adding a set of braces to level 4. you add structural braces to the building model.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. Also notice that grid 3 is identified within the view. This project file is required. 860 | Chapter 25 Structural . you created an elevation view design specifically to add structural braces. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial.

5 Enter SM and click the midpoint of the girder located on Level 5. ■ ■ SM: Snap only to midpoints of objects. select the view crop box. NOTE If necessary. drag the left and right extents until you can see the grid heads for 2 and 3 as shown. SE: Snap only to endpoints of objects. 3 In the Type Selector. select M_C-Channel: C75x7. select the grids and drag the grid heads above level 5. and using the shape grips. you should use the following snap shortcut keys when applicable. 2 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. When adding the braces. click Brace. you use point-to-point insertion.4. 4 Enter SE and click the beam endpoint at the intersection of grid 2 and Level 4. Because it is often necessary to make sure you snap to the endpoints and midpoints. Adding Braces in a Framing Elevation | 861 .Expand the view extents 1 Before adding the braces.

6 Enter SM and click the midpoint of the girder located on Level 5. 7 Enter SE and click the beam endpoint at the intersection of grid 3 and Level 4. click Modify. click Array. 13 Click the intersection of Level 4 and grid 2 to specify the array endpoint. Enter 4 for Number. Clear Group and Associate. 862 | Chapter 25 Structural . 10 On the Edit menu. Array the braces 8 On the Design Bar. The second brace is displayed. 12 Click the intersection of Level 5 and grid 2 to specify the array start point. Select Constrain. The braces are arrayed to Level 1. Select 2nd for Move to. 11 On the Options Bar. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click .The brace displays. 9 Select both braces on Level 4.

Adding Braces in a Framing Elevation | 863 .14 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. click . click Tag All Not Tagged. 15 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog box. 16 On the View toolbar. select Structural Framing Tags.

you added structural braces to the design and created a brace array. click Save. In this exercise. 864 | Chapter 25 Structural .17 On the File menu.

Using Worksharing. A workset is a collection of building elements. you can borrow that element without requiring the workset owner to relinquish control of the entire workset. floors. such as walls. In this tutorial. You can enable Worksharing for any project. 865 . stairs. They can update their local files at any time in order to see the changes other team members have published. architects commonly work in teams with each person assigned to a specific functional area. however.Sharing Projects 26 When working with large building projects. doors. team members adding and changing elements in worksets can save their work to a local file on the network or their own hard drive and publish work to a central file whenever they choose. they cannot make changes to it. Only one user can edit each workset at a given time. called Worksharing. This involves simultaneously working on and saving different portions of the project at the same time. and so on. This prevents possible conflicts within the project. All other team members can view this workset. you learn how to use Worksharing to divide a project into worksets so multiple users can access the project and have all their changes coordinated by Autodesk Revit Building®. If you need to modify an element that belongs to a workset that someone else is actively working on.

When planning a Worksharing-enabled project The decisions you make when sharing a project and setting up its worksets can have long-lasting effects on the project team. you learn how to work as an individual with the central and local project files. After the project is shared. Any new model elements are automatically assigned to the active workset. you can only make changes to the worksets that are editable by you. You can improve the display-related performance of Revit Building by opening only those worksets required for your work. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals In this conceptual exercise. ■ Project size The size of your building may affect the way you decide to segment the worksets for your team. This reduces the time it takes to open the file and the amount of memory it uses. Elements specific to a view. This includes how to plan and execute the use of worksets in a project in order to maximize project and team performance. and click Editable. Unlike AutoCAD Xrefs. 866 | Chapter 26 Sharing Projects . In the lessons and exercises that follow. Increasing performance using selective open When opening a Worksharing-enabled project. are automatically assigned to the view workset of the current view. you could create separate worksets for a set of building elements that will only appear on one floor. go to the Worksets dialog box. Elements in closed worksets are not read from disk until they are required. You learn what to consider before enabling and using Worksharing. You gain valuable practical experience setting up a project for worksets and working within that project. Instead. Working in a shared project In a shared project. You can change the workset assignment of any modeling element within the property dialog box for that element. When setting up Worksharing. you may want to create separate worksets for each portion. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing application. Using Worksharing in a Project In this lesson. you should take several considerations into account: General Considerations: ■ ■ ■ ■ Project size Team size Team member roles Default workset visibility You can maximize long-term project performance more easily if you plan Worksharing appropriately and use the feature correctly. select the desired workset. you should separate the project into worksets that allow team members to work without interfering with each other. If you only need to modify a single element within a workset that someone else has checked out. you learn some of the strategies that maximize your use of worksets. you specify an active workset. such as annotations and dimensions. To make a workset editable. When you are working on a shared project. you must first enable Worksharing. After learning the fundamentals. Establishing practical policies on how all team members access and create new worksets in the project will maintain performance for existing users and ease the process of introducing new team members to the project. each building element in the project is contained in exactly one workset. a dialog box displays allowing you to set up the initial sharing of the project. You then learn how to work within a Worksharing-enabled project with multiple users and borrow particular elements from other users. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing. use Element Borrowing. you enable Worksharing within a project and set up the initial workset environment.Overview Sharing a project for the first time To share a project. If the project floor plan is so large that you need to split it with match lines to fit it on sheets. You learn the basic steps of project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios. such as a tenant interior. You can close or open worksets at any time using the Worksets dialog box. In the next exercise. The first time you activate worksets within a project. you do not need to make separate worksets for each floor of the building. Each workset can only be editable by one user at a time. In a multi-story structure. you can select which worksets are open or closed.

Experience has shown that. the project coordinator should create the additional worksets required by the team. you can turn off the visibility of that workset within that view. for a typical project. If you are sure that the elements of a particular workset should not appear in a view. Generally. the central file is not a file that a team member would open and work in directly. if a workset named Interior was created. Long-term performance is improved if new worksets are not visible by default unless they need to be. a Worksets tab displays on the Visibility/Graphics dialog box.■ Team size You should take into consideration the size of the project team at the time you enable Worksharing. you decide whether or not the elements in that workset are visible by default in each view. In most projects. Step 3: Create additional worksets After enabling Worksharing. the file is saved as the central file. the optimum number of worksets is approximately four for each team member. Step 5: Create the central file The first time you save a project after Worksharing has been enabled. with each assigned a specific functional task. ■ Conceptual stages of project sharing The following steps explain the basic stages of project sharing. Regardless of the default setting. Default workset visibility After a project has been shared. Team size usually increases as the project progresses from the design stage to the documentation stage. The central file coordinates and propagates the changes of each user and keeps track of which worksets are available. Using Worksharing in a Project | 867 . The building model should also reach a reasonable point of development before you enable Worksharing. ■ Team member roles Typically. As new members create worksets for their own use. remember to create worksets for functional roles and properly assign default visibility. each team member has control over a portion of the design. A typical scenario for a multi-story commercial building is shown in the following illustration. Notice that the workset names refer to functional roles. you control workset visibility on a per view basis. and View worksets. you can change the visibility setting in the Visibility/Graphics dialog box. You should have at least one workset for each person. When you create a new workset. Step 2: Activate Worksharing After the building model is ready for multiple user access. Step 4: Subdivide the building model into worksets After you have created the initial worksets. designers work in teams. Therefore. you must assign building model elements to their respective workset. greater subdivision improves workflow by reducing interference between team members. Step 1: Start the project with one user One user starts to work on the project. it is essential that you save the central file to a location accessible to all team members. make sure visibility defaults are set appropriately. For example. not including the Project Standards. you would want to assign the interior walls and other interior components to that workset. This allows Revit Building to display the view faster because computing time is not spent figuring out if the element belongs to a workset that should be displayed. Shared Levels and Grids. When creating the new worksets. This project file should incorporate as many office/project standards as possible and it should include many of the families required by the project. the worksets they add often do not need to be visible by default. TIP As new team members create new worksets for their own use. On this tab. the project coordinator should enable Worksharing. By subdividing the project based on these task roles.

and then save the local file. In this situation. If you choose Editable at Risk and the owner of the at-risk workset has already published their files to the central file. you can make the workset Editable at Risk. Local files are user-specific and can only be accessed by the users that created them. you should use it only when: ■ You do not intend to save your changes back to the central file. When you save to the central file. Step 10: Saving your changes As you work on the project throughout the day. you should relinquish any worksets that you no longer need. ■ If you realize that you need to modify elements in a workset that you did not make editable before going remote. you can still work remotely as an individual and as a team. You create a local file by opening the central file and using “Save As” to create a local copy of the central file. If the owner of the at-risk workset agrees to relinquish editability of the contested workset. you can shorten the time required to open the file by selecting to open only the worksets required to complete your assigned tasks. within the local file. Tips and common scenarios 1 When working on a Worksharing-enabled project. Step 11: Closing a local file At the end of a work session. In this instance. each user saves their changes back to the central file where the changes can be propagated to all team members. make any required worksets editable. if you know who checked out the required workset. You can modify any elements in an editable workset and all new elements are added to the active workset. you work no differently then you would in the office. you should save the file locally and to the central file at regular intervals. you can select which workset is active. This gives you the right to make changes to the elements in the workset and to add to the workset. There is no limit to the number of worksets you can have editable at one time. Step 7: Open worksets Whenever you open a central or local file. you will lose the changes you made to all your worksets. Step 8: Check out worksets from the central file When you “check out” a workset. your changes propagate to the entire team. When working remotely. When finished or at regular intervals. however. you make that workset editable by you. You can work on the project from a remote location by doing the following: ■ Before leaving the office and disconnecting from the networked access to the central file. On the Options Bar. you have the option to choose which worksets to open. you should then save to your local file. When you save to the central file. no other users can make modifications to any elements in those worksets until you check them back into the central file. new building elements are assigned to the workset that is active at the moment. you will not only lose the changes to that workset. you can save your changes back to the central file but then the other owner loses all their work. When you save locally (to your local file). you will not be able to save your changes back to the central file if another user has changed the same workset and already published those changes back to the central file.Step 6: Create local files Each team member creates a local file that makes it possible to check out worksets and work on their respective portion of the building model. You can make a workset active only if it is editable by you. This ensures that your local file is synchronized with the central file. they are not propagated to the rest of the team. you may want to phone them and make arrangements rather than waste valuable work time. As you work. However. You can also add new elements to any View or Project Standards workset even if they are not editable. you should save to the central file and relinquish control of all worksets that you set as editable.” When opening a Worksharing-enabled project. proceeds as usual. or 868 | Chapter 26 Sharing Projects . This makes them available to other team members. This is called “Selective Open. Since making a workset Editable at Risk carries a high risk that work will be lost. Taking your computer to a remote location with the project 2 You do not need to have access to the central file in order to work on the project. The tips discussed below provide useful information for working creatively with worksets. your changes are saved. Any changes that other users have made to the building model become visible to you after you save to the central file or when you select Reload Latest. Step 9: Work on the project Work on the project. save to the central file. After saving to the central file.

This will guarantee that no other user can make it editable during the remainder of your absence. This means that other team members will not be able to change any materials while you have the Materials workset checked out. click the Training Files icon. reload the latest changes from the central file. If you have a colleague who is in the office with access to the central file. Remote rendering 4 While rendering remotely using AccuRender® is supported. In the next exercise. using VPN.rvt file located in the Common folder. Open the c_Worksets. WARNING You should avoid editing a workset “at risk” whenever possible. Enable Worksharing 1 On the File menu. Multiple users working remotely 3 Users can work remotely provided the remote users have high-speed network access to the central file. it is not recommended unless you understand the implications for the rest of the team. 2 Click OK to accept the default workset names. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets In this exercise. It also informs you that existing elements in your project move to default worksets. and make that workset editable." Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. you enable Worksharing in a project and set up some initial worksets. A dialog box displays suggesting that any user new to Worksharing should complete this training. click Open. you should check out the Materials workset. you learned what to consider before enabling Worksharing. and transfer the updated local file back to the remote user. change the username to your name under Settings ➤ Options. a user can transfer a local file to someone with network access who can then publish the changes back to the central file. You learned the basic steps of project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios. Using Worksharing in a Project | 869 . for instance. you will probably be changing material definitions and other project settings.■ You are very confident that no other user will make that workset editable in your absence. You subdivide the project into worksets and save the project as the "Central File. Alternatively. The Worksets dialog box is displayed. you enable Worksharing within an existing project. click Worksets. If you intend to render the building model while away from the office. you may want to request that someone start a session of Revit Building. To do this. In this conceptual exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog box.

imagine four users including yourself. In this case. 870 | Chapter 26 Sharing Projects . Creating new worksets 7 In the Worksets dialog box. 10 Click New. For training purposes. clear Visible by default in all views. and the remainder of the team must work on wall section details. Therefore. click New. 6 Under Show. another is assigned the interior layout. 4 In the Worksets dialog box. 12 In the Worksets dialog box. one user is assigned to the development of the exterior. Because furniture should only be visible in specific views. Rather than create a new workset for these elements. TIP You can change your username by selecting Options under the Settings menu. turn off Families. Because the interior walls appear in many views. it is better to make them visible by default. Your username displays as the present owner. Notice that Visible by default in all views is checked. You cannot change your username with an unsaved Worksharing-enabled project open. The next workset you create is for the furniture layout. The project must be subdivided in such a way as to reflect the tasks of each user. a small number of team members are working on the building model. 11 Enter Furniture Layout. and Views. you must create worksets that allow each team member to work independently. you should turn off Visible by default in all views. Do not change your username during this exercise unless explicitly instructed to do so.3 Notice that all worksets are open and editable by you. under Show. currently named Workset1. 8 Enter the name Interior Layout. you can rename the default workset. Only User-Created worksets should display. select: ■ ■ ■ Families Project Standards Views 5 Scroll down the list of workset names. and click OK. 9 Click OK. In this simple training project. and notice all are editable by you. This improves performance since fewer components need to be generated in each view. The final new workset is for the exterior shell of the building model. Project Standards. 13 Click Rename. select Workset1. a third team member is assigned furniture placement.

24 Select all of the interior elements. select any of the exterior walls of the building model. and walls. expand Views (all). under Identity Data. In this training file. The next step is to assign elements within the building model to specific worksets. Using Worksharing in a Project | 871 . The easiest way to do this is to drag a pick box beginning inside the lower right corner and up to the upper left corner. When you initially activate Worksharing. 21 Select one of the interior walls. however. Hold Shift down to deselect an element. click . furniture components have not been added to the building model and therefore do not need to be moved to the respective workset. click OK. select Interior Layout for Workset. all building model elements are assigned to that workset. need to reassign the interior elements to the Interior Layout workset. 18 On the Options Bar. expand Floor Plans. notice that the Workset parameter is set to Exterior Shell. including the interior doors. You do. and double-click Level 1. 19 In the Element Properties dialog box. 23 In the Element Properties dialog box. 15 In the Worksets dialog box. and click OK. 20 Click OK. TIP You can also hold CTRL down to select multiple elements.14 In the Rename dialog box. under Identity Data. and click OK You have created the required worksets for each team member working on this project. all building model elements are placed into Workset1 by default. type the name Exterior Shell. stairs. Because you renamed Workset1 to Exterior Shell. click . This is why all worksets are editable immediately after you enable worksets. Subdividing the project into worksets 16 In the Project Browser. 22 On the Options Bar. 17 In the drawing area.

under Views (all). click the Worksets tab. select them and change their workset assignment to Interior Layout. You can verify that all interior elements have been reassigned to the Interior Layout workset by turning off the visibility of that workset. click . click Save As. Create the central file 38 On the File menu. select Interior Layout for Workset. 26 In the Element Properties dialog box. and click OK. 872 | Chapter 26 Sharing Projects . 37 In the Element Properties dialog box. select Interior Layout for Workset. click Visibility/Graphics. 29 Clear Interior Layout to turn off the visibility of that workset in the view.25 On the Options Bar. This is because you turned off “Visible by default in all views” when you created the workset. and click OK. select all of the interior elements of the building model. 27 On the View menu. 30 Click OK. and click OK. If any interior elements remain. 36 On the Options Bar. 28 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog box. The central file is created automatically the first time you save the project after enabling worksets. double-click Level 2. under Identity Data. The Level 1 floor plan should display with only the exterior shell visible. click the Worksets tab. Notice that the visibility of the Furniture Layout workset is turned off in this view. 34 In the Project Browser. 31 On the View menu. 32 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog box. click . 35 In the drawing area. 33 Select Interior Layout. click Visibility/Graphics. under Identity Data. under Floor Plans.

select all the User-Created worksets. Working Individually with Worksets In this exercise. 39 In the Save As dialog box. select Specify. Using Worksharing in a Project | 873 . and navigate to the location where you saved the central file created in the previous exercise. 40 Click Save. Checking in the worksets 41 On the File menu. you must relinquish workset editability so that other users can have access to the worksets they need. created new worksets to accommodate each team member. 3 Click Open. click Options. click Worksets. 4 In the Opening Worksets dialog box. make modifications to the building model.Navigate to a location on a network drive that all team members have access to. Now that you have created the central file. 44 Click OK. 2 In the Open dialog box. but be sure not to save the file in the training files location. 45 On the File menu. this can be accomplished by saving the central file to your hard drive and changing your user name before accessing the project. In addition. 6 In the Save As dialog box. and click OK. This is imperative if you and another user intend to complete the multi-user exercise later in this tutorial. Checking out worksets 9 On the File menu. you create your local file. Creating a local file 1 On the File menu. you check out worksets so you can modify the building model. enter Worksets Project-Central as the file name. 7 In the File Save Options dialog box. and publish your changes back to the central file where other team members can see them. make sure you remember the location of this central file. verify that Make this the Central location after save is not selected. and then assigned building model elements to the worksets. In this exercise. check out worksets. and click OK. 8 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. 42 In the Worksets dialog box. click Worksets. you enabled Worksharing on a project. select the central file and. If you intend on completing the remaining exercises in this tutorial. You then created the central file and checked in all worksets. 5 On the File menu. You have created a local file which is for your use only. If you do not have access to a network and still want to complete that exercise. click Save As. 43 On the right side of the dialog box. click Non Editable. You must access it in each of the remaining exercises. under Open Worksets. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets. Next. and click Save. please do so before continuing. click Open. click Close. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User1. This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and access to the resulting central file. Notice that your name has been removed as the owner of the worksets and all Editable values are set to No. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. This project is now ready for individuals to access it and check out their required worksets. If you have not yet completed the exercise. select all the User-Created worksets by pressing CTRL + A. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. any referenced workset is opened but hidden.

Verify that it is cleared. you are assigned the task of designing the interior layout of the building model. click Toolbar ➤ Worksets. In this case. Only the worksets that are opened are visible during that session. 16 Select the upper exterior wall and notice a symbol displays indicating that the element belongs to a workset that is not currently editable. 23 Click OK. 19 Under Constraints. click . 15 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 20 On the Options Bar. 12 On the Window menu. 18 In the Element Properties dialog box. 11 Click OK. a message would display and you would have the option to cancel the change or make the element editable. the Edited by value is now assigned to you. however. click Modify. Revit Building borrows it for you and applies your changes. Even though you have not checked out the Exterior Shell workset. Notice that the wall still belongs to the Exterior Shell workset. The Worksets toolbar displays with a drop-down list that allows you to specify the active workset. The upper exterior wall should still be selected. notice the Editable Only option. 874 | Chapter 26 Sharing Projects . you can only select editable elements within the drawing area. Because this element is not owned by another user. select Finish Face: Exterior for Location Line. click . 14 In the Project Browser. If this is selected. and click OK. select Interior Layout. 13 On the Worksets toolbar. click Worksets. and select Yes for Editable. you can still edit this wall. You are now ready to modify the interior layout of the building model. under Identity Data. notice that you do not own the Exterior Shell workset. expand Floor Plans. 21 Click OK. 17 On the Options Bar. notice that this element is assigned to the Exterior Shell workset and that the Edited by value is blank. Before working on the model. In the Worksets dialog box. select Interior Layout for Name. 10 In the Worksets dialog box. If it was owned by another user. you should activate the Worksets toolbar.The project sharing environment allows you to choose which worksets are opened during a working session. Any new elements that you add to the building model are automatically assigned to the active workset. In this case. you have borrowed the ownership of the upper exterior wall. On the Options Bar. 22 On the File menu. Your name displays as the owner of the Interior Layout workset. but you are listed as a borrower of that workset. expand Views (all). and double-click Level 1.

The precise location is not important. click Wall. 28 In the Type Selector.Modify the building model 24 Select the door on the right side of the corridor. 25 Delete the door. click Modify. and extend the lower end until it intersects the horizontal wall you added previously. 27 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 31 Select the vertical interior wall in the upper right corner. select Basic Wall: Interior . 33 In the Type Selector. and modify the length so that the corridor is open. 29 Using the following illustration as a guide. click Door. 30 On the Design Bar. 32 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.126mm Partition (2-hr). 26 Select the wall that hosted the deleted door. select M_Sgl Flush: 864 x 2032mm. add a horizontal wall in the lower right corner. Using Worksharing in a Project | 875 .

876 | Chapter 26 Sharing Projects . In the following section of this exercise. In this exercise. Each modifies the building model within their local file and publishes it back to the central file where the other user can see the changes. By default. You should check this element back into central so that others can use it if necessary. checked out worksets. Using Worksets with Multiple Users In this exercise. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. It is recommended that you locally save your work approximately every 30 minutes and save to central every 1-2 hours. All of the new elements that you added were automatically assigned to the Interior Layout workset. skip the following section. Throughout the process. select: ■ ■ ■ Borrowed Elements User-created Worksets Save the local file after “Save to Central” completes successfully 37 Click OK. add two door openings into the rooms you created. which matches the information in the Status Bar. Saving your work 35 On the File menu. The Save to Central dialog box is displayed with the path to the central file automatically filled in. NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2). you borrowed the upper exterior wall in order to modify it. If you intend to complete the remainder of this tutorial by proceeding to the multi-user exercise. please do so before continuing. For training purposes. you should perform regular saves. and published your changes back to the central file where other team members can see them. Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. At the end of a work session. it is recommended. you should relinquish all worksets. If you have not yet completed these exercises. and save locally immediately afterward. and reload the latest changes. click Save to Central. In addition.34 Using the following illustration as a guide. each user must check out worksets. you created your local file. you can relinquish the user-created worksets as well as any borrowed elements. two users access the central file through a network connection. When working in your local file. leave this file open in its current state. a tooltip. displays the workset as well as the element type. In this particular case. and borrowed an element from a workset you did not own. Whenever you save. save to central. You modified the building model. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Building and setting the username to User 2. and proceed to Creating a local copy. This exercise requires the completion of the previous workset exercises and access to the resulting local and central files. If you place the cursor over any of the new elements. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. make elements editable. notice that there is an option to save the local file immediately after the save to central. Borrowed Elements is selected. Although this is not a necessary option if you are in the middle of a work session. 36 In the Save to Central dialog box.

rvt. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. two users work on the building model residing in the central file you created and saved in a previous exercise. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. select all the User-Created worksets. click Save As. and select Yes for Editable. and reset the Username to your computer login name. 9 In the Opening Worksets dialog box. 15 Select the Exterior Shell workset. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. Throughout the remainder of this exercise. 8 Click Open. You are now the owner of that workset. select Specify. WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file. Using Worksharing in a Project | 877 . select one of those central files to be used in this exercise. Creating a local copy 5 In this exercise. specifically sequenced. This file is for your use only. 13 Navigate to your preferred location on the hard drive. This is a system setting. click Options. 11 In the Save As dialog box. If both users have completed the previous worksets exercises and created central files on the network. 3 On the Settings menu. under Username. In addition. 10 On the File menu. 4 Click the General Tab and. and click Save. click Open. You now have a local copy of the project. under Open Worksets. 7 In the Open dialog box. User 2: Create a local file. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User2. 2 Start a new Revit Building session by double-clicking the Revit Building icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu. one user has already created a local file. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file named Worksets Project-Central. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. enter User 2. select the central file and. and click OK.Using a second Revit Building session to mimic User 2 1 Minimize the current Revit Building window. For training purposes. click Options. and check out worksets 6 On the File menu. The user who has not yet created a local file for the chosen central file is User 2. and click OK. return to the Settings dialog box. consider that person to be User 1. 12 In the File Save Options dialog box. The next series of steps create a local file for User 2. Regardless of which central file you choose to use. instructions are staggered. verify that Make this the Central location after save is not selected. and refer explicitly to User 1 and User 2. click Worksets. and click OK. 16 Click OK. 14 On the File menu.

select the option to save the local file after the central file is saved. open it now. If it is not open. 878 | Chapter 26 Sharing Projects . 27 In the Save to Central dialog box. 19 Try to change the Editable status for Exterior Shell to Yes. expand Floor Plans. and publish changes 17 User 1 should still have the local file open. 18 On the File menu. That is because changes made to the central file display in local files only when the worksets are explicitly updated. Notice that the Exterior Shell workset is checked out by User 2. click Save to Central. select the lower exterior wall. 23 In the Project Browser. expand Floor Plans. 24 Select the vertical interior wall shown in the following illustration. 22 Click OK. Notice that you own this workset and the active workset is now Interior Layout. A warning is displayed informing you that a conflict exists. 30 Using the following illustration as a guide. Notice that the changes made by User 1 do not immediately display in the local file of User 2. 26 On the File menu. and select Yes for Editable. expand Views (all). 21 Select the Interior Layout workset. A warning is displayed informing you that you cannot check out this workset because it is already checked out by another user. If you only have one workset checked out. it becomes the active workset. expand Views (all). click Worksets. 25 Click anywhere in the empty drawing area to ignore the warning. 20 Click OK to return to the Worksets dialog box. and double-click Level 1.User 1: Check out worksets. and move it upward approximately 2 meters. modify the building model. 28 Click OK. and double-click Level 1. and move it to the left until it approaches the centerline of the exterior double door on the south wall. User 2: Modify the building model and publish changes 29 In the Project Browser.

select the option to save the local file after the central file is saved. 41 Select Furniture Layout. select Furniture Layout to turn on its visibility. 50 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog box. Click Yes. under Floor Plans. 51 Notice that the desk you added previously now displays. delete the left window on the lower exterior wall. any elements added to the building model are automatically assigned to the active workset. click Save to Central. 34 Click OK. right-click Copy of Level 1. click Reload Latest. 38 Click OK. and click OK. the visibility of the workset is not turned on even though it is checked out and is the active workset. 31 Click Delete Instances to delete the windows. choose any desk. click the Worksets tab. 43 On the Project Browser. When you save to central. you should create a furniture plan view. 35 Using the following illustration as a guide. This is because when the Furniture Layout workset was created. enter Level 1 Furniture Plan. and check out additional worksets 39 On the File menu. click Component. However. and click inside any room. under Floor Plans. and click Duplicate. under Views (all). 48 On the Design Bar. The wall conflict with the door opening that User 1 introduced now displays. 46 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. select the option to save the local file after the central file is saved. and click OK. 44 In the Rename View dialog box.A message displays warning you that several windows are not cutting anything. you are asked if you want to make the Furniture Layout workset the active workset. Using Worksharing in a Project | 879 . and click OK. click Save to Central. 49 On the View menu. Because you now have more than one workset checked out. 40 On the File menu. under Floor Plans. you publish your changes and load the changes other users have made to the building model. double-click Level 1 Furniture Plan. select Yes for Editable. 36 On the File menu. Even though the Furniture Layout workset is active. 45 On the Project Browser. 37 In the Save to Central dialog box. you still have complete access to the elements belonging to the Interior Layout workset. click Visibility/Graphics. The changes User 2 made are apparent. User 1: Reload latest worksets. and move the door to the right in order to avoid the conflict. You should turn on the visibility before adding furniture. 33 In the Save to Central dialog box. Before adding any furniture. click Modify. and click Rename. right-click Level 1. A message displays informing you that the component you are trying to place is not visible in that view. 42 On the Project Browser. 32 On the File menu. This is because windows are wall-hosted components and cannot float in the air without a wall to host them. click Worksets. Therefore. the Visible by default option was not selected. 47 In the Type Selector.

and published their changes back to the central file. two users worked on the same building model using worksets. 63 Scroll down to the bottom of the list until you see Wall Types. 57 In the Element Properties dialog box. leave this file open in its current state. 54 Click OK. 70 In the Save to Central dialog box. 53 In the Save to Central dialog box. click Edit/New. 58 In the Type Properties dialog box. Each user checked out worksets. Checking out worksets. you learn how to borrow elements from worksets that other users are actively working on. 69 On the File menu. click Reload Latest. select the option to save the local file after the central file is saved. User 1: Reload latest. Notice the new Level 1 Furniture Plan view in the Project Browser. If you intend to complete the final exercise of this tutorial. 65 On the File menu. 56 Right-click the upper exterior wall. leave this file open in its current state. select Reload Latest.52 On the File menu. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users. select Save to Central. click Save to Central. 880 | Chapter 26 Sharing Projects . This exercise also requires two users and you can skip the first sections of the exercise and proceed directly to the section. 61 On the File menu. click Rename. User 2: Make an element editable on the fly 55 On the File menu. 66 In the Save to Central dialog box. and click Properties. In the final exercise of this tutorial. under Show. Notice you have borrowed a portion of the workset. 62 In the Worksets dialog box. 60 Click OK twice. click Save to Central. modified the building model. and click OK. select the following. ■ ■ User-created Worksets Save the local file after “Save to Central” completes successfully In this exercise. select Project Standards. 64 Click OK. click Worksets. and save 68 On the File menu. select: ■ ■ ■ Borrowed Elements User-created Worksets Save the local file after “Save to Central” completes successfully 67 Click OK. 59 In the Rename dialog box. If you intend to complete the final portion of this tutorial by proceeding to the Element Borrowing exercise. enter Exterior Wall . and click OK.200mm.

and still have your local files open.Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users In this exercise. 8 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. click Options. This exercise requires two users and. finished the previous workset exercises. 10 In the File Save Options dialog box. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. and these problems are rectified. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. Click OK to this message and subsequent messages. Save training file as the central file on the network 1 On the File menu. throughout this training. 7 On the File menu. you save the dataset as a central file. Open the c_Worksets Project-Central. Set the Username to User 2. select Make this the Central location after save. 5 Click Save. This is the local file for User 1. Only one user needs to open the dataset and save the central file to a network location. you must borrow elements that belong to worksets that the other user has checked out. At the appropriate point in this exercise.rvt file located in the Common folder. and click OK. There are specific instructions for each user. and click OK. NOTE When you open the training dataset for this tutorial. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Building and setting the username to User 2. 2 Navigate to a directory on the network that both users have access to. and click OK. click Save As. User 2: Create local file 12 If you are a single user and want to replicate the multi-user experience. Click the General tab of the Options dialog box. You have created a new central file for User 1 and User 2. click Save As. Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. click Options. The central file should still be open. 11 Name the file Worksets Project_Local-User1. click the Training Files icon. NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2). you need to set up your central and local files. ■ ■ ■ Using Worksharing in a Project | 881 . and click Save. the user that saved the central file should be User 1. 9 In the Save As dialog box. click Options. perform the following steps to create a session for User 2: ■ Start a second session of Revit Building by double-clicking the icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu. In subsequent steps. verify that Make this the Central location after save is not selected. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. you may receive a message informing you that the central file has been relocated. two users are working on the same project with separate local files. As each of you work. You learn how to make borrowing requests and how to grant them. 4 In the File Save Options dialog box. These messages are a result of the central file being relocated (to your PC). instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. proceed directly to the section Checking out worksets. On the Settings menu. User 1: Create local file 6 For the sake of simplicity. If you have not completed the previous workset exercises. Each user must have network access to the central file. 3 In the Save As dialog box. click Open.

return to the Settings dialog box. 17 On the File menu. click Options. and select Yes for Editable. 13 On the File menu. and navigate to the network location where User 1 saved the central file. and click Open. 31 On the left exterior wall. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. under Floor Plans. In addition. select Interior Layout. You have created a local file which is for your use only. click Save As. 18 In the Save As dialog box. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. verify that Make this the Central location after save is not selected. User 2: Borrow an element from User 1 29 On the Project Browser. select them. This is a system setting. 20 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. select Exterior Shell. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User2. and select Yes for Editable. and click Save. WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file. click Worksets. Next. Afterwards. User 2: Check out worksets 26 On the File menu.This Revit Building session is now set up for User 2. You are now the owner of that workset. if any User-Created worksets are not open. double-click Level 1. 19 In the File Save Options dialog box. and then click OK. 30 On the Options Bar. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. and click OK. select the Interior Layout workset. This allows you to select elements that belong to worksets that you do not own. 16 Select all the User-Created worksets. 882 | Chapter 26 Sharing Projects . you check out worksets so you can modify the building model. click Open. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. You are now the owner of that workset. the steps for each user have to be followed in sequence. select Specify. click Worksets. 28 Under Active Workset. and click OK. 24 Select the Exterior Shell workset. 23 In the Worksets dialog box. 27 In the Worksets dialog box. verify that Editable Only is cleared. and reset the Username to your computer login name. Checking out worksets 21 Both User 1 and User 2 can check out their worksets at the same time. User 1: Check out worksets 22 On the File menu. 15 Click Open. 25 Under Active Workset. select the second window from the top. and then click OK. select the central file and under Open Worksets. 14 In the Open dialog box.

and click Editing Requests. You can do this by dragging the window or by modifying one of the temporary dimension values. 35 In the Editing Requests dialog box. 39 Click OK. select the request submitted by User 2. a message informs you that you are waiting for permission from User 1. Using Worksharing in a Project | 883 . you should inform User 1 that you are waiting for permission to edit a borrowed element. 32 Move the window 500 mm toward the upper exterior wall. Leave this dialog box open until User 1 grants permission. A message informs you that your request has been granted. 33 Click Place Request to ask User 1 for permission to edit the window. A warning message informs you that you must obtain permission from User 1. After you submit the request. click the File menu. and notice the window is in the new location. click Check Now. 37 Click Close. 36 Click Grant. User 1: Grant User 2 permission to borrow element 34 When User 2 contacts you and informs you that a borrowing request is pending your authorization.A symbol appears letting you know that it belongs to a workset you do not own. At this point. User 2: Check for editability grant 38 In the Check Editability Grants dialog box.

In this case. select Save to Central. and click OK. 41 In the Save to Central dialog box. you requested permission to edit the element. In this multi-user exercise. click Close.User 1 and 2: Save to Central. and close 40 On the File menu. 884 | Chapter 26 Sharing Projects . select the following. to Local. you learned how to borrow elements from another workset even though that workset was actively being edited by another user. and the other user granted it. ■ ■ ■ User-created Worksets Borrowed Elements (User 2 only) Save the local file after “Save to Central” completes successfully 42 On the File menu.

Creating Multiple Design Options 27 When working with a building model. Using design options. In this tutorial. it is common to explore multiple design schemes as the project develops. These schemes can be conceptual or can be detailed engineering designs. you learn how to create and manage multiple design sets and options within a single building model. you can study and modify each design option and present the options to the client. 885 . you create multiple design schemes within a single project file. Because all design options coexist in the project with the main model (the main model consists of elements not specifically assigned to a design option).

In addition. Any new elements introduced at that time become part of that option. After you and the client agree on the final design. 886 | Chapter 27 Creating Multiple Design Options . The first option is a simple combination of columns and beams. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. you can edit it. In the first exercise in this lesson. Creating the Structural Design Options In this exercise. In this particular case. click the Training Files icon. The client has asked you to create various options. In the second exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. With the second option. you learn how to manage and organize the design options. The first time you open the Design Options dialog box within a project. each with multiple design options. make your final design decision. click New.Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project You can use design options to explore multiple design schemes as the project develops. The client is interested in a pergola and sunshade for the roof terrace but is not sure of the specific layout or materials. you can have an option set called roofing with multiple subordinate roofing schemes. These three exercises are designed to be completed sequentially with the second and third exercises dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. This option will be the first structural scheme consisting of 75 mm round columns and 50 mm round bars. In the final exercise of this lesson. click Open. and each option set can have multiple schemes. the task is to develop two roof schemes for an addition to an existing house. After you create a design option. you can have an option set for the roof structure with multiple subordinate structural design schemes. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. you create two roof system design options that work with the structural options. 2 In the Design Options dialog box. you can designate a primary design scheme for each option set. the only available command is to create a new option set. Each option set represents a portion of the building model wherein design alternatives are being considered. and delete the unwanted options from the project. under Option Set.rvt file located in the Metric folder. After setting up the design option sets and their subordinate options. Open the m_Urban_House. you design each of the structural options. At any time in the design process. Create first design option 1 On the Tools menu. you can have multiple sets of design options. you set up the design option names and add the modeling elements to the structural design option set. you create a unique in-place family as the structural system. Notice Option Set 1 has been created with a design option: Option 1 (primary). you set up multiple design option sets. For example. There is no limit to the number of option sets you can create.

10 Select the three columns either by dragging a pick box around them or by selecting them individually while holding CTRL. 11 On the Edit toolbar. The first click specifies the reference point on the element to be copied. TIP You can zoom in and out easily during this process using the wheel on your wheel mouse. click Column. 3 Select Option 1 (primary). expand Views (all). 6 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. either add a centered reference plane and snap the column to it.TIP In this exercise. Any new elements introduced to the building model are added to this option. each is constructed for interchangeability. By selecting Multiple. or add a dimension string between the columns. 14 Click at an identifiable part of the notch construction. 13 Zoom in around the left column that is embedded in the notch. and the second click specifies the point on the building model the reference point is copied to. the second column directly across from it at the intersection of the two walls. Because it is important that you select the same location on the notches you copy to. 9 On the Design Bar. 4 In the Project Browser. Arrows and the dimension lines have been added for training purposes only. click Modify. In the following illustration. Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project | 887 . select Round Column: 75mm Diameter. add three columns. You should delete the dimension and unconstrain after adding the column. and click the EQ symbol to equalize the segments. the three columns need to be copied three times to create a 3 x 4 grid of 12 columns. and the third column centered between the two. the midpoint of the lower notch line is selected. and zoom in on the upper half of the building model. In this case. select: ■ ■ ■ . 7 In the Type Selector. expand Floor Plans. Selecting Constrain limits the movement and helps ensure the post-copy alignment of the columns. TIP To center the middle column. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. and double-click ROOF TERRACE. the roof and structure systems must work together. make sure you select a point that is easily recognizable. you can continue adding new copies without reselecting the reference point (the first click). 5 On the View menu. therefore. Constrain Copy Multiple The Copy command is a two-click process. and click Close. click 12 On the Options Bar. click Edit Selected. The left column should be centered at the intersection of the notch and the wall. 8 Using the following illustration as a guide.

using the same technique. 17 Zoom out and.15 Zoom out and move downward to the notch just below this one. click . they are difficult to see in this view. A copy of the three selected columns is added. Because of the size of the columns. click Modify on the Design Bar to end the copy process. 18 On the View toolbar. and click in the same location as you did for the previous notch. add a copy of the columns to the next two notches below this one. When you are finished. Notice the 12 columns that you added. 16 Zoom in around the notch construction. 888 | Chapter 27 Creating Multiple Design Options .

under Floor Plans. click Beam. click . double-click TOP OF CORE. You can do this manually or use the Copy command. Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project | 889 . The beam needs to be added between the remaining columns. In it. 21 In the Type Selector. 22 Add the first beam between the upper left and right columns by using the following steps: ■ ■ ■ Zoom in on the upper-left column. 25 On the Edit toolbar. and click at its center to set the beam start point. two callouts with thin lines have been added to clarify the location of the start and end points of the beam. The first click specifies the beam start point. you add the beams that span the columns. 23 On the Design Bar. and click on the center to set the beam endpoint. 20 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. The second click specifies the end of the beam. 24 Select the Beam you added previously. Use the following illustration as a guide. select Round Bar : 50mm. Adding a beam is a two-click process. Zoom in on the upper right column. Zoom out and move the cursor over the upper right column. 19 In the Project Browser. click Modify.Next.

Notice that the beams complete the bracket structure for the proposed roof. move down to the next set of columns. 29 Repeat this step twice more until a beam is added to each set of columns. zoom into the left column. This is the reference point for the subsequent copies. and select the center of the column to add a copy. 890 | Chapter 27 Creating Multiple Design Options . 30 On the View toolbar. select: ■ ■ ■ Constrain Copy Multiple 27 Zoom in around the upper left column that is embedded in the notch. 28 Zoom out. and click the center point.26 On the Options Bar. click .

and click OK. enter Structure for New. 35 Select Option 1 (primary) and. and click OK. 40 In the Rename dialog box. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. click Rename. 39 Select Option Set 1 and. 33 Click Finish Editing. 37 Select Option 2 and. 34 In the Design Options dialog box. under Option. 32 In the Design Options dialog box. click Rename. enter Beam for New. notice that you are still editing Option Set 1: Option 1 (primary). 36 In the Rename dialog box. under Option.Organize design option sets and subordinate options 31 On the Tools menu. 38 In the Rename dialog box. under Option. not a new option set. and click OK. click Rename. under Option Set. Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project | 891 . click New. NOTE Be sure you are creating a new option. enter Brackets for New.

select Option 1 (primary). You have completed the initial setup of the design option sets and their subordinate design option names. click Rename. 50 In the Design Options dialog box. it will resemble the following illustration. 45 Under Roofing. and click OK. 52 Click Close. click New. 51 Under Edit. you create the second design option. 47 Under Roofing. There should now be two roofing design options. 43 In the Rename dialog box. name the option Sunscreen. select Option 2.Logically naming the option sets and relative options allows you to more easily manage them. 48 Under Option. under Option Set. click New. click Rename. 46 Under Option. 41 Under Option Set. 44 Select the option set Roofing and. and click OK. This allows you to more easily manage the project. 42 Select Option Set 1 and. under Option. select Beam. name the option Louvers. and click OK. notice that Structure: Beam is displayed. Design the second structural design option 49 In this section of the exercise. under Structure. Notice that the columns added to the Brackets design option do not display. enter Roofing for New. When finished. select Edit Selected. click Rename. 892 | Chapter 27 Creating Multiple Design Options . Under Now Editing.

58 On the Tools menu. 59 Align the roof beam by clicking the lower edge of the adjacent horizontal wall and then clicking the lower edge of the roof beam. click Align. Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project | 893 . select M_Roof Beam. Refer to the following illustration. click Component. 56 In the Type Selector. 55 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. double-click ROOF TERRACE. 57 Place a roof beam into the drawing area as shown. under Floor Plans.53 In the Project Browser. 54 Zoom in toward the top of the roof terrace near the stairs. The first click sets the plane that the object will be aligned to. Using the Align tool requires two clicks. The second click represents the plane that is moved.

click Modify. Click to indicate the end point of the move. click the padlock that displays to lock the alignment. 62 Select the beam and. 64 Click the start point at the alignment of the beam and wall as shown.60 After aligning the beam. The first click sets the move start point. Clear Group and Associate Enter 4 for number Select 2nd for Move To: Select Constrain Using the Array tool requires two clicks. 894 | Chapter 27 Creating Multiple Design Options . 65 Move the cursor down to the next intersection of the lower edge of the horizontal wall and the beam. on the Edit toolbar. 61 On the Design Bar. The second click represents the move end point. Three more roof beams are placed at the same intersection as the first beam. click 63 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ ■ .

which is visible by default. you set up multiple design option sets. Notice that even before you close the dialog box. 67 On the Tools menu. Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project | 895 . click Design Options ➤ Design Options. With the second option. 69 Click Close. click . click Finish Editing. m_Urban_House-in progress. Notice the new design option for the structural elements su